HA030554 Nanodac Recorder - Controller User Guide (HA030554 Issue 16)

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
User Guide
HA030554 Issue 16
Date: September 2021
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................... 3
Safety Information ........................................................................ 11
Important Information ........................................................................................11
Safety and EMC ........................................................................... 12
Symbols ..................................................................................................... 16
Hazardous Substances .................................................................................... 16
USB Device Precautions.................................................................................. 16
32-BIT Resolution ............................................................................................ 16
Cybersecurity ............................................................................... 17
What’s in this Chapter ...................................................................................... 17
Introduction ...................................................................................................... 17
Secure Network Topologies and Good Practices............................................. 17
Security Features ............................................................................................. 17
Principle of Secure by Default.................................................................... 17
HMI Access Level / Comms Config Mode.................................................. 17
Logged Out Access Level .................................................................... 17
Operator Access Level......................................................................... 18
Customizable Users............................................................................. 18
Supervisor Access Level...................................................................... 19
Engineer Access Level ........................................................................ 19
HMI Passwords.......................................................................................... 19
Ethernet security features .......................................................................... 20
Ethernet rate protection ....................................................................... 20
Broadcast Storm protection ................................................................. 20
Configuration backup and recovery ........................................................... 20
Memory Integrity .............................................................................................. 20
Firmware .......................................................................................................... 20
Supported Protocols and Threat Mitigations .................................................... 22
FTP Client .................................................................................................. 22
FTP Server................................................................................................. 22
ICMP (ping) ................................................................................................ 22
DHCP......................................................................................................... 22
SNTP ......................................................................................................... 22
ModBus...................................................................................................... 23
HTTP (Web Server) ................................................................................... 23
UHH Navigator........................................................................................... 23
Ethernet IP ................................................................................................. 23
BACnet....................................................................................................... 23
Decommissioning............................................................................................. 23
Legal Information ......................................................................... 24
Introduction .................................................................................. 25
Unpacking the Instrument ................................................................................ 25
Installation .................................................................................... 26
Mechanical Installation..................................................................................... 26
Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 26
Demounting................................................................................................ 27
Removing the Instrument from its Sleeve .................................................. 27
Electrical Installation ........................................................................................ 30
Installation Requirements .......................................................................... 31
Termination details ..................................................................................... 31
Low Voltage Option.................................................................................... 31
Dual Input Option ....................................................................................... 31
Sample Rate ........................................................................................ 31
HA030554 Issue 16 3
Table of Contents nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Sensor Break Detection ....................................................................... 32

Dual Milliamp Offset Correction ........................................................... 32
Input Range Limitation ......................................................................... 32
Modbus Master communications ............................................................... 32
EtherNet/IP ................................................................................................ 32
Operation ..................................................................................... 33
Introduction - Initial Setup ................................................................................ 33
Operator Interface ............................................................................................ 34
Display Screen........................................................................................... 34
Navigation Pushbuttons ............................................................................. 35
On Screen Help ......................................................................................... 36
Process Variable Display ................................................................................. 36
Alarm Icons ................................................................................................ 37
Status Bar Icons......................................................................................... 38
Breaks in recording .................................................................................... 41
Top Level Menu................................................................................................ 41
Home ......................................................................................................... 41
Configuration.............................................................................................. 42
User menu ........................................................................................... 42
Go to View ................................................................................................. 43
History........................................................................................................ 46
Faceplate Cycling on/off ............................................................................ 46
Operator Notes .......................................................................................... 46
Demand Archiving...................................................................................... 46
Login .......................................................................................................... 49
Display Modes.................................................................................................. 52
Vertical Trend Mode ................................................................................... 52
Horizontal Trend Mode............................................................................... 53
Vertical Bargraph Mode ............................................................................. 54
Horizontal Bargraph Mode ......................................................................... 54
Numeric Mode............................................................................................ 55
Alarm Panel Mode ..................................................................................... 56
Control Loop1/Loop2 ................................................................................. 57
Cascade Display Mode .............................................................................. 58
Programmer Display Mode ........................................................................ 59
Steriliser Display Mode .............................................................................. 70
Batch Summary ......................................................................................... 75
Batch Control ....................................................................................... 76
Promote list ................................................................................................ 77
Modbus Master display mode .................................................................... 78
EtherNet/IP display mode .......................................................................... 80
Trend History.................................................................................................... 87
Navigation .................................................................................................. 88
History Options Menu ................................................................................ 89
Text Entry ......................................................................................................... 89
Numeric keyboard...................................................................................... 90
USB keyboard............................................................................................ 90
Configuration ................................................................................ 91
Instrument Menu .............................................................................................. 92
Clock .......................................................................................................... 92
Locale ........................................................................................................ 93
Display configuration.................................................................................. 94
Info menu ................................................................................................... 96
Upgrade ..................................................................................................... 97
Security menu ............................................................................................ 98
I/O fitted ................................................................................................... 101
Save/Restore ........................................................................................... 102
Input adjust .............................................................................................. 103
Output adjust............................................................................................ 106
User Accounts (Auditor) ........................................................................... 107
Network Menu ................................................................................................ 109
4 HA030554 Issue 16
Interface ....................................................................................................110
Archiving ................................................................................................... 111
FTP Server................................................................................................114
Modbus TCP .............................................................................................115
BACnet......................................................................................................116
Group Configuration........................................................................................117
Group Trend configuration ........................................................................117
Group Recording configuration .................................................................117
Batch Configuration.........................................................................................119
Initiating a new Batch............................................................................... 122
Starting a Batch ....................................................................................... 122
Starting a Batch using Modbus .......................................................... 123
Input Channel Configuration .......................................................................... 123
Channel Main........................................................................................... 123
Channel Trend configuration.................................................................... 127
Alarm 1 menu........................................................................................... 128
Alarm 2 menu........................................................................................... 131
Alarm types .............................................................................................. 131
Virtual Channel Configuration ........................................................................ 133
Maths channel configuration .................................................................... 133
Totaliser configuration .............................................................................. 135
Wiring Example using a counter in combination with a totaliser .............. 140
Counter configuration............................................................................... 141
Loop Option Configuration ............................................................................. 142
Main menu parameters ............................................................................ 143
Setup menu parameters .......................................................................... 144
Tune menu parameters............................................................................ 145
PID menu parameters.............................................................................. 145
Setpoint menu parameters....................................................................... 147
Output menu items................................................................................... 148
Loop diagnostics ...................................................................................... 150
Advanced Loop Configuration........................................................................ 152
Advanced Loop Main menu ..................................................................... 153
Advanced Loop Setup menu.................................................................... 154
Advanced Loop Tune menu ..................................................................... 155
Advanced Loop Master PID menu ........................................................... 158
Advanced Loop Slave PID menu ............................................................. 159
Advanced Loop Master SP menu ............................................................ 162
Advanced Loop Slave SP menu .............................................................. 163
Cascade Full Scale Mode ........................................................................ 165
Cascade Trim Mode................................................................................. 166
Advanced Loop Output menu .................................................................. 167
Advanced Loop Diagnostics menu .......................................................... 170
Programmer Configuration............................................................................. 171
Programmer Features menu.................................................................... 172
Programmer FTP menu ........................................................................... 174
Programmer Setup menu......................................................................... 175
Programmer Run menu ........................................................................... 178
Connecting the programmer to a loop ..................................................... 179
Configuration by Modbus Comms............................................................ 181
Modbus Master Configuration ........................................................................ 182
Slave Main menu ..................................................................................... 183
Slave Diagnostics menu .......................................................................... 185
Modbus master data configuration........................................................... 186
Ethernet/IP Configuration............................................................................... 189
Ethernet/IP Configuration Main menu ...................................................... 190
Implicit inputs/outputs .............................................................................. 191
Explicit inputs/outputs .............................................................................. 191
Web Server .................................................................................................... 192
Configuration Display............................................................................... 193
Digital I/O ....................................................................................................... 193
Digital input/output ................................................................................... 194
Relay outputs ........................................................................................... 194
HA030554 Issue 16 5
Digital inputs ............................................................................................ 194

Digital outputs .......................................................................................... 195
DC Output ...................................................................................................... 195
Configuration display ............................................................................... 195
User LIN ......................................................................................................... 197
User linearisation table rules.................................................................... 197
Custom Messages ......................................................................................... 198
Zirconia Block Option ..................................................................................... 198
Definitions ................................................................................................ 198
Configuration............................................................................................ 199
Zirconia Probe Wiring .............................................................................. 203
Steriliser Option.............................................................................................. 203
Configuration parameters ........................................................................ 204
Saturated Steam Option................................................................................. 206
Pressure Units Conversion ...................................................................... 208
Saturated Steam Mass Flow Calculation ................................................. 208
Saturated Steam Heat Flow Calculation .................................................. 209
Saturated Steam Heat Consumed Calculation ........................................ 209
Saturated Steam Enthalpy Calculation .................................................... 210
Mass Flow Option .......................................................................................... 210
Linear Mass Flow Calculation .................................................................. 210
Root Mass Flow Calculation .....................................................................211
Configuration............................................................................................ 212
Humidity Block Option.................................................................................... 213
BCD Input....................................................................................................... 214
Input rules ................................................................................................ 214
Configuration............................................................................................ 214
Logic (2 Input) Block ...................................................................................... 215
Parameters .............................................................................................. 215
Logic (8 Input) Block ...................................................................................... 216
Parameters .............................................................................................. 216
Schematic ................................................................................................ 217
Invert input decoding table....................................................................... 217
Multiplexer block ............................................................................................ 218
Math (2 Input)................................................................................................. 220
Parameters .............................................................................................. 220
Sample and Hold details .......................................................................... 222
Timer .............................................................................................................. 222
Parameters .............................................................................................. 222
Timer modes ............................................................................................ 223
User Values.................................................................................................... 225
Parameters .............................................................................................. 225
Alarm Summary ............................................................................................. 225
Real Time Event Configuration ...................................................................... 226
MODBUS TCP Slave Comms .................................................... 227
Installation ...................................................................................................... 227
Introduction .................................................................................................... 227
Function Codes........................................................................................ 227
Data types................................................................................................ 228
Invalid multiple register writes.................................................................. 228
Master communications timeout .............................................................. 229
Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM ...................................................... 229
Parameter List................................................................................................ 232
BACnet ....................................................................................... 343
BACnet Objects.............................................................................................. 343
BACnet Services ............................................................................................ 343
BACnet Object Mapping................................................................................. 343
Mapping to I/O and Loop Data Points...................................................... 343
Mapping to Virtual Channels .................................................................... 345
6 HA030554 Issue 16
Read/Write Access to Internal Modbus Registers.......................................... 346

Optional parameters ................................................................................ 347
BACnet Services...................................................................................... 347
Foreign Device Registration..................................................................... 348
BACnet Configuration .............................................................................. 348
iTOOLS ...................................................................................... 349
iTOOLS Connection ....................................................................................... 349
Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications ................................................ 349
Direct Connection .................................................................................... 352
Scanning for Instruments ............................................................................... 353
Graphical Wiring Editor ................................................................................. 354
Tool bar .................................................................................................... 355
Wiring Editor Operating Details................................................................ 355
Parameter Explorer ........................................................................................ 364
Parameter explorer detail......................................................................... 365
Explorer tools ........................................................................................... 366
Context Menu........................................................................................... 366
Watch/Recipe Editor ..................................................................................... 367
Creating a Watch List............................................................................... 367
Watch Recipe toolbar icons ..................................................................... 368
Watch/Recipe Context Menu ................................................................... 369
Programmer Option ....................................................................................... 369
Segment parameter editing...................................................................... 369
Digital Event display................................................................................. 371
Program parameters ................................................................................ 371
Adding and deleting segments................................................................. 372
Loading and Saving programs ................................................................ 373
Toolbar icons............................................................................................ 373
Context menus......................................................................................... 374
Programmer menu ................................................................................... 375
Two channel programs............................................................................. 375
To Set Up OEM Security .......................................................................... 376
User Wiring ................................................................................ 381
Drive Relay Example...................................................................................... 381
Wire removal............................................................................................ 383
Counter Example ........................................................................................... 383
USB Devices .............................................................................. 387
Memory Stick ................................................................................................. 387
Barcode Reader ............................................................................................. 387
USB Keyboard ............................................................................................... 388
Appendix A: Technical Specification .......................................... 389
Installation Category and Pollution Degree.................................................... 389
Installation Category II ............................................................................. 389
Pollution Degree 2 ................................................................................... 389
Recorder Specification ................................................................................... 389
I/O types ............................................................................................ 389
Environmental performance............................................................... 390
Other approvals and compliance details............................................ 390
Physical ............................................................................................. 390
Operator interface .............................................................................. 390
Power requirements........................................................................... 390
Battery backup ................................................................................... 390
Ethernet communications .................................................................. 390
USB port ............................................................................................ 391
Update/Archive rates ......................................................................... 391
Analogue Input Specification.......................................................................... 392
General .............................................................................................. 392
DC input ranges ................................................................................. 392
Resistance input ranges .................................................................... 393
HA030554 Issue 16 7
Thermocouple data ............................................................................ 394

Relay and Logic I/O Specification .................................................................. 395
OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4 and OP5 logic input, logic output and relay
specification. ............................................................................................ 395
Active (current on) current sourcing logic output ............................... 395
Inactive (current off) current sourcing logic output (OP1 or OP2 only)395
Active (current on) contact closure sourcing logic input (OP1 and OP2
only) ................................................................................................... 395
Relay contacts (OP1, OP2 and OP3) - AgCdO ................................. 395
Relay contacts (OP4 and OP5) - AgNi............................................... 395
Digital Inputs .................................................................................................. 396
DigInA, DigInB, contact closure logic input .............................................. 396
Contact closure .................................................................................. 396
DC Outputs .................................................................................................... 397
OP1, OP2, OP3 DC analogue outputs..................................................... 397
Current outputs (OP1, OP2 and OP3) ............................................... 397
Voltage outputs (OP3 only) ................................................................ 397
General .............................................................................................. 397
Blocks Supported ........................................................................................... 397
‘Toolkit’ Blocks.......................................................................................... 397
Application Blocks.................................................................................... 397
Appendix B: Control Loops ........................................................ 399
Introduction .................................................................................................... 399
Example (Heat Only)................................................................................ 399
Control Loop Definitions................................................................................. 400
Auto/Manual............................................................................................. 400
Types of Control Loop.............................................................................. 400
On/Off control..................................................................................... 400
PID Control ........................................................................................ 401
Motorised valve control ...................................................................... 403
Loop Parameters ..................................................................................... 404
Relative cool gain (R2G).................................................................... 404
High and Low cutback ....................................................................... 405
Manual Reset..................................................................................... 405
Integral Hold ...................................................................................... 406
Integral De-bump ............................................................................... 406
Loop Break ........................................................................................ 406
Gain Scheduling ................................................................................ 407
Tuning ...................................................................................................... 408
Introduction ........................................................................................ 408
Loop Response................................................................................. 408
Initial Settings .................................................................................... 409
Other tuning considerations ............................................................... 410
Autotune .............................................................................................411
Relative Cool Gain in Well Lagged Processes .................................. 417
Manual tuning .................................................................................... 419
Setpoint.................................................................................................... 421
Setpoint function block....................................................................... 421
Setpoint Limits ................................................................................... 422
Setpoint Rate Limit ............................................................................ 422
Setpoint Tracking ............................................................................... 423
Manual Tracking ................................................................................ 423
Output ...................................................................................................... 423
Introduction ........................................................................................ 423
Output Limits...................................................................................... 424
Output Rate Limit ............................................................................... 425
Sensor Break Mode ........................................................................... 425
Forced Output .................................................................................... 425
Power Feed Forward ......................................................................... 426
Cool Type........................................................................................... 426
Feed forward...................................................................................... 427
Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband ........................... 428
8 HA030554 Issue 16
Valve nudge ....................................................................................... 429

Time Proportioning............................................................................. 430
Diagnostics .............................................................................................. 430
Appendix C: Reference .............................................................. 431
Battery............................................................................................................ 431
Setting Up An FTP Server Using Filezilla....................................................... 431
Downloading ............................................................................................ 431
Server Setup ............................................................................................ 433
PC Setup.................................................................................................. 435
Recorder/Controller Setup ....................................................................... 436
Archive Activity......................................................................................... 436
Function Block Details.................................................................................... 437
Eight Input OR Block................................................................................ 437
TCP Port Numbers......................................................................................... 437
Isolation Diagram ........................................................................................... 438
Appendix D: Web Server ........................................................... 439
Browsers ........................................................................................................ 439
Connecting to the Internet........................................................................ 439
Denied Page ............................................................................................ 439
Error Message ......................................................................................... 440
Home Page .............................................................................................. 440
About Page .............................................................................................. 441
Contact Page ........................................................................................... 441
Bar Graph Page ....................................................................................... 442
Line Graph Page...................................................................................... 443
Numeric Page .......................................................................................... 444
Alarm Summary Page.............................................................................. 445
Message Summary Page......................................................................... 445
Promote Page .......................................................................................... 446
Historical Line Page ................................................................................. 446
Status Icons ............................................................................................. 447
DHCP Support ......................................................................................... 448
Network Protocols.................................................................................... 448
Languages ............................................................................................... 448
Appendix E: LabVIEW Driver ..................................................... 449
Application Example 1 - Heat/Cool Control.................................................... 450
Application Example 2 - Program Load by Program Number ........................ 453
Application Example 3 - Steriliser .................................................................. 454
Application Example 4 - Configurable Steriliser ............................................. 454
Full driver capabilities list ............................................................................... 455
HA030554 Issue 16 9
10 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Safety Information
Safety Information
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this manual or on the equipment to warn of
potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential

personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this
symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury. The safety alert
symbol shall not be used with this signal word.
Note: Electrical equipment must be installed, operated, serviced and maintained

only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for
any consequences arising out of the use of this material.
Note: A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the
construction, installation, and operation of electrical equipment, and has received
safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
HA030554 Issue 16 11
Safety and EMC nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Safety and EMC
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Power down all equipment before starting the installation, removal, wiring,
maintenance or inspection of the product.
Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.
Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and
national regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular
equipment, i.e. UK, the latest IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671), and USA, NEC
class 1 wiring methods.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Reasonable use and responsibility
The safety of any system incorporating this product is the responsibility of the
assembler/installer of the system.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
While every effort has been made to improve the accuracy of the information, your
supplier shall not be held liable for errors contained herein.
This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications,
which meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC.
Use in other applications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this

manual may compromise safety or EMC. The installer must ensure the safety and
EMC of any particular installation.
Failure to use approved software/hardware with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.
12 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Safety and EMC
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only by
qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out

of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction
and operation of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety
training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents
of this manual and all other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work
on and with this product.
The qualified person must be able to detect possible hazards that may arise from
parameterization, modifying parameter values and generally from mechanical,
electrical, or electronic equipment.
The qualified person must be familiar with the standards, provisions, and regulations
for the prevention of industrial accidents, which they must observe when designing
and implementing the system.
INTENDED USE
The product described or affected by this document, together with software and
options, is the nanodac™ Recorder / Controller (referred to herein as "programmable
controller", "controller" or "nanodac"), intended for industrial use according to the
instructions, directions, examples, and safety information contained in the present
document and other supporting documentation.
The product may only be used in compliance with all applicable safety regulations
and directives, the specified requirements, and the technical data.
Prior to using the product, a risk assessment must be performed in respect of the
planned application. Based on the results, the appropriate safety-related measures
must be implemented.
Since the product is used as a component within a machine or process, you must
ensure the safety of this overall system.
Operate the product only with the specified cables and accessories. Use only
genuine accessories and spare parts.
Any use other than the use explicitly permitted is prohibited and can result in
unanticipated hazards.
HA030554 Issue 16 13
DANGER
Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical
work practices. See applicable national standards e.g. NFPA70E, CSA Z462, BS
7671, NFC 18-510.
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated and maintained by only suitably
qualified personnel.
Refer to manual for installation and servicing.
Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on the loads of the
equipment.
Replace doors and plug-in terminals before turning on power to this equipment.
If on receipt, the unit or any part within is damaged, do not install but contact your
supplier.
Do not disassemble, repair or modify the equipment. Contact your supplier for
repair.
This product must be installed, connected and used in compliance with prevailing
standards and/or installation regulations.
Do not exceed the device's ratings.
The unit must be installed in an enclosure or cabinet connected to the protective
earth ground.
Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the
product is mounted.
Do not allow anything to fall through the case apertures and ingress the product.
Before any other connection is made, the protective earth ground terminal must be
connected to a protective conductor.
Any interruption of the protective earth ground conductor inside or outside the
product, or disconnection of the protective earth ground terminal is likely to make
the product dangerous under some conditions. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made
inoperative, and secured against accidental operation. The manufacturers nearest
service centre must be contacted for advice.
Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and
national regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular
equipment, i.e. UK, the latest IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671), and USA, NEC
class 1 wiring methods.
Tighten all connections in conformance with the torque specifications. Periodic
inspections are required.
Ensure all cables and wiring harness are secured using a relevant strain relief
mechanism.
Use appropriate safety interlocks where personnel and/or equipment hazards exist.
Respect electrical installation requirements to ensure optimum IP rating.
Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.
Grounding the temperature sensor shield: Where it is common practice to replace
the temperature sensor whilst the instrument is live, it is recommended that the
shield of the temperature sensor be grounded to a protective earth ground, as an
additional protection against electric shock.
14 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Safety and EMC
DANGER
The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals
must not exceed 240Vac.
1) Relay output to logic, dc or sensor input connections
2) Any connection to ground.
The ac supply must not be connected to sensor input or low-level inputs or outputs.
Ensure the power supply capacitors discharge to a safe voltage, the power supply
must be disconnected for at least two minutes, before the instrument is removed
from its sleeve. The touching of the exposed electronics of an instrument which has
been removed from its sleeve should be avoided.
DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
A maximum of two wires, when identical in type and cross sectional size can be
inserted per controller terminal or terminal harness connector (where utilized).
The conductor stripping length must be as stated in electrical installation.Ensure all
wires that connect to the controller terminals or to the controllers terminal harness
connector (without ferrules), do not exceed the maximum exposed conductor
length.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not use the product for critical control or protection applications where human
or equipment safety relies on the operation of the control circuit.
Signal and power voltage wiring must be kept separate from one another. Where
this is impractical, all wires must be rated to the power voltage and shielded
cables are recommended for signal wiring.When shielded cable is used, it must
be grounded at one end only.
This product has been designed for environment A (Industrial). Use of this product
in environment B (domestic, commercial and light industrial) may cause unwanted
electromagnetic disturbances in which cases the installer may be required to take
adequate mitigation measures.
For Electromagnetic Compatibility, the panel or DIN rail to which the product is
attached must be grounded.
Observe all electrostatic discharge precautions before handling the unit.
At commissioning, ensure cybersecurity robustness of the installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If being stored before use, store within the specified environmental conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.
HA030554 Issue 16 15
Symbols
Various symbols may be used on the controller. They have the following meaning:
D Risk of electric shock.
O Take precautions against static.
P Regulatory compliance mark for Australia (ACA) and New Zealand (RSM).
* Complies with the 40 year Environment Friendly Usage Period.
Hazardous Substances
This product conforms to European Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
(using exemptions) and Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH) Legislation.
RoHS Exemptions used in this product involve the use of lead. China RoHS
legislation does not include exemptions and so lead is declared as present in the
China RoHS Declaration.
Californian law requires the following notice:
WWARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead
compounds which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
For more information go to: http://www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
USB Device Precautions

Note: The use of U3 USB Flash drives is not recommended.
1. Precautions against electrostatic discharge should be taken when the instrument
terminals are being accessed. The USB and Ethernet connections are
particularly vulnerable.
2. Ideally, the USB device should be plugged directly into the instrument, as the use
of extension leads may compromise the instrument’s ESD compliance. Where
the instrument is being used in an electrically noisy’ environment however, it is
recommended that the user brings the USB socket to the front of the panel using
a short extension lead. This is because the USB may lock up’ or reset in noisy
environments and the only means of recovery is to remove the device, then
re-insert it. For memory sticks, EMC-related failure during a write operation might
cause corruption of the data held on the stick. For this reason, the data on the
memory stick should be backed up before insertion and checked after removal.
3. When using a USB extension cable, a high quality screened cable must be used.
The total length of USB cable between the device and the USB port must not
exceed 3 metres (10 ft.).
4. Most barcode readers and keyboards are not designed for use in industrial EMC
environments, and their operation in such environments may result in impaired
performance of the recorder/controller.
32-BIT Resolution
Floating point values are stored in IEEE 32-bit single precision format. Values which
require greater resolution than is available in this format are rounded up or down.
16 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Cybersecurity
Cybersecurity
What’s in this Chapter
This chapter outlines some good practice approaches to cybersecurity as they relate
to use of the nanodac instrument, and draws attention to several nanodac features
that could assist in implementing robust cybersecurity.
Introduction
When utilising the nanodac in an industrial environment, it is important to take
‘cybersecurity’ into consideration: in other words, the installation’s design should aim
to prevent unauthorised and malicious access. This includes both physical access
(for instance via the front panel or HMI screens), and electronic access (via network
connections and digital communications).
Secure Network Topologies and Good Practices

Overall design of a site network is outside the scope of this manual. The
Cybersecurity Good Practices Guide, Part Number HA032968 provides an overview
of principles to consider. This is available from www.eurotherm.com.
Typically, an industrial controller such as the nanodac together with any associated
HMI screens and controlled devices should not be placed on a network with direct
access to the public Internet. Rather, good practice involves locating the devices on a
fire-walled network segment, separated from the public Internet by a so-called
demilitarized zone’ (DMZ).
Security Features
The sections below draw attention to some of the cybersecurity features of the
nanodac.
Principle of Secure by Default

Some of the digital communication features on the nanodac can provide greater
convenience and ease-of-use (particularly in regards to initial configuration), but also
can potentially make the controller more vulnerable. For this reason, some of these
features are turned off by default. In particular, ID061 (the BACnet port is closed
unless the BACnet option is enabled).
HMI Access Level / Comms Config Mode

As described in Login (page 49), the nanodac device features tiered,
password-restricted user access levels, so that available functions and parameters
can be restricted to appropriate personnel.
Note: User accounts of any access level require a password, otherwise they will not
be available for selection.
Logged Out Access Level

Logged out mode allows the user to select viewing mode, to view history, to view
alarms, to toggle faceplate cycling on and off, to send notes, to suspend/resume USB
archiving and to access the login process.
HA030554 Issue 16 17
Cybersecurity nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Operator Access Level

In addition to the logged out features, Operator access level allows the user to
acknowledge alarms, to edit notes and to perform demand archive operations. By
default, a password is required to enter Operator level. Passwords can be configured
either at Supervisor level or at Engineer level.
If the Auditor feature is enabled, the Operator user is pre-configured as ‘User 1’. See
next section for details.
Customizable Users
Overview
A total of 25 customizable user accounts are available. With the exception of ‘User 1’
which is pre-configured to replace the ‘Operator’ user account, the remaining 24 are
disabled by default and require the ‘Login Disabled’ permission to be enabled and a
unique password provided.
Each user account can automatically inherit the ‘Logged Out’ access level, however
the user can further choose to inherit the permission sets from any of the following
base users:
• Operator (these permissions can be individually configured)
• Supervisor (inherits as a set)
• Engineer (inherits as a set)
The following example demonstrates the number of user account types that can be
configured.
• 24 Operator Users + 0 Supervisory Users + 1 Engineer User, or
• 23 Operator Users + 1 Supervisory User + 1 Engineer User, or
• 10 Operator Users + 10 Supervisory Users + 5 Engineer Users, or
• 13 Operator Users + 9 Supervisory Users + 3 Engineer Users, etc.
Username
The username for each user can be up to 20 characters in length. Typically, only the
first 12 characters are displayed in scroll lists (such as when logging on) due to
space. When logging in, the user account number (1 to 25) is prefixed to the
username so that each name is unique by default.
Password
The password for each user can be up to 20 characters in length, and should contain
a selection of numbers, letters, uppercase, lowercase, etc. to provide a strong
password for enhancing cybersecurity.
18 HA030554 Issue 16
Configurable parameters per user

The following parameters are configurable for each user. Refer to "User Accounts
(Auditor)" on page 107 for further details:
Permission Description
Batch Control Yes = Control batches via batch control page

Ack Alarms Yes = Acknowledge alarms in the alarm summary screen
Demand Archiving Yes = Access to the demand archiving screen
Login Disabled Yes = Disable this account
Signing Yes = This user will appear in the list when required to sign
for an action
Authorising Yes = This user will appear in the list when required to
authorise an action
Archive Interval Yes = Modify the archive interval rate
Loop Control Yes = Change the mode, manual OP in control loop
screens
Program Mode Yes = Change the mode of programs
Program Edit Yes = Edit programs
Program Store Yes = Store programs
Supervisor Yes = Inherits Supervisor user access level (mutually
exclusive with Engineer)
Engineer Yes = Inherits Engineer user access level (mutually
exclusive with Supervisor)
Supervisor Access Level

In addition to the logged out features, this access level allows the user to view the
recorder’s configuration, and to edit some values (such as alarm thresholds).
Engineer Access Level

This allows full access to all areas of the recorder configuration.
HMI Passwords
When entering passwords via the HMI, the following features help protect against
unauthorised access:
• Each digit is obscured (replaced with an asterisk character) after entry, to help
protect against an unauthorized person seeing the password as it is typed in.
• Password entry is locked after a configurable number of invalid attempts (if

Auditor option is enabled). If this number of attempts is exceeded, the User
account is disabled. This helps protect against “brute force” attempts to guess
the password.
HA030554 Issue 16 19
• The controller records the number of successful and unsuccessful login attempts
for each level of password. This is recorded in the History. Regular auditing of
this History is recommended, as a means to help detect unauthorized access to
the controller.
Ethernet security features

Ethernet connectivity is available on the nanodac. The following security features are
specific to Ethernet:
Ethernet rate protection

One form of cyberattack is to try to make a controller process so much Ethernet traffic
that this drains systems resources and useful control is compromised. For this
reason, the nanodac device includes an Ethernet rate protection algorithm, which will
detect excessive network activity and help to ensure the controller’s resources are
prioritized on the control strategy rather than the Ethernet. If this algorithm is
activated, a message will be entered into the History.
Broadcast Storm protection

A ‘broadcast storm’ is a condition which may be created by cyberattack: spurious
network messages are sent to devices which cause them to respond with further
network messages, in a chain reaction that escalates until the network is unable to
transport normal traffic. The nanodac device includes a broadcast storm protection
algorithm, which will automatically detect this condition, stopping the controller from
responding to the spurious traffic. If this algorithm is activated, a message will be
entered into the History.
Configuration backup and recovery

Using the iTools software, you can ‘clone’ a nanodac device, saving all its
configuration and parameter settings to a file. This can then be copied onto another
controller, or used to restore the original controller’s settings. Clone files are digitally
signed using an SHA-256 cryptographic algorithm, meaning that if the file contents is
tampered with, it will not load back into a controller.
Memory Integrity
When a nanodac device powers up, it automatically performs an integrity check on
the contents of its internal non-volatile memory devices. Additional periodic integrity
checks are performed during normal runtime and when non-volatile data is being
written. If any integrity check detects a difference from what is expected, the
controller enters Standby mode and a message is displayed on then screen.
Firmware
From time to time, to provide new functionality or address known issues, Eurotherm
may make new versions of the nanodac firmware available.
20 HA030554 Issue 16
This firmware may be downloaded from the Eurotherm website, and transferred to a
nanodac instrument in the field, via a USB memory stick (or FTP server).
CAUTION
NON-SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC FIRMWARE
There is a potential risk that an attacker could upgrade a nanodac with non-genuine
firmware that contains malicious code. To mitigate this potential risk, genuine
nanodac firmware upgrade utility executables are always supplied digitally signed
with the publisher as Schneider Electric. Do not use a firmware upgrade utility if it
has not been signed by Schneider Electric.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
HA030554 Issue 16 21
Supported Protocols and Threat Mitigations

The nanodac supports the following protocols on Ethernet. For each protocol, a list of
mitigations are provided. As a general comment, the firewall is configured to block all
ports except those required for installed/enabled options.
FTP Client
An external FTP client can access the FTP server on the instrument. This FTP server
has a remote username and password for each of the users (that will need
configuring). Passwords can be modified and additional users can be added with
configurable remote usernames and passwords.
To mitigate threats:
1. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.
2. Firewall to block TCP port 21.
3. It is recommended that user’s should change their passwords regularly, this

could be done manually or by using the password expiry feature.
FTP Server
Up to two external FTP servers can be configured. The nanodac will then connect to
these servers as an FTP client and push archive files to the servers.
Threat mitigation as for FTP Client.
ICMP (ping)
The nanodac will respond to a ping to aid network diagnostics.
2. Use a firewall to block ICMP / ping.
DHCP
The nanodac can allocate its IP address using DHCP; however this is typically set to
fixed IP address allocation by configuration. The DHCP server could be spoofed
allocating an invalid IP address to the instrument.
1. Use fixed IP address allocation.
SNTP
The nanodac can support SNTP for network time synchronisation.
2. Firewall to block UDP port 123.
22 HA030554 Issue 16
ModBus
The nanodac supports ModBus, which can be configured to act as Master via TCP
and Slave via serial or TCP.
1. Physically protect access to subnet (or serial cabling) in use.
2. Firewall to block TCP port 502 (or alternate non-standard port if so configured).
HTTP (Web Server)

UHH Navigator
Ethernet IP
1. Physically protect access to subnet in use.
2. Firewall to block TCP port 2222. This port is opened when Ethernet IP option is
enabled.
BACnet
1. Physically protect access to subnet in use.
2. Firewall to block UDP port 47808. This port is opened when BACnet option is
enabled.
Decommissioning
When a nanodac instrument is at the end of its life and being decommissioned,
Eurotherm advises reverting all parameters to their default settings using the
Engineer Password ‘ResetConfig’ or via iTools (see "Security menu" on page 98 and
"iTOOLS" for instructions). This can help to protect against subsequent data and
intellectual property theft if the controller is then acquired by another party.
HA030554 Issue 16 23
Legal Information nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Legal Information
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or
technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This
documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for
determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications. It
is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk
analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific
application or use thereof. Schneider Electric, Eurotherm Limited or any of its
affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information
contained herein.
If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors
in this publication, please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, non-commercial use,
all or part of this document on any medium whatsoever without permission of
Eurotherm Limited, given in writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext
links to this document or its content. Eurotherm Limited does not grant any right or
license for the personal and noncommercial use of the document or its content,
except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as-is" basis, at your own risk.
All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when
installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance
with documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to
components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the
relevant instructions must be followed.
Failure to use Eurotherm Limited software or approved software with our hardware
products may result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
Eurotherm, EurothermSuite, ECAT, EFit, EPack, EPower, Eycon, Eyris, Chessell,

Mini8, nanodac, optivis, piccolo and versadac are trademarks of Eurotherm Limited
SE, its subsidiaries and affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.
© 2021 Eurotherm Limited. All rights reserved.
24 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Introduction
Introduction
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of a paperless
graphic recorder/controller. The instrument comes, as standard, with four input
channels and is equipped for secure archiving via FTP transfer and/or to USB
memory stick.
Unpacking the Instrument

The instrument is despatched in a special pack, designed to give adequate protection
during transit. Should the outer box show signs of damage, it should be opened
immediately, and the contents examined. If there is evidence of damage, the
instrument should not be operated and the local representative contacted for
instructions. After the instrument has been removed from its packing, the packing
should be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been
removed. The packing should then be stored against future transport requirements.
HA030554 Issue 16 25
Installation nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Installation
DANGER
Before installation, ensure that the specified instrument supply voltage matches the
facility supply.
Mechanical Installation
Figure 1 gives installation details.
Installation Procedure
1. If it is not already in place, fit the IP65 sealing gasket behind the front bezel of the
instrument.
2. Insert the instrument through the panel cutout, from the front of the panel.
3. Spring the retaining clips into place, and secure the instrument by holding it firmly
in place whilst pushing both clips towards the rear face of the panel.
4. The protective membrane can now be removed from the display.
For the sake of clarity, the Retaining spring (two places)

panel is shown as though
transparent
Push springs towards panel
Push springs towards panel
Figure 1 Securing the Instrument
26 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Installation
Demounting
DANGER
Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical
work practices. See applicable national standards e.g. NFPA70E, CSA Z462, BS
7671, NFC 18-510.
Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on the loads of the
equipment.
1. Isolate the mains supply and secure it against accidental operation. Remove all
wiring and the USB device and Ethernet cable (if any).
2. Remove the retaining springs by unhooking them from the sides using a small
flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Pull the instrument forwards out of the panel.
Removing the Instrument from its Sleeve

The instrument is designed to be removed from its sleeve from the front panel.
However, if a USB memory stick or the Ethernet cable is fitted then this must be
removed first.
When the instrument is shipped from the factory it is fitted with two small red clips,
one in the top side of the sleeve and the other below. These are intended as a
safeguard against removal of the instrument from its sleeve when an Ethernet cable
is fitted. These clips must also be removed, using a small screwdriver, before the
instrument can be taken out of its sleeve.
Ease the latching ears (Figure 2) outwards and pull the controller forward.
When plugging back in ensure that the latching ears click into place to maintain the
panel sealing.
HA030554 Issue 16 27
Side View
Latching
ears
Panel cutout:
92mm x 92mm (both -0 + 0.8mm)
3.62in x 3.62in (both -0.00 + 0.03in)
Minimum inter-unit spacing:
Horizontal (‘x’) = 10mm (0.4in) Top View
Vertical (‘y’) = 38mm (1.5in)
Figure 2 Mechanical installation details (standard case)
28 HA030554 Issue 16
Side View
Latching
ears
Panel cutout:
92mm x 92mm (both -0 + 0.8mm)
3.62in x 3.62in (both -0.00 + 0.03in)
Minimum inter-unit spacing:
Horizontal (‘x’) = 10mm (0.4in) Top View
Vertical (‘y’) = 38mm (1.5in)
Figure 3 Mechanical installation details (wash down case option)
HA030554 Issue 16 29
Electrical Installation
Figure 4 shows the locations of the various user terminations along with signal and
supply wiring pinouts.
100 to 230Vac±15%;
48/62 Hz
1 Brown
Blue
8
Mains (Line) supply voltage
24Vac; -15%, +10%

48 to 62 Hz or
24V dc; -15%, +20%
(polarity irrelevant)
Supply
Voltage
Supply Voltage
Low voltage option wiring
I/O1
R>500R = inactive
R<150R = active
Contact closure Logic o/p (active high) Relay output Isolated DC o/p (mA)
O/P2
Each wire connected
to LA, LB and LC must
be less than 30 metres
in length.
Isolated DC o/p (mA) Logic o/p (active high) Relay output

O/P3 Dig InA Dig InB O/P4; O/P5
R>600R = inactive
R<300R = active
Relay output Isolated DC o/p (mA/V) Contact closure Contact closure Relay output
An In1; An In2; An In3; An In4
R<200R = active
R>350R = inactive
T/C, Volts, millivolts Milliamps RTD (three wire) RTD (two wire) Ohms inputs Digital
An In1; An In2; An In3; An In4
Dual input option ("Dual Input Option" on page 31, below)
(Primary and secondary inputs are not electrically isolated from one
another.)
For maximum accuracy, it is recommended that separate returns are
made to the negative terminal.
Dual mV/TC Dual mA
Figure 4 Connector locations and pinouts (rear panel)
30 HA030554 Issue 16
Installation Requirements
NOTICE
Safety requirements for permanently connected equipment state:
1. A switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation.
2. The switch/circuit breaker will be in close proximity to the equipment and

within easy reach of the operator.
3. It shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment.
Note: Recommended external fuse ratings are: 2A Type T 250V.
Termination details
The screw terminals accept single wires in the range 0.21 to 2.08mm2 (24 to 14
AWG) inclusive, or two wires each in the range 0.21 to 1.31mm2 (24 to 16 AWG)
inclusive. Screw terminals should be tightened to a torque not exceeding 0.4Nm
(3.54lb in).
Low Voltage Option

This option allows the use of a low voltage ac or dc 24V supply. The specification in
Appendix A gives full details. The polarity of the dc supply connection is not important
-it may be connected either way round.
Dual Input Option

This is a cost option, enabled on a channel-by-channel basis by means of entering
the relevant password in the ‘Feature3 Pass’ field in Instrument.Security menu
described in Section 6.1.6.
For each enabled channel, a pair of thermocouple, mV or mA inputs can be

connected to the instrument. These inputs are called ‘primary’ and ‘secondary’, and
are terminated at the analogue input terminals (An In1 to An In 4) as shown in Figure
4, above. The primary inputs 1 to 4 are assigned to channels 1 to 4, as normal. Each
secondary input must be soft wired to a maths channel configured as Operation =
‘Copy’ if it is to be recorded/ displayed/alarmed etc.
Note: Due to the nature of the input circuit, a large offset may appear for secondary
thermocouple inputs. This offset can be removed only by using the input adjust
feature described in "Input adjust" on page 103. Because of this offset, the dual
thermocouple input option is not suitable for AMS2750D applications.
Soft wiring is described in "iTOOLS".
Maths channels are described in "Maths channel configuration" on page 133.
Channel configuration is described in "Channel Main" on page 123.
Input adjust is carried out as described in "Input adjust" on page 103.
Sample Rate
For dual input channels, both primary and secondary sample rate is reduced to 4Hz
(250ms) from the normal 8Hz (125ms).
HA030554 Issue 16 31
Sensor Break Detection

Input sensor break detection is not supported for secondary inputs. The internal
circuit acts as a ‘pull up’ on the secondary input which therefore saturates high in the
event of a sensor break.
Dual Milliamp Offset Correction

If ‘Dual mA’ is selected as input type, then an automatic offset correction will be
made, according to the shunt value entered in channel configuration. Refer to
"Channel Main" on page 123 for further information.
Input Range Limitation

There is no 10V range associated with the secondary input. Any input greater than
+2V or less than -2V is deemed to be ‘bad range’.
Modbus Master communications

The master instrument can be connected directly to up to two slaves using standard
Ethernet network cable either directly (single slave only) or via a hub or switch (one
or two slaves). In either case, ‘straight through’ or ‘crossover’ cable may be used.
The cable is terminated at the RJ45 socket at the rear of the unit.
EtherNet/IP
The Client and Server are connected in the same way as described above for
Modbus Master communications, except that there can be only one client and one
server.
32 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Operation
Operation
On power up a default or custom splash screen appears and remains
visible whilst the unit is initialising. If during this process a network
broadcast storm is detected, the unit stops, displaying a network failure
icon until the broadcast storm has cleared, after which the initialisation
process resumes.
Introduction - Initial Setup
Figure 5 Engineer password configuration screen - at initial start.

At initial start, after installation the unit will display the Engineer password
configuration screen, see Figure 5.
The Engineer password must be configured to allow any further operation, see
Engineer Password - Configuration.
Note: The initial Engineer password screen only appears after a Clone file load or
firmware upgrade, if no engineer password was configured. All user accounts require
an associated password.
NOTICE
ENGINEER ACCESS DENIED
When configuring the Engineer password, ensure the password can be recalled
and entered correctly. An incorrect password will prevent Engineer access (lock
out) and any further configuration or use of the controller. Contact your local
Eurotherm support desk in the unlikely event of being locked out.
Note: Please read the following information regarding the units display screen and
navigation controls to familiarize yourself with all the controls and their associated
functions, see Operator Interface (page 34).
Engineer Password - Configuration
1. From the Engineer password configuration screen, press the scroll button .
The Engineer Pass panel appears.
2. Enter a password, using the raise and lower buttons ( ) which in turn will
move the highlighted key, and pressing the scroll button to enter each character.
HA030554 Issue 16 33
Operation nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
3. Press the Page button ( ), once you have completed typing the Engineer
password.
The Accept changes? panel will appear with the following options:
• Cancel - cancels the panel and returns to the keyboard
• No - cancels the panel and returns to the Engineer password configuration

screen
• Yes - enters the password
4. Select Yes to enter the password.

Use the raise button twice (or the lower button once) to highlight the word ‘Yes’
and press the scroll key to confirm.
The Engineer password is accepted and completed. The display mode screen
will appear, see Figure 6 Display mode screen (vertical trend).
The Engineer password is configured at initial start up, but can also be updated when
required. The Engineer password must only be associated with and used when
logging in at Engineer level access, for further details see:
• Login (page 49)
• To Log in as Engineer (page 51)
• Security menu (page 98)
Operator Interface
The operator interface consists of a display screen and four push buttons.
Display Screen
The display screen is used both to display channel information (in one of a number of
display modes), and to display the various configuration screens which allow the user
to setup the recorder to display the required channels, to set up alarms and so on.
Display modes are described in "Display Modes" on page 52 below; configuration is
described in "Configuration".
In display mode, the screen is split horizontally into three areas (Figure 6):
1. A faceplate giving channel details.
2. the main display screen showing channel traces etc.
3. the status area, displaying instrument name, the current time and date and any
system icons.
Faceplate Channel 1 6.23V
Main display screen
12:01:08
Status area Instrument name
Figure 6 Display mode screen (vertical trend)
34 HA030554 Issue 16
In configuration mode, the entire display screen is devoted to the selected

configuration menu.
Navigation Pushbuttons
Home
Configuration
Go to View
History
Faceplate cycling (On)
Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Figure 7 Top level menu (Engineer level access)

There are four navigation buttons, called ‘Page’, ‘Scroll’, ‘Lower’ and ‘Raise’ located
below the screen. The general properties of these buttons are described in the
remainder of this section, but some have additional, context sensitive functions,
which, for the sake of clarity are not described here but in the relevant sections (e.g.
‘Message summary’) of the manual.
Page Button
From any non-configuration page, pressing this push button causes the top level
menu (Figure 7) to appear. The figure shows the menu for a user logged in with
‘Engineer’ level access. Other access levels may have fewer menu items.
Within configuration pages, the Scroll button can be used as an enter key to select
lower menu levels. In such cases the page button is used to reverse this action,
moving the user up one menu level per operation.
Scroll Button
From trending pages, operation of the scroll push-button scrolls through the channels
enabled in the group. The Faceplate cycling ‘Off’ selection can be used to keep a
particular channel permanently displayed, and the scroll pushbuttons can then be
used to select channels manually.
In configuration pages, the scroll key operates as an ‘enter’ key to enter the next
menu level associated with the highlighted item. Once the lowest menu level is
reached, operation of the scroll key allows the value of the selected item to be edited
by the relevant means (for example, the raise/lower keys, or a keyboard entry).
The ‘Page’ key is used to move the user back up the menu structure, until the top
level menu is reached, when the scroll key can be used again to return to the Home
page. The scroll button is also used to initiate user wiring as described in "iTOOLS".
Raise/Lower Buttons
Within trending displays, the Raise and Lower keys can be used to scroll through the
enabled display modes in the sequence: vertical trend, horizontal trend, vertical
bargraph, horizontal bargraph, numeric, vertical trend... and so on.
HA030554 Issue 16 35
Within configuration pages, these pushbuttons act as cursor keys, allowing, for
example, the user to highlight menu items for selection using the scroll button, and in
many cases allowing the user to select one from a number of alternative values
within menu items. These keys are also used to navigate through the virtual
keyboards ("Text Entry" on page 89) and number pads used to enter text or numeric
strings.
On Screen Help
The top level configuration menu includes contextual help text on the right-hand half
of the screen. Mostly this text fits within on screen height. Where this is not the case,
the text can be moved up or down the screen by holding the Page button operated
whilst using the up and down arrows to move the text.
The down arrow moves the text upwards on the screen; the up arrow moves it
downwards.
(Use the Page button with the down arrow to access hidden text at the bottom of the
screen)
Select configuration menu
Logic (2 Input) The timer function block

offers a universal timer
Logic (8 input) which may be On-screen help.
re-configured between
Multiplexer single pulse outputs and
(Use the Page button with the
Math (2 input) re-triggering outputs.
down arrow to access hidden
Timer types are:
Timer text at the bottom of the
screen)
User values
On pulse on-timer +
Alarm Summary
Figure 8 On-screen help (typical)
Process Variable Display

As discussed above, the operator interface consists of a display screen and
associated push buttons. The display screen shows process variables in one of a
number of formats, or operational details (notes or alarm history for example), or
configuration details for use in setting up the recorder to produce the required
displays and history formats. The remainder of this section discusses the process
variable displays, alarm displays and so on; configuration details are to be found in
"Configuration".
Note: Some of the items below can be selected for use only by users with a suitable
permission level as set up in the ‘Instrument’ ‘Security’ menu described in "Security
menu" on page 98.
Figure 9 depicts a typical trend display and gives details of the various areas of the
display page.
36 HA030554 Issue 16
Current point name Channel 1 6.23V Current point value and units
Current point scale
Current point ‘pen
Time/date stamps
Instrument name
12:01:08
Recording status Inst name Current time/date
Figure 9 Typical display screen (Vertical trend)

Figure 9 shows a vertical trend page. Operating the Raise/Lower push-buttons allows
the user to scroll through the other display modes: Horizontal trend, Vertical
bargraph, horizontal bargraph, numeric, vertical trend... and so on. All these display
modes are described in "Display Modes" on page 52, below.
A display mode can also be selected from the Top level menu ‘Go To View’ item
which appears when the ‘Page’ key is operated.
The scroll button can be used to scroll through the points in the group, overriding the
‘Faceplate Cycling’ on or off selection
Alarm Icons
Note: A full discussion of alarms is given in the Channel Configuration section of
this manual, "Alarm 1 menu" on page 128.
Note: Trigger alarms do not display threshold marks or bars, or faceplate symbols.
The alarm icons shown below appear in some display modes. The icons on a
channel faceplate show the status of that channel’s alarm(s), as follows:
Icon is flashing alarm is active but unacknowledged or it is an Auto alarm
which is no longer active but which has not been acknowl-
edged.
Icon steadily illuminated
the alarm is active and has been acknowledged.
Alarm thresholds and deviation alarm bars appear for horizontal and vertical trend
modes. For deviation bars, the bar stretches from (Reference - Deviation) to
(Reference + Deviation). Vertical and Horizontal bargraph modes display only
absolute alarm symbols.
Absolute High
Absolute Low
Deviation High
Deviation Low
Deviation Band
Rising Rate of change
Falling Rate of change
Digital High
Digital Low
Figure 10 Alarm icons
HA030554 Issue 16 37
Status Bar Icons

The following items can appear in a dedicated window immediately to the left of the
time and date, at the bottom right-hand corner of the display. The width of this
window expands as the number of icons increases, and the instrument name is
truncated, as necessary, to make room.
System Alarms
This indicator appears, flashing, if any one or more of the alarms listed below is
active. The System Alarms summary page (accessed from ‘Go to View in the top
level menu) allows the user to view such system alarms as are active. It is not
possible to ‘acknowledge’ system alarms
Archive Disabled An unattended archiving strategy has temporarily been
disabled.
Archiving Failed An unattended archiving strategy has failed to complete.
Archiving Timeout A configured archiving strategy has timed out.
Battery failure Indicates that the battery is approaching the end of its use-
ful life, or that it is missing or is completely exhausted. Im-
mediate battery replacement is recommended ("Appendix
C: Reference", "Battery" on page 431).
Broadcast Storm detected
Networking is limited until the storm has passed.
Clock failure The internal clock was found to be corrupt at power up, or
that the time has never been set. Time is forced to 00:00
1/1/1900. Can be caused by battery failure, in which case
a battery failure message appears. The error is cleared by
setting the time and date.
Channel error Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the
internal cold junction temperature measurement.
Database failure Corrupted EEPROM or flash memory.
DHCP Server failure For units with ‘IP Type’ set to ‘DHCP’ (Network.Interface
configuration) this alarm occurs if the instrument is unable
to obtain an IP address from the server.
FTP Archiving file lost
A file has been deleted that had not yet been archived.
Possible causes: Communications with the server could
not be established,; archive is disabled; archive rate too
slow.
FTP Archiving to slow
The archive rate is too slow to prevent the internal memory
from overflowing. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Au-
tomatic’ ("Archiving" on page 111) to ensure that data is
not lost.
FTP Primary Server Failure
This error occurs if the recorder fails to establish connec-
tion with the primary server, after two attempts. After the
second attempt fails, the recorder attempts to establish
connection with the secondary server instead. Primary and
secondary server details are entered in the Network. Ar-
chiving area of configuration ("Archiving" on page 111).
FTP Secondary Server Failure
This error occurs if the recorder fails to establish connec-
tion with the secondary server, after two attempts. Primary
and secondary server details are entered in the Net-
work.Archiving area of configuration ("Archiving" on
page 111).
38 HA030554 Issue 16
Maths channel failure

Appears if, for example, the divisor of a divide function is
zero.
Media archiving file lost
A file has been deleted that had not yet been archived.
Possible causes: memory stick missing, full or write pro-
tected; archiving has been disabled; archiving rate too
slow.
Media archiving to slow
The archive rate is too slow to prevent the internal memory
from overflowing. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Au-
tomatic’ ("Archiving" on page 111) to ensure that data is
not lost.
Media full Archive storage device is full. The alarm becomes active
only when an archive is in progress.
Media missing No archive storage device present when archive attempt-
ed.
Non-volatile memory failure
RAM copy of non-volatile parameters is corrupted.
Non-volatile Write Frequency warning
One or more parameters are being written frequently to
non-volatile memory. If this continues, it may lead to ‘mem-
ory depletion’ (i.e. the memory will no longer be able to
store values correctly). A common cause of this problem is
frequent writes over Modbus comms.
Recording failure (message)
Message explains reason for failure.
SNTP failure Invalid data received from SNTP server, for example, the
year received from the server is <2001 or >2035, or the
server cannot be accessed.
Time synchronisation failure
Instrument time has failed to synchronise with SNTP serv-
er. If more than 5 ‘Time change events’ occur within 24
hours a ‘Time synchronisation failure’ alarm is set. The
alarm occurs 24 hours after the first event. Once synchro-
nisation is re-established, the alarm self- clears within 24
hours. A ‘Time change event’ occurs whenever the record-
er time is found to be more than two seconds different from
the server time. If the instrument time differs from the
SNTP time by less than two seconds, the instrument time
is updated gradually (1ms, eight times a second) to pre-
vent time changes being recorded. SNTP time is based on
elapsed seconds since 00:00 hours on 1st January 1900.
The time is not affected by time zones or daylight saving
adjustments.
USB overcurrent USB power fault - too much current (i.e. >100mA) is being
drawn by a USB device.
Wiring failure The user wiring has failed to verify, i.e. one or more wires
has been detected that does not have both a source and a
destination defined. This may be the result, for example, of
power loss during a download from iTools.
Channel Alarm
This indicator appears if any channel (including channels not in the display group) is
in an alarm state. The symbol is illuminated continuously if all alarms are
acknowledged or flashes if any one or more alarms is unacknowledged. Alarms are
acknowledged from the Root menu ‘Alarm summary’ item as described in "Go to
View" on page 43 or in the Channel configuration area ("Alarm 1 menu" on page 128)
if the user’s access permission is appropriate.
HA030554 Issue 16 39
USB
This icon appears whenever a memory stick (max. capacity 8GB) or other supported
USB device ("USB Devices")
is plugged into the USB port at the rear of the recorder. When data transfer is in
progress between the instrument and the memory stick, the icon changes to a ‘busy’
version.
NOTICE
LOSS OF DATA
The memory stick must not be removed whilst archiving (demand or automatic) is
in progress.
Removal of the memory stick during archiving may irreparably

Memory stick
damage the file system of the memory stick, rendering it fitted
unusable. It is recommended that all archiving is suspended Transfer in
before the memory stick is removed. progress
FTP Icon
The FTP icon appears whenever transfer activity is taking place.
Record Icon
One of four icons appears at the bottom left corner of the display to indicate recording
status.
Record
This indicates that the recorder is recording the items selected in the Group
Recording area of configuration ("Group Configuration" on page 117).
Stopped
This means that ‘Enable’ has been set to ‘no’ in the Group Recording area of
configuration ("Group Configuration" on page 117). Trending is not affected.
Paused (Suspended)
This means that recording has been paused by a wire to the Suspend parameter
(Group Recording area of configuration ("Group Configuration" on page 117) going
true (high). Trending is not affected.
In Configuration
The recorder has been placed in configuration mode either at the user interface, or
via iTools. Recording is stopped until the recorder is no longer in configuration mode.
For each non-recording state (Stopped, Paused or In Configuration). A new history
file is created when the unit comes out of configuration mode.
Note: For recording to be enabled, configuration status must be ‘logged out’ both at
the instrument and at iTools.
Message Icon
This ‘envelope’ icon appears when a message is generated and it remains on display
until the Message Summary (see "Message Summary" on page 44) is accessed,
when it is removed from the display until the next new message is generated.
40 HA030554 Issue 16
Autotune Icon
For instruments fitted with the Loop option, this symbol appears during the Autotune
process.
Breaks in recording
Breaks in recording can be caused by the unit being powered down, by the user
entering configuration mode or when the recorder time is changed manually. In
vertical and horizontal trend modes, a line is drawn across the width/height of the
chart to indicate that recording has been interrupted.
On power up, a red line is drawn across the chart. In ‘History’, if messages are
enabled the message:
Date Time System power up
is printed on the chart, together with the configuration and security revisions.
On exiting configuration mode, a blue line is drawn on the chart and in ‘History’, if
messages are enabled, the messages:
Date Time Logged out.
Date Time Config Revision: N was N-1 assuming a configuration change was made)
Date Time Logged in as: Engineer
appear on the chart.
When the instrument time is changed (manually - not through daylight saving action)
a green line is drawn on the chart and in ‘History’, if messages are enabled, the
message:
Date Time Time/Date changed
appears on the chart.
Top Level Menu

This menu appears when the page key is operated from any non-configuration page.
The menu items displayed depend on the access permission of the user. One of the
menu items is highlighted, and if the scroll key is operated, then it is the highlighted
item that is ‘entered’.
"Home" on page 41 Home

"Configuration" on page 42 Configuration/User
Page key
"Go to View" on page 43 Go to View
"History" on page 46 History
"Faceplate Cycling on/off" on page 46 Faceplate cycling (On) Scroll key
"Operator Notes" on page 46 Operator Notes
"Demand Archiving" on page 46 Demand Archiving
"Login" on page 49 Log out
Figure 11 Top level menu
Home
Operating the scroll key whilst ‘Home’ is highlighted causes a return to the ‘Home’
page. By default, this is the vertical trend mode, but the mode can be changed in
‘Instrument.Display’ configuration ("Display configuration" on page 94).
HA030554 Issue 16 41
Configuration
Operating the down arrow key highlights the ‘Configuration’ item. Operating the Scroll
key enters the configuration submenu described in "Configuration".
Note: ‘Configuration’ appears only if the user has an appropriate access level.
Note: If the Auditor feature is enabled, additional user accounts are available. If one
of these users are logged in, the ‘Configuration’ menu option is replaced by the ‘User’
menu option instead (see "User menu" on page 42).
User menu
If the Auditor feature is enabled, up to 25 additional user accounts are available with
configurable access permissions and each requiring a configured password.
If one of these users are logged in, the ‘Configuration’ menu option is replaced by a
‘User’ menu option which provides the ability for the user to change their password
and set the Archive Interval (if the user has appropriate permissions).
Operating the scroll key whilst the ‘User’ item is highlighted, displays the individual
user account menu, as shown in the following figure. The menu title matches that of
the username used to log in.
User account 12
Password **********
Archive Rate None
Figure 12 User menu

Password Allows the user to change their password (up to a maxi-
mum of 20 characters). The minimum password length can
be configured using the Min Password Len parameter in
the Security menu (see "Security menu" on page 98).
Archive Rate Allows the user to specify the frequency at which the con-
tents of the flash memory are archived to the USB port, or
via FTP, to a PC. Scrollable settings are:
None: Automatic archiving is disabled. Any archiving must be in-
itiated by the user using Demand Archiving.
Minute: Archive is initiated on the minute, every minute.
Hourly: Archive is initiated at 00:00 each day.
Weekly: Archive is initiated at midnight every Sunday.
Monthly: Archive is initiated at 00:00 on the 1st of every month.
Automatic. The recorder selects the least frequent of the above archive periods
which is guaranteed not to lose data as a result of the in-
ternal flash memory running out of space.
This field is editable if the logged in user has appropriate permissions to adjust
the archive interval (see "User Accounts (Auditor)" on page 107). For further
information on archiving, refer to "Archiving" on page 111.
42 HA030554 Issue 16
Go to View
Operating the scroll key whilst the ‘Go to view’ item is highlighted, calls the Go to
view submenu (Figure 13). This allows the user to view channel alarms, system
alarms, messages or to select a different display mode.
Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary
System Alarms System Alarms
Message Summary Message Summary
Vertical Trend Mode Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend Horizontal Trend
Mode Vertical Bargraph
Vertical Bargraph Horizontal Bargraph
Mode Numeric
Alarm Panel Mode Alarm Panel
Control Loop1/Loop2 Control
Dual Loop Control (Dual Loop)

Cascade Display Mode Cascade
Programmer Display Mode Programmer
Figure 13 Go to view submenu

Note: If an option (e.g. ‘Steriliser’) is not fitted, its display mode does not appear in
the list.
Note: Some display modes must be enabled in Instrument.View configuration

("Display configuration" on page 94) before they become available.
Alarm Summary
For each active alarm, this page displays the channel identifier with alarm number
(e.g. C1(2) = channel 1; alarm 2), the channel descriptor, the alarm threshold the
current process value and an alarm type symbol. To return to the top level menu,
operate the Page key.
Note: The background colour to the channel ID is the same as that chosen for the
channel.
Note: A prefix ‘C’ in the channel ID means that this is a measuring channel; A prefix
‘V’ means that this is a virtual channel (i.e. a totaliser, counter or maths channel.
Alarm Threshold
Channel descriptor Channel current process value
Alarm Summary Alarm Type indicator

Channel ID C1(2) Furnace 1 temp 1 750.00 798.39
(Alarm number) C2(1) Furnace 1 temp 3 750.00 763.89
Page key
C3(1) Furnace 1 temp 2 590.00 603.39
C4(1) Furnace 2 temp 1 645.00 630.71
Scroll key
Figure 14 Alarm summary page with acknowledge confirmation display
HA030554 Issue 16 43
Alarm Acknowledgement
To acknowledge an alarm from this
Alarm Summary
view:
C1(2) Furnace 1 temp 1 750.00 763.26
1. Use the up and down arrows to C2(1) Furnace 1 temp3 750.00 770.01
C3(1) Furnace 1 temp2 590.00 595.83
highlight the required alarm.
C4(1) Furnace 2 temp1 645.00 644.33
2. Operate the scroll button. The
‘Acknowledge alarm’ window
Acknowledge alarm?
appears.
No C2(1) All
3. Use the up arrow to highlight the
relevant field (C2(1) in this
example), or ‘All’ if all alarms are
Acknowledge alarm?
to be acknowledged.
No C2(1) All
4. Operate the scroll key to
confirm. If the alarm fails to
respond, this may be due to the
fact that it has been configured
as a ‘Manual’ alarm, and the trigger has not yet returned to a ‘safe’ (non-alarm)
state, or it could be that the instrument is in a logged out state.
System Alarms
Operating the scroll button whilst the ‘System Alarms’ field is highlighted displays a
list of all currently active system alarms. "Status Bar Icons" on page 38 contains a list
of system alarms and their interpretations. To return to the top level menu, operate
the Page key.
A further operation of the scroll button displays a ‘Help Information’ page, giving the
reason for the highlighted alarm. Operate the scroll button again to return to the
system alarm display.
Message Summary
Operating the scroll key whilst the ‘Message summary’ field is highlighted displays
the ten most recent
messages. Operating the scroll key whilst a message is highlighted shows the
selected message in more detail (and using the up/down keys allows the other
messages to be scrolled through). Whilst in this mode, operating the scroll key again,
allows the user to choose to jump to the message’s location in trend history mode
("Trend History" on page 87) or to return to the summary page.
By default, the interface is set up such that:
1. all message types are included.
2. the up and down arrow keys cause the highlighted selection to move up or down
by one message at a time.
44 HA030554 Issue 16
Message Summary (All Messages) 9/47 20/11/09 08:05:22

20/11/09 08:06:37 Inactive: Ch1(Al1)
Battery flat less than 5% remaining
20/11/09 08:06:29 Active: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:22 Active: Ch1(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:19 Inactive: Ch2(Al2) Go to?
20/11/09 08:06:18 Inactive: Ch1(Al2)
Summary History
20/11/09 08:06:09 Inactive: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:06:01 Active: Ch1(Al2)
20/11/09 08:05:59 Active: Ch2(Al1)
20/11/09 08:05:22 Battery flat less than
To Trend History display ("Trend

History" on page 87)
Use scroll button to scroll through ‘All Messages’,

‘System’, ‘Alarm’ and ‘Power Up’. Use page button to
confirm selection.
All Messages
Refresh Use scroll button to return to refreshed Message

Summary page.
Exit Messages
Use the scroll or page button to return to the top level

menu.
Figure 15 Message summary features

MESSAGE FILTERS
All Messages Causes all messages to be displayed on the screen.
System Shows only system alarms.
Alarm Shows only channel alarms.
Power up Shows only power up messages.
Login/out Limits the display to Log in and Log out events.
Display Mode Selection

Alarm Summary
Use the up/down arrow buttons to highlight the
System Alarms
required display mode. Once the required
display mode is highlighted, operation of the Message Summary
scroll button causes the recorder to leave the Vertical Trend
‘Go to View’ menu and to display channel Horizontal Trend

values in the selected mode. See "Display Vertical Bargraph
Modes" on page 52 for a description of the Horizontal Bargraph
various display modes. Numeric
Alternatively the up and down arrow buttons can

Alarm Panel
be used from any of the display modes to cycle
through the available modes in the order listed Control
in the figure. Control (Dual Loop)
Cascade
Note: If an option (e.g. ‘Steriliser’) is not fitted,
its display mode is not available for selection.
Note: Some display modes must be enabled

in Instrument. Display configuration ("Display configuration" on page 94) before they
become available.
HA030554 Issue 16 45
History
This top level menu item allows the user to switch from real-time trending to review
mode, where channel values, messages, alarm triggers, etc. can be viewed back as
far as the last significant configuration change. History mode is fully discussed in
"Trend History" on page 87.
Faceplate Cycling on/off

For the purposes of this document the channel whose faceplate is currently displayed
and whose ‘pen’ symbol is visible is called the ‘Active’ channel. By default, the
recorder scrolls through all the channels in the display group, with each channel
becoming the active channel in turn. This top level menu ‘Faceplate Cycling’ item
allows the user to inhibit this scrolling action such that the currently active channel
remains active permanently, or until a manual scroll is performed using the scroll
button (or until Faceplate Cycling is re-enabled).
‘Faceplate Cycling’ is highlighted by using the up/down arrow buttons. Once

highlighted, the status can be changed from ‘On’ to ‘Off’ or vice-versa using the scroll
button. Operation of the ‘Page’ button returns to the trend display.
Operator Notes
This area allows up to 10 notes to be created when logged in as Engineer, using
either the text entry techniques described in "Text Entry" on page 89, or "iTOOLS"
described in "iTOOLS". Once logged out, operating the scroll button whilst a note is
highlighted calls a selection box allowing the user either to send that note to the
chart, or to write a Custom Note.
Custom Note
The Custom Note is written using the text entry techniques described in "Text Entry"
on page 89. Once the note is complete, operation of the page button calls a
confirmation display. The down arrow is used to highlight ‘Yes’, and when the scroll
key is then operated, the message is sent to the chart. The user name is added to the
start of the custom note when saved. This custom note is not retained for further use,
so if it is required on a regular basis, it is suggested that one of the Operator Notes 1
to 10 be configured (Engineer access level required) so that it may be used instead.
Note: Note: Each note can contain up to 100 characters.
Demand Archiving
This allows a user, with a high enough access level, to archive a selected portion of
the recorder history, either to a ‘memory stick’ plugged into the USB port at the rear of
the recorder (Local Archiving), or to a PC, by means of the FTP protocol (Remote
Archiving). The archived data remains in the flash memory of the instrument. When
the flash memory is full, new data causes the oldest file(s) to be discarded.
The up and down arrow keys are used to navigate to the required field.
46 HA030554 Issue 16
Archive Menu
Demand Archiving Demand Archiving
Archive To USB Archive To FTP Server

Archive None Archive None
Suspend Schedule No Cancel All No
Cancel All No Pri Status Complete
Status Complete Sec Status Connecting
Last Archive 02/11/2011 11:37:09 Last Archive 02/11/2011 11:37:09
Figure 16 Demand Archiving menu (Local Archiving on left; Remote Archiving on right)
Archive To With this item highlighted, the scroll button and the
up/down arrows can be used to select ‘USB’ or ‘FTP Serv-
er’. For ‘USB’, the archive will be made to the rear USB
memory stick. For ‘FTP Server’ the archive will be made to
the Primary or Secondary server (configured in the Net-
work.Ar-chive area of configuration described in "Archiv-
ing" on page 111. For more details about remote ar-
chiving, see ‘Remote archiving’, below.
Archive In a similar way, select the archive period:
None: No archiving to take place. (Not editable when
logged out).
Last Hour: Archives all files created within the last 60 min-
utes.
Last Day: Archive all files created in the last 24 hours.
Last Week: Archives all files created in the past seven
days.
Last Month: Archives all files created in the past 31 days.
Archive All: Archives all the files in the recorder’s history.
Bring To Date: Archives all files created or updated since
the ‘Last Archive’ date and time.
Suspend Schedule When set to ‘Yes’, automatic (scheduled) archiving is
stopped, once the transfer of the current file is complete.
Suspend Schedule must be set to ‘No’ again, to restart the
suspended archive. Suspend can be used to allow the
memory stick to be removed and re-fitted safely.
Cancel All When set to ‘Yes’, this cancels USB archiving activity im-
mediately, or cancels FTP archiving once transfer of the
current file (if any) is complete.
Last Archive Shows the date and time at which the last archive (demand
or automatic) was attempted. If a demand archive is re-
quested, or is in operation when an automatic archive is
triggered, the automatic archive takes precedence.
Status For Archive to USB only: ‘Complete’ means that no archiv-
ing is currently taking place. ‘Transferring’ indicates that an
archiving is in progress. Accompanied by an animated cir-
cular display. ‘Suspended’ means that archiving has been
suspended as requested.
PriStatus For Archive to FTP Server only, this shows the transfer
status between the instrument and the primary host com-
puter.
SecStatus For Archive to FTP Server only, this shows the transfer
status between the instrument and the secondary host
computer.
HA030554 Issue 16 47
FTP Server Archiving

This allows the archiving of recorder files to a remote computer via the RJ45 type
connector at the rear of the recorder, either directly or via a network. In order to carry
out a successful transfer:
1. Details of the remote host must be entered in the Network.Archive area of

configuration ("Archiving" on page 111).
2. The remote computer must be set up as an FTP server. Help from the user’s IT
department may be necessary in order to achieve this. Appendix C, "Setting Up
An FTP Server Using Filezilla" on page 431 to this manual suggests one way,
using Filezilla.
3. The remote computer must also be set up to respond to ‘pings’. This is because
the instrument pings the host whilst establishing connection, and if it does not
receive a response the archive attempt fails.
When accessing files using Microsoft® Internet Explorer, the address (URL) field can
be in one of two formats:
1. ftp://<instrument IP address>. This allows a user to log in as the anonymous user

(if the recorder has any account with the user name set to ‘anonymous’ with a
blank password.
2. ftp://<user name>:<password>@<instrument IP address> to log in as a specific

user.
Microsoft® Internet Explorer displays, by default, history files only. To quit the history
folder, either uncheck the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/’Enable folder
view for FTP sites’ option, or check the Tools/Internet
Options/Advanced/Browsing/’Use Web based FTP’ option.
Review Software
‘Review’ is a proprietary software package which allows the user to extract ‘archive’
data from one or more suitable instruments* and to present this data on a host
computer, as if on a chart, or as a spreadsheet. The host computer must be set up as
an FTP server (see Appendix C, "Setting Up An FTP Server Using Filezilla" on
page 431 for a description of one way of doing this).
As described in the Review help system, ‘Review’ allows the user to set up a regular
transfer of data (using FTP) from connected instruments into a database on the PC,
and then from this database to the chart or spreadsheet. The chart/spreadsheet can
be configured to include one or more ‘points’ from one or all connected instruments
(where a ‘point’ is an umbrella term for channel, totaliser, counter etc.).
It is also possible to archive instrument history files to a memory stick, Compact

Flash card etc. (depending on instrument type) and to use this to transfer the data to
the PC.
Each type of instrument has its own remote user name and password configuration.
*Suitable instruments are connected instruments, the archive files of which have the
suffix ‘.uhh’.
48 HA030554 Issue 16
Login
Login allows the user to enter a password in order to gain access to areas of the
unit’s configuration which are not available when the user is logged out.
Passwords are required for the additional 25 user accounts, when the Auditor feature
is enabled. Failed login attempts are recorded in the history. It is recommended that a
strong password, that is difficult to guess is used. Failed login attempts are recorded
in the history.
Note: User accounts of any access level require a password, otherwise they will not
be available for selection.
Logged Out Access Level

Logged out mode allows the user to select viewing mode, to view history, to view
alarms, to toggle faceplate cycling on and off, to send notes, to suspend/resume USB
archiving and to access the login process.
Operator Access Level

In addition to the logged out features, Operator access level allows the user to
acknowledge alarms, to edit notes and to perform demand archive operations.
By default, a password is required to enter Operator level. Passwords can be

configured either at Supervisor level or at Engineer level.
If the Auditor feature is enabled, the Operator user is disabled and instead replaced
by the 25 User accounts (see section User Access Level below).
Note: The User 1 account defaults to a user with a user name of “Operator” in this
instance (with no additional permissions), which can be kept, disabled, modified or
overridden if necessary or desired.
Supervisor Access Level

In addition to the logged out level function, this access level allows the user to view
the recorder’s configuration, and to edit some values (such as alarm thresholds). The
password for the Supervisor level must be configured, if the access level is to be
used (and can be changed) in the Instrument area of configuration, either at
Supervisor or Engineer access level, see Security menu (page 98). It is
recommended that a strong password be used.
When the Auditor feature is enabled, it is regarded as best practise that the
Supervisor level is not used at all. This can be enforced by disabling the Supervisor
level altogether (refer to the ‘Sup Log Disabled’ parameter in Security menu
(page 98). With the Supervisor access level disabled, only the Engineer level can
view (and change) the instrument’s configuration.
HA030554 Issue 16 49
Engineer Access Level

This allows full access to all areas of the recorder configuration. The Engineer
password must be configured at initial start see Introduction - Initial Setup (page 33)
and can be changed in the Instrument area of configuration by the existing Engineer
access level user, see Security menu (page 98). It is recommended that a strong
password be used.
Note: Recording is stopped for as long as the user is

logged in at Engineer level, even if the recorder is not Record icon
being configured. This is indicated by the Record icon at
Configuration
the bottom left corner of the process value display screen icon
being replaced by the Configuration (wrench) icon.
If the Auditor feature is enabled, it is recommended to only use the Engineering level
within the context of a formal change control procedure.
User Access Level

If the Auditor feature is enabled, an additional 25 user accounts are available which
can be configured to provide customisable levels of permission on a per-account
basis. When this is done, the standard Operator Access Level is disabled, and the
Logged Out user has no permissions. When logging in as one of these 25 user
accounts, the account number (1 to 25) is prefixed to the user name. Refer to "User
Accounts (Auditor)" on page 107 for details on how to configure these user accounts
and the permissions available to be assigned to each. Failed login attempts are
written to the history, as is the user being disabled if a maximum number of failed
login attempts is exceeded.
50 HA030554 Issue 16
Login Procedure
From the top level menu, use the up or down arrow keys as often as necessary in
order to highlight ‘Login’, and then operate the Scroll key to produce the ‘Access
Logged out’ display.
Note: This procedure describes how to login to an access level with a password - all
access levels (user accounts) require a password, otherwise they will not be
available for selection.
Access Logged out

Password
Access <User>
Access Operator
Access Supervisor
Access Engineer
Access Engineer Password
* If the Auditor feature is enabled, the Accept changes

Operator user is not displayed. If the Cancel No Yes
Auditor feature is not enabled, the
<User> user is not displayed.
Figure 17 Log in Menu

To Log in as Engineer
Note: Use the Engineer password configured at initial set up, see Introduction -
Initial Setup (page 33) for further details.
1. From the Log in panel, press the up arrow key and select Engineer.
2. Press the scroll key twice.
The ‘alpha’ keyboard, with the letter ‘q’ highlighted appears.
3. Enter the Engineer password configured at Initial Setup, using the raise and
lower buttons which, in turn will move the highlighted key, press the scroll button
to enter each selected character.
4. Press the Page button, once you have completed typing the Engineer password.
The Accept changes? panel will appear with the following options:
• Cancel - cancels the panel and returns to the keyboard
• No - cancels the panel and returns to the Engineer password configuration

screen
• Yes - enters the password
5. Select Yes to enter the password.

Use the raise button twice (or the lower button once) to highlight the word ‘Yes’
and press the scroll key to confirm.
The configuration menu appears. (See Configuration (page 91) for further
details).
HA030554 Issue 16 51
Display Modes
The following subsections describe the various display modes available to the user.
By default, the ‘Home’ display mode is ‘Vertical Trend’, but this can be edited as a
part of ‘Instrument.Display’ configuration ("Display configuration" on page 94). This
configuration area also allows the user to disable one or more display modes should
they not be required.
The current display mode can be chosen either by using the top level menu ‘Go to
View’ item or, from any display mode, by scrolling through the enabled modes using
the up or down arrow buttons.
Details of the various display modes are to be found in the following subsections:
Vertical trend"Vertical Trend Mode" on page 52
Horizontal trend"Horizontal Trend Mode" on page 53
Vertical bargraph"Vertical Bargraph Mode" on page 54
Horizontal bargraph"Horizontal Bargraph Mode" on page 54
Numeric "Numeric Mode" on page 55
Alarm panel"Alarm Panel Mode" on page 56
Control loop 1/2"Control Loop1/Loop2" on page 57
Cascade "Cascade Display Mode" on page 58
Programmer (inc. future trend)"Programmer Display Mode" on page 59
Steriliser "Steriliser Display Mode" on page 70
Batch "Batch Summary" on page 75
Promote list"Promote list" on page 77
Modbus Master"Modbus Master display mode" on page 78
EtherNet/IP"EtherNet/IP display mode" on page 80
Vertical Trend Mode

In this mode, channel values are traced as though on a chart rolling downwards (i.e
with the latest data at the top). The chart speed, and the number of major divisions
are configured in the ‘Group.Trend’ area of configuration ("Group Trend
configuration" on page 117). By default, the chart background is black, but this can
be changed to white or grey in the ‘Instrument’ ‘Display’ area of configuration
("Display configuration" on page 94).
52 HA030554 Issue 16
Faceplate
Current point name Channel 1 6.23V Current point value

Current point scale
Current trace ‘pen’
Time/date stamp
12:01:08
Recording symbol Inst name Current time/date
Instrument name Status icons
Figure 18 Vertical trend mode display elements

One of the channels is said to be the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel. This channel is
identified by its pen icon being displayed, and by the channel descriptor, dynamic
value and its scale being displayed on a ‘faceplate’ across the width of the display,
above the chart.
Each channel in the Group becomes the ‘current’ channel in turn, for approximately
five seconds -i.e. the channels are cycled through, starting with the lowest numbered
channel. Once the final channel in the Group has been displayed for five seconds,
the first channel is returned-to and the process repeats. This scrolling behaviour can
be enabled/disabled from the top level menu ‘Faceplate Cycling (Off)’ item described
in "Faceplate Cycling on/off" on page 46.
The scroll button can be used to cycle through the channels manually in both
Faceplate cycle on and off modes. Use of the up arrow button causes the next
enabled display mode to be entered (default = horizontal trend). The page key calls
the top level menu.
Horizontal Trend Mode

This view is similar to the vertical trend mode described in "Vertical Trend Mode" on
page 52 above, except that the traces are produced horizontally rather than vertically.
Initially, as each channel appears, its scale appears at the left edge of the display (as
shown below), but in order to show the maximum amount of trend data, the scale is
overwritten after a few seconds.
Channel 1 6.23V
By default, after a few seconds, the ‘chart’

expands leftwards to hide the scale. This
feature can be disabled in the
Instrument.Display area of configuration
("Display configuration" on page 94,
H.Trend scaling) so that the scale is
permanently on display.
Inst name
Figure 19 Horizontal trend display mode
HA030554 Issue 16 53
Note: Timestamps appear to the right of the gridline to which they relate.
Use of the up arrow button causes the next enabled display mode to be entered
(default = vertical bargraph). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
Vertical Bargraph Mode

This display mode shows the channel values as a histogram. Absolute alarm
threshold values appear as lines across the bars, grey if the alarm is not triggered;
red if the alarm is triggered. Alarm symbols appear for active alarms.
Bargraph widths for four to six channels divide the width of the display screen equally
between them. For one and two channels, the width is fixed, and the bars are centred
on the screen. Figure 19 shows some examples (not to the same scale).
Channel 1 6.23V
Full scale value
Active alarm symbol 2 channels
Alarm threshold (active)
Alarm threshold (non-active)
1 channel
‘Zero’ value
Inst name
Figure 20 Vertical bargraph display mode

(default = horizontal bargraph). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
Horizontal Bargraph Mode

Similar to the Vertical bargraph mode described in "Vertical Bargraph Mode" on
page 54, above, but includes channel descriptors.
The scroll button toggles the text between point descriptor (as shown) and point
value.
Furnace 1 temp 12
Furnace 1 temp 12
2 channels
Channel 2 Channel 2
The scroll button toggles
the text between point Channel 3
descriptor (as shown) and
point value.
Channel 4
VirtualChan 1 1 channel
VirtualChan 2
Inst name
Figure 21 Horizontal bargraph mode

(default = numeric). Use of the page key calls the top level menu.
54 HA030554 Issue 16
Numeric Mode
Shows the enabled channels’ values along with their descriptors and with indications
of the type(s) of alarm configured for each channel.
Alarm type indication
(see Figure 10)
Alarm type indication

Furnace 1 temp 12
(see Figure 10)
Channel 2 VirtualChan 1
Channel 3
VirtualChan 2
Figure 22 Numeric display mode (six enabled channels)

The figure above shows an example where the Trend group contains six channels.
Figure 23 shows how the display appears for trend groups with fewer than six
channels configured.
6 channels 5 channels 4 channels
2 channels 1 channels
3 channels
Figure 23 Display layout for different numbers of channels

The up arrow button returns to the vertical trend display mode; the page key calls the
top level menu.
HA030554 Issue 16 55
Alarm Panel Mode

This display appears only if enabled in the Instrument Display configuration ("Display
configuration" on page 94). Alarm panel mode shows current value and alarm status
for each channel enabled in the Trend Group. The status is shown in two ways, by
the colour of the relevant bar, and by the alarm status indicators.
Alarm type indication (Figure 10)
Red bar
Alarm 2 is active, or alarm 1 and
alarm 2 are both active.
Amber bar
Alarm 1 is active for this channel,
but not alarm 2.
Green bar
Neither alarm 1 nor alarm two
active for this channel.
Inst name
Figure 24 Alarm panel display (six channels)

The figure above shows an example where the Trend group contains six channels.
Figure 25 shows how the display appears for trend groups with fewer than six
channels configured.
6 channels 5 channels 4 channels
2 channels 1 channels
3 channels
Figure 25 Alarm panel display layouts for trend groups with fewer than six channels
56 HA030554 Issue 16
Control Loop1/Loop2
These displays appear only if the controller option is enabled ("Security menu" on
page 98).
The loop display modes are interactive, in that the setpoint, the Auto/Manual mode
and the Manual Output value can be edited from the user interface. Full configuration
is carried out in the Loop setup menus ("Loop Option Configuration" on page 142)
and a fuller description of control loops is to be found in "Appendix B: Control Loops"
to this manual.
Figure 26 depicts a single loop display and the dual loop display. The up and down
arrow keys are used as normal to scroll through Loop1, Loop2 and Dual loop pages.
Loop 1 Loop 1
°C SP1
Mode Manual PV
PV Man Op WSP
WSP
Working Output Loop 2
SP SP1
SP1 Mode Manual PV
Manual Man Op WSP
Mode
PV WSP Man Op
Inst name Inst name
Figure 26 Loop displays

Note: The colours associated with the loops are those of the channels to which they
are wired.
Editing Techniques
1. With the loop page on display, operate the Scroll SP1
key. This highlights the first editable item (SP1). Mode Manual
Man Op
The scroll order includes both loop1 and loop 2
parameters in the dual loop display.
SP1
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to select the
Mode Manual
required field for editing. When the required field is Man Op
highlighted, operate the scroll key again, to enter
edit mode.
SP1
3. Use the up/down arrows to edit the current setting. Mode Manual
Man Op
4. Operate the scroll key to confirm the edit.
5. Select a further parameter for editing, or operate SP1

the page key to return to normal operation. Mode Manual
Man Op
SP1
Mode Manual
Note: Edit permissions for Setpoint, Auto/Manual Man Op
and Manual Output Access are set in the Loop Setup
configuration menu ("Setup menu parameters" on
page 144). If the Auditor feature is enabled, user account permissions are set using
the User accounts menu ("User Accounts (Auditor)" on page 107).
HA030554 Issue 16 57
Cascade Display Mode

This display mode appears only if ‘Cascade’ has been enabled in the
Instrument.Display area of configuration "Display configuration" on page 94). See
also Advanced Loop configuration ("Advanced Loop Configuration" on page 152).
Master
Mode Cascade
SP1 PV
WSP
Slave
SP1
Mode PV
WSP
Inst name
Figure 27 Cascade display mode

Figure 27 Single channel
Operating the scroll button highlights the Master ‘Mode’ field. Operating the scroll
button again, enters edit mode allowing the user to use the up/down arrow buttons to
scroll through the available modes. Once the required mode appears, a further
operation of the scroll button confirms the entry and quits edit mode.
Once out of edit mode, the down arrow key can be used to select Master ‘SP1’, Slave
‘SP’ and Slave ‘Man OP’. The Mode selected determines how many of these items
are editable by the operator.
Mode Cascade: The master loop is in auto mode and provides
the slave setpoint. Changing modes causes the slave to
switch to the local slave setpoint.
Slave: A simple single loop controlling with a local setpoint.
Manual: Provides a single manual percentage power out-
put.
SP1 Setpoint 1 is the primary setpoint of the controller. If the
controller is in automatic control mode, then the difference
between the setpoint and the process variable (PV) is con-
tinuously monitored by the control algorithm. The differ-
ence between the two is used to produce an output
calculated to bring the PV to the setpoint as quickly as pos-
sible without causing overshoot.
SP The slave setpoint, either local (Manual or Slave mode) in
which case it can be edited, or supplied by the master loop
(Cascade mode), in which case it is not editable.
Man.OP The percentage output power to be applied when in Man-
ual mode (100% = full on; 0% = off).
Note: Note: The default loop names (‘Master’ and ‘Slave’) can be replaced by
user-entered strings of up to 10 characters in Advanced Loop Setup configuration
("Advanced Loop Setup menu" on page 154).
58 HA030554 Issue 16
Programmer Display Mode
Program status Program edit
Program Name (Segment name) Program Name (Segment name)
PV PV PV
Ramp WSP WSP WSP
Events Status: Running Events

Mode Run Status: Running Mode Run Seg Time Left 00:01:06
Ch1 PSP 123.2 Seg Time Left 00:00:44 Ch1 PSP 123.2 Ch1 PSP 12.7
Ch1 TSP 140.0 Ch1 Rate 1 Ch1 TSP 140.0 Ch1 TSP 13.0
00:00:30 00:02:12 00:01:30 00:03:12
Program Figure 27 Double channel

Segment Program time
progress progress remaining
Figure 28 Programmer displays (typical)

This display mode (if enabled - see "Display configuration" on page 94) allows the
user to monitor the progress of a single or dual-channel setpoint program, and if
logged-in as ‘Operator*’, to reset or run the program. The program itself is created in
the Program edit page (described below) and in Programmer configuration
("Programmer Configuration" on page 171 or "iTOOLS").
Note: *Operator is the default access level - to edit, see ‘Prog Mode Access’ in
"Programmer Setup menu" on page 175).
The displays contain the following features:

Program name This is the name of the loaded program. If the program has
been modified since being saved, an asterisk (*) appears
after the name. Default background colour shown. This
colour changes to that assigned to the input channel when
this is configured.
Segment name This is the name of the current segment. If not named in
Segment configuration, then the segment number appears
instead.
Program status At the top right hand corner of the display, this can be any
one of the following:
The program is running (or ran last time) without any
PV ‘Alarm’ events or user intervention.
The user has intervened in the running of the program,
by placing it in ‘hold’ or ‘reset’, or by advancing a segment,
or by adjusting a duration, target setpoint, ramp rate or
time-to-target value.
A PV ‘Alarm’ Event has activated. A PV ‘Alarm’ Event
is an absolute high/low or a deviation alarm on the PV in-
put.
There is no program loaded, or if a program is loaded,
it has not yet run.
Program edit This icon appears for users with appropriate access
permissions, to indicate that setpoint programs can be
configured (as described in Program edit, below).
Segment type For single channel displays, this indicates the type of seg-
ment currently being run:
Dwell. The segment value remains constant for the du-
HA030554 Issue 16 59
ration of the dwell period.

End (dwell). Displayed on completion of the program.
The segment value remains at the final value until reset.
End (reset). Displayed on completion of the program.
The program resets.
Ramp. The segment value ramps at a fixed rate or over
a fixed period to the Target setpoint. Ramp up icon shown;
ramp down is similar but inverted.
Step. The segment value switches immediately to the
new Target setpoint. Step down shown; step up similar but
inverted.
Wait. The segment value remains constant until the
wait criteria are satisfied.
PV The current process value of the signal wired to Ch1(2) PV
Input. C
h1(2)PSP This is the output setpoint from the programmer for the
channel. In reset this value tracks the configured servo pa-
rameter.
Ch1(2)TSP The channel target setpoint. The target setpoint may be
edited while the program is in hold (in such cases, for ramp
rate segments the time remaining is recalculated.
Events Up to eight events can be configured in the Program Edit
page. Any one or more of these events may be deemed to
be active for the duration of each individual segment.
Mode Shows the current run mode of the program. If the user has
the correct access level, the mode can be set to ‘hold’, re-
set’ etc. by using the scroll key twice (first to highlight the
run mode, then again to enter edit mode) and then using
the up/down arrow keys to select the required mode. Run,
reset, hold etc. can also be selected by inputs from other
parameters, switch inputs etc.
Status Shows the status of the current segment.
Ch1 Rate The channel 1 rate-of-change of segment value for ‘Rate’
ramp segments.
Ch1 Time Shows the channel 1 duration configured for the segment
to ramp, dwell etc. for ‘Time’ ramp segments. For
two-channel programs, see the note below.
Seg Time Left Shows the time that the segment has to run before com-
pletion.
Program progress The numerals show program elapsed time, and the bar
gives an indication of progress so far. For two-channel pro-
grams, see the note below.
Segment progress For each segment as it runs, this gives a visual indication
of the proportion of total segment time which has elapsed
so far. For two-channel programs, see the note below.
Program time remaining
Shows the time remaining until the program completes.
For two-channel programs, see the note below.
Note: Note: For two-channel programs, in ‘Hold’ mode, the ‘program progress’,
‘segment progress’ and ‘program time remaining’ areas of the display are replaced
by ‘Ch1 Time’ and ‘Ch2 Time’, as shown below.
60 HA030554 Issue 16
Program Name (Segment name)
PV PV
PSP PSP
Status: Holding Events
Mode Hold Seg Time Left 00:01:05

Ch1 PSP 123.2 Ch2 PSP 12.7
Ch1 TSP 140.0 Ch2 TSP 13.0
Ch1 Time 00:00:34 Ch2 Time 00:00:49
Figure 29 Two channel program in Hold mode
Program Run/Reset/Hold
Programs can be controlled by users with the correct access level (defined in
Programmer configuration - "User Values" on page 225). The display page is placed
in edit mode by operation of the scroll key (‘Mode’ highlights). A second operation of
the scroll key followed by operation of the up/down arrows allows the user to select
‘Run’, ‘Hold’ or ‘Reset’. A further operation of the scroll key initiates the selected
action.
Program Name
Reset Reset
14.3 15.7
PV
Ramp PSP ‘Hold’ appears only Reset
if the program
18.9
Mode Reset Status: Reset

Ch1 PSP 14.3
Reset
17.3
Figure 30 Setting the Mode

NOTES:
1. These functions can also be carried out by wiring relevant inputs to the ‘Run’,
‘Hold’ or ‘Reset’ parameters in Programmer configuration ("User Values" on
page 225).
2. The user must have either ‘Logged off’, ‘Operator’ or ‘Supervisor’ level access as
defined in ‘Prog Mode Access’ in the Programmer. Setup menu described in
"Programmer Setup menu" on page 175. Alternatively, if the Auditor feature is
enabled, a user with Program Mode permissions can also access the
Programmer Mode. The program cannot run if the unit is logged into at ‘Engineer’
level.
Program Editing
The program edit page is accessed by operating the scroll button once to highlight
the Mode, then using the up arrow key to highlight the page symbol at the top right
hand corner of the display and then the scroll button again to enter the program
editor.
HA030554 Issue 16 61
Program Name (Segment name)
Ramp
Events
By default, Program Edit is available only to users with
Mode Reset Status: Reset Supervisor or Engineer level access. The required
Ch1 PSP 14.3 access level can be edited in Programmer. Set Up
configuration as described in "Programmer Setup
menu" on page 175.
Program Edit
Operation Select ...
Program Name (Segment name) Status Success
Program Program Name
Holdback Style Program
Ramp Ch1 Holdback High
Ch1 Holdback Val 0.0 V

Events
Mode Reset Status: Reset Ch2 Holdback Off
Ch1 PSP 14.3
Ramp Style Time
Ch1 Ramp Units Per Second
Ch2 Ramp Units Per Minute
Segment Number 1
Segment Name Heat Init
Figure 31 Access to the program editor

As can be seen from the figure above, the initial Program Edit page is divided into
two areas - the top part contains program details; the lower part (Figure 33) contains
individual segment details. The editable items that appear in the program details area
depend on the features enabled in the Programmer Features configuration menu
("Programmer Features menu" on page 172).
Note: Access to some program operations is restricted to users with the correct
access level, as defined in the ‘Prog Mode Access’, the ‘Prog Edit Access’ and the
‘Prog Store Access’ parameters in the Programmer. Set Up area of configuration
described in "Programmer Setup menu" on page 175. Alternatively, if the Auditor
feature is enabled, individual users can be assigned access to the Program Mode,
Program Edit and Program Store functions. Access to some items also depends on
whether or not the program is running.
Program Details
Operation This allows the user to select one of the following (see also
‘Program Store’, below): Load. Opens the program store
and allows the user to select a program to be loaded. The
program must have the same number of channels as de-
fined in Programmer.Set Up ("Programmer Setup menu"
on page 175).
Store. Allows the current program to be saved to the inter-
nal program drive. This is useful if you wish to snapshot the
current program and store this under a different program
name.
Delete. Allows the selected program to be deleted.
62 HA030554 Issue 16
Delete All. Deletes all programs.

Copy. Copies the selected program for ‘pasting’ either
from the internal drive to the USB device, or vice-versa.
This is useful if you need to transfer a program to other
nanodac instruments.
Copy All. As above, for ‘Copy’, but copies all the programs
in the selected directory.
Note: If a ‘Store’, ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy All’ operation would result in there being a total of
more than 100 program files in the internal drive, the operation fails and an error
message is displayed.
Status Success. Previous operation was successful.
Failed. Previous operation failed.
Loading. The program is loading.
Copying. The program copy process is underway.
Deleting. The relevant program is being deleted.
Program The name of the program currently loaded.
Holdback Style Appears only if ‘Holdback’ is enabled in the Programmer
Features configuration ("Programmer Features menu" on
page 172). See also ‘Holdback’, below.
Program: Holdback applies to all appropriate segments.
Per Segment: Holdback enabled on a segment by seg-
ment basis as described in ‘Segment Configuration’ below.
Ch1 Holdback Appears only if ‘Holdback Style’ (above) is set to ‘Pro-
gram’.
Off: Holdback is disabled.
Low: Holdback is entered when PV < (PSP - Holdback Val-
ue).
High: Holdback is entered when PV > (PSP + Holdback
Value).
Band: Holdback is entered when PV < (PSP - Holdback
Value) or PV > (PSP + Holdback Value).
Ch1 Holdback value The value to be used in triggering holdback.
Ch2 Holdback As for Ch1 Holdback, above but for channel 2. Appears
only if ‘Channels’ is set to ‘2’ in Programmer Set Up con-
figuration ("Programmer Setup menu" on page 175).
Ch2 Holdback value As for ‘Ch1 Holdback value’, above, but for channel 2. Ap-
pears only if ‘Channels’ is set to ‘2’ in Programmer Set Up
configuration ("Programmer Setup menu" on page 175).
Ramp Style Ramp style applies to all ramp segments in the program.
Ramp Style can be edited only when the program is in Re-
set mode. Setpoints, rates, times etc. are set in the individ-
ual segment configurations.
Rate. A Ramp Rate segment is specified by a target
set-point and the rate at which to ascend/descend to that
set-point.
Time. A Ramp Time segment is specified by a target
set-point and a time in which to achieve that set-point.
Ch1 Ramp Units Select ‘Per Second’, ‘Per Minute’ or ‘Per Hour’ for ramp
timing units. Ramp Units can be edited only when the pro-
gram is in Reset mode.
Ch2 Ramp Units As for ‘Ch1 Ramp Units’ above. Appears only for two chan-
nel programs and allows different ramp units to be select-
ed for the two channels, if required. Ramp Units can be
edited only when the program is in Reset mode.
HA030554 Issue 16 63
Holdback
Holdback pauses the program (freezes the Programmer setpoint (PSP) and the time
remaining parameters) if the difference between the Process value (PV) and the PSP
exceeds a user-specified amount (Holdback value). The program remains paused
until the PV returns to within the specified deviation. In ramp or step segments,
holdback indicates that the PV is lagging the SP by more than the specified amount
and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up. In a dwell segment,
holdback is used to guarantee that a work piece stays at set-point within a specified
tolerance for the specified dwell duration.
Holdback applied
Holdback Holdback
applied released
PV
PSP
PSP-Holdback value Holdback released
Figure 32 Holdback
Segment Configuration
Program Edit
Segment Number 1
Segment Name Heat init
Type Ramp
Ch1TSP 43.358 °C
Ch1 Time 00:10:30
Ch1 Holdback High
Ch1 Holdback Val 5.0 °C

Ch1 PVEvent Abs High
Ch1 PVEvent Val 58 °C
Ch1 User Val 40.0
Ch2TSP 19.5 °C
Ch2 Time 00:01:00

Ch2 User val 33.00
Event 1
Event 2
Figure 33 Segment configuration

Segment Number Select the relevant segment for configuration.
Segment Name Enter a segment name of up to 20 characters. This name
will be truncated on the display page if it, together with the
program name, are too long to fit the width of the display
area.
Type Select a segment type. Default is ‘End’.
Ramp. For any program, Ramp segments can be either
‘Ramp Rate’ segments or ‘Ramp Time’ segments accord-
ing to the ‘Ramp Style’ setting described above. See also
64 HA030554 Issue 16
‘Ch1(2) Time’ or ‘Ch1(2) Rate’, below.

Dwell. The setpoint is maintained at its current value for
the period defined in ‘Duration’ (see below).
Step. A step segment allows a step change to be entered
for the target set-points Ch1 TSP and Ch2 TSP.
Wait. A wait segment causes the program to wait for a cer-
tain event to occur before continuing. See ‘Wait For’, be-
low.
Go Back. A Go Back segment allows a specifiable number
of iterations to be performed of a group of segments. This
could be used, for example, to cycle an entire program by
having a Go Back segment immediately before the end
segment and specifying segment 1 as the ‘Go Back To’
point. Setting ’Cycles’ to ‘Continuous’ causes the program
to loop indefinitely, until interrupted by the user. ‘Nested’
loops are not permitted i.e. ‘Go Back’ is not available as a
segment type for segments inside an existing GoBack
loop.
End. The final segment of a program allows the user to se-
lect ‘Dwell’ or ‘Reset’ as the action to be taken at the end
of the program (see ‘End Type’, below).
Ch1(2) TSP Target setpoint. The value that Ramp or Step segments
seek to attain, for channel 1(2).
Ch1(2) Rate For Ramp Rate segments, this specifies the speed at
which the process value ramps towards the target, for
Channel 1(2). The ramp units (per second, per minute, per
hour) are set in Ch1(2) ramp units described above.
Ch1(2) Time For Ramp Time segments, this allows the user to specify
the time to be taken by the segment for the process value
to reach the target.
Duration For Dwell segments, this allows the entry of the time for
which the segment dwells.
Go Back To For ‘Go Back’ segments, this defines the number of the
segment to which the program is to return.
Cycles The number of times the ‘Go Back’ instruction is to be car-
ried out. If set to ‘Continuous’, the program continues until
the user intervenes to stop it.
End Type Allows the user to select the action to be taken at the end
of the program:
Dwell: the set-point is maintained indefinitely and event
outputs remain at their configured state.
Reset: the set-point reverts to the value used by the control
loop before the program was started and the event outputs
return to their default states.
Wait For Digital High: Wait segments can be configured to wait for
‘Wait Digital’ to go ‘high’ before allowing the program to
continue.
Analog 1(2): The segment waits for ‘Wait Analog1(2) to
meet an Absolute High or Low, or Deviation High or Low
condition before allowing the program to continue.
Analog Both: As Analog 1(2) above, but waits for both
Channels’ conditions to be true before continuing.
Note: ‘Wait Digital’, Wait Analog 1’ and ‘Wait Analog 2’ parameters are configured in
the Programmer.Set Up menu described in "Programmer Setup menu" on page 175.
Ch1 Wait Select ‘Abs High’, ‘Abs Low’, ‘Dev High’ or ‘Dev Low’ as the
wait criterion for channel 1. Appears only if ‘Wait For’
(above) is set to ‘Analog 1’ or ‘Analog Both’.
Ch2 Wait Select ‘Abs High’, ‘Abs Low’, ‘Dev High’ or ‘Dev Low’ as the
wait criterion for channel 2. Appears only if ‘Wait For’
(above) is set to ‘Analog 2’ or ‘Analog Both’.
HA030554 Issue 16 65
Ch1(2) Wait Val Enter the trigger value for ‘Ch1(2) Wait’.
Ch1(2) Holdback Select ‘Off’, ‘Low’, High’, or ‘Band’ (see description in Pro-
gram Details, above).
Ch1(2) Holdback Val
The value to be used in triggering holdback.
Ch1(2) PV Event Appear only if ‘PV Events’ have been enabled in the Pro-
grammer Features menu ("Programmer Features menu"
on page 172). A PV Event (an analogue alarm on the
channel PV) is available for each channel in every seg-
ment (excluding Wait and Go Back segment types). The
following PV Events are supported:
Off: The PV Event is disabled.
Abs High: The event is triggered when the channel PV ex-
ceeds PVEvent Val for the relevant channel.
Abs Low: Triggered when the channel PV becomes less
than PVEvent Val for the relevant channel.
Dev High: This event is triggered when the channel PV ex-
ceeds (PSP + PVEvent Val) for the relevant channel.
Dev Low: Triggered when the channel PV becomes less
than (PSP - PVEvent Val) for the relevant channel.
Dev Band - This event is triggered when the channel PV
differs from the PSP by more than the configured deviation
value (either above or below).
In the following example, in segment 1 Ch1 PV Event has
been configured as Dev Band and in segment 2 it has
been configured as an Abs low:
Segment 1 Segment 2
PSP
PV
PVEvent Val
= PV Event Val Segment 1

= PV Event Val Segment 2
On
Off PV Event
Figure 34 PV Events
Ch1 PVEvent Val Appears only if ‘Ch1 PVEvent’ is not ‘Off’. Sets the level at
which Ch1 PV Event becomes active.
Ch2 PVEvent Val Appears only if ‘Ch2 PVEvent’ is not ‘Off’ and if ‘Channels’
is set to ‘2’ in Programmer Set Up configuration ("Program-
mer Setup menu" on page 175). Sets the level at which
Ch2 PV Event becomes active.
Ch1 (2) Event Use When PV events become active, they can be used either
to Trigger a secondary process or as a simple analogue
alarm on the PV input. Appears only if the relevant PV
Event parameter is not set to ‘Off’.
Ch1 (2) User Val Specifies the User Value for this segment, for
channel 1(2). Appears only if ‘User Value’ has been ena-
bled in the Programmer Features menu ("Programmer
Features menu" on page 172).
The example below (from iTools) shows this parameter
wired to the trigger 1 input of the Custom Messages block,
so that, if a User value >0 is entered, then every time the
segment runs, Custom message 1 is generated.
66 HA030554 Issue 16
Event 1 to 8 The number of Events available (Max Events) is defined in

Programmer Set Up configuration ("Programmer Setup
menu" on page 175). Enabling an event causes the rele-
vant indicator on the display page to be illuminated for the
duration of the segment. As with ‘User Val’, above, Events
can be wired to the inputs of other parameters if required.
Figure 35 iTools example showing Ch1 UserVal being used to trigger custom mes-
sage 1.
Future Trend Display Mode

If enabled in Instrument.Display configuration ("Display configuration" on page 94),
this allows the user to view the actual value of the PSP alongside the expected value,
so the two can be compared to see how the process is performing. Future trend is an
enhancement of the horizontal trend mode, with the display being divided into two
parts, with the instantaneous current value located at the divide, with past trends to
the left and the next few program segments to come, to the right.
NOTES:
1. For the future trend mode to appear, the programmer must be wired to the loop
or advanced loop feature.
2. Both historic and future trends move from right to left with the present anchored
at the screen centre.
3. The amount of history and of future trending displayed on the screen depends on
the trend interval set in Group.Trend configuration ("Group Trend configuration"
on page 117).
Figure 36 shows a typical future trend display.
HA030554 Issue 16 67
Present
Channel 1 26.23V
Past Future
Inst name
Figure 36 Future trend display
Program Store
Note: The access levels required for the operations described below are configured
in the Programmer Set Up menu ‘Prog Edit Access’ and ‘Prog Store Access’
parameters, described in "Programmer Setup menu" on page 175.
The program store allows access to the instrument’s local program storage area and
to programs stored on a USB memory stick (if any) and to those stored in a PC (if
any), via FTP. Programs may be saved to (Stored) or retrieved from (Loaded) from
the program store, or they can be copied or deleted. Selecting any of the program
operations (except ‘Delete All’), from the Program Edit page (Engineer access level
required) opens the file explorer page. "Program store display" on page 68 depicts
this page, with just a couple of example entries after a ‘Load’ operation has been
requested. On entry, use the up/down arrow button to select ‘User’, ‘USB’ or ‘FTP’
(selection highlights yellow), then use the scroll button to confirm. Use the up/down
arrow buttons to select the required file, and then use the scroll button again to
confirm. Other operations are similar.
The file explorer supports 100 entries, which may be directories or files.
User
Kiln1.UIPZ
Kiln1 type 2.uipz Symbol appears only if a Selected file
suitable USB device is highlighted
kiln2.uipz
furnace1 purge.uipz inserted
Figure 37 Program store display

Note: A ‘busy’ icon (rotating green flash) appears whilst directory listings are being
accessed.
68 HA030554 Issue 16
Program Load - Quick Access

From firmware version V5.00 and above a quick selection of an internally stored
program may be made directly from the Program Summary page. The programmer
must be in Reset. Press and hold the scroll key for two seconds. The page will go
immediately to the file explorer page with the ‘User’ drive selected and the
‘Operation’ parameter set to ‘Load’. The first program file will be selected (assuming
different programs have been configured). Use the Up/Down keys to select the
required program followed by the scroll key to load it.
If the selected file cannot be loaded (for example, the programmer file is for a
different number of channels) then an error message is shown on the file explorer.
The Quick Access to load mode adheres to the access security settings set in
configuration mode - Programmer set up ("Programmer Setup menu" on page 175).
Note: Quick load is disabled when in Edit mode. This is indicated by the highlighted
parameter showing the raise/lower symbol to the right of its value.
User
PV
Kiln1.UIPZ
Ramp PSP Kiln1 type 2.uipz
Events kiln2.uipz
Mode Reset furnace1 purge.uipz
Status: Reset Press and hold the
Ch1 PSP 14.3 Seg Time Left 00:00:44 Scroll key for two
Ch1 TSP 140.0 Ch1 Rate 01 seconds
Figure 38 Program load display
Program Load via a Program Number

This feature has been added to firmware versions V5.00 and above. To allow a
program (stored as a file) to be loaded, either via a BCD switch, wired to a set of
digital inputs, or via a single comms transaction, it is necessary to prefix the program
name with a program number in the range 01 to 99. For example, 01kiln1.uipz,
01furnace.uipz, 02kiln2.uipz, 03kiln3.uipz etc. The program name can consist of up
to 18 characters. Note that program numbers 1 to 9 must be entered as 01 to 09
otherwise they will not be recognised by the switch or via comms. On value change of
the program number, the first program file with the prefixed number in the
instrument’s internal User drive (listed lexicographically) will be loaded. In the above
example if program 01 is selected, 01fur-nace.uipz will be loaded, 01kiln1.uipz will
not be loaded using the BCD switch or through comms. It can, of course, be loaded
manually.
If no program number is prefixed it is not possible to load the program via the BCD
switch or via comms. It is, however, still possible to load the program by selecting the
file as described in the previous section.
HA030554 Issue 16 69
Note: When a BCD switch is turned from its current value to another value,
intermediate switch positions may be seen on the inputs of the BCD function block
and could potentially be used by subsequent blocks wired from the BCD input. A
Settle Time parameter has been introduced which will in effect filter out these
intermediate values by applying a time in which the inputs can settle before their
converted decimal value is seen on the output parameters of the block. The Settle
Time can be set from 0-10 seconds with a default of 0s i.e. no filtering as in previous
firmware versions. The BCD block is described in "BCD Input" on page 214.
Example BCD Switch Wiring

Figure 39 shows an example of digital input channels soft wired to the BCD function
block using iTools.
Figure 39 BCD Switch Wiring

Figure 40 shows the corresponding hard wiring of a BCD switch.
1 1A 1I
USB
1B 1+
2A 1-
2B 8 2I
2 LA 2+
1
LC 2-
C
3A LB 3I
3B LC 3+
4
4A 3-
C 4I
L 5A 4+
8 N E 4-
BCD Switch
Figure 40 BCD Switch Physical Wiring
Steriliser Display Mode

This display mode appears only if the Steriliser option is fitted and if the display mode
has been enabled in the Instrument Display configuration ("Display configuration" on
page 94). Steriliser configuration parameters are to be found in "Configuration
parameters" on page 204.
70 HA030554 Issue 16
Cycle status
Cycle number Input status beacons
Cycle: 123 Equilibration
Band High If any input is configured

‘Off’ (in Steriliser
configuration parameters,
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 "Configuration parameters"
Band Low (red) on page 204), it does not
Target setpoint (orange) appear in the display, and
the other inputs occupy the
Current input values 120.8°C 121.6°C 122.4°C 2885mB screen width equally.
Remaining 00.05.00 Equilibration 00.03.00
Input status beacons are
Sterilising 00.00.00 Total Cycle 00.03.00 black for inputs configured
‘Off’.
Figure 41 Steriliser display mode (typical) (four inputs)
Operation
A sterilising cycle cannot be initiated whilst the unit is in Configuration (Engineer)
mode. A steriliser cycle is started by setting its relevant ‘Start’ input to ‘Yes’ for the
duration of the cycle. The cycle waits (status ‘Waiting’) until input 1 reaches its
setpoint, at which point the cycle enters the equilibration period (status
‘Equilibration’), and remains there until all the configured inputs are valid. The cycle
then enters the sterilising period and stays in this mode until the sterilising period has
expired (status ‘Passed’) or until one of the inputs becomes invalid (status ‘Failed’)
for longer than its configured ‘Failure Dwell’ time.
Note: The cycle stops (status ‘Failed’) if the trigger source is removed.
Terminology
Holding time Most operating cycles have a stage in which the load must
be exposed to sterilisation conditions for a specified length
of time, known as the ‘Holding time’.
Equilibration time The holding time (above) is preceded by a period during
which, although the sterilising condition is present in the
chamber, the load has not yet attained that temperature
due to its thermal inertia. ‘Equilibration time’ is defined as
the time between the attainment of sterilisation tempera-
ture in the chamber, and the attainment of that tempera-
ture in all parts of the load.
Bands For steam and dry heat sterilisers, sterilisation conditions
are specified by a sterilisation temperature band, defined
by a minimum acceptable temperature (known as the ster-
ilisation temperature) and a maximum allowable tempera-
ture. A sterilisation band is normally quoted for each
steriliser type.
HA030554 Issue 16 71
Beacons
There are four input status beacons near the top right hand corner of the display, one
for each input. During equilibration, the beacons are flashing red for inputs that have
not attained the Target setpoint, and go green when the target setpoint is reached,
remaining green even if the input value rises above the Band High value The
beacons revert to red if input falls below* the target setpoint. During sterilisation, the
beacons go red for any input whose value rises above Band High or falls below*
setpoint for a duration exceeding the configured ‘Failure Dwell’ period. Beacons are
black for inputs that are configured as ‘Off’.
* ‘rises above’ for input types ‘Falling Pressure’ or ‘Fall Air Detect’.
Displayed Information
Cycle A five-digit counter to indicate the total number of cycles
started.
Status Wait start: The initial state at power up. This status re-
mains until the first cycle is initiated Waiting: Waiting for in-
put 1 to reach its target setpoint. The cycle then enters
Equilibration. Equilibration: Currently in the equilibration
period, during which the cycle waits until all inputs have
reached sterilisation conditions.
Sterilising: Currently in the decontamination phase.
Passed: The cycle has completed successfully.
Failed: The cycle has failed either through one or more in-
puts becoming invalid, or because the ‘Start’ signal was re-
moved. Test cycle: A test cycle is in progress.
Remaining The sterilising time remaining for the current cycle. Display
field is replaced by ‘Target Time’ (below) when the cycle is
not running.
Target time The intended sterilisation time. This can be configured by
operating the scroll button twice (once to highlight the field,
and again to enter edit mode), and then using the up
and/or down arrows to edit the time. Use the Scroll button
again to quit edit mode, and the page key to ‘unhighlight’
the field.
Replaced by ‘Remaining’ (above) when the cycle is run-
ning.
Equilibration The equilibration time period for the current cycle.
Sterilising The time for which the load has currently been at sterilisa-
tion conditions.
Total Cycle The elapsed time since the initiation of the current cycle.
This time increments from the time the cycle is triggered
until the time the trigger is removed.
Input values Temperature are required in °C; pressure inputs in mBar.
If necessary, maths channels and user values can be used
to convert from other units (see ‘Note’ overleaf).
72 HA030554 Issue 16
Sterilising Cycle Diagram

Figure 42 shows a steriliser cycle in diagrammatic form.
Wait Start Waiting Equilibration Sterilisation
Overheat
Band High
(Note 3)
Target setpoint
Sterilisation starts when slowest
input reaches setpoint
Equilibration starts when
input 1 reaches setpoint
Band Low
(Note 3)
Cycle start
Figure 42 Steriliser cycle

NOTES:
1. For temperature inputs in most applications, the Setpoint value is the same as
the Band Low value. For the sake of clarity, this is not as shown in the figure
above.
2. For the sake of clarity all four inputs in the figure above are shown with the same
Band High, Band Low and Setpoint value. This would not be unusual for
temperature units, but the pressure input would normally have a different set of
values from temperature inputs.
3. Band High and Band Low are effective only during Sterilisation phase.
Application Details
Figure 43 shows a typical steriliser application, with temperature and pressure
signals from the sterilisation chamber being applied directly to the rear terminals of
the controller/recorder, and control signals connected from the controller to both the
chamber and the controller/recorder.
Sterilisation chamber
Temperature Pressure
transducers transducer
nanodac
PV1
PV2
PV3
Data Flow
PV4
Start
121°C/134°C
User wiring
Controller
Steriliser configuration I/O terminals
parameters
Figure 43 Typical steriliser application
HA030554 Issue 16 73
Analogue inputs 1 to 3 receive signals from temperature transducers (typically

thermocouples) within the chamber. These inputs are internally connected to
channels 1 to 3 respectively, allowing transducer type, ranges, alarms, etc. to be
configured ("Input Channel Configuration" on page 123). Inputs are assumed to be
degrees Celsius (see Note).
The pressure transducer is connected to channel 4 and can be configured in the
same way. The input is assumed to be in milliBar. Other pressure inputs should be
converted using virtual channels (see Note).
PV1 to PV4 in the Steriliser configuration is software wired (Section 9) to Ch 1 to Ch4.
Start cycle input and the ‘Running Output’ and ‘Passed Output’ signals are software
wired to suitable DIO terminals, for connection to the Controller.
Note: For Fahrenheit inputs, use one virtual channel to subtract 32, and a second to
divide the result by 1.8 (where 32 and 1.8 can be configured as user values). Similar
techniques should be used to convert pressure input units if necessary.
Test Cycles
A ‘Test’ cycle is initiated by initiating a 121°C cycle and a 134°C cycle simultaneously.
A test cycle allows the user to check actual performance against expected
performance.
F0
F0 is a means of calculating ‘equivalent time at sterilising temperature’ for
temperatures below, at and above sterilizing temperature, using the equation below.
Temp – Ts
--------------------------
Z
F 0 = Sterilisation time ×10
Where:
Sterilisation time Depends on the application, typically 15 minutes at Ts =
121°C
Temp The value of the temperature measuring input.
Ts Desired Sterilising temperature.
Z Temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 reduction
in killing efficiency. Z = 10 for steam sterilising (F0), or
Z=20 for dry heat sterilising (FH). Z = 10 for thermal disin-
fection (A0).
To ensure that steriliser loads which contain materials with different thermal inertias
are thoroughly sterilised, a number of sensors are located within the load. The F
value should be calculated using the sensor closest to that part of the load which has
the highest thermal inertia. For maximum accuracy, the temperature sensor should
be calibrated and the input adjust function used to compensate for any inaccuracy
found.
F0 calculation examples
For all the examples following, the following are assumed: Sterilisation time = 15
minutes; Sterilisation target temperature =121°C and Z = 10.
1. For an actual sterilising temperature of 111°C.
111 – 121- – 10-

----------------------- --------
10 10
Fval = 15 × 10 = 15 × 10 = 1.5minutes
74 HA030554 Issue 16
Which means that 15 minutes at 111°C is equivalent to 1.5 minutes at 121°C.
2. For a sterilising temperature of 121°C.
121 – 121 0
------------------------ ------
10 10
Fval = 15 × 10 = 15 × 10 = 1.5minutes
Which means that the sterilising temperature is ideal (by definition).
1. For a sterilising temperature of 124°C.
124 – 121 3
------------------------ ------
10 10
Fval = 15 × 10 = 15 × 10 = 15 × 1.995 = 29.925minutes
Which means that 15 minutes at 124°C is equivalent to nearly 30 minutes at 121°C.
Normally sterilising temperatures would not remain constant at temperatures below

or above the target value, so the above equations are illustrative only of the facts:
1. Temperatures below the target have some killing efficacy.

2. Temperatures above the target value have a greater killing efficiency, so
that the sterilising time can be reduced.
In order to calculate the value dynamically, the instrument uses the equation:
ma t – T arg ettemp
----------------------------------
-
Z
Fval t = Fval t – 1 + T × 10
where
Fvalt = F value this iteration
Fvalt-1 = F value last time
T = Iteration period (minutes)
mat = input temperature value this iteration
Target Temp = 121°C for F0, 170°C for FH, 80°C for A0
Z = 10°C for F0, 20C for FH, 10°C for A0
Batch Summary
This display page shows the user a summary of the current, or last run (if no batch is
currently running), batch. Access to the Batch Control page is available through this
page if the logged in user has sufficient permissions; otherwise the Batch Summary
page is display-only. The page shows basic information about the batch includ-ing
whether a batch is currently active, the customised Field 1 descriptor and value, start
date and time and the batch run duration.
Page icon only visible if logged in user is the Supervisor or has Batch permissions.
HA030554 Issue 16 75
Batch Summary Page icon only visible if

logged in user is the
Supervisor or has Batch
Active Yes
permissions.
Batch number 050316b16
Start Date 05/03/16
Start Time 06:30:03
Duration 04:16:00
Figure 44 Batch summary page
Batch Control
If the logged in user is the Supervisor or has Batch permissions, the page icon
appears at the top-right of the display. This provides access to the Batch Control
page where a batch can be initiated, started or stopped. To access the Batch Control
page, press the scroll button twice (the first press highlights the page icon, and the
second press enters the page). An example Batch Control page is shown in Figure
45.
Batch Control
Batch Active No
Batch New Yes
Batch Descriptor 1
Batch Descriptor 2 Data 2
Batch Start No
Batch Stop No
Figure 45 Batch control page

Batch Active Read-only parameter showing the current running state of
the batch -either ‘Yes’ (active) or ‘No’ (inactive).
Batch New When set to ‘Yes’, initialises a new batch and resets all the
Batch Descriptor values to the default values (see "Batch
Configuration" on page 119). Any Batch Descriptor fields
which require user input are set blank and must be com-
pleted before a batch can be started using the Batch Start
pa-rameter. This field can only be changed if no batch is
currently active.
Batch Descriptor {n} Up to six user-definable text values which are pre-config-
ured (see "Batch Configuration" on page 119) and written
to the log on batch initialisation, batch start and batch stop
(according to configuration rules). Batch field 1 can be con-
figured to automatically populate with the current PV value.
These fields are only editable if the Batch New field is set
to Yes and the batch hasn’t yet been started.
Batch Start Set to ‘Yes’ to start the batch. This field can only be set to
‘Yes’ if a batch has already been initialised and the re-
quired Batch Descriptor fields have content (if configured).
76 HA030554 Issue 16
Batch Stop Set to ‘Yes’ to stop the current active batch. This field can
only be set to ‘Yes’ if a batch is currently active.
Promote list
This display page allows the user to display up to 10 of the parameters that appear
anywhere in the operator interface. The parameters can be selected only by using
iTools, as described below.
NOTES:
1. ‘Promote List’ must be enabled (in ‘Instrument.Display’ configuration), before it
appears in the ‘Go to View’ list.
2. There are more parameters visible in iTools than appear at the operator interface.
If non-operator interface parameters are selected for inclusion in the promote list,
they do not appear.
3. If parameters which appear only in certain circumstances are selected, then they
appear in the promote list only when they appear in the Operator interface. For
example, a channel PV is not visible unless that channel is enabled (i.e. it is not
‘Off’).
Parameter Selection
1. Open iTools and scan for the instrument, (see "iTOOLS").
2. Once the instrument has been found, stop the scan. When the instrument has
synchronised, click on the ‘Access’ button near the top of the display to set the
unit into configuration mode (a password may be required).
3. Click on the ‘+’ sign to the left of the Instrument folder in the tree list (left-most
pane) to expand the folder. Double-click on ‘Promote List’, to display the Promote
list in the main pane. The list contains 20 entries, 1 to 10 being for parameters, 11
to 20 being available to the user to add descriptors for parameters 1 to 10
respectively.
4. Expand further folders, as necessary, to access the required parameters, and

click-drag these parameters into the promote list. Enter a descriptor for the
parameter if the default is not as required. As each parameter is dragged into the
list, it appears in the Promote list.
5. If the parameters are modified at the operator interface, the changes are
reflected in iTools, and vice-versa.
6. Once all the parameters have been added, it is recommended that the Access
button be used to quit configuration mode, as otherwise it will not subsequently
be possible to quit from the operator interface.
Figure 46 shows typical displays.
HA030554 Issue 16 77
Promote list
Chan 1 Tmp 268.34°C
T/C 157A H2O Tmp 12
Channel.1.Main.Units °C
Group.Recording.Enable Yes
Channel.1.Alarm1.Active Yes
Promote List Promote list (Operator

interface)
Figure 46 Promote list displays.
Modbus Master display mode

This display mode consists of two pages, as shown in Figure 47.
Page one opens by default and shows the first eight parameters being read
from (left pointing arrow) or written to (right pointing arrow) the relevant slave.
These items are configured in the Modbus Master configuration described in
Section 6.10. Hidden parameters may be viewed by operating the scroll key,
then using the arrow keys to scroll through the list. A green arrow means that
the item may be edited by the user when logged in. A pair of animated
indicators in the top left-hand corner of the screen show the connection status
of the two possible slaves. A green moving ‘streak’ indicates that successful
communications are being carried out. A red flashing circle indicates that there
is a break in the transmission line or that the slave is switched off. A grey,
non-animated display indicates that the slave has not yet been configured as a
part of the communications link (i.e it is ‘off line’).
A ‘traffic light’ indicator appears to the right of each parameter. Green indicates that
the parameter is being read from or written to successfully. Orange indicates that a
write of the value is pending. Red indicates that there is an error and that no value is
currently being read or written; the value displayed is the last good value read or
written depending on whether the data item is a read or write. If the indicator is black,
the parameter is ‘off’.
Operation of the scroll key highlights the page symbol in the top right-hand corner of
the screen, and a further operation of the scroll key calls page two to the screen.
Page two contains the IP address of the Modbus master and of any slaves connected
to it, together with some diagnostic information, as described in ‘Ping Details’, below.
78 HA030554 Issue 16
Page symbol
Read/Write
Connection Parameter status
status
Modbus Master
Chan 1 Tmp 198.3

Chan 2 Tmp 200.3
VChannel 1 PV 2.0
Parameters
and values VChanne 2 PV -20.0
VChannel 3 Input 122
Any Channel alarm Active
Modbus Master
Dig In 1 Off
Chan 1 Tmp 195.6

Chan 2 Tmp 199.7
VChannel 1 PV 4.1
VChanne 2 PV -23.9
VChannel 3 Input 13
Any Channel alarm Active
Modbus Master
Dig In 1 Off
nanodac
123.123.123.123
nanodac 3rd Party The list of parameters can be scrolled through using the up/
123.123.123.120 down arrows. Values being read by the master are read
123.123.123.124
only, but the user may enter values for parameters being
26684 0
written by the master, by highlighting the relevant item and
1 0 using the scroll key to enter edit mode. The use of the Page
Ping... Ping... key causes a return to be made to the initial Modbus
Master display.
Figure 47 Modbus Master display pages
HA030554 Issue 16 79
Ping Details
Slave 1 Slave 2
Slave Name
Slave address nanodac 3rd Party
Total number of successful
read and write transactions } 123.123.123.120
26684
123.123.123.124
0
}
1 0
Total number of failed read
and write transactions Ping... Ping...
Ping initiation field.
Green: Ping successful

Red: Ping failed
3rd Party
123.123.123.124
0
0
Start
3rd Party
123.123.123.124
2
0
Ping...
Figure 48 Slave 2 ping initiation (Slave 1 similar)

The ‘Ping...’ field of the first slave is highlighted by default. As shown above, the
down (or up) arrow can be used to highlight the ‘Ping...’ field of the other slave
instead.
Once the relevant ‘Ping...’ field is highlighted, the scroll key can be used to enter edit
mode and the up/down arrow key used to select ‘Start’. A further operation of the
scroll key initiates the ‘Ping’ and if this is successful, a green indicator appears
alongside the field (and the text returns to ‘Ping...’). If the Ping is unsuccessful, then
the indicator is coloured red.
The up or down arrow can now be used to return to slave 1, or the page key can be
used to return to the previous parameter display page.
As shown in the figure above, some diagnostic information is given. This includes the
total number of successful attempts that the master has made to communicate with
the relevant slave, and the total number of failed attempts. Fuller diagnostic details
are to be found in the Modbus Master Communications configuration description
("Modbus Master Configuration" on page 182).
EtherNet/IP display mode

This display mode appears only if enabled in Instrument.Display configuration
("Display configuration" on page 94) and is used to display the input and output
parameters assigned to the Client and Server input and output tables. Parameters
which have been configured with descriptors are identified by these descriptors
instead of their ‘opc’ names (shown in Figure 49).
80 HA030554 Issue 16
EtherNet/IP Client
Virtual 11.1
Inputs
Channel.1.Main.Input1 -19.1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP1 123.0
Outputs EtherNet/IP Client
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
Virtual 17.3
Channel.1.Main.Input1 -12.9
Server IP Loop.2.Setpoint.SP1 246.2
address, EtherNet/IP Client Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2
Connection
type, RPI 123.123.123.223 : Point2Point :
1000ms
IP address The list of parameters can be scrolled through

and mode of 123.123.123.222 using the up/down arrows.
operation for Client (IO) Items with green arrows can be edited if the See
this unit
user is logged in with the correct access level.
See
‘Explicit Explicit 1 Explicit 2
data’ below No Connection No Connection
IO Server Identity
Vendor Number 45
IO Server Configuration Device Type 0
Product Code E780
Mode Client (IO) Revision n.nn
Status Word 0
Serial number 8D01904C
Input Instance 100 Product Name
Size (Bytes) 100 Nano
Output Instance 112

Size (Bytes) 100
Data depends on the slave.
Server Address 123.123.123.22
Priority 3
RPI (ms) Scheduled
Connection Type 1000 These items appear only for the Client
Reset No
Figure 49 Typical EtherNet/IP display

If the EtherNet/IP option has been ordered and enabled, the nanodac can be
configured as either a client (master) or a server (slave) (see "Ethernet/IP
Configuration" on page 189). The client and server displays are identical except that
the configuration area of the client display is more extensive than that of the server
display.
Figure 49, above shows a typical set of display pages for an EtherNet/IP client.
HA030554 Issue 16 81
Configuration of Implicit Input/Output Tables

Configuration of the input and output tables is carried out via iTools drag and drop
only by:
a. Entering the parameters to be read by the client into the server output table.
b. Entering the destination parameter into the equivalent location in the client
input table.
c. Entering the parameters to be written by the client into the client output table.
d. Entering the destination parameter into the equivalent location in the server
input table.
The example in Figure 50 shows this (using the nanodac as the client) in graphical
form, using just a few parameters (there can be up to 50 in each table).
Client (nanodac) input table Server output table

Virtual Channel.1.Main.Input1 I/P1
Input Data Destination
O/P1 Out Parameter 1
Virtual Channel.2.Main.Input1 I/P2 O/P2 Output Data Source
The implicit data value Out Parameter 2
coming in from the Virtual Channel.3.Main.Input1 I/P3 The value coming in from
EtherNet/IP device will O/P3 Out Parameter 3 this wire will be sent to the
be copied to this wired Virtual Channel.4.Main.Input1 I/P4 O/P4 Out Parameter 4 EtherNet/IP device.
parameter
etc. etc.
Wired parameters Values Wired parameters
Client (nanodac) output table Server input table

Input Data Destination
Output Data Source User Values.1.Value O/P1 I/P1 In Parameter 1
The implicit data value
The value coming in Channel.1.Alarm1 O/P2 I/P2 In Parameter 2 coming in from the
from this wire will be EtherNet/IP device will be
etc. etc. copied to this wired
sent to the EtherNet/IP
device. parameter
Figure 50 Input/Output table entries

NOTES:
1. Channel values from the Server can be ‘wired’ into nanodac Virtual channel
inputs (as shown above) so that they can be traced and/or recorded. In such
cases the virtual channel ‘Operation’ must be set to ‘Copy’ (see "Maths channel
configuration" on page 133).
2. Inputs and outputs would normally be given suitable descriptors (e.g. ‘Reset
timer’ instead of ‘Channel.1.Alarm1’).
Connection Status Indicator

A circular status indicator appears in a number of the EtherNet/IP display pages. This
indicator can indicate the following states:
Green rotating ‘flash’: the instrument is on line and at least one CIP
connection is established.
Green flashing circle: the instrument is on line but no CIP connections have
been established.
Red flashing circle: there is a break in the physical connection between the
client and the server, or the remote unit is switched off or is initialising.
82 HA030554 Issue 16
Adding parameters to the input and output tables can be achieved only through the
proprietary software package ‘iTools’, running on a PC. It cannot be configured
through the user interface. The following description assumes that the user is familiar
with ‘iTools’. "iTOOLS" of this manual shows how to set up an iTools link to the unit
and the iTools on-line help system and its PDF version (HA028838) should be
referred-to as necessary.
Note: The client/server and the PC must all be on the same network.
Once iTools has started up and the ‘Scan’ process

Synchronised
has ‘found’ the relevant instrument, the scan
Not synchronised
process should be stopped and the instrument (s)
allowed to synchronise. (The scan may be left to run
its course, but the speed at which iTools operates is reduced for the duration of the
scan process.)
Example
To add Loop 2 Setpoint 2 to Output 4 of the Client
Output table. In the example shown below, the
instruments have both synchronised, and the
‘Access’ tool button clicked-on for both instruments
to set them into configuration mode. With the client
selected, expand the EtherNet/IP folder in the
Browse list, then double-click on the
‘ImplicitOutputs’ folder. Locate and expand the
Loop 2 SP folder in the Browse window, and
click-drag SP2 to ‘Output 4’ and release.
HA030554 Issue 16 83
Figure 51 Dragging a parameter to the Output table

An alternative to the click-drag technique is to right click on the required output (five
in the example below), and select ‘Edit Wire...’ from the context menu that appears. A
browse window pops up, allowing the user to navigate to the required parameter.
This technique can be used both on previously empty inputs or outputs and on those
previously filled.
Figure 52 Context menu details
84 HA030554 Issue 16
Explicit Data
As shown in Figure 53, when configured as a server, there is only one explicit
application object, and that has the class ID= A2 (162 decimal). The instance ID is
the Modbus address of the parameter and the Attribute is always = 1. Explicit service
codes hex10 (decimal 16) and 0E (14) are both supported, for writing and reading
single attributes respectively.
Service code Class ID Instance ID

Attribute
Hex Dec Decimal
0010 16 A2 162 1-65535 1

000E 14 A2 162 1-65535 1
Figure 53 Explicit data specification

When configured as a client, two separate connections are available allowing the
user to produce two independent explicit read or write messages to different server
devices.
Figure 54, shows an example of how to configure an explicit message request. The
instance ID and the data type are taken from the server manufacturer’s data. In this
example a read request is configured to determine the Group recording status of a
nanodac server, and it can be seen from the table in "Parameter List" on page 232
that the decimal Modbus address for this parameter is 4150 and the data type is
int16. It is this address which is used as the instance ID.
Once all the information has been entered, the read is requested by setting ‘Send’ to
‘Yes’. The Data field changes to ‘3’ for this example and from the table in "Parameter
List" on page 232 it can be seen that the recording status is ‘Recording enabled’.
Note: The nanodac supports only 16 bit data types for reading and writing of explicit
messages.
HA030554 Issue 16 85
When wired to parameters which have

EtherNet/IP Client descriptors, the descriptor names appear
instead of the ‘opc’ names (e.g.
Virtual Channel.1.Main.Input1 11.1 Loop.1.Setpoint.SP1) shown here.
Virtual Channel.1.Main.Input1 -19.1
Loop.1.Setpoint.SP2 111.119 Tags page appears if ‘Mode’ is set to ‘Client
(Tags)’ in EtherNet/IP configuration
("Ethernet/IP Configuration" on page 189).
Explicit messaging is not possible in tag IO
mode as tag mode needs to consume both
connections for communications with the PLC.
EtherNet/IP Client EtherNet/IP Client
123.123.123.223 : Point2Point : 1000ms 123.123.123.223 : 1000ms

Implicit I/O Implicit I/O
123.123.123.222 123.123.123.222
Client (IO) Tag I/O
Explicit 1 Explicit 2 Input Tags Output Tags

No Connection No Connection Connection Failed Connection Failed
Explicit Messaging
Destination Address 123.123.123.223

Service Code Get Attribute
Class Id 162
Instance Id 4150
Attribute Id 1
Data Type INT
Data 3
Send No
Figure 54 Explicit messaging example
Using Tags
When acting as servers, many PLCs present their data in a tag format instead of
implicit data format. For this reason, when the client is configured as ‘Client (Tags)’,
(see "Ethernet/IP Configuration" on page 189) 30 input and 30 output tags become
available to the user via iTools (Figure 55).
This allows tag names to be typed in, input tags 1 to 30 being associated with implicit
inputs 1 to 30 respectively and output tags 1 to 30 being associated with implicit
outputs 1 to 30 respectively.
86 HA030554 Issue 16
Figure 55 iTools display showing input tags.

In the example above, the value of the parameter with the tag ‘Channel 1’ will be
written to implicit input 1.
NOTES:
1. Most PLCs have a data buffer limit of 500 Bytes. The total number of bytes being
used is given by the equation: Total number of data bytes = (tag length + 10) ×
the number of requested tags.
2. Input data direction is always to the nanodac: in server mode input data is written
to the nanodac from the client in client mode, input data is read by the nanodac
from the server device.
3. Output data direction is always from the nanodac: in server mode output data is
written to the client from the nanodac in client mode, output data is read by the
server from the nanodac.
Trend History
Entered from the top level menu ("Introduction" on page 25), this allows vertical and
horizontal traces to be reviewed for Trend group channels. The amount of data
displayed in one screen depends on the ‘Zoom In/Out’ setting in the History menu
("History Options Menu" on page 89) and on the recording interval selected in Group
Recording configuration ("Group Recording configuration" on page 117). It is also
possible to enter a time and date to which the history then jumps.
The history display is identical in appearance with the trend display except:
1. History displays can include messages if so configured in the History menu.
2. For horizontal trends, the scale is displayed permanently at the left edge of the
display.
HA030554 Issue 16 87
Home
Configuration
Go to View
History Enter trend history mode
Faceplate cycling (Off)
Operator Notes
Demand Archiving
Log out
Figure 56 Top level menu
Navigation
The down arrow button moves the display backwards in time by 1/3
screen-full per operation (assuming that the current display is not the
earliest). See also ‘SEARCH FOR’, below.
The up arrow button moves the display forwards in time by 1/3 screen-full
per operation (assuming that the current display is not the latest). See also
‘SEARCH FOR’, below.
The scroll key scrolls through the trend group channels, emphasizing each
channel (and displaying its faceplate) as it is selected.
The page key calls the History Menu, described in "History Options Menu"
on page 89, below.
Search For
In the history display, holding the up or down
arrow key operated for approximately two Search for
seconds produces a ‘Search for’ display which 10:31:58 21/09/10
allows the user to enter a time and date. Once a
Cancel Yes
time and date have been entered, ‘Yes’ then
causes the history display to jump to that time
and date (if such history exists).
To enter a time and date:
1. Use the up/down arrows to highlight the item to be edited.
2. When highlighted (orange background), operate the scroll button. The

highlighted text turns black.
3. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the required value for the field, then
operate the scroll button again. The text goes white.
4. Repeat the above editing process for all the remaining items which are to be
edited.
5. Use the up/down keys to select ‘Yes’. The ‘Search for’ window closes, and the
history display jumps to the selected time and date.
NOTES:
1. N If no history exists for the selected time and/or date ‘No History Available’ is
displayed.
88 HA030554 Issue 16
2. The time and date format and Daylight Savings Time (DST) effects are as set in
the ‘Locale’ area of Instrument configuration. See "Locale" on page 93 for further
details.
History Options Menu

Operating the page key from within a history display, causes the History Options
menu to appear.
History Menu
Zoom In/Out 0.125 sec

Trend All Points
Show Messages Off
Exit History No
Figure 57 History Options menu
Parameters
Zoom In/out Allows the user to select the amount of history displayed
on the screen.
Trend Select either ‘All Points’ or ‘Each Point’.
‘All points’ displays all channels in the trend group, with the
first channel emphasized on the screen and its faceplate
displayed. The Scroll button is used to select the next
channel in the group.
‘Each Point’ initially displays only the first point in the trace
group. The scroll key is used to cycle through individual
group channels in turn.
Show Messages ‘Off’ disable the inclusion of messages in history display.
‘On’ causes messages to appear, superimposed upon the
point traces (vertical trend mode only).
Exit History Selecting ‘Yes’ for this item causes a return to the top level
menu or to the message summary page.
Note: Operating the page key from the History menu causes a return to the history
display.
Text Entry
The user is often required to enter text characters or numbers (when editing operator
notes, for example). This is done using the pop-up keyboards which are displayed
when required. When only numerals are required a special keyboard is presented
which contains only numerals.
Figure 58 shows the three standard keyboards, along with a ‘scan’ direction for
operations of both up arrow and down arrow keys. To change keyboards, use the
arrow push buttons to highlight the keyboard name (‘Numeric’, ‘Symbols’ or ‘Alpha’),
and then operate the scroll button.
Generally, to enter text, the required character is highlighted using the up and down
arrows and the scroll button is used as an ‘Enter’ key. Once text entry is complete,
the Page button is used to confirm the edit (use the down arrow to select ‘Yes’ then
operate the scroll button).
HA030554 Issue 16 89
Pressing and holding the scroll button and then immediately operating the up or down
arrow, causes the character insertion point to move to the left (down arrow) or to the
right (up arrow). The user can press and hold the scroll key to display variations on
certain characters (the letter ‘e’ in the figure). Once displayed, the up and down
arrows can again be used to scroll through auxiliary list, allowing capital letters, and
characters with diacriticals (e.g. accents, umlauts, tildes, cedillas) to be selected and
entered using the scroll button.
The backarrow key is used as a back space key - i.e. it deletes the character to the
left of the cursor position. The ‘Del’ key deletes the character to the right of the
cursor.
Note: Leading and trailing space characters are automatically removed from text
strings.
Press and hold scroll

button for alternative
character set.
Ω Γ Ε Θ Π Σ Τ
Figure 58 Standard Keyboards
Numeric keyboard
As mentioned previously, for functions which can take only numerals, a special
numeric keyboard appears, as depicted in Figure 59.
Figure 59 Numeric keyboard
USB keyboard
Text and numeric entry can also be carried out using a USB keyboard as described in
"USB Keyboard" on page 388.
90 HA030554 Issue 16
nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Configuration
Configuration
Entered from the top level menu ("Top Level Menu" on page 41) this allows the
instrument configuration to be accessed and edited (‘Engineer’ access level required
for full editing).
CAUTION
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
When logged in at Engineer access level, recording is stopped and the
input/output circuits are switched off. Ensure the controlled process is in a suitable
control and recording state before entering the Engineer access level.
damage.
As shown in Figure 60, below, the instrument configuration is arranged in a number

of ‘areas’, each of which is allocated its own sub-section within this Section.
Instrument "Instrument Menu" on page 92
Home Network "Network Menu" on page 109
Group "Group Configuration" on page 117

Configuration
Go to View Batch "Batch Configuration" on page 119
"Input Channel Configuration" on page 123
History Channel
Faceplate cycling (Off) "Virtual Channel Configuration" on page 133

Virtual Channel
Operator Notes Loop "Loop Option Configuration" on page 142
Demand Archiving Advanced Loop "Advanced Loop Configuration" on page 152
Log out Programmer "Programmer Configuration" on page 171
Modbus Master "Modbus Master Configuration" on page 182
EtherNet/IP "Ethernet/IP Configuration" on page 189

Web Server "Web Server" on page 192
Digital I/O "Digital I/O" on page 193
DC Output "DC Output" on page 195
User Lin "User LIN" on page 197

Custom Message "Custom Messages" on page 198
Zirconia "Zirconia Block Option" on page 198
Steriliser "Steriliser Option" on page 203
Saturated Steam "Saturated Steam Option" on page 206
Figure 60 Top level configuration menu

The factory default configuration can be returned to, if required, by entering a special
Engineer password, as described in "Security menu" on page 98.
HA030554 Issue 16 91
Configuration nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Instrument Menu
Instrument
Clock Locale Display Info Upgrade Security I/O Fitted Save/Restore

("Clock" on ("Locale" on ("Display ("Info menu" on ("Upgrade" on ("Security menu" ("I/O fitted" on ("Save/Restore"
page 92) page 93) configuration" on page 96) page 97) on page 98) page 101) on page 102)
Date Language page 94) Name Type Engineer Select Save or
Time Date format Brightness Type IP Address Password Restore
Time zone Save after Version Username Supervisor
DST enable Saver Bootrom Password Password
Brightness Company ID Source Path Operator
Home page Config Rev Initiate Password
HPage timeout Security Rev Feature
Vertical trend Nvol writes Passwords
Horizontal trend Line Voltage Comms
Future trend Wires Free Password
Vertical bar OEM Pass
Horizontal bar OEM Entry
Numeric OEM Status
Alarm panel
Loop control
Dual loop
Cascade
Programmer
Steriliser
Promote list
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Trend Input Adjust Output Adjust User Accounts
background ("Input adjust" ("Output adjust" (Auditor)
History on page 103) on page 106) ("User Accounts
background Select channs Output (Auditor)" on
H.Trend scaling Start IP adjust Measured o/p page 107)
Faceplate Abort Confirm User 1 to User
cycling 25
Setpoint colour
Number format
USB auto scan
Clock
The up and down arrows are used to highlight ‘Date’ (default) or ‘Time’.
To set the date, the scroll button is used to display the numeric keyboard described in
"Numeric keyboard" on page 90. The up and down arrows are used to highlight the
relevant numeral or separator (‘/’ or ‘:’) and the scroll key used to enter it into the
display window.
To set the time, the scroll button is operated to enter edit mode, then the up and
down buttons are used to scroll to display a time, say 15 seconds later than the
current time. Once the current time matches the display, the scroll button is pressed
to confirm the time and to start the clock.
92 HA030554 Issue 16
Instrument.Clock
Date
Time
DST
Figure 61 Clock menu

The ‘DST’ field appears only If ‘DST Enable’ is selected ‘Yes’, in ‘Locale’ ("Locale" on
page 93). If the ‘box’ contains a cross (as shown) then Daylight Saving Time (DST) is
not currently active. A ‘tick’ means that the time shown has been advanced by an
hour because DST is active.
Locale
Instrument.Locale
Language English
Date Format DD/MM/YY

Time Zone GMT
DST Enable Yes
Start Time 01:00
Start On Last
Start Day Sunday
Start Month March

End Time 02:00
End On Last
End day Sunday
End Month October
Figure 62 Typical Instrument configuration menu (expanded to show all fields)

Language Select the language to be used for displays etc.
Date format Select either DD/MM/YY, MM/DD/YY, or YY/MM/DD as
the required format.
Time Zone Select the required offset from GMT (UTC). This setting af-
fects only the displayed time. Archiving, recording etc.
times remain in GMT.
DST Enable Daylight Saving Time enable. Once the selection is ena-
bled, the following (previously hidden) fields appear, allow-
ing the start and end dates for Daylight Saving Time (DST)
to be configured. DST affects only the displayed time. Ar-
chiving, recording etc. times remain in GMT.
Start Time Appears only when ‘DST Enable’ (above) is set to ‘Yes’.
Use the up/down keys to scroll to the required start time.
Start On Select ‘Last’, ‘First’, ‘Second’, ‘Third’ or ‘Fourth’ as the re-
quired week. Used in conjunction with the ‘Start Day’ and
‘Start Month’ entries following.
Start Day Select the day of the week on which DST is to commence.
Start Month Select the month in which DST is to commence.
End Time, End On, End Day, End Month
As for ‘Start Time’ etc. above, but specifies the end time
and date for daylight savings.
HA030554 Issue 16 93
Display configuration
This allows the user to set display brightnesses and screen saver details, to select a
display mode as the ‘Home’ page, and to enable/ disable the various display modes.
The normal ‘Select, Scroll, Enter’ editing technique is used as has been previously
described.
Instrument.Display
Brightness 70%
Save After 7 min

Saver Brightness 50%
Home Page V.Trend
HPage Timeout Off Home page (always
Vertical Trend enabled)
Horizontal Trend Mode disabled
Vertical Bar
Horizontal Bar Mode enabled
Promote List
Trend Backgrnd Black
History Backgrnd DarkGrey
H.Trend Scaling Hide
Faceplate Cycling Off
Setpoint Colour Red
Number Format Rounded
USB Auto Scan No
Figure 63 Display menu (expanded to show all fields)

Brightness Allows the user to select a normal operating brightness for
the screen from 10% to 100%, in 10% steps.
Save After The elapsed time (since last button press) before the
screen switches from ‘Brightness’ to ‘Saver Brightness’.
(Off = saver function disabled). Saver BrightnessThe
screen saver brightness. Valid entries are 10% to 100% in-
clusive, in 10% steps. Using a lower power when not ‘in
use’ not only saves power, but also increases display life.
Typical screen power consumption is 0.5W at 100%, fall-
ing in a linear fashion to 0.05W at 10%.
Home page Allows any display mode to be chosen as the ‘Home’ page.
This is the page that the instrument displays at power up,
and also the page displayed when the ‘Home’ key is se-
lected from the top level menu ("Top Level Menu" on
page 41). The selected display mode (vertical trend in Fig-
ure 63) is always enabled in the following display mode en-
able fields (its ‘tick’ is greyed out and cannot be edited).
See "Display Modes" on page 52 for a description of the
available modes.
HPage Timeout The elapsed time (since last button press) before the dis-
play returns to the home screen. (Off = disabled).
Vertical Trend This is the default home page, and its tick is greyed. If this
is not the home page, the tick can be changed to a cross,
by highlighting it and operating the scroll button.
94 HA030554 Issue 16
Horizontal Trend, Vertical Bar, Horizontal bar, Numeric, Alarm Panel, Loop control,
Dual Loop, Cascade, Programmer, Steriliser, Promote List, Modbus Master,
EtherNet/IP, Batch.
As for Vertical Trend, above. By default some display
modes are disabled (grey cross). In order to enable such
display modes the relevant cross is highlighted using the
up/down arrow buttons, and the scroll button then used to
change the grey cross to a white tick. The tick associated
with the selected home page is always grey.
Note: Some display modes are available only if the relevant option is fitted.
Future Trend This and the associated colour selections appear only if
the Programmer option is fitted. See "Programmer Display
Mode" on page 59 for more details.
Trend Background Allows the user to select black (default), white dark grey or
light grey as the ‘chart’ colour.
History Background As above for ‘Trend background’, but for history displays.
H.Trend Scaling As described in "Horizontal Trend Mode" on page 53, by
default, the scale for horizontal trends appears at the left
edge of the chart for a few seconds before the chart ex-
pands leftwards to occupy the scale area. Setting ‘H.Trend
Scaling’ to ‘Permanent’, ensures that the scale remains
permanently on display.
Faceplate cycling Allows the default faceplate cycling state to be defined as
‘On’ or ‘Off’ ("Faceplate Cycling on/off" on page 46)
Setpoint colour The colour for the setpoint in Control Loop display pages
("Control Loop1/Loop2" on page 57).
Number Format Rounded
Truncated
USB Auto Scan If set to ‘Yes’, bar code data messages are automatically
generated and appear on the display and in the Message
list without operator intervention. If set to ‘No’, the Mes-
sage appears on the screen for editing and/or confirma-
tion, before being displayed etc. "Barcode Reader" on
page 387 provides further details.
From firmware versions V3.01 and above there is an option to allow numbers to be
rounded. The reason for this is driven primarily from a control point-of-view. With
truncation, it is quite likely that the PV will look as though it never settles onto the
setpoint. The rounding/truncation affects the UI display and MODBUS scaled
integers, the underlying numbers are not affected, nor the values saved in the history
files. Over MODBUS communications, all floating point parameters that are read via
scaled integer communications will take note of the configured setting for rounding or
truncating and reflect this. On the UI, ALL floating point values rendered will adhere
to the configured setting of rounding or truncating.
HA030554 Issue 16 95
Info menu
Gives information about the instrument hardware and software, and allows the user
to enter a descriptor for the instrument. The normal ‘Select, Scroll, Enter’ editing
technique, previously described) is used to edit those fields that are not read only.
Instrument.Info
Name nanodac
Type nanodac
Version 2.0
Bootrom 1.8
Company ID 1280
Config Rev 10
Security Rev 2
Nvol writes 339
Line Voltage 239.2 v

Wires Free 240
Figure 64 Info menu (expanded to show all fields)

Name Allows the user to enter a descriptor of up to 20 characters,
using the text entry techniques described in "Text Entry"
on page 89. The number of characters visible in the dis-
play mode pages varies according to the number of alarm
symbols on display.
Type Nano. Read only display of the instrument model (used by
‘iTools’).
Version Read only. The software version of the instrument.
Bootrom Read only. Instrument software Boot ROM version
Company ID Read only. For CNOMO1 purposes over Modbus (1280
decimal; 0500 hex).
Config Rev Read only. This value is updated, and a message including
this value generated, every time configuration is exited, if
any one or more configuration parameter has been
changed.
Security Rev Read only. This number is incremented every time config-
uration is exited, if any one or more passwords has been
changed, or if the FTP Server username has been
changed, or if the Comms Enable field has been edited.
Nvol writes Number of non volatile write operations for diagnostic pur-
poses.
Line voltage The instantaneous value of the supply voltage applied to
the instrument. Used in some control loop operations.
Wires Free This shows the number of wires free to be used. The value
takes into account all user wiring whether carried out at the
instrument or downloaded from the iTools graphical wiring
editor.
1. CNOMO = Comite de normalisation des moyens de production.
96 HA030554 Issue 16
Upgrade
This item allows the user to update the instrument firmware, either from a memory
stick in the USB socket at the rear of the unit, or via FTP transfer from a host
computer. Firmware upgrade files are downloaded from the instrument manufacturer
and transferred to the instrument by memory stick or by FTP transfer. Splash screens
are prepared by the user and transferred using a memory stick. The unit restarts
automatically after an upgrade or splash screen replacement.
Note: After a firmware upgrade the Engineer password must be configured to allow
any further operation, see Engineer Password - Configuration (page 33). All user
accounts require an associated password.
CAUTION
INOPERABLE EQUIPMENT
Power must not be removed from the unit whilst upgrade is in progress.
The memory stick must not be removed whilst upgrade is in progress.
Removal of the either of the above whilst an upgrade is in progress, will cause
permanent damage to the unit.
damage.
Instrument.Upgrade
Upgrade Firmware (FTP) Instrument.Upgrade
Server IP Address 123.123.123.123 Upgrade Firmware (USB)

Account Username anonymous Source Path release
Account Password ****
Initiate No
Source Path release
Initiate No
Figure 65 Typical Upgrade menus

Upgrade Select ‘Firmware (USB)’, ‘Firmware (FTP)’, ‘Bootrom
(USB)’ or ‘Splash (USB)’ as the source of the upgrade.
Server IP Address For ‘Upgrade’ = ‘Firmware (FTP)’ only, this field must con-
tain the IP address of the PC which is to supply the up-
grade file.
Account Username For ‘Type’ = ‘Firmware (FTP)’ only, the username set up in
the host FTP server
Account Password For ‘Type’ = ‘Firmware (FTP)’ only, the password set up in
the host FTP server
Source Path The name of the directory from which the upgrade file is to
be read. This is only the name of the directory without any
path elements (e.g. ‘/’) included unless the path is ‘release/
upgrade/files’.
Initiate Select ‘Yes’ to initiate the upgrade.
HA030554 Issue 16 97
Customising the Splash Screen

‘Splash (USB)’ allows the user to select a new image for the splash screen (i.e. the
screen that appears at power up or restart). When ‘Initiate’ is set to ‘Yes’, the
instrument searches the USB device for a file called ‘splash.bmp’ located in the
‘release’ folder. If such a file is found, it is loaded, and the instrument re-starts with
the new image as the ‘splash’ screen. If no file is found, the request is ignored. If the
image is not of the correct type or size, the instrument re-starts with the default
splash screen.
The original splash screen is included on the ‘tools’ DVD, so that it can be restored if
required. Rules:
1. This feature is available only with Bootrom versions 2.0 and above.
2. The file must be located in a folder called ‘release’ and the file name must be
‘splash.bmp’.
3. The image must be 320 x 240; 24-bit resolution.
4. The image must be in bitmap (suffix.bmp) format.
5. The image may not exceed 256kB.
Security menu
This allows the user to enter passwords for all security levels (except logged out),
and to enable/disable serial communications security.
Instrument.Security
Engineer Pass **********

Supervisor Pass
Operator Pass
Feature Pass 12345
Feature2 Pass 1232
Feature3 Pass 54321
Comms Pass Enabled
OEM Pass
**********
OEM Entry
OEM Status Unlocked
Audit Trail No
Signing Yes
Authorisation No
Login Timeout Off

Pass Attempts Unlimited
Min Password Len 3
Sup Log Disabled No
Passwords Expire Off Default Config. option
uuu Pass Expires xx Days appears only if Engineer
Password = ResetConfig
Default Config. No
Figure 66 Security menu

Engineer Pass Gives access to configuration menus. The Engineer pass-
word must be configured to allow any access,
see Introduction - Initial Setup (page 33). The password
98 HA030554 Issue 16
can be edited here, if required, by entering an alternative

of up to 20 characters (Notes no.1).
If ‘ResetConfig’ (case sensitive) is entered as the Engineer
Password, the ‘Default Config.’ field appears allowing the
instrument default configuration to be restored (Notes no.
2).
Supervisor Pass A password of up to 20 characters must be entered here to
protect Supervisor level access.
Operator Pass A password of up to 20 characters must be entered here to
protect Operator level access.
If the Auditor (auditor) feature is enabled, this option is not
available as Operator level access is replaced by Users 1
to 25 - all configured user accounts must have an associ-
ated password, making them available for selection.
Note: User accounts, of any access level require a password, otherwise they will
not be available for selection.
Feature Pass This is a password supplied by the manufacturer to enable
the software options (e.g. Loop, Zirconia block, Toolkit
blocks, Batch, 21CF11, etc.). When applying for this pass-
word, the manufacturer will require the instrument’s MAC
address (Network.Interface menu "Interface" on page 110)
and the instrument’s firmware Version (Instrument.info
menu "Info menu" on page 96). The password is MAC ad-
dress dependent so that it cannot be used on any other in-
strument.
Note: When the Auditor feature is enabled, entry of an invalid feature password will
result in the feature codes becoming read-only for a period of 30 minutes. This is to
discourage multiple attempts to guess a feature password. This period cannot be
shortened.
Feature2/3 Pass Similar to ‘Feature Pass’ above, but for additional features.
Comms Pass Enables/disables password security for external communi-
cations (including via iTools). If set to ‘Enabled’, the Engi-
neer level password will be required if an attempt is made
to enter the configuration menus from a remote PC. If set
to ‘Disabled’, then access to configuration can be gained
over a communications link, without a password. If ena-
bled, then entry to configuration mode via the Instrument
Mode (IM) parameter must be completed within 5 seconds
of entering the password, or the attempt will fail.
NOTES:
1. It is recommended that only characters that appear on the user’s PC keyboard
be used in the Engineer password. The use of other characters makes it
necessary to use ‘Escape’ codes (e.g. Alt 0247 for the ‘÷’ sign) when trying to
enter configuration mode from iTools, for example.
2. Restoring factory default configuration can also be carried out in iTools, using the
Engineer password ‘ResetConfig’ and selecting Default Config to ‘Yes’.
OEM Pass The configured pass phrase used to enable / disable the
OEM security option. This field is editable whilst the OEM
Status is ‘Unlocked’ and the user has ‘Engineer’ access.
OEM Entry To lock or unlock the OEM security feature, the user must
enter the pass phrase entered in ‘OEM Pass’ above. The
default passcode is ‘OEM’ (in capitals).
OEM Status Read only ‘Locked’ or ‘Unlocked’ status display.
Audit Trail Determines whether an audit trail is written to the history
file (when set to ‘Yes’). When enabled, all configuration pa-
rameter changes, operator alarm acknowledgements, and
cloning status changes are recorded in the history. Note
HA030554 Issue 16 99
that during iTools and USB cloning, the audit trail is tempo-
rarily disabled since, potentially, every parameter could
change. However, the fact that a clone has been loaded
will be written to the history by the audit trail. This field ap-
pears only if the Auditor feature is enabled.
Signing When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), if a user tries to enter a sign-
able menu or edit a signable parameter, the signing dialog
will appear (see below). For the required action to proceed,
the selected signing user must enter their password and a
note (which cannot be blank), and then set Accept to ‘Yes’.
If signing is accepted, messages are added to the history
along with the entered note. This field appears only if the
Auditor feature is enabled.
Signed Engineer
Password
Note
Accept No
Figure 67 Signing dialog

Authorisation When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), similar to the Signing param-
eter above, an additional user (the authoriser) will need to
enter their password to approve the operation. Other than
the built-in Engineer or Supervisor accounts, an authoriser
will need to have Authorising permissions assigned to him
or her. Refer to section User Accounts (Auditor) to assign
this permission to a user. This field appears only if the Au-
ditor feature is enabled.
Signed Engineer
Authorised Supervisor
Password
Note
Accept No
Figure 68 Authorising dialog

Login Timeout Provides the option to log out an inactive (no key-presses
detected) user when a preset number of minutes have
elapsed. This can be set to ‘Off’ for no automatic timeout,
or between 1 and 99 minutes. This field appears only if the
Auditor feature is enabled.
Pass Attempts Specifies whether a user has unlimited attempts of logging
in (‘Unlimited’) or only three attempts before their account
is disabled from logging in (‘3’). This field only appears if
the Auditor feature is enabled.
Min Password Len Specifies the minimum number of characters allowed for a
password, between 3 and 9 characters. This field appears
only if the Auditor feature is enabled.
Sup Log Disabled Determines whether the Supervisor level login is permitted
(‘No’) or disabled (‘Yes’). It is recommended that this be
set to ‘Yes’ if the Auditor feature is used. This field only ap-
pears if the Auditor feature is enabled.
100 HA030554 Issue 16

Passwords Expire Provides the option to specify the number of days before a
password will expire. This can be set to ‘Off’ for no expiring
passwords, or between 1 and 999 days. The expiry coun-
ter is reset when the password is changed. When the
password expires, it will not work any more. The engi-
neer’s password never expires so as not to block all ac-
cess. This field appears only if the Auditor feature is
enabled.
{uuu} Pass Expires If the Passwords Expire parameter is set to any number
(other than ‘Off’), indicating that passwords will expire after
a set number of days, a list of all configured (and enabled)
users is displayed next to the Pass Expires parameter,
showing the number of days remaining before each ac-
count’s password will expire. These are read-only and can-
not be altered here. This field appears only if the Auditor
feature is enabled, and the Passwords Expire parameter is
set to anything other than ‘Off’.
Default Config This field appears only if ‘ResetConfig’ has been entered
as the Engineer Password. Selecting ‘Yes’ Causes the in-
strument to restart with default configuration (i.e. the in-
strument ‘cold starts’). See Note 2 above.
Note: After a cold start (returned to default configuration) the Engineer password
must be configured to allow any further operation, see Engineer Password -
Configuration (page 33). (All user accounts require an associated password).
OEM Security
In products that incorporate user wiring, the value of an application may lie more in
the user wiring (connecting the function blocks together) than in the configuration of
the instrument's parameters. OEM Security allows the user to prevent the application
from being copied either via comms (by iTools or a third party comms package) or via
the instrument's user interface.
When OEM security is enabled, users are prevented from accessing wiring (for
reading or writing) from any source (comms or user interface), and it is not possible to
Load or Save the configuration of the instrument via iTools or by using the
Save/Restore facility ("Save/Restore" on page 102).
From firmware version V5.00 onwards OEM Security is enhanced by providing an

option, enabled by a new parameter ‘Instrument.Security.OEMParamLists. This
parameter is available only through iTools and allows the OEM to:
1. Make all parameters that are read/write in Engineer access level only, read only
when the instrument is OEM locked AND it is in Engineer access level. It is
possible for the OEM to select up to 100 parameters which are to remain
read/write in Engineer access level.
2. Make up to 100 parameters that are read/write in Supervisor access level, read
only when the instrument is OEM locked.
Examples of how to set up OEM security are given in the iTools ("To Set Up OEM
Security" on page 376).
I/O fitted
This provides a read only display showing what type of input or output circuit is
associated with each set of rear terminals.
HA030554 Issue 16 101

Instrument.I/O Fitted
1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
LBLC (Dig.In)
4AC (Relay)
5AC (Relay)
Figure 69 I/O fitted display
I/O Types
Dig.IO Digital input/output
Relay Relay output
Dig.In Digital input
Dig.Out Digital output
DC.Op DC output
Note: The I/O types fitted in locations LALC, LBLC, 4AC and 5AC are always as
shown above. The types of I/O fitted in locations 1A1B, 2A2B and 3A3B depends on
the options specified at time of order.
Save/Restore
This allows the user to save and/or restore instrument clone configurations to a
memory stick inserted into the USB connector at the rear of the unit. The format of
the saved/restored files is iTools clone files (*.uic).
Selecting ‘Restore’ presents a list of clone files in the configured directory on the USB
device. (In the example below, the file is located in the basic usb0 directory - it has
not been saved to a particular configuration directory.)
When ‘Save’ is selected, the virtual keyboard must be used to enter the filename. If
the file already exists on the USB device, a warning appears offering ‘Cancel’ or
‘Overwrite’ alternatives.
Notes:
1. The ability to save and restore is disabled if OEM security is enabled.
2. Configuration save/restore is available only when the unit is logged into at
‘Engineer’ access level.
3. During USB cloning (USB save/restore), the priority of modbus slave comms is
lowered. This allows the save/restore process to complete in a minimal time
(around 60 seconds). During this period, modbus slave comms response times
will be extended and may result in the master device timing-out.
102 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.Save/Restore
RELEASE
Operation Restore history
Status Complete FileName.UIC
Figure 70 Save/Restore display
Operation Select ‘Save’ or ‘Restore’. Use the up/down arrow keys to

highlight the required UIC file, then use the scroll key to in-
itiate the operation.
Status Shows the status of the operation, as follows:
Inactive: Neither saving or restoring a clone file has oc-
curred since the last time the instrument was power cy-
cled.
Complete: Indicates that the cloning process has complet-
ed.
Restoring: Restore operation is currently in progress.
Saving: A clone file is currently being saved.
Cold started: A power-cycle of the product occurred
whilst a Restore operation was in progress. The
product configuration is unreliable and has been re-
set to factory default.
The ‘Restoring’ and ‘Saving’ status text is accompanied by an animated display
(circling green ‘flash’) to indicate that the operation is in progress.
Note: After a cold start (returned to default configuration) the Engineer password
must be configured to allow any further operation, see Engineer Password -
Configuration (page 33). (All user accounts require an associated password).
Input adjust
Notes:
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’
or ‘Off’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users logged in as ‘Engineer’ (see
"Login" on page 49).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 minutes) for it to
reach thermal equilibrium before an input adjust is performed.
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique
used is to select those channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each
channel to:
a. apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the
relevant input. When the instrument reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to
the relevant input. When the instrument reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
HA030554 Issue 16 103

Figure 71 shows a typical display when ‘Input adjust’ is selected from the Instrument
menu, and Apply Adjust has been selected. As can be seen, Channel 3 has
previously been adjusted.
Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Unadjusted
Channel 3 Adjusted
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Figure 71 Input adjust top level display

Channel 1 to 4 Shows the adjust status of each channel.
Apply Adjust Selecting ‘Yes’ initiates the adjustment procedure de-
scribed below.
Remove Adjust Selecting ‘Yes’ initiates the adjustment removal procedure
described below.
Abort Allows the user to abandon input adjustment at any point
in the procedure.
Adjustment Procedure
1. As shown in Figure 72, highlight the ‘Apply Adjust’ field, and operate the scroll
key to enter edit mode. Use the up or down arrow key to select ‘Yes’. Use the
scroll button to change Channel 1 ‘cross’ to a ‘tick’ (check mark). Similarly select
any other channels which require adjustment.
Instrument.Input Adjust Instrument.Input Adjust
Channel 1 Unadjusted Channel 1

Channel 3 Adjusted Channel 3
Apply Adjust Yes Start IP Adjust No
Remove Adjust No Remove Adjust No
Figure 72 Channel adjustment procedure (1)

2. Highlight the ‘Start IP ‘Adjust’ field and use the scroll and up/down arrow to select
‘Yes’. Use the scroll key again to enter the low value adjust page.
3. Apply the known low value and wait for the value to stabilise. Enter the ‘Low
Target Value’ (the value that the instrument is to read for the applied input).
When all is steady, use the scroll and up/down arrow to set the ‘Confirm Low’
field to ‘Yes’, then operate the scroll button again.
104 HA030554 Issue 16

Channel 1 Low Target Value 0.00

Channel 2 Confirm Low Yes
Channel 3 Channel 1 Value 0.21
Channel 4 Abort No
Start IP Adjust Yes
Abort No

4. The display changes to the high value adjust page.
5. Apply the known high value and wait for the value to stabilise. Enter the High
Target Value (the value that the instrument is to read for the applied input). When
all is steady, set ‘Confirm High’ to ‘Yes’.
High Target Value 0.00 Channel 1 Adjusted
Confirm High Yes Channel 2 Unadjusted

Channel 1 Value 9.79 Channel 3 Adjusted
Abort No Channel 4 Unadjusted
Apply Adjust Yes
Remove Adjust No
Removal Procedure
1. Set ‘Remove Adjust’ to ‘Yes’ and operate the scroll button.
2. Use the scroll and up/down arrow buttons to change the required channel icons
from crosses to ticks.
3. Select Remove IP Adjust to ‘Yes’ and operate the scroll key. The adjustment is
removed from all selected channels without further confirmation.

Apply Adjust Yes Remove IP Adjust Yes
Remove Adjust No Abort No
Figure 75 Channel adjustment removal
HA030554 Issue 16 105

Dual Input Channels

For the dual input channel option, input adjust is carried out as described above,
except that for any channel where dual inputs are configured, the user must initiate
adjustment to primary and secondary inputs separately. As shown in Figure 76, a
new field ‘Input on Channel’ is introduced for this purpose.
Input on Channel Primary Input on Channel Secondary
Channel 1 Unadjusted Channel 1 Unadjusted
Channel 2 Unadjusted Channel 3 Unadjusted

Channel 3 Unadjusted Apply Adjust No
Channel 4 Unadjusted Remove Adjust No
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No Only those channels with ‘Type’ set to ‘Dual mA’,
‘Dual mV’ or ‘Dual T/C’ appear in the list of secondary
channels. In this example, only channels 1 and 3 are
configured as dual input. (See "Channel Main" on
page 123 for channel Type configuration.)
Figure 76 Input adjust top level display (dual input channels)

For primary inputs, all four channels are included in the list and can therefore be
selected for adjustment. For secondary inputs, only those channels which have been
configured as dual input are included.
Output adjust
This item appears only if one or more of I/O type DC Output is fitted and allows the
user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. in connected equipment.
1A1B and 2A2B can be configured only as mA
DC Output 3A3B Unadjusted outputs.
DC Output 2A2B Unadjusted
3A3B can be configured as mA or Volts. See "DC
Apply Adjust No Output" on page 195 for configuration details.
Remove Adjust No
Figure 77 Output adjust initial display
Adjust Procedure
1. Highlight the ‘Apply Adjust’ field, and operate the scroll key to enter edit mode.
Use the up or down arrow key to select the required output and confirm with the
scroll key. The output adjust page appears for the low point.
2. Measure the output at the required point, and enter this value in the ‘Measured
Output’ field using the text entry techniques described in "Text Entry" on page 89.
To skip this stage go to step 3.
3. Set ‘Confirm Low’ to ‘Yes’. The output adjust page appears for the high point.
4. Measure the output at the required point, and enter this value in the ‘Measured
Output’ field as described for the low point. To skip this stage go to step 5.
106 HA030554 Issue 16

5. Set ‘Confirm High’ to ‘Yes’. The output adjust initial display reappears, with the
word ‘Adjusted’ in the relevant DC Output field.
Output 2V Output 10V

Measured Output 2.000 Measured Output 10.000
Confirm Low No Confirm High No
Abort No Abort No
Figure 78 Low and High adjust point displays

Notes:
1. The figures above show the displays when the DC output is set to ‘Volts’ ("DC
Output" on page 195) (3A3B only). The mA displays are similar, but the fixed low
and high values are 4mA and 20mA respectively
2. ‘Abort’ cancels operations so far and returns to the output adjust initial display
(Figure 77).
DC Output 3A3B Adjusted

DC Output 2A2B Unadjusted
Apply Adjust No
Remove Adjust No
Figure 79 Adjusted display
Adjust Removal
In the output adjust initial display (Figure 79) highlight the ‘Remove Adjust’ field, and
operate the scroll key to enter edit mode. Use the up or down arrow key to select the
required output and confirm with the scroll key. The output adjustment is removed,
without confirmation. The initial display returns to ‘Unadjusted’ as in Figure 77.
User Accounts (Auditor)

The User 1 to User 25 options only appear if the Auditor feature is enabled. These
parameters provide up to twenty five additional user accounts, each of which can be
configured with customisable levels of permission. The built-in Operator account is
disabled when this feature is enabled, but the default username for User 1 is set as
‘Operator’. Note that when the Auditor feature is enabled, the Logged Out user has
no permissions. Select the user account you wish to configure and press the scroll
key. The user configuration page appears.
HA030554 Issue 16 107

Instrument.User 1
Username User 1
Password **********
Batch Control No
Ack Alarms No
Demand Archiving No
Login Disabled Yes
Authorising No
Archive Interval No
Figure 80 User account configuration

Username The username for the user (up to 20 characters). Typically
only the first 12 characters are displayed in scroll lists
(such as when logging on) due to space. User 1 defaults to
the user called “Operator”, which replaces the standard
Operator account when the Auditor feature is enabled.
This standard account has no additional permissions ap-
plied to it, however, and can be modified, disabled, or over-
written. When logging in, the user account number (1 to
25) is prefixed to the username so that each name is
unique.
Password The password for the user being edited (up to 20 charac-
ters).
Batch Control When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user can control batches
via the batch control page (see "Batch Control" on
page 76) from the batch summary page.
Ack Alarms When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user can acknowledge
alarms in the alarm summary page (refer to Alarm Summa-
ry -"Go to View" on page 43).
Demand Archiving When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user can access the De-
mand Archiving page (see "Demand Archiving" on
page 46 for further details).
Login Disabled When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user is disabled and can-
not login, sign or authorise. Set to ‘No’ to enable the user.
If the maximum number of login attempts has been ex-
ceeded for an account, this parameter is automatically set
to ‘Yes’ to prevent further login attempts. The number of
login attempts permitted is set using the ‘Pass Attempts’
parameter in the Security menu (refer to "Security menu"
on page 98). Each failed login attempt is recorded in the
history, as is the user’s login being disabled after the spec-
ified number of failed login attempts.
Signing When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user will appear in the
user scroll list of the signing dialogue (refer to the Signing
parameter in "Security menu" on page 98).
Authorising When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user will appear in the
user scroll list of the authorising dialogue (refer to the Au-
thorisation parameter in "Security menu" on page 98).
Archive Interval When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the archive interval will be
writeable in the user page; otherwise it will be read-only
(refer to "User menu" on page 42 for details).
Loop Control When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user can change the set-
point, Mode and Manual output fields in the loop control
screens (refer to "Control Loop1/Loop2" on page 57 for de-
tails).
108 HA030554 Issue 16

Program Mode When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user can change the
mode of programs (see "Programmer Display Mode" on
page 59).
Program Edit When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), the user can edit programs
(see “Program Editing” on page 40 within "Programmer
Display Mode" on page 59).
Program Store When enabled (set to ‘Yes’), then user can store programs
(see “Program Details” on page 41 within "Programmer
Display Mode" on page 59).
Network Menu
Network
Interface Archiving FTP Server Modbus BACnet

("Interface" on ("Archiving" on ("FTP Server" on ("Modbus TCP" on ("BACnet" on
page 110) page 111) page 114) page 115) page 116)
MAC address Media size User name Prefmaster IP Device ID
Client Identifier Media free Password Address Port
IP type Media duration Input timeout Password
IP address Rate Unit ID Enable BBMD Status
Subnet mask Destination Serial Mode BBMD IP Address
Gateway File format Time Format BBMD Port
SNTP Enable On media full Pref Master Conn BBMD TTL
SNTP Server Remote path Response time Rx Count
Primary server Master Conn 2 Tx Count
Primary user Response time Reset Counts
Primary password Master Conn 3
Secondary server Response time
Secondary user Master Conn 4
Secondary password Response time
Trigger
Period
HA030554 Issue 16 109

Interface
This area of configuration allows the user to set up an IP address for the instrument,
either by typing one in (Fixed), or automatically (DHCP), assuming a DHCP server is
running.
Network.Interface
MAC 00:0A:8D:01:90:00
Client identifier 01000A8D019000

IP Type DHCP
IP Address 123.123.123.123
Subnet Mask 255.255.248.0
Gateway 234.234.234.234
SNTP Enable Yes
SNTP Server 192.168.111.123
Figure 81 Network Interface menu

MAC Read only. Media Access Control. A unique address for
each instrument, entered at the factory.
Client Identifier The client identifier is a unique id used by DHCP servers
that implement option 61. Each nanodac product will have
a unique ID built up from its MAC address. If the DHCP
server is configured to use option 61, then it will use this ID
instead of the MAC address to assign a dynamic IP ad-
dress.
IP Type If ‘Fixed’, the user needs to enter an IP address and Sub-
net Mask in the following fields, and a Gateway address if
required.
If ‘DHCP’ the subsequent fields become read only, with the
entries automatically generated by the DHCP server.
When set to DHCP, it takes several seconds before the IP
address is obtained from the DHCP server.
IP Address Read only if ‘IP Type’ = ‘DHCP’.
If ‘IP Type’ = ‘Fixed’, the user may enter an IP address
(IPV4 dot notation). This would normally be supplied by the
user’s IT department, or from the Network supervisor.
Subnet Mask Read only if ‘IP Type’ = ‘DHCP’.
If ‘IP Type’ = ‘Fixed’, this sets a range of IP addresses that
can be accessed. Normally supplied by the user’s IT de-
partment, or from the Network supervisor.
Gateway Read only if ‘IP Type’ = ‘DHCP’.
If ‘IP Type’ = ‘Fixed’ this allows the user to enter a gateway
address for use when the unit is to communicate outside
the local network. Normally supplied by the user’s IT de-
partment, or from the Network supervisor.
SNTP Enable Select ‘Yes’ to allow time synchronisation from a Simple
Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to be enabled.
When enabled the instrument time is updated every 15
minutes.
SNTP always works using UTC/GMT. Time zones are
handled separately.
SNTP is a protocol that allows clients on a TCP/IP network
to synchronise the instrument clock with that of a server -
port number 123. nanodac can act only as a client.
Servers such as Microsoft ‘TimeServ’ cannot be used with
the nanodac because they are not SNTP servers.
The SNTP client used in nanodac will not support stratum
15 server.
110 HA030554 Issue 16

SNTP Server The IP address of the SNTP Server. This only appears if
the SNTP server is enabled.
If ‘IP Type’ is set to ‘DHCP’, the SNTP Server address is
automatically assigned. Although this address can be al-
tered it will be overwritten once the instrument is power cy-
cled. The SNTP address should only be entered manually
if ‘IP Type’ is set to ‘Fixed’.
For a description of SNTP alarms see "Status Bar Icons" on page 38.
Archiving
This area of configuration is used to set up the parameters for use during unattended
archiving. Some of the fields appear only if other fields are set to a particular value.
For example, the CSV fields appear only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or to ‘Both’.
The archived data is not removed from the flash memory of the instrument. When the
flash memory is full, new data causes the oldest file(s) to be discarded.
Note: For remote archiving, the host computer must be set up to respond to ‘pings’.
This is because the nanodac pings the host whilst establishing connection, and if it
does not receive a response, the archive attempt fails.
Network.Archiving Network.Archiving
Media Size 1907.46 MB Rate Monthly

Media Free 1902.90 MB Destination USB
Media Duration 763.77 Days File Format Both

Rate Automatic CSV Values Yes
Destination FTP server CSV Messages No
File Format Binary (UHH) CSV Headers No
On Media Full Overwrite CSV Headings Yes
Remote Path /archive CSV Date Format Text

Primary Server 123.123.123.123 CSV Tab Del No
Primary User history On Media Full Overwrite
Primary Password ****** Remote Path /archive

Sec. Server 234.234.234.234 Primary Server 123.123.123.123
Sec. User history Primary User history
Sec. Password anonymous Primary Password ******
Trigger No Sec. Server 234.234.234.234
Period None Sec. User history

Sec. Password anonymous
Remote with Binary file format
Trigger No
Period None
Local with CSV files included
Figure 82 Unattended Archive configuration (typical settings)

Media Size Appears only for File Format = ‘Binary (UHH)’. A read only
value showing the capacity of the memory stick inserted in
the USB port at the rear of the unit. Shows zero if no mem-
ory stick is present.
Media Free Appears only for File Format = ‘Binary (UHH)’. A read only
value showing the space remaining in the memory stick in-
HA030554 Issue 16 111

serted in the USB port at the rear of the unit. Shows zero if
no memory stick is present.
Media Duration Appears only for File Format = ‘Binary (UHH)’. A read only
value showing the time it will take to fill the Memory stick if
the instrument configuration remains unchanged.
Rate Allows the user to specify the frequency at which the con-
tents of the Flash memory are archived to the USB port or,
via FTP, to a PC. Scrollable settings are:
None: Automatic archiving is disabled. Any archiving must
be initiated by the user using Demand Archiving, as de-
scribed in "Demand Archiving" on page 46.
Hourly: Archive occurs on the hour, every hour.
Daily: Archive initiated at 00:00* each day.
Weekly: Archive is initiated at midnight* every Sunday.
Monthly: Archive is initiated at 00:00* on the 1st of every
month.
Automatic: The instrument selects the least frequent of the
above archive periods which is guaranteed not to lose data
as a result of the internal flash memory’s running out of
space.
Note: * Archive times are not adjusted for daylight saving time (DST). Thus, if the
archive is set to ‘Daily’, ‘Weekly’ or ‘Monthly’, then during summer time, the archive
will be triggered an hour late (i.e at 01:00 hours instead of midnight).
Destination Select ‘FTP Server’ for archive to a remote PC, or ‘USB’ to
archive to the USB port device.
File format Select ‘Binary (UHH)’ ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’.
Binary (UHH): A proprietary format used by the instrument
that needs other software (e.g. Review’, to interpret the
data before it can be presented in spreadsheets etc. Bina-
ry files have the extension ‘.uhh’.
CSV: This format is a standard open-file format for numeric
data. A simple ASCII-based format, it is readable by a wide
range of pc applications as well as being suitable for direct
import into many commercial databases. CSV files have
the extension ‘.csv’.
Both: Archiving includes both .uhh and .csv files.
Note: Note: CSV is ASCII based and cannot interpret Unicode characters. For this
reason, some characters available to the user will not be displayed correctly in *.csv
files.
CSV Values Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If
‘Yes’ is selected, then process values are included in the
file (see Figure 83 for details).
CSV Messages Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If
‘Yes’ is selected, then messages are included in the file
(see Figure 83 for details).
CSV Headers Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If
‘Yes’ is selected, then Header details are included in the
CSV Headings Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. If
‘Yes’ is selected, then column headers are included in the
CSV Date Format Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’. Allows
‘Text’ or ‘Spreadsheet’ to be selected. Text causes a
time/date to appear in the spreadsheet. ‘Spreadsheet Nu’
displays the number of days since December 30th 1899.
The decimal part of the number represents the latest six
hours. For example: DDD--- --DD.25 represents 06:00
hours and DDD--- --DD.5 represents 12:00 hours. Spread-
112 HA030554 Issue 16

sheet Numeric format is more easily interpreted than ‘Text’

by some spreadsheet applications.
CSV Tab Del Appears only if ‘File Format’ is set to ‘CSV’ or ‘Both’.
CSV (Comma Separated Variables) does not always use
commas as separators. For example, in some countries
the decimal point is represented by a full stop (period),
whilst in others a comma is used. In order to avoid confu-
sion between a comma as a decimal point and a comma
as a separator, a different separator can be used. This field
allows the ‘tab’ character (^t) to be used instead of a com-
ma.
On Media Full For ‘Destination’ = ‘USB’ only, this allows the user to select
‘Overwrite’ or ‘Stop’ as the action to be taken when the
memory stick is full. ‘Overwrite’ causes the oldest data to
be discarded from the memory stick to make room for new-
er data. ‘Stop’ inhibits archiving activity.
Remote Path Left blank if the archive destination is the home folder. If
the destination is to a subfolder within the home folder,
then the name of the subfolder is entered here, preceded
by a ‘/’ character (e.g. ‘/history’).
Primary Server Allows the user to enter the IP address for the PC to be
used as the primary FTP server.
Primary User/Password
These are the Login name and password of the remote
host account, assigned either by the Network administra-
tor, or set up in the ‘Guest’ account of the remote host’s
‘FTP server’ or ‘User Manager’ configuration.
Sec. Server/user/password
As Primary server details above, but for the secondary
FTP server used when the primary is not available for any
reason.
Trigger This parameter can be ‘wired’ to, say, an alarm going ac-
tive, or a digital input, to allow an archive to be triggered re-
motely. Can also be set to ‘yes’ manually.
Period Appears only if ‘Trigger’ is wired ("iTOOLS"). Allows a pe-
riod of history to be selected for archiving when ‘Trigger’
goes ‘true. Selections are: None, Last Hour, Last Day, Last
Week, Last Month, All, Bring to Date. (‘Last Month’ ar-
chives the last 31 days of history.)
HA030554 Issue 16 113

Click/drag separator
to edit field width
Include header
details
Include column
headings
Include values
Right click, then: Include messages

Format cells...
select ‘time’ as number category
Select time/date ‘type’ as required.
Figure 83 CSV data example
FTP Server
This area of configuration allows the user to enter the Username and Password used
to access the instrument from a remote FTP client.
114 HA030554 Issue 16

Modbus TCP
This allows the user to configure the instrument so as to allow it to communicate
using Modbus Transmission Control Protocol.
Network.Modbus
PrefMaster IP 123.123.123.123
Address 1
Input Timeout 0 sec
Unit ID Enable Instrument

Serial Mode Modbus Slave
Time Format Seconds
PrefMaster Conn 123.123.123.123
Response Time 0
Master Conn 1 0.0.0.0
Response Time 0
Response Time 0

Response Time 0
Response Time 0
Figure 84 Modbus TCP configuration menu

PrefMaster IP The IP address of the relevant Modbus master. The Pre-
ferred master is guaranteed to be able to connect, even if
all slave connections (max. = 4 for TCP) are in use.
Address The Modbus address for this slave. This address must be
unique for the network to which it is attached. The instru-
ment will respond to this address and to Address 255.
Input Timeout Allows a value of between 0 and 3600 seconds to be en-
tered to set the timeout period for modbus input channels.
If a Modbus input is not written to within this period the val-
ue of the channel is set to -9999.0 with a 'No Data' status.
A value of 0 disables the comms inactivity timeout feature.
Unit ID Enable Enables/Disables the checking of the Modbus TCP unit
identity field.
Strict The Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not
have to match the instrument address. The instrument re-
sponds only to Hex value FF in the UIF. iTools finds this in-
strument only at location 255, and then stops scanning.
LooseThe Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) does not
have to match the instrument address. The instrument re-
sponds to any value in the UIF.
InstrumentThe Modbus TCP Unit Identity Field (UIF) must
match the instrument address or no response will be made
to messages.
Serial Mode Slave communications via the side mounted configuration
port interface (CPI) clip (for iTools use.) Parameters: Baud
rate = 19,200; Parity = none; Number of data bits = 8;
Number of stop bits = 1; no flow control. Can be set to
‘Modbus Slave’ or ‘Off’. The unit must be restarted before
any change takes effect.
HA030554 Issue 16 115

Time Format Allows the user to choose milliseconds, seconds, minutes

or hours as the time format. Sets the resolution for the
reading and writing of time format parameters.
PrefMaster Conn Read only. Shows the IP address of the preferred master,
when connected.
Response Time Read only. Shows the response time for a single commu-
nications request to the relevant master.
Master Conn 1 to 4 Read only. Shows the IP addresses of any other masters
connected to this instrument.
BACnet
This allows the user to configure the instrument so as to allow it to be used as a
BACnet device on a BACnet/ IP BMS network.
Network.BACnet
Device ID 0
Port 47808
Password **********
BBMD Status X
BBMD IP Address 0.0.0.0
BBMD Port 47808
BBMD TTL 60
Rx Count 0
Tx Count 0
Reset Counts No
Figure 85 BACnet configuration menu

Device ID The instance ID for this instrument. Must be unique on the
network. Range is 0 - 4194302.
Port The BACnet I/P standard port is 47808. Valid values are:
1024 -65535.
Password The BACnet password for Remote Device Management.
Maximum 20 characters.
BBMD Status Enable or disable registration of the instrument as a for-
eign device. Default is ‘x’ (disabled).
BBMD IP Address The IP address of this instrument as a BACnet/IP Broad-
cast Management Device. Default is 0.0.0.0.
BBMD Port The port this instrument communicates through as a BAC-
net/IP Broadcast Management Device. Standard Port is
47808. Range is 1024 - 65535.
BBMD TTL The Time to Live for this instrument as a BACnet/IP Broad-
cast Management Device. The default value is ‘60’. Range
is 0 - 65535.
Rx Count A count of messages received.
Tx Count A count of messages transmitted.
Reset Counts Set to ‘Yes’ and the Rx and Tx Counts are reset to zero.
Once the counts are reset, this option reverts to ‘No’.
116 HA030554 Issue 16

Group Configuration
Group configuration is separated into two areas, one which defines trending
characteristics (for display channels) the other defining the recording characteristics
for saving data to the Flash memory ready for archiving.
Group Trend configuration

This allows the user to define which points are to be traced on the display and at what
interval, and also allows the number of chart divisions to be set up. Figure 86 shows
a typical configuration page.
Note: The background chart colour is set up as a part of Instrument Display

configuration ("Display configuration" on page 94).
Group.Trend
Descriptor Group 1
Interval 0.25 sec
Major Divisions
10
Point1 Channel1
Point2 Channel2
Point3 Channel3
Point4 Channel4
Point5 No Trend
Point6 VirtualChan1
Figure 86 Group Trend Configuration

Descriptor Allows the user to enter a descriptor (20 characters max.)
for the group.
Interval The trending interval which defines how much data ap-
pears on one screen height or width. A number of discrete
intervals can be chosen between 0.125 seconds to 1 hour.
The selection should be made according to how much de-
tail is required, and how much data is to be visible on the
screen.
Major Divisions Allows the user to select the number of divisions into which
the scale is divided and how many gridlines are displayed.
Setting the value to 1 results in just the zero and full scale
values appearing. Setting the value to 10 (the maximum)
results in a scale with zero, full scale and nine intermediate
values appearing, with associated grid lines.
Point1 to Point6 Allows the user to select which channels and virtual chan-
nels are to be traced. The maximum number of traces is
six.
Group Recording configuration

Similar to Trend configuration, above, but for saving the data to Flash memory history
files. Each point can individually be enabled or disabled for recording, or recording
can be disabled for the whole group.
Figure 87 shows a typical page.
HA030554 Issue 16 117

Group.Recording
Flash Size 50.00 MB

Flash Duration 17.06 Days
Enable Yes
Interval 1 sec
UHH Compression Normal
Channel 1 Yes
Channel 2 Yes
Channel 3 Yes
Channel 4 Yes
VirtualChan 1 Yes
VirtualChan 2 No
VirtualChan 30 No
Suspend No
Figure 87 Group trend recording configuration

Flash Size Read only. Shows the size of the Flash memory fitted in
MB.
Flash Duration Read only. Shows the time it will take to fill the Flash mem-
ory if the instrument configuration remains unchanged.
Enable ‘Yes’ enables group recording so that all points set to ‘Yes’
are stored in the instrument’s flash memory. ‘No’ disables
group recording.
Interval Defines the rate at which data is saved to the instrument’s
Flash memory. The value affects how much trace history
appears on the screen in trend history mode.
UHH Compression Select ‘Normal’ or ‘High’. ‘Normal’ compresses the data,
but still provides an exact copy. ‘High’ compresses more,
but values are saved only to 1 part in 108 resolution. See
also note 1, below.
Channel 1 to VirtualChan 30 (see note 2, below)
Read only (greyed ‘yes’) for points being trended, (these
are automatically recorded). For non-trending points the
user may enable or disable each point individually.
Suspend Ignored unless the user has wired to this field. If wired then
when set to 'No' recording is active, when set to 'Yes' re-
cording is paused.
Notes:
1. Where very high values are involved, such as in some totaliser values, ‘High’
compression may cause the value displayed at the instrument, and held in the
history file, to be incorrect. The problem may be resolved by changing to ‘Normal’
compression, or, in the case of a totaliser, by re-scaling it (for example from
MegaWatt hours to TeraWatt hours).
2. Virtual channels 1 to 15 are included in the standard build. Channels 16 to 30 are
included only if the Modbus Master and/or EtherNet/IP option is fitted.
118 HA030554 Issue 16

Batch Configuration
Batch records form a part of recording history and are identified by messages that
are written to the history file indicating when a batch starts and ends, along with
additional customisable textual information. Batches can be initiated directly by the
operator, automatically whenever a specific PV value is reached, or remotely via
Modbus.
Batches can be defined as Start/Stop or Continuous. For Start/Stop batches, the

batch record starts when the batch is started and continues until it is stopped. For
continuous batches, the batch record starts when the batch is started and continues
until the next batch is started, or until batch recording is disabled.
When a batch is started, a start message is included in the history in the format:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch Start <User>
where DD/MM/YY is the date, HH:MM:SS is the time, and <User> is the current user
name, security level (Engineer, for example), or ‘Modbus’ if initiated remotely). A
similar message is written to the history when the batch is stopped. There are no stop
messages written if the batch is in Continuous mode.
In addition to the above Start/Stop messages, up to six lines of text can, if required,
be written to the history at the start of a batch, and, if required, at the end of the
batch. The messages are in two parts, the field descriptor, and the field value. The
field descriptors are entered in the parameters ‘Field 1’ to ‘Field 6’ in the Batch
Configuration menu. The field values associated with these descriptors are entered
by the operator at initiation. The field descriptors and content can be used to label the
batch with identifiable information, such as the batch number, customer name, and
so on. The use of ‘Field 1’ is mandatory for a batch to be started, and is unique
because this particular field can also have an automatically populated PV value if
configured in this way.
The following shows the options in the Batch Configuration menu. Note that some
options will not be available depending on the security level of the logged on user.
HA030554 Issue 16 119

Engineer view Supervisor view
Batch
Batch
Mode Start/Stop Active No

Fields 1 Start Date 25/1/16
Field 1 Field 1 Start Time 11:30:37
Batch Field 1 Use Text Duration 00:28:33
Field 2 Field 2 Mode Start/Stop
Field 3 Field 3 Fields 6

Field 4 1Field 4 Field 1 Field 1
Field 5 Field 5 Batch Field Use Text

Field 6 Field 6 Field 2 Field 2
On Start Log 1 ... Field ...
On Stop Log 1 Field 6 Field 6
On New Clear 1 On Start Log 6
Print Versions Yes On Stop Log 6
File By Name Yes On New Log 1
PV Start 0 Print Versions Yes

Start No File By Name Yes
Stop No New Yes

Data 1
...
Data 6
PV Start 0
Start No
Stop No
Figure 88 Batch configuration menu

Active Read-only field showing whether batch is currently run-
ning.
Start Date Read-only field showing the date the batch was started, or
the last date the batch was started if a batch is not currently
active.
Start Time Read-only field showing the time the batch was started, or
the last time the batch was started if a batch is not currently
active.
Duration Read-only field showing the length of time the current
batch has been running, or the length of time the last batch
ran for if a batch is not currently active.
Mode Determines whether a batch process runs once after start-
ing, stopping when the batch ends (‘Start/Stop’), or runs
continuously (‘Continuous’).
Fields Specifies how many messages (between one and six) can
be written to the history file at batch start, stop and new.
For each field, customised field descriptors can be set us-
ing the ‘Field 1’ to ‘Field 6’ parameters. The value (content)
of each field can be entered when a new batch is initiated.
Field 1 can be set to automatically contain the current PV
at batch start (see ‘Batch Field 1’ parameter below).
Field 1-6 Allows the user to enter customised text for the field de-
scriptors that can be written to the history file during batch
120 HA030554 Issue 16

start, stop and new. Values for these fields descriptors

must be entered by the user prior to Batch initiation. The
number of Field lines is dependent upon the value in the
‘Fields’ parameter. A maximum of 20 characters per field
is allowed.
Batch Field 1 Determines whether the value (content) associated with
‘Field 1’ should use the text de-fined in the Field 1 param-
eter when the batch starts (‘Use Text’), or whether the val-
ue should be the PV value at batch start (‘Use PV Start’).
On Start Log Defines how many of customised fields (Field 1 to Field 6)
are written to the history file at batch start. An entry of ‘1’
means that only Field 1 will be written. An entry of ‘2’
means that Fields 1 and 2 will be used, and so on. An entry
of ‘0’ means that only the ‘Batch Start’ message is written.
It is not possible to record, only, Field 3, for example. If
Field 3 is required, it will be preceded by Fields 1 and 2.
On Stop Log As fir the On Start Log parameter above, but for batch
stop. This item appears only if Start/ Stop is selected as the
batch mode (‘Mode’ parameter).
On New Clear This parameter determines how many Field values are
cleared when a new batch is initiated. For example, if Field
1 were used to record a batch number, and Field 2 were
used to record the customer name, a value of ‘1’ in the pa-
rameter will force the user to enter the batch number (Field
1 descriptor) at each new batch instance. If this parameter
were set to ‘2’, the user would have to enter the batch num-
ber and customer number at each new batch instance.
In each case, a new batch cannot be started without new
values first being entered. A value of ‘0’, however, clears
no existing fields, and a new batch can be started without
any additional entry of field values.
Print Versions Determines whether the configuration and security revi-
sion numbers are written to the history file when a batch
starts.
File By Name As an aid to identification, if this parameter is set to ‘Yes’,
the value of the Data 1 parameter (see below) is inserted
into the history file name. For example, if the contents of
the Data 1 parameter were “BAT060515.001”, then the file
name will appear in the form:
Group Name~060515.001~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHH-
HHHHHHH where YYYYYYMMDD is the date and
HH...HH is a 16 digit hex code used by the instrument and
by the Review software to identify the file.
If the File By Name parameter is set to ‘No’, the file history
file name appear as:
Group Name~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
New This field is only accessible when no active batch is
running and you are logged on as a supervisor. Setting this
field to ‘Yes’ will initialise a new batch and clear the param-
eters Data 1 to Data 6 depending on the value of parame-
ter, On New Clear, above. A new batch must be initialised
before the ability to Start a new batch is available. The user
must ensure that all Data 1 to Data 6 fields (where applica-
ble) have values in them before being able to start a new
batch.
Data 1 - Data 6 When a new batch is initialised (using the New parameter
above), the content of these fields are cleared according to
the On New Clear parameter, above, and new values can
be input by the user. A batch cannot be started until the
Data 1 to Data 6 fields have content in them, which are the
values assigned to the Fields 1 to 6 descriptors. These are
typically used to record the batch number, and any other
HA030554 Issue 16 121

generic or specific information that will be written to the his-

tory file upon batch start and stop. The number of Data
fields presented is controlled by the value in the Fields pa-
rameter, above.
PV Start Defines the PV at which the Batch process should start.
This field is only visible when the Batch Field 1 is set to
‘Use PV Start’.
Start Starts the batch process. This field is only available when
signed in as a Supervisor and, at the very least, the ‘Data
1’ parameter has content defined. This field is not visible
when the Batch Field 1 is set to ‘Use PV Start’, as the batch
process starts automatically at a defined PV.
Stop Stops the batch process. This field is only available when
signed in as a Supervisor and a batch is currently running.
This field is not visible when the batch Mode is set to ‘Con-
tinuous’.
Initiating a new Batch

This section describes how the user initiates a new batch, and assumes batch
options have already been con-figured (see "Batch Configuration" on page 119).
Initialising a batch does not, in itself, start a new batch. Instead, initialising a new
batch sets all the parameters in a state ready for batch to be started, which can then
be done manually, automatically based on a PV value, or over Modbus.
To initiate a batch, a user with appropriate permissions needs to be logged in. This
typically means the Super-visor user, or if the Auditor feature is enabled, then any
user account that has Batch permission granted to it. Note that the Engineer user
cannot initiate, start or stop a batch.
Once logged in, the user can initiate a new batch by using the Batch Control page
(see "Batch Control" on page 76) or the Batch Configuration page ("Batch
Configuration" on page 119). In either page, scroll to the ‘New’ field and change the
value to ‘Yes’. All, some or none of the Data fields will be cleared (from the value they
last held) depending on the value of the ‘On New Clear’ parameter in the Batch
Configuration menu.
Populate the Data fields as appropriate. These fields are used to store specific
batch-related information, the content of which are appended to the history file.
Unless the batch is configured to start when a specific PV value is reached, at least
the first Data field must be populated.
For instances where batch is configured to start at a specific PV value, set the ‘PV
Start’ to the desired PV start value. This value is copied to the first Data field
automatically when the batch starts so it is recorded in the History file.
Starting a Batch
Once a new batch has been initialised (see the previous section, "Initiating a new
Batch" on page 122). The batch can be started (assuming the batch Mode is defined
as ‘Start/Stop’ and not ‘Continuous’).
If the batch has not been configured to start when PV reaches a specific value,
navigate to the Start parameter and change the value to ‘Yes’. The batch then starts.
If the batch has been configured to start when PV reaches a specific value, initialising
the batch is all that is needed for a batch to be armed to start at the appropriate PV.
No further action is required.
122 HA030554 Issue 16

The batch can also be started (and stopped) by utilising User Wiring, linking another
parameter to ‘Batch Start’ or ‘Batch Stop’. Refer to Section 10 for further details of
User Wiring.
Starting a Batch using Modbus

It is possible to start a Batch via Modbus by setting the Batch Start flag to 0001 at
Modbus address 0x3058. If the Batch mode is ‘Start/Stop’, batches can also be
stopped via Modbus by setting the value 0001 at address 0x3059. For a list of all
Modbus addresses relating to Batch, refer to the BatchSection Batch sub-section
within "Parameter List" on page 232.
Input Channel Configuration
Channel
N Select channel number
Main Trend Alarm 1/2

("Channel Main" on page 123) ("Channel Trend configuration" ("Alarm 1 menu" on page 128)
Descriptor on page 127) Type
Type Colour Status
PV Span low Threshold
Status Span high Hysteresis
IP adjust state Latch
Resolution Block
Units Dwell
Test signal Acknowledge
Input low/high Active
Shunt value Inactive
Linearisation type Not acknowledged
Range low/high Acknowledgment
Scale low/high
Offset
CJ type
Filter
Sensor break type
Fault Response
Sensor break value
Measured value
Internal CJ Temp
Figure 89 Channel configuration menu
Channel Main
This section describes all possible menu items, but it should be noted that some
items are context dependent (e.g. Cold Junction settings appear only for Type =
‘Thermocouple’).
Channels one to four in the configuration relate to An In 1 (terminals 1I, 1+ and 1-) to
An In 4 (terminals 4I, 4+ and 4-) respectively -see Figure 4, in Section "Installation".
HA030554 Issue 16 123

Channel.1.Main
Descriptor Channel 1
Type Thermocouple
PV 197.35
Status Good
IP Adjust State Adjusted
Resolution 2
Units °C
Test Signal Triangle 5 Hr

Input Low 0
Input High 10
Shunt 2.49
Lin Type Type K
Range Low 0.00

Range High 100.00
Range Units °C
Scale Low 0.00
Scale High 100.00

Offset 0.000
CJ Type External
Ext CJ Temp 0.00
Filter 1.0 sec
Sensor Break Type Break High
Fault Response Drive Low

Sensor Break Val 1%
Measured Value 0.2
Internal CJ Temp 35.1
Figure 90 Channel main menu (expanded)

Note: For the sake of completeness, the figure above shows all possible fields,
even though many are mutually exclusive. For example, ‘Test signal’ appears only
when ‘Test’ is selected as Type. It would never appear when Type = thermocouple
(as shown). Similarly, ‘Shunt’ would appear only for Type = mA.
Descriptor Allows a (20 character max.) descriptor to be entered for
the channel. Some thought should be given to ensure that
the descriptor is meaningful because in some display
screens it is truncated. For example, ‘Furnace 1 area 1’
and ‘Furnace 1 area 2’ might both appear as ‘Furnace 1 a’
and thus be indistinguishable from one another, except in
background colour.
PV Read only. Displays the current value of the channel.
Status Read only. Shows the channel status as one of: ‘Good’,
‘Channel Off’, ‘Over range’, ‘Under range’, ‘HW error’,
‘Ranging’, ‘HW (capability) exceeded’.
PV2 Read only. For dual inputs only, displays the current value
of the secondary input.
Status2 Read only. For dual inputs only, shows the secondary in-
put status (as ‘Status’ above).
124 HA030554 Issue 16

IP Adjust State Appears only for channels which have been included in the
‘Adjust Input’ procedure described in "Input adjust" on
page 103.
IP Adjust State2 As ‘IP Adjust State’, above but for secondary channels.
Resolution Allows the number of decimal places to be defined for the
channel. Valid entries are zero to six.
Units Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered.
Type Allows the user to select an input type for the channel.
Available selections are: ‘Off’, ‘Thermocouple’, ‘mV’, ‘V’,
‘mA’, ‘RTD’, ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘Ohms’. If the Dual Input op-
tion is fitted, Dual mV, Dual mA, Dual T/C (if enabled) are
also available.
Note: If Dual T/C is selected then it is essential that the secondary T/C input is field
calibrated using the Input Adjust procedure ("Input adjust" on page 103)
Test signal Appears only if ‘Test’ is selected as ‘Type’. Allows either a
sinusoidal or a triangular waveform to be selected at one
of a number of cycle times between 40 seconds and five
hours.
Input Low* For Type = mV, Dual mV, V, mA, Dual mA or Ohms, the
lowest value of the applied signal in electrical units.
Input High* As ‘Input Low’, but the highest value of the applied signal
in electrical units.
Shunt value For mA and Dual mA input types only, this allows the value
of the shunt resistor (in Ohms) to be entered. The instru-
ment does not validate this value -it is up to the user to en-
sure that the value entered here matches that of the shunt
resistor(s) fitted. For Dual mA input type, both primary and
secondary inputs must have independent shunts each of
the same value.
Lin type Linear, Square root, x3/2, x5/2, User Lin.
Thermocouple types (alphabetical order): B, C, D, E, G2,
J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, NiMo/NiCo, Platinel, Ni/MiMo,
Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh.
User 1 to User 4
Resistance thermometer types: Cu10, Pt100, Pt100A,
JPT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu53.
See Appendix A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION for input
ranges, accuracies etc. associated with the above thermo-
couple and RTD types. See "User LIN" on page 197 for de-
tails of user linearisations.
Range Low* For thermocouples, RTDs, User linearisations and retrans-
mitted signals only, the lowest value of the required lineari-
sation range.
Range High* For thermocouples, RTDs, User linearisations and retrans-
mitted signals only, the highest value of the required line-
arisation range.
Range Units For thermocouples only and RTDs, Select °C, °F or K.
Scale Low/High Maps the process value to (Scale High - Scale Low). For
example, an input of 4 to 20mA may be scaled as 0 to
100% by setting Scale Low to 0 and Scale High to 100.
Scale Low2/High2 As ‘Scale Low/High’ but for the secondary input (PV2).
Offset Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the
process variable.
Note: * See "User LIN" on page 197 for details of the configuration of Range
High/Low and Input High/Low when ‘Type’ = User 1 to User 4.
Offset2 The nature of the secondary input results in an offset being
introduced into the process variable value.
For mA inputs this offset is removed automatically, without
HA030554 Issue 16 125

user intervention.
For mV inputs the offset depends on the value of the volt-
age source impedance and is equal to 199.9µV/.. This off-
set can be compensated for either by using this Offset2
parameter, or by carrying out the ‘Input Adjust’ procedure
("Input adjust" on page 103).
For Dual T/C inputs, it is recommended that the ‘Input Ad-
just’ procedure be used instead of Offset2 as the use of
Offset2 results in an offset which is non-linear over the
thermocouple range.
Input filter Damping can be used to filter out noise from slowly Input
changing signals so that the underlying trend can be seen
more clearly. Valid input values are between 0 Instrument
and 60 seconds.
Input
Instrument
Response
3x
Input filter
Note: Applying a filter to an input channel can affect the operation of any
Rate-of-change alarms configured to act on that channel.
CJC Type For thermocouple input types only, this allows the user to
select ‘None’, ‘Internal’, ‘External’ or ‘Remote 1’ to ‘Remote
4’. For Dual T/C inputs, both primary and secondary inputs
use the same cold junction. None: No Cold junction com-
pensation applied. ‘Internal’ uses the instrument’s internal
cold junction temperature measurement. ‘External’ means
that the cold junction is to be maintained by the user, at a
fixed, known temperature. This temperature is entered in
the ‘External CJ Temp’ field which appears when ‘External’
is selected. Remote 1 (2) (3) (4) means that the cold junc-
tion temperature is being measured by input channel 1 (2)
(3) (4) respectively. (This must be a different channel from
that currently being configured).
Ext. CJ Temp Appears only if CJC type is set to ‘External’, and allows the
user to enter the temperature at which the external cold
junction is being maintained.
Sensor Break Type Defines whether the sensor break becomes active for cir-
cuit impedances greater than expected.
‘Off’ disables Sensor Break detection.
Break Low: Sensor break active if measured impedance is
greater than the ‘Break Low impedance’ value given in Fig-
ure 91.
Break High: Sensor break active if measured impedance is
greater than the ‘Break High Impedance’ value given in
Figure 91.
For mA inputs, limits are applied, such that if the process
value lies outside these limits, a sensor break is assumed
to have occurred. These limits are (Input lo - 4% Span) and
(Input high + 6% Span). For example, for a 4 to 20mA sig-
nal, an input below 3.36mA or above 20.96mA will trigger
a sensor break event.
126 HA030554 Issue 16

Range Break Low im- Break High Im-

pedance pedance
40mV ~5k ~20k

80mV ~5k ~20k
2V ~12.5k ~70k
10V ~12.5k ~120k
Figure 91 Minimum impedances for sensor break detection

Note: Break High impedance values would be used typically for sensors which have
a high nominal impedance when working normally
Input sensor break detection is not supported for second-
ary inputs. The internal circuit acts as a ‘pull up’ on the sec-
ondary input which therefore saturates high in the event of
a sensor break.
Fault Response Specifies the behaviour of the instrument if a sensor break
is detected or if the input is over driven (saturated high or
low).
‘None’ means that the input drifts, with the wiring acting as
an aerial.
‘Drive High’ means that the trace moves to (Scale High
+10%). ‘Drive Low’ means that the trace moves to (Scale
Low -10%), where the 10% values represent 10% of
(Scale High - Scale Low).
Sensor Break Val A diagnostic representation of how close the sensor break
detection circuitry is to tripping.
Measured Value The (read only) input channel measured value before any
scaling or linearisation is applied.
Measured Value2 As ‘Measured Value’, above but for the secondary input.
Internal CJ temp The (read only) temperature of the internal cold junction
associated with this channel.
Channel Trend configuration

This area allows the configuration of channel colour and span.
Channel.1.Colour
Wheatgerm
Channel.1.Trend
Colour Wheatgerm
Span Low 0.00
Span High 200.00
Figure 92 Channel Trend menu and Colour selection

Colour Allows a colour to be specified for the channel. The Scroll
key is used to enter the colour swatch page. The up and
down arrows are used to scroll through the available col-
ours, with each colour being enlarged for as long as it is
‘selected’. Once the required colour, is reached, the scroll
key is used again to return to the Trend Configuration.
Span Low/High Span low and high values.
HA030554 Issue 16 127

Note: Trend colours and alarm settings for secondary inputs are configured in the
maths channels to which they are wired.
Span Example
In an input range of 0 to 600 degrees C, the temperature range between 500 and 600
degrees is of most interest. In such a case, Span Low is set to 500 and Span High to
600 so that the instrument trends only the required part of the temperature range,
effectively magnifying the area of interest.
Note: Trending is restricted to the PV range (Span High -Span Low), but the
instrument can display values outside this range.
Channel Configuration Example

A type J thermocouple is used to measure a temperature range of 100 to 200
degrees Celsius. This thermocouple output is transmitted to the instrument by a 4 to
20mA transmitter, for display as a value between 0 and 100%.
In Channel.Main, set the following for the relevant channel:
Type = mA
Units = %
Input Low = 4.00
Input high = 20.00
Shunt = 250 Ohms
Lin Type = Type J
Range Low = 100.00
Range High = 200.00
Range Units = °C
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
Other items may be left at their defaults.
Alarm 1 menu
Allows the alarm characteristics for Alarm 1 to be configured. The figure below shows
a typical configuration page (expanded for clarity). Actual configuration parameters
are context sensitive.
128 HA030554 Issue 16

Channel.1.Alarm1
Type Abs High

Status Active Not ackd
Threshold 35.00°C
Hysteresis 5.00°C
Latch Manual
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Inhibit
Figure 93 Typical alarm 1 configuration menu

Type Select an alarm type from: ‘Off’, ‘Abs. High’ (absolute
high). ‘Abs. Low’ (absolute low), ‘Dev. High’ (deviation
high), ‘Dev. Low’ (deviation low), ‘Dev. Band’ (deviation
band), ‘Rise ROC’ (rate-of-change: rising), ‘Fall ROC’
(rate-of-change: falling), ‘Digital High’, ‘Digital Low’. See
‘Alarm types’, below, for definitions.
Status Read only. This shows that the alarm is Off, Active,
SafeNotAcked or ActiveNotAcked. For ‘Auto’ and ‘Manual’
alarms only, ‘SafeNotAcked’ means that the alarm trigger
source has returned to a non-alarm state, but the alarm is
still active because it has not been acknowledged. Similar-
ly, ‘ActiveNotAcked’ means that the source is still active
and the alarm has not been acknowledged. Always shows
‘Off’ when the alarm is inhibited (see below).
Threshold For absolute alarms only, this is the trip point for the alarm.
For absolute high alarms, if the threshold value is exceed-
ed by the process value (PV) of this channel, then the
alarm becomes active, and remains active until the PV falls
below the value (threshold -hysteresis). For absolute low
alarms, if the PV of this channel falls below the threshold
value, then the alarm becomes active and remains active
until the PV rises above (Threshold + Hysteresis).
Reference For deviation alarms only, this provides a ‘centre point’ for
the deviation band. For ‘deviation high’ alarms, the alarm
becomes active if the process value (PV) rises above the
value (Reference + Deviation) and remains active until the
PV falls below (Reference + Deviation -Hysteresis). For
‘deviation low’ alarms, the alarm becomes active if the pro-
cess value (PV) falls below the value (Reference - Devia-
tion) and remains active until the PV rises above
(Reference - Deviation + Hysteresis). For ‘deviation band’
alarms, the alarm is active whenever the process value
(PV) lies outside the value (Reference ± Deviation) and re-
mains active until the PV returns to within the band, minus
or plus Hysteresis as appropriate.
Deviation For deviation alarms only, ‘Deviation’ defines the width of
the deviation band, each side of the Reference value, as
described immediately above.
HA030554 Issue 16 129

Hysteresis For absolute and deviation alarms, this provides a means

of preventing multiple alarm trig-gering, if the process val-
ue is drifting close to the trigger value.
Amount For rate-of-change alarms only. The alarm becomes active
if the process value rises (Rise ROC) or falls (Fall ROC) by
more than the specified ‘Amount’ within the time period de-
fined in ‘Change Time’, below. The alarm remains active
until the rate of change falls below the value
(Amount/Change Time) in the relevant sense.
Change Time Settable to 1 second, 1 minute or 1 hour. See ‘Amount’
(above).
Average Time For rate-of-change alarms only. This allows an averaging
period (for the process value) to be entered to reduce nui-
sance trips due to signal noise, or if the rate of change is
hovering around the trip value.
Latch None: The alarm remains active until the monitored value
has returned to a non alarm state, when it becomes inac-
tive.
Auto: The alarm remains active until the monitored value
has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has been
acknowledged. Acknowledgement can take place either
before or after the value has returned a non alarm state.
Manual: The alarm remains active until the monitored val-
ue has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has
been acknowledged. Acknowledgement is permitted only
after the value has returned a non alarm state.
Trigger: Not enunciated, this mode is used only to initiate
an action defined by user wiring either using iTools or us-
ing the user interface.
Block Alarms with ‘Block’ set to ‘On’ are inhibited until the moni-
tored value has entered the 'safe' condition after a start-up.
This prevents such alarms from becoming active whilst the
process is brought into control. If a latching alarm is not ac-
knowledged then the alarm is re-asserted (not blocked),
unless the alarm’s threshold or reference value is
changed, in which case the alarm is blocked again.
Dwell Initiates a delay between the trigger source becoming ac-
tive, and the alarm becoming active. If the trigger source
returns to a non alarm state before the dwell time has
elapsed, then the alarm is not triggered and the dwell timer
is reset.
Acknowledge Select ‘yes’ to acknowledge the alarm. Display returns to
‘No’.
Active Read only. Shows the status of the alarm as ‘Yes’ if it is ac-
tive, or No, if inactive. The active/inactive state depends on
the Latch type (above) and acknowledgment status of the
alarm. Always shows ‘No’ if the alarm is inhibited (below).
Inactive As for ‘Active’ above, but shows ‘Yes’ if the alarm in inac-
tive and ‘No’ if the alarm is active. Always shows ‘Yes’ if the
alarm is inhibited (below).
N.acknowledged As for ‘Active’ above but shows ‘Yes’ for as long as the
alarm is unacknowledged, and ‘No’ as soon as it is ac-
knowledged. Always shows ‘No’ if the alarm is inhibited
(below).
Acknowledgement Fleetingly goes ‘Yes’ on alarm acknowledgement, and
then returns to ‘No’.
Inhibit When ‘Inhibit’ is enabled, (tick symbol), the alarm is inhib-
ited. Status is set to ‘Off’; ‘Active’ and ‘N.acknowledged’
are set to ‘No’, and ‘Inactive’ is set to ‘Yes’. If the alarm is
active when inhibit is enabled, then it becomes inactive un-
til inhibit is disabled, when its status depends on its config-
130 HA030554 Issue 16

uration. Similarly if the alarm trigger becomes active when

the alarm is inhibited, the alarm remains ‘off’ until inhibit is
disabled, when its status depends on its configuration.
Alarm 2 menu
As above for Alarm 1 menu.
Note: The parameters ‘Acknowledge’, ‘Active’, ‘Inactive’, ‘N(ot) Acknowledged’ and,

‘Acknowledgement’ can all be ‘wired’ to other parameters, so, for example, a relay
can be made to operate whilst the alarm is inactive or whilst it is active or on
acknowledgement etc. by wiring the relevant parameter to the relay’s ‘PV’ input. See
"User Wiring" for details of user wiring.
Alarm types
The following figures attempt to show graphically the meanings of the alarm
parameters which can be set for the various alarm types available.
Absolute Alarms
Absolute high alarm definitions Absolute low alarm definitions
Symbol Symbol
Threshold Input signal
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Input signal Threshold
Hysteresis: 0 Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0 Dwell: 0
Dwell: D Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0 Dwell: 0

Dwell:D = Alarm active Dwell:D
= Alarm active
Figure 94 Absolute alarm parameters
HA030554 Issue 16 131

Deviation Alarms
Deviation low alarm definitions Deviation high alarm definitions

Symbol Symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal Input signal
Dwell: 0 Dwell: 0
Dwell: D Dwell: D
Dwell: 0 Dwell: 0
Dwell:D Dwell:D
= Alarm active = Alarm active
Deviation high alarm definitions

Symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: 0
Dwell: D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell:D
= Alarm active
Figure 95 Deviation alarm parameters
132 HA030554 Issue 16

Rate-Of-Change Alarms
Rate-of-change alarm definitions
Symbol Symbol
Rate-of-change rise active
Amount
Rate-of-change fall active
‘Change Time’ units Present

(second, minute or hour) time
A rate-of-change alarm is active if the monitored value changes by more than one ‘Amount’ in less
than 1 ‘Change time’. Dwell delays the alarm on-time. Averaging removes the effects of signal noise.
Figure 96 Rate-of-change alarm parameters

Note: Operation of rate-of-change alarms may be affected if an input filter
("Channel Main" on page 123) is applied to the input signal.
Virtual Channel Configuration

This allows the configuration of maths channels, totalisers and counters. The
configuration is divided into the following areas: ‘Main’, ‘Trend’, ‘Alarm 1*’ and ‘Alarm
2*’. Items appearing in the ‘Trend’, Alarm 1’ and ‘Alarm 2’ areas are identical with the
equivalent items described in "Input Channel Configuration" on page 123 (Input
channels), above.
Note: * Virtual channels 16 to 30 (supplied with Modbus Master and EtherNet/IP

options only) come without alarms
Maths channel configuration

The following maths functions are available (listed in up-arrow scroll order) Off, Add,
Subtract, Multiply, Divide, Group Average, Group minimum, Group maximum,
Modbus input, Copy, Group minimum (latch), Group maximum (latch), Channel
maximum, Channel minimum, Channel Average, Configuration revision, Off.
Figure 97 shows a typical maths channel configuration.
HA030554 Issue 16 133

Virtual Channel.1.Main
Descriptor VirtualChan1
Type Math
Operation Add
PV 180.36 Units
Status Good
Resolution 2
Units Units
Input1 93.49°C
Input2 86.8°C
Figure 97 Maths channel configuration (typical)

for the maths channel
Type Math selected for this example. See "Totaliser configura-
tion" on page 135 and "Counter configuration" on
page 141 for totalisers and counters respectively.
Operation Allows the user to select the required maths function. See
‘Maths Functions’, below.
PV Read only. Shows the dynamic value of this channel in the
units entered in ‘Units’ below.
Status Read only. Shows the status of this channel, reflecting the
status of the input sources.
Resolution Enter the number of decimal places required
Units Allows a five character string to be entered to be used as
the channel units.
Input1 The value of input 1. May be entered manually, or it may
be wired from another parameter ("iTOOLS"). Uses the
resolution of the source.
Input 2 As for ‘Input 1’, Appears only when the operation requires
two inputs.
Reset Allows the user to reset latching functions (e.g. Channel
Max) or averaging functions (e.g. Channel Avg). Reset is
carried out by setting the field to ‘Yes’, then operating the
scroll key. The display returns to ‘No’. Alternatively the
function can be reset by another parameter wired to ‘Re-
set’.
Time Remaining The period of time remaining before the virtual channel
performs its operation. For example, the time remaining for
the maths channel average operation to sample the input
before performing the calculation.
Period For averaging functions, this allows a period to be entered,
over which the value is to be averaged. Selectable periods
are: 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5,
10, 20, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 6, 12, 24 hours.
Maths Functions
Off Out = -9999; status = Off
Add Out = Input1 + Input2
Subtract Out = Input1 - Input2
Multiply Out = Input1 x Input2
Divide Out = Input1 ¸ Input2. If Input2 = 0, Out = -9999; Status =
‘Bad’.
134 HA030554 Issue 16

Group Avg* Out = Instantaneous sum of all points in the recording

group (except this one and any channel that has been con-
figured with operation = group average, group minimum,
group maximum, group minimum (latched), group maxi-
mum (latched), channel maximum or channel minimum),
divided by the number of points in the group (excluding this
one). Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is ex-
cluded from the calculation.
If the group contains no channels, Out = -9999; Status =
‘No data’.
Group Min* Out = Instantaneous value of whichever point (except this
one) in the recording group has the lowest value.
Any point that has a status other than ‘Good’ is excluded
from the calculation.
‘No data’.
Group Max* Out = Instantaneous value of whichever point (except this
one) in the recording group has the highest value.
‘No data’.
Modbus Input Out = value written to this channel’s Modbus input.
If the comms timeout expires, Out = -9999; status = ‘No da-
ta’.
Copy Allows an input or other derived channel to be copied.
Grp Min Latch* Out = Lowest value reached by any point in the recording
group (except this one) since last reset.
‘No data’.
Grp Max Latch* Out = Highest value reached by any point in the recording
group (except this one) since last reset.
‘No data’.
Channel Max Out = Highest value reached by Input1 since last reset.
If Input1 has a status other than ‘Good’, then Out = -9999
and ‘Status’ depends on the status of Input1.
Channel Min Out = Lowest value reached by Input1 since last reset.
Channel Avg Out = the average value of Input1 over the time specified
in ‘Period’.
Config Revision Out = current Configuration Revision value.
Note: * All ‘Group’ functions operate on the ‘Recording’ group, not on the ‘Trend’
group.
Totaliser configuration
Totalisers allow the user to maintain a running total of any input channel, or of any
maths channel. Using maths channels, it is possible to totalise combinations of input
channels so that, for example, the sum of two channels or the difference between
them could be totalised if required.
HA030554 Issue 16 135

A totaliser is configured using Virtual Channels. This is in essence a way to convert

an input signal representing a rate of change of some parameter, such as a fuel flow
being measured, for example, in litres/minute into a cumulative flow. If the fuel flow is
constant then, of course, the conversion would be simple, just multiply the flow rate
by time and the answer comes out directly in litres. Provided, of course, that the time
units of the flow rate and the time measurement are in the same units. Both need to
be in Seconds, Minutes, Hours, etc. in order to get the correct answer.
If the flow rate is variable, the calculation has to be done repeatedly over the time
period required and the results of the individual calculations must then be added
together (Totalised). In order to get reasonable accuracy it is important that the flow
should be reasonably constant during each measurement period. This means that
the sampling time for the measurements should be sufficiently frequent that
significant changes in flow rate are not missed. If the sampling frequency is high
enough, the totalisation process is approximately equivalent to mathematical
integration of the input signal.
The totaliser block in the nanodac is intended to automate this process. It uses the
built-in sampling rate of the nanodac (125mSec) as the sampling period for the
totalisation process. In addition, it provides two separate parameters which can be
used to adjust the results of the totalisation process so that the output from the block
is scaled in the correct units. Figure 99 shows the Main configuration parameter list
when the Virtual Channel block is being configured as a totaliser.
Wiring is carried out, either at the operator interface ("User Wiring"), or in iTools
("iTOOLS").
The totaliser equation is:
ma t
tot t = tot t – 1 + -----------------------------
PSF × USF
where,
tott = totaliser value this sample
tott-1 = totaliser value last sample
mat = process value this sample
PSF = Period Scaling Factor (Period)
USF = Units Scaling Factor (Units scaler)
Note: The time between samples is 125ms.
Figure 99 shows a typical totaliser configuration page.
136 HA030554 Issue 16

Type Totaliser
Operation On
PV 180.3625 units
Status Good Totaliser
Resolution 4 Input 1 Rollover
Units units 1 to 106
Units Scaler 1 Counter 1

Low Cut Off 0 Input 1 Rollover
High Cut Off 100000 10 to 1012
6
Input1 327.1
Period 1 sec Counter 2
Preset No Input 1 Rollover
Preset Value 0 1012 to 1018
Rollover No Figure 98 Using cascaded counters to ex-

Rollover Value pand the totalisation range.
1000000
Disable
Figure 99 Typical totaliser configuration menu

for the totaliser.
Type Select: Math, Counter or Totaliser.
Operation Allows the user to enable (‘On’) or disable (‘Off’) the total-
iser. PV Read only. This is the dynamic output value of the
totaliser.
Status Read only. Shows the status of the totaliser.
Resolution The Resolution parameter allows the number of decimal
places (up to six) to be set for the totalised value as dis-
played on the instrument panel. It does not affect the res-
olution of the totalisation process. Up to six decimal places
may be set for the totalised value.
Units Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered
for the totalised value.
Units Scaler Allows a units scaler to be selected. Typically this will be
used to scale between unit types rather than to influence
time period.
One example of this would be when an input is measured
in Litres/Minute, and Period has been set to 1Minute. If
UnitsScaler is set to 1 then the total volume will be meas-
ured in Litres. If the volume is required in Cubic Metres
then conversion of the total will be needed. There are 1000
Litres in a Cubic Metre so the UnitsScaler should be set to
1000. This produces an additional division of 1000 and re-
sults in a total output in Cubic Metres.
Another example would be a requirement for the output in
Gallons rather than litres, still with an input being meas-
ured in Litres/Minute. There are 4.54609 litres in an impe-
rial gal-lon so the UnitsScaler would be set to 4.54609.
(For a US Gallon the figure would be 3.78541.)
HA030554 Issue 16 137

Low Cut Off Used to restrict the input operating range of the totaliser.
Minimum value = -100 000
High Cut Off Used to restrict the input operating range of the totaliser.
Maximum value = 100 000
Low Cut Off and High Cut Off are particularly important as
they directly affect the totalisation process. Together these
two parameters define the range of valid inputs to the to-
talisation process. If Input1 value lies between them, then
the input is considered valid and it contributes to the total
for any period during which it remains valid. Negative input
values are allowed and will cause the totaliser to decrease
in value for negative values.
The total increases with positive values.
If the input lies outside the region defined by these CutOff
parameters then it will be ignored and not contribute to the
total. Many applications do not wish to use negative values
and so LowCutOff would then normally be set to 0. Occa-
sionally though, calibration errors at the low scale end
could cause unacceptable errors in the total. In these cir-
cumstances, it may be necessary to consider setting Low-
CutOff to a small positive value.
An example where this may be needed is when a process
has a very low input value for long periods of time inter-
spersed with short periods of high input values. The cumu-
lative effect of slightly inaccurate low input values for long
periods could then reduce the accuracy of the overall total
recorded.
Thoughtful use may produce an increase in the overall ac-
curacy of the total; inappropriate use could introduce sig-
nificant inaccuracy.
Inputl The value of the source. May be entered manually, or this
parameter can be wired from an external channel PV. In-
put1 is the input signal representing an external measure-
ment which is in the form of Units/Time-Unit, i.e. a rate.
The sampling rate internal to the block is fixed at the instru-
ment tick rate of eight times/second, taking one sample
every 125ms.
Period The Period parameter divides the signal being applied to
Input1 by the number which is needed to generate a Total
PV which is scaled in appropriate time units. There is a se-
lection of preset values available for the Period parameter.
These are listed in Table 1 below. The totaliser equation
works in seconds. If the totalised channel units are other
than ‘per second’, a period scaler different from the default
(1 sec) must be used. The ‘Period’ field presents a number
of fixed periods from 0.125 seconds to 24 hours for selec-
tion.
Preset Setting this to ‘Yes’ causes the totaliser to adopt the Preset
Value. The field returns immediately to ‘No’. The totaliser
can also be pre set by an external source ‘wired’ to this pa-
rameter.
Preset Value Allows the entry of a value, from which the totaliser is to
start incrementing or decrementing. The direction of the
count is set by the sign of the units scaler: positive = incre-
ment; negative = decrement.
Rollover This is the rollover output which will be set for one execu-
tion cycle when the totaliser rolls over. This output can be
used to expand the range of the totaliser by wiring it to the
Trigger input of a counter.
Rollover Value This is the value at which the totaliser will roll over to 0. It
is configurable (default 1,000,000). When the totaliser rolls
over the difference between the rollover value and the cal-
138 HA030554 Issue 16

culated output will be added to 0.

Example 1: with a rollover value of 1000, a current output
of 999 and an input of 5, then the output will become 4.
Example 2: with a rollover value of -1000, a current output
of -999 and an input of -5, then the output will become -4.
In both examples, the Rollover output will be set for 1 exe-
cution cycle.
Many applications do not require very large values to be
totalised and can be scaled so that the Rollover Value will
never be reached. The instrument default value of 10^6 is
generally satisfactory for these. If, however, higher values
are expected, a larger Rollover value than this will have to
be used. When configuring very large values the number
stored on the instrument display may be slightly larger or
slightly smaller. This happens because the numbers are
stored in the instrument in IEEE representation as used by
all computing systems to save space. The trade-off is that
very large values are stored with a small inaccuracy, which
increases as the value being stored increases. As an ex-
ample, if a value of 9,999,999,999,999 is entered into the
instrument screen as the Rollover value, it is read back on
the instrument panel as 9,999,999,827,968. The inaccura-
cy caused by the compression amounts to 0.02 parts per
million, considerably smaller than the inaccuracy associat-
ed with the input channel which is being used to generate
the input to the totaliser.
Disable Allows the user temporarily to suspend totalising action.
The totaliser is toggled between being enabled (cross
symbol) and disabled (tick symbol) by means of the scroll
key. The output retains the pre-disabled value until the to-
taliser is re-enabled, when it resumes from that value, or
until the value is changed using the Preset parameter
mentioned above. In the latter event, it will still be neces-
sary to enable the totalisation by setting the Disable pa-
rameter to the cross symbol again.
Table 1: Period
Sec Divider Sec Divider Min Divider Hour Divider
0.125 1 1 8 1 480 1 2880
0.25 2 2 16 2 960 2 5760
0.5 4 5 40 5 2400 6 17280
10 80 10 480 12 34560
20 160 20 960 24 69120
30 240 30 1440
The selections in Bold Italic font are those which set the calculation into common time
units, Second, Minute, Hour and Day (24Hours), and are probably going to be the
most commonly selected. The other selections may be useful for more unusual
applications.
HA030554 Issue 16 139

Note: The formula linking Input1 and PV is:

PV Increment each 0.125Sec = Input1/(8*Period(Sec) * UnitsScaler).
There is no reason why the Period and UnitsScaler parameters have to be used only
in the way described above, one reflecting the units used by the input channel and
the other linked directly to the output units required. There may be application where
they may be used in other ways. Use Table 1, which shows the divisor associated
with a particular selection for Period, in combination with a custom value as the
UnitsScaler to generate a custom overall divisor.
Wiring Example using a counter in combination with a totaliser

Figure 100 shows how a counter and totaliser can be linked in a real application
using the internal (soft) wiring in iTools. See also "Graphical Wiring Editor" on
page 354.
The application is to provide a running total of power being used by a process.
Figure 100 Linking a counter and totaliser

In this example
Channel 1 input is connected to a wattmeter.
Totaliser VC1 uses the period parameter to set the timescale of the units to hours.
The UnitsScaler is set to 1000 to set the units of the total to Kilowatt-Hours.
Alarm 1 in VC1 is set as Absolute High and the Alarm Status output resets VC1 and
increments the counter VC3 by 1.
Math2 1 takes the output from VC1 and converts it into MegaWatt-Hours so that it
can be added to the count (also in MegaWatt-Hours) from VC2 to present a running
total value.
Digital Input 1A1B is used to simultaneously reset both the count in VC2 and the total
in VC1.
OR 1 is used to allow VC1 to be reset either by 1A1B or by the total reaching 1000.
140 HA030554 Issue 16

Note: Firmware version 5.00 uses 64 bit IEEE calculations. Inputs and outputs from
the block as wiring to and from other blocks is still in 32bit format, just like all other
instrument parameters. Inside the totaliser block these are converted to 64bits and
processed in the 64bit domain until their value has to be used by another block or has
to be sent over comms, when it is converted back to 32bits.
Counter configuration
This allows the user to set up a counter to count trigger inputs (or it may be
incremented from the Configuration page. The Rollover Value of the counter is
configurable (default 1,000,000). Counters can be cascaded by wir-ing from
‘Rollover’ of one counter to ‘trigger’ of the next. Wiring is carried out from the operator
interface ("User Wiring") or in iTools ("iTOOLS").
For ‘Trend’, ‘Alarm 1’ and ‘Alarm 2’ configurations please see the relevant parts of
"Input Channel Configuration" on page 123.
Type Counter
Operation On Totaliser
Input 1 Rollover
PV 123436 units
Status Good 1 to 106
Resolution 0
Counter 1
Units units
Input 1 Rollover
Low Cut Off 0 10 to 1012
6
High Cut Off 999999

Input1 015.3241 Counter 2
etc.
Preset 0 Input 1 Rollover
Preset Value 0 1012 to 1018
Trigger No
Figure 101 Cascading counters
Rollover No
Rollover Value 1000000
Disable
Figure 102 Typical Counter configuration

for the counter.
Type Select: Math, Counter or Totaliser.
Operation Allows the user to enable (‘On’) or disable (‘Off’) the coun-
ter.
PV Read only. Shows the dynamic value of the counter.
Status Read only. Reflects the status of the input channel.
Resolution Allows the number of decimal places (up to six) to be de-
fined for the channel.
Units Allows a units string of up to five characters to be entered
for the counter value.
Low Cut Off Specifies a value below which the counter will not decre-
ment.
High Cut Off Specifies a value above which the counter will not incre-
ment.
HA030554 Issue 16 141

Input1 The amount by which the counter is incremented each

time ‘Trigger’ goes high. The value may be entered manu-
ally, or wired from another parameter. Negative values
cause the counter to decrement.
Preset Setting this to ‘Yes’ causes the counter to adopt its Preset
Value. The field returns immediately to ‘No’. The counter
can also be preset by wiring from another parameter.
Preset Val Allows the entry of a value, from which the counter is to
start incrementing or decrementing.
Trigger Setting this to 1, causes the current value of the input
source to be added to the Counter value. This function can
be carried out manually, or the input can be wired from an-
other parameter (Section 10.2).
Rollover This is the rollover output which will be set for one execu-
tion cycle when the counter rolls over. This output can be
used to expand the range of the cascade counters by wir-
ing it to the Trigger input of the next counter.
Rollover ValueThis is the value at which the counter will rollover and is configurable
in the same way as the totaliser. When the counter rolls over the difference between
the rollover value and the calculated output will be added to 0.
Example 1: with a rollover value of 1000 and a current output of 999 and an input of
5, then the output will become 4 when the counter is next triggered.
Example 2: with a rollover value of -1000 and a current output of -999 and an input of
-5, then the output will become -4 when the counter is next triggered.
Note: In both examples, the Rollover output will be set for one execution cycle.
Disable Allows the user temporarily to suspend counting. The out-
put retains the pre-disabled value until the counter is re-en-
abled, when it resumes counting from that value. The
counter is toggled between being enabled (cross symbol)
and disabled (tick symbol) by means of the scroll key.
Loop Option Configuration

This configuration area allows the user to set up two control loops. This description
refers to temperature control loops, but the configuration parameters apply equally to
other types of control. For each loop, channel 1 is assumed to be a heating channel;
channel 2 a cooling channel.
The configuration is divided into a number of areas, as shown in the overview below.
142 HA030554 Issue 16

Loop
N N = 1 or 2
Main Setup Tune PID Setpoint Output Diagnostics

("Main menu ("Setup menu ("Tune menu ("PID menu ("Setpoint menu ("Output menu ("Loop
parameters" on parameters" on parameters" on parameters" on parameters" on items" on diagnostics" on
page 143) page 144) page 145) page 145) page 147) page 148) page 150)
Auto/Manual Loop name Tune Enable Sched Type Range Low Output Low Error
PV Ch1 Control Low Output No. of sets Range High Output High Target Output
Inhibit Ch2 Control High Output Remote i/p SP Select Ch1/2 Output Working Out Low
Target Setpoint Control action State Active set SP1 Ch2 Deadband Working Out High
Working Setpoint PB Units Stage Time Boundary 1-2 SP2 Ch1/2 OnOff Hyst Loop Break
Working Output Deriv Type Boundary 2-3 SP Low Limit Ch1/2 Travel time Prop Output
Integral Hold Setpoint Access PB SP High Limit Nudge raise Integral Output
Auto/Man Access Ti Alt SP Enable Nudge lower Deriv Output
Man.Out Access Td Alt SP Ch1/2 pot pos Sensor Break
CBH Rate Ch1/2 pot brk Sched PB
CBL Rate Done Pot Brk mode Sched Ti
MR SP rate disable Rate Sched Td
LBT Servo to PV SbrkMode Sched CBH
Output Low SP Trim Sbrk OP Sched CBL
Output High SP Trim Low Safe OP Sched MR
SP Trim High Manual Mode Sched Loop
Manual Track Manual Output Break
Setpoint Track Forced Output Sched Out Low
Track PV Manual Startup Sched Out High
Track Value Pff En
SP Int Balance Power In
Cool type
FF type/gain
FF offset/trim lin
FF OP
Track Output
Track Enable
Rem. Output Low
Rem. Output High
Figure 103 Loop configuration overview

For a general discussion of control loops, please see "Appendix B: Control Loops".
Main menu parameters

Auto/Manual Selects Auto(matic) or Manual operation. ‘Auto’ automati-
cally controls output power in a closed loop configuration.
In manual mode, the operator controls the output power.
PV The Process Variable input value. The value can be en-
tered by the user, but is most often ‘wired’ from an ana-
logue input.
Inhibit Select ‘No’ or ‘Yes’. ‘Yes’ stops the loop and sets the out-
put to a ‘safe’ value, this value being entered as a part of
the Output configuration ("Output menu items" on
page 148). If an output rate limit is set, then the output
ramps to the safe level at that rate, otherwise it performs a
step change. If setpoint or manual tracking is enabled (in
setpoint configuration "Setpoint menu parameters" on
page 147), Inhibit overrides tracking.
If ‘No’ is selected, the loop operates normally.
Inhibit can be enabled/disabled from an external source.
Target Setpoint The value at which the control loop is aiming. SP may be
derived from a number of sources, as described in Section
B2.5. The value range limited by the setpoint limits (SP
HA030554 Issue 16 143

High Limit and SP Low Limit) described in "Setpoint menu

parameters" on page 147.
Working Setpoint A read-only value displaying the current value of setpoint
being used by the loop. This might or might not be the Tar-
get setpoint. The value may come from a number of sourc-
es, but is limited by the setpoint limits (SP High Lim and SP
Low Lim) described in "Setpoint menu parameters" on
page 147.
Working Output The actual working output value before being split into
channel 1 and 2 outputs.
Integral Hold Select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. ‘Yes’ freezes the integral term at its
current value. IntHold ensures that the power is reapplied
smoothly after the loop has been broken for service rea-
sons, for example.
Setup menu parameters

Loop Name Allows entry of an 11 character name for the loop.
Ch1 Control Selects the type of control for channel one from:
Off: Channel is turned off.
OnOff: Channel uses on/off control.
PID: Proportional + integral + derivative (three-term) con-
trol.
VPU: Valve positioning unbounded.
VPB: Valve positioning bounded.
Section B2.2 provides more details.
Ch2 Control As above, but for loop channel two.
Control Action Select ‘Reverse’ or ‘Direct’.
‘Reverse’ means that the output is ‘on’ when the process
value (PV) is below the target setpoint (SP). This is normal
for heating control.
‘Direct’ means that the output is on when PV is above SP.
This is normal for cooling control.
PB Units * Select ‘Engineering’ or ‘Percent’.
‘Engineering’ displays values in (for example) temperature
units1 (e.g. °C or °F).
‘Percent’ displays values as a percentage of loop span
(Range Hi - Range Lo).
Deriv Type * ‘Error’ means that changes to PV or SP cause changes to
the derivative output. Derivative on error should be used
with a programmer since it tends to reduce ramp over-
shoot. ‘Error’ provides rapid response to small setpoint
changes which makes it ideal for temperature control sys-
tems.
‘PV’ means that changes in PV alone cause changes to
the derivative output. Typically used for process systems
using valve control, as it reduces wear on the valve me-
chanics.
Setpoint Access Allows setpoint editing permission in the loop display pag-
es ("Control Loop1/Loop2" on page 57). ‘Read/Write’ al-
lows free access to all users. ‘Read Only’ allows editing
only in Configuration or Supervisor modes. ‘Operator R/W’
allows editing in all modes except ‘Logged out’.
Auto/Man Access As ‘Setpoint Access’ above, but for Auto/manual parame-
ter.
1. Temperature units are those configured for the channel to which the tem-
perature measuring transducer is connected.
144 HA030554 Issue 16

Man.Out Access As ‘Setpoint Access’ above, but configures the read/write

access for the Manual Output parameter.
Note: * ‘PB Units’ and ‘Deriv Type’ appear only if at least one of Ch1 Control and
Ch2 Control is set to ‘PID’, ‘VPU’ or’ VPB’.
Tune menu parameters

Tune R2G Defines the type of relative cooling gain tuning for the loop.
‘Standard’ -tunes the relative cooling gain of the loop using
the standard R2G tuning algorithm.
‘R2GPD’ - If the process is heavily lagged, this setting
should be used.
‘Off’ - R2G is not calculated automatically. Enter the value
manually as described in "Manual tuning" on page 419.
Note: This parameter only appears when both channel 1 and channel 2 are
configured (for example, in heat/cool processes).
For further information, refer to "Autotune" on page 411.
Tune Enable ‘On’ initiates autotune. Legend changes to ‘Off’ when au-
totune is complete. Can be set to ‘Off’ manually, to stop the
tuning process.
Low Output Sets a low limit to be imposed whilst autotune is running.
The value must be greater than or equal to the ‘Output
Low’ value, specified in the Output menu ("Output menu
items" on page 148).
High Output Sets a high limit to be imposed whilst autotune is running.
The value must be less than or equal to the ‘Output High’
value, specified in the Output menu ("Output menu items"
on page 148).
State Read only display of autotune progress:
Off. Autotune not running.
Ready. Fleeting display. Changes immediately to ‘Run-
ning’.
Running. Autotune is in progress.
Complete. Autotune completed successfully. This is a
fleeting display which changes immediately to ‘Off’.
Timeout, TI Limit and R2G Limit are error conditions de-
scribed in "Autotune" on page 411. If any of these occurs,
tuning is aborted and the PID settings remain unchanged.
Stage A read only display showing the progress of the autotune:
Settling. Displayed during the first minute whilst loop sta-
bility is checked ("Autotune" on page 411)
To SP. Heating or cooling switched on.
Wait min. Power output off.
Wait max. Power output on.
Timeout, TI Limit and R2G Limit are error conditions de-
scribed in "Autotune" on page 411.
Stage Time Time into the current stage of the autotune process. 0 to
99999 seconds.
AT.R2G Autotune at R2G. ‘Yes’ means that the control loop uses
the R2G value calculated by autotune. ‘No’ causes the
loop to use the R2G value entered by the user (PID menu)
calculated as described in "Autotune" on page 411.
PID menu parameters

Note: If control type is set to ‘Off’, or ‘OnOff’ in the Setup menu, the PID menu
contains only the Loop Break Time parameter ‘LBT’.
HA030554 Issue 16 145

Sched Type Selects the type of gain scheduling ("Gain Scheduling" on

page 407) to be applied.
Off. Gain scheduling not active
Set. The user selects the PID parameter set to be used.
Setpoint. Transfer from one set to the next depends on the
setpoint value.
PV. The transfer from one set to another depends on the
PV value.
Error. The transfer between sets depends on the value of
the error signal.
OP. Transfer depends on the value of the output.
Rem. Transfer is controlled by a remote input.
Number of Sets Allows the number of sets of PID parameters for use in
Gain scheduling to be selected.
Remote input For ‘Sched Type’ = ‘Rem’ only, this shows the current val-
ue of the remote input channel being used to select which
set is active. If the remote input value = the Boundary 1-2
value (see below) then set 1 is selected. If it is > Boundary
1-2 value but = Boundary 2-3 value then set 2 is used. If
the remote value is > Boundary 2-3 value, then set three is
used. If the Remote input is not ‘wired’, the value is user
editable from the front panel.
Active Set The set number currently in use.
Boundary 1-2 For all Sched Types except ‘Set’, this allows the user to en-
ter a ‘boundary’ value, which means that if the relevant val-
ue (SP, PV, Error etc.) rises above this boundary, the loop
switches from PID set 1 to PID set 2. If it falls below the
boundary value, the loop switches from set 2 to set 1.
Boundary 2-3 As above but for switching between sets 2 and 3.
PB/PB2/PB3 Proportional band for set one/two/three. The proportional
term in the units (Engineering units or %) set in ‘PBUnits’
in the Setup menu. See "PID Control" on page 401 for
more details.
Ti/Ti2/Ti3 Integral time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries
are1 to 9999.9 seconds, or ‘Off’. If set Off, then integral ac-
tion is disabled. Removes steady state control offsets by
moving the output up or down at a rate proportional to the
error signal.
Td/Td2/Td3 Derivative time constant for set one/two/three. Valid en-
tries are 1 to 9999.9 seconds, or ‘Off’. If set Off, then deriv-
ative action is disabled. Determines how strongly the
controller reacts to a change in the PV. Used to control
overshoot and undershoot and to restore the PV rapidly if
there is a sudden change in demand.
R2G/R2G2/R2G3 Relative cool gain for set one/two/three. Appears only if
cooling has been configured (Ch2 Control not ‘Off’ or ‘On-
Off’ in Setup menu). Valid entries are 0.1 to 10. Sets the
cooling proportional band which compensates for differ-
ences between heating and cooling power gains.
CBH/CBH2/CBH3 Cutback high for set one/two/three. Valid entries ‘Auto’
(3´PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of display units above
setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 0% or -
100% (OP min), in order to modify undershoot on cool
down. See "High and Low cutback" on page 405 for more
details.
CBL/CBL2/CBL3 Cutback low for set one/two/three. Valid entries ‘Auto’
(3´PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of display units below
setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 100%
(OP max), in order to modify overshoot on heat up. See
"High and Low cutback" on page 405 for more details.
146 HA030554 Issue 16

MR/MR2/MR3 Manual reset for set one/two/three. Valid entries 0 to

100%. Introduces a fixed additional power level to the out-
put in order to eliminate steady state error from proportion-
al only control. Applied instead of the integral component
when Ti is set to ‘Off’.
LBT/LBT2/LBT3 Loop break time for set one/two/three. valid entries are 1
to 99999 seconds, or ‘Off’. See "Loop Break" on page 406
for more details.
Output Low/2/3 Output low limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in
the range Output High/2/3 to - 100.
Output High/2/3 Output high limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in
the range Output Low/2/3 to +100.
Setpoint menu parameters

Range High/Low Range limits. Valid entries from 99999 to -99999. Range
limits set absolute maxima and minima for control loop set-
points. If the proportional band is configured as a percent-
age span, the span is derived from the range limits.
SP select Select SP1 or SP2. SP1 is considered to be the primary
setpoint for the controller, and SP2 a secondary (standby)
setpoint.
SP1, SP2 Allows values for Setpoints 1 and 2 to be entered. Valid en-
tries are any within the range ‘SPHigh Limit’ to ‘SPLow-
Lim’.
SP Low Limit Minimum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are
in the range ‘Range Lo’ and ‘SP High Limit’.
SP High Limit Maximum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are
in the range ‘Range Hi’ and ‘SP Low Limit’.
Alt SP Enable ‘Yes’ enables the alternative setpoint; ‘No’ disables it. May
be wired to an external or in-ternal source.
Alt SP When wired this is a read only display of the alternative
setpoint value. Otherwise, the user may insert a value.
Valid values are limited by ‘Range Hi’ and ‘Range Lo’.
Rate Sets the maximum rate at which the working setpoint may
change in Engineering units per minute. Often used to pro-
tect the load from thermal shock cause by large step
changes in setpoint. ‘Off’ disables rate limiting.
Rate Done Read only display. ‘Yes’ indicates that the working setpoint
has completed its change. ‘No’ indicates that the setpoint
is still ramping.
SP Rate Disable Appears only if Rate is not ‘Off’. ‘Yes’ disables rate limiting;
‘No’ enables rate limiting.
Servo To PV If ‘Rate’ is set to any value other than ‘Off’, and if ‘Servo to
PV’ is set to ‘Yes’ then any change in the current setpoint
value causes the working setpoint to servo to the current
PV before ramping to the new setpoint value.
SP Trim A positive or negative value added to the setpoint, for local
fine tuning. Valid entries are any value between ‘SP Trim
High’ and ‘SP Trim Low’.
SP Trim High/Low Setpoint trim high and low limits.
Manual Track ‘On’ enables manual tracking to allow the local SP to follow
the value of the current PV. See "Manual Tracking" on
page 423 for more details. ‘Off’ disables manual tracking.
Setpoint Track ‘On’ enables setpoint tracking to allow the local SP to fol-
low the value of the alternative SP. See "Setpoint Track-
ing" on page 423 for more details. ‘Off’ disables setpoint
tracking.
Track PV The unit tracks the PV when it is servoing or tracking.
HA030554 Issue 16 147

Track Value The SP to track in manual tracking.

SP Int Balance Allows the user to enable (tick) or disable (cross) debump
on PV change.
Output menu items

"Output" on page 423 contains details of the output functions.
Output Low The minimum power, or the maximum ‘negative’ (i.e. cool-
ing) power to be delivered by the system. The valid input
range is -100% and Output High.
Output High The maximum output power to be delivered by channels 1
and 2, where 100% is full power. The valid input range is
Output Low to 100.0%. Reducing this value reduces the
rate of change of the process, but it also reduces the con-
troller’s ability to react to perturbations.
Ch1 Output Displays the positive power values used by the heat out-
put. Values range from Output low to Output high.
Ch2 Output Displays the cooling power values for channel two. Ap-
pears as a value between Output high and -100%, where
-100% represents full cooling power.
Ch2 Deadband A gap (in percent) between output 1 switching off, and out-
put 2 switching on, and vice-versa. Valid inputs are 0 (off)
to 100%.
Rate Limit on the rate at which the output from the PID can
change. Can be useful in preventing rapid changes in out-
put that could damage the process, heater elements etc.
Ch1 OnOff Hyst Appears only if ‘Ch1 Control’ has been set to ‘OnOff’ in the
Setup menu. Allows the user to enter a hysteresis value for
channel one. Valid entries are 0.0 to 200.0.
Ch2 OnOff Hyst Appears only if ‘Ch2 Control’ has been set to ‘OnOff’ in the
Setup menu. Allows the user to enter a hysteresis value for
channel two. Valid entries are 0.0 to 200.0.
Ch1 Travel Time Appears only if Setup menu parameter ‘Ch1 Control’ is set
to ‘VPB’ or ‘VPU’. This is the valve travel time from closed
(0%) to open (100%). In a valve positioning application,
channel 1 output is connected by a single software ‘wire’ to
a Valve Raise/Valve Lower relay pair. For heat/cool appli-
cations, channel 1 is associated with the heating valve.
Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Ch2 Travel Time Appears only if Setup menu parameter ‘Ch2 Control’ is set
to ‘VPB’ or ‘VPU’. This is the valve travel time from closed
(0%) to open (100%). For heat/cool applications, channel
2 is associated with the cooling valve. Valid entries: 0.0 to
1000.0 seconds.
Nudge Raise Appears only if Setup menu parameter ‘Ch1 Control’ or
Ch2 Control is set to ‘VPU’. If set to ‘Yes’, the valve can be
moved towards the open position by, for example, a con-
tact closure, an up arrow button operation or a serial com-
munications command. The default minimum nudge time
is 125 ms, but this can be edited in the relevant relay con-
figuration - see "Configuration Display" on page 193. See
also "Valve nudge" on page 429 for more ‘Nudge’ details.
Nudge Lower As for ‘Nudge Raise’, above but moves the valve towards
the closed position.
Ch1 Pot Pos* The position of the channel one actuator as measured by
the feedback potentiometer.
Ch1 Pot Brk* ‘On’ indicates that the input to the relevant channel is open
circuit.
148 HA030554 Issue 16

Ch2 Pot Pos* The position of the channel two actuator as measured by
circuit.
Pot Brk Mode* Defines the action to be taken if a potentiometer break is
detected:
Raise: opens the valve.
Lower: closes the valve.
Rest: the valve remains in its current state.
Model: the controller tracks the position of the valve and
sets up a model of the system so that it continues to func-
tion if the potentiometer becomes faulty.
Note: * These parameters appear only if the ‘Setup’ menu parameter ‘Ch1 Control’
or ‘Ch2 control’ (as appropriate) is set to ‘VBP’. The Setup menu is described in
"Setup menu parameters" on page 144.
SBrk Mode Defines the action to be taken in the event of a sensor
break.
Safe: The output adopts the value configured in ‘Sbrk OP’,
below.
Hold: The output remains at its current level.
Sbrk OP The value to be output if a sensor break occurs, and SBrk
Mode (above) is set to ‘Safe’.
Safe OP The output level adopted when the loop is inhibited (Main
menu "Main menu parameters" on page 143).
Manual Mode Selects the type of transition to occur when changing to
manual mode ("Main menu parameters" on page 143):
Track: Whilst in Auto mode, the manual output tracks the
control output so that there is no change of output when
manual mode is switched to.
Step: On transition to manual mode, the output is set to the
value entered for ‘Forced-OP’ (below).
Last Man. Out: On transition to manual mode, the output
adopts the manual output value as last set by the operator.
Manual Output The output when the loop is in manual mode. In manual
mode the controller limits the maximum power, but it is not
recommended that it be left unattended at high power set-
tings. It is important that over range alarms are fitted to pro-
tect the process.
Note: It is recommended that all processes are fitted with an independent over
range detection system.
Forced Output Forced Manual output value. When ‘Manual Mode’ =
‘Step’, this is the output value adopted when changing
from Auto to Manual mode.
Manual Startup When set to off (cross symbol), the controller powers up in
the same (auto or manual) mode that obtained when it was
switched off. When set to on (tick symbol) the controller al-
ways powers up in manual mode.
Pff En Power feed forward enable. ‘Yes’ enables power feed for-
ward (adjusts the output signal to compensate for varia-
tions is supply voltage. ‘No’ disables Pff. See "Power Feed
Forward" on page 426 for further details.
Power In Read only display of the current supply voltage.
Cool Type Appears only if ‘Ch2 Control’ = ‘PID’ in the setup menu
("Setup menu parameters" on page 144) and allows the
user to enter the appropriate type of cooling ("Cool Type"
on page 426):
Linear: For use when controller output changes linearly
with PID demand.
Oil: For oil cooled applications
HA030554 Issue 16 149

Water: For water cooled applications

Fan: For forced air cooling.
FF Type Feed forward type ("Feed forward" on page 427):
None: No signal fed forward.
Remote: A remote signal fed forward.
SP: Setpoint is fed forward.
PV: PV is fed forward.
FF Gain For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this scales the feed forward
signal.
FF Offset For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this defines the offset of the
scaled feed forward signal.
FF Trim lim For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, defines symmetrical limits
about the PID output which are applied to the scaled feed
forward signal.
FF OP For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this is the calculated (scaled,
offset and trimmed) feed forward signal. FF OP = FF gain
(input + FF Offset).
Track Output If ‘Track Enable’ (below) is set to ‘Yes’, this is the value for
the control output. PID remains in Auto mode and tracks
the output. The Track OP value can be wired to an external
source, or can be entered via the front panel. Similar to en-
tering manual mode.
Track Enable When set to ‘Yes’, the output follows the Track OP value
(above). When subsequently set to ‘Off’ the loop makes a
bump less return to control.
Rem. Output Low/High
Used to limit the output using a remote source. These lim-
its cannot exceed the ‘Output Low’ and ‘Output High’ val-
ues described earlier in this section.
Loop diagnostics
These parameters are read only unless otherwise stated.
Error The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV.
Target Output The requested control output. The target of the active out-
put if rate limiting is active.
Working Out Low The low limit for the working output. This is the value used
to limit the output power of the loop and is derived from the
gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the safety limit.
Working Out High The high limit for the working output. This is the value used
to limit the output power of the loop and is derived from the
gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the safety limit.
Loop Break Loop Break Alarm. Becomes active ‘Yes’ if the loop break
time (LBT), set in the PID menu ("PID menu parameters"
on page 145) is exceeded, otherwise ‘No’ is displayed.
Prop. Output Shows the proportional term contribution to the control out-
put.
Integral Output Shows the integral term contribution to the control output.
Deriv. Output Shows the derivative term contribution to the control out-
put.
Sensor Break Indicates sensor break status. On (tick symbol) indicates a
sensor break has occurred; Off (cross symbol) shows that
no sensor breaks have been detected.
Sched PB The scheduled proportional band for the current PID set.
Sched Ti The scheduled integral time for the current PID set.
Sched Td The scheduled derivative time for the current PID set.
Sched R2G The scheduled relative cool gain value for the current PID
set.
150 HA030554 Issue 16

Sched CBH The scheduled cutback high value for the current PID set.
Sched CBL The scheduled cutback low value for the current PID set.
Sched MR The scheduled manual reset value for the current PID set.
Sched Loop Break The scheduled loop break time for the current PID set.
Sched Out Low The scheduled output low limit for the current PID set.
Sched Out High The scheduled output high limit for the current PID set.
HA030554 Issue 16 151

Advanced Loop Configuration

Similar to the Loop option described above, advanced loop includes the ability to run
a cascade loop.
Figure 4.7 is an overview of the configuration menu structure.
Advanced Loop
Main Setup Tune Master PID Slave PID

("Advanced Loop Main ("Advanced Loop Setup ("Advanced Loop Tune ("Advanced Loop Master ("Advanced Loop Slave
menu" on page 153) menu" on page 154) menu" on page 155) PID menu" on page 158) PID menu" on page 159)
Master PV Master Name Tune Type Control Action Control Action
Master WSP Slave Name Tune Enable PB Units PB Units
Target setpoint Master Loop Tune Slave R2G Derivative Type Derivative Type
Slave PV Cascade Type Tune High PB Sched Type
Slave WSP Slave Channel 1 Tune Low Ti No of sets
Working Output Slave Channel 2 Output High Td Remote input
Cascade Mode Setpoint access Output Low CBH Set boundaries
Inhibit Mode Access State CBL PB
Master Int.Hold Man.Out Access Stage Time MR Ti
Slave Int.Hold Diagnostics LBT Td
R2G
CBH
CBL
MR
LBT
Output Low
Output High Master SP Slave SP Output Diagnostics

("Advanced Loop Master ("Advanced Loop Slave ("Advanced Loop Output ("Advanced Loop
SP menu" on page 162) SP menu" on page 163) menu" on page 167) Diagnostics menu" on
Range High Range High Output High page 170)
Range Low Range Low Output Low Master Error
SP Select SP High Limit Ch1 Output Slave Error
SP1 SP Low Limit Ch2 Output (M)Prop. Output
SP2 Local SP Ch2 Deadband (M)Integral Out
SP High Limit Alt SP Rate (M)Deriv. Output
SP Low Limit Remote FF Sbrk Mode (S)Prop. Output
Alt SP Enable Remote FF Enable Sbrk OP (S)Integral Out
Alt SP Remote FF High Safe OP (S)Deriv. Output
Rate Remote FF Low Manual Mode Target Output
Rate Done Manual Track Manual Output Loop Break (S)
SP Trim Sbrk Mode Forced Output Loop Break (M)
SP Trim High Sbrk SP Manual Startup Sensor Break (S)
SP Trim Low Pff En Sensor Break (M)
Manual Track Line Voltage Sched PB
Setpoint Track Cool Type Sched Ti/Td
Track PV FF Type Sched CBH/CBL
Track SP Track Output Sched MR
SP Int Balance Track Enable Sched Loop Break
Rem. Output Low Sched R2G
Rem. Output High Sched Out High
Sched Out Low
Working Out Low
Working Out High
152 HA030554 Issue 16

Advanced Loop Main menu
Advanced Loop.Main
Master PV 0.0
Master WSP 16.1
Target setpoint 16.1
Slave PV 0.0
Slave WSP 32.2
Working Output 0.0%
Cascade Mode Slave
Inhibit No
Master Int.Hold No
Slave Int.Hold No
Figure 104 Main menu

Master PV This is the process value for the outer (master) loop of cas-
cade control, typically obtained from an analogue input.
Master WSP This is the (read only) working setpoint for the outer (mas-
ter) loop of cascade control. The Master WSP can obtain
its value from one of a number of sources such as ‘Internal
SP’ or ‘Remote SP’.
Target setpoint The target setpoint is the value which the outer (master)
control loop is attempting to reach. The value may come
from one of a number of sources, such as ‘Internal SP’ or
‘Remote SP’.
Slave PV This is the process value for the inner (slave) loop of cas-
cade control, typically wired from an analogue input.
Slave WSP This is the (read only) working setpoint for the inner (slave)
loop. The value may come from one of a number of sourc-
es, such as the output from the master loop or the local
slave setpoint.
Working Output The actual output of the inner (slave) loop before it is split
into channel 1 and channel 2 outputs.
Cascade Mode Slave: Also known as ‘Slave Local Auto’, this is a single
loop controlling with a local setpoint.
Manual: Also known as ‘Slave Manual’, this provides a sin-
gle manual power setting for the slave.
Cascade: (Full) cascade. In this mode, the master is in ‘Au-
to’ mode and provides the setpoint for the slave.
Inhibit If set to ‘Yes’, both outer (master) loop and inner (slave)
loops stop controlling and the output of the slave loop is set
to the safe output value (SafeOp) set in the Output menu
("Advanced Loop Output menu" on page 167).
Master Int.Hold If set to ‘Yes’, the integral component of the outer (master)
loop PID calculation is held at its current value and does
not integrate any further disturbances in the plant. Essen-
tially this is equivalent to switching into PD control with a
manual reset value pre-configured.
Slave Int.Hold As for Master.IntHold, above, but for the inner (slave) loop.
HA030554 Issue 16 153

Advanced Loop Setup menu
Advanced Loop.Setup
Master Name Master

Slave Name SLave
Master Loop PID
Cascade Type Full Scale

Slave Channel 1 PID
Slave Channel 2 Off
Setpoint Access Read/Write
Mode Access Read/Write
Man.Out Access Read/Write
Figure 105 Advanced Loop Setup menu

Master Name Allows the user to enter a 10-character string for the Mas-
ter loop name in the Cascade display page ("Cascade Dis-
play Mode" on page 58).
Slave Name As above, but for the slave loop.
Master Loop The control algorithm for the master control loop (PID only
for this software release).
Cascade Type Full Scale: The master generates a setpoint (between SP
High limit and SP Low limit) for the slave.
Trim: The master working setpoint is used as the base set-
point of the slave. This is then modified by the addition of
a setpoint trim, to become the target setpoint for the slave.
The PID output from the master is mapped to range set by
Trim Range High and Trim Range Low.
Slave Channel 1 Selects the channel 1 control algorithm. Different algo-
rithms can be selected for channels 1 and 2. In tempera-
ture control applications, channel 1 is usually the heating
channel, and channel 2 the cooling channel.
PID: Control Output Configured as PID.
VPB: Control Output Configured as Bounded VP. Bound-
ed VP is implemented as a PID algorithm driving a position
loop and is used in systems with position feedback.
Slave Channel 2 Selects the channel 2 control algorithm. Different algo-
rithms can be selected for channels 1 and 2. In tempera-
ture control applications, channel 1 is usually the heating
channel, channel 2 the cooling channel.
Off: Control output is not configured.
PID: Control Output Configured as PID.
Setpoint Access Allows the user to select ‘Read Only’, ‘Read/Write’, or ‘Op-
erator R/W’ for setpoint access, where ‘Operator R/W
means that the setpoint is read write for access levels op-
erator and above, but read only in Logged out mode.
Mode Access As for ‘Setpoint Access’, above, but for Auto/Manual mode
switching.
Man.Out Access As for ‘Setpoint Access’, above, but configures the
read/write access for the Manual Output parameter.
154 HA030554 Issue 16

Advanced Loop Tune menu
Advanced Loop.Tune
Tune Type Master

Tune Enable Off
Tune Slave R2G Standard
Tune High 1372.0

Tune Low -20
Output High 100.0%
Output Low 0.0%
State Off
Stage Reset
Stage Time sec
Diagnostics
Hysteresis 1.0
Band 5.0
Timout 7200 sec

OPDel 0.00
WSP 0.0
ModeMan 1
OP 0.0
MasterTune 0 These items appear only if
‘Tune Type’ = ‘Master’ and
TuneSlave 0.0
if Diagnostics is enabled
TuneStatus 0 (ticked) as shown.
(default = disabled )
Mod_PV 0.0
Mod_OP 0.0
Arg_PV 0.0
Arg_OP 0.0
Gain 0.0
Phase 0.0
Period 0.0
A1 0 sec
A2 0
Figure 106 Advanced Loop Tune menu

Tune Type Select ‘Master’ or ‘Slave’ for the Tuning process.
Tune Slave R2G Appears only if the Slave channel 2 is set to ‘PID’ in the
Setup menu ("Advanced Loop Setup menu" on page 154),
and Tune Type is set to Slave in the Advanced Loop.Tune
menu. Standard: Normal compensation applied to account
for differences in heating and cooling efficiencies between
the heating and cooling channels. R2GPD: Typically used
in heavily lagged systems.
Tune Enable Allows the user to initiate an autotune.
Tune High State Sets the maximum value for the master loop setpoint
during the tuning process.
Tune Low Sets the minimum value for the master loop setpoint during
the tuning process.
HA030554 Issue 16 155

Output High The maximum output power level which the controller may
supply during the tuning process. If ‘Output High’ in the
Output menu ("Advanced Loop Output menu" on
page 167) is lower than ‘High Output’ then the maximum
output is clipped to the ‘Output High’ value.
Output Low The minimum output power level which the controller may
supply during the tuning process. If ‘Output Low’ in the
Output menu ("Advanced Loop Output menu" on
page 167) is higher than ‘Low Output’ then the minimum
output is clipped to the ‘Output Low’ value.
State The current autotune state.
Off: Autotune not enabled.
Ready: Fleeting display. Changes immediately to ‘Run-
ning’.
Running: Autotune running.
Complete: The tune process completed successfully.
Fleeting display before returning to ‘Off’.
Time-Out: A timeout error has occurred and the autotune
has been aborted.
Ti Limit.
R2G Limit.
Stage Reset.
None.
Settling. Current SP.
New SP.
To SP.
Wait Max.
Wait Min.
Store.
CoolT.
PID.
Abort.
Complete.
NewR2G.
1:Half Cycle.
2:Full Cycle.
3:Full Cycle.
4:FinalCycle.
5:Calc.
Stage Time Elapsed time since entering this stage of the tuning.
Diagnostics If this is enabled, a number of further parameters become
visible.
Hysteresis This defines the hysteresis of the switch used during mas-
ter autotuning to generate the oscillation. It is set as a per-
centage of the master PV range (High Range - Low
Range) in engineering units being +/- Hysteresis/2 about
the tuning setpoint.
Band This defines the band between which the setpoint of the
slave controller will be switched during the master auto-
tune oscillation. It is set as a percentage of the master PV
(High Range -Low Range) in engineering units being +/-
Band/2 about the tuning setpoint. The actual values ap-
plied to the slave may actually be constrained inside this
band by the wind-up control mechanism.
Timeout Defines the maximum time permitted for each stage of the
master tuning.
OPDel This is an internal setting of the order of 0.5 during tuning.
WSP This is the actual setpoint around which the autotuning os-
cillation of the master takes place. It is used for the calcu-
lations associated with the Hysteresis and Band
parameters.
156 HA030554 Issue 16

ModeMan This parameter is used by the master autotune algorithm

to communicate with the master loop. Puts master control-
ler into ‘Not-Auto’ mode.
OP This signal is generated within the master loop during the
autotune oscillation. It is used only as an input to the cal-
culations which generate the slave loop setpoint. It is not
the overall loop output to the load which at all times is un-
der the control of the slave PID calculations.
MasterTune Master tune in progress.
TuneSlave The autotune process is requesting a slave tune.
Tune Status This indicates the internal stage of tuning.
0 = Not tuning
1 = Tuning the slave
2 = Tuning the master
3 = Tuning completed
-1 = Tuning has aborted or timed-out
Mod_PV This is the amplitude of the fundamental component of the
master PV during the last cycle of the tuning oscillation.
Mod_OP This is the amplitude of the fundamental component of the
master OP during the last cycle of the tuning oscillation.
Arg_PV This is the argument (phase) of the fundamental compo-
nent of the master PV during the last cycle of the tuning os-
cillation. Value in radians.
Arg_OP This is the argument (phase) of the fundamental compo-
nent of the master OP during the last cycle of the tuning os-
cillation. Value in radians.
Gain This is the gain between the master OP and the master PV
over the path via the slave loop and the load, measured at
the fundamental frequency of the autotuning oscillation.
Phase The phase shift in radians between the master OP and the
master PV over the path via the slave loop and the load,
measured at the fundamental frequency of the autotuning
oscillation.
Period This is the period of the last cycle of the autotune oscilla-
tion, in seconds.
A1 This is the number of samples actually taken in order to de-
termine the fundamental components of the master PV
and OP. The target number is around 100 samples but the
actual number taken may differ slightly from this depend-
ing on the load's behaviour.
A2 The A2 parameter is a used for diagnostic purposes. Its
value indicates the design method chosen by the algorithm
which depends on the characteristics of the master tuning
oscillation and the measured values of frequency, gain,
and phase shift around the master loop. This influences
the choices of the P, I and D values set into the master
loop.
Alpha_p R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Heat time / cool time.
OPss R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Steady state output
at the end of the settling period.
Alpha R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: 1/R2G.
Debug R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: 0-PID, 1-PI, 2-PD,
3-P.
CycleNo R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Number of cycles in
auto tune sequence.
PBs R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: PBs scales the pro-
portional band which will be used in the PD settling period.
HA030554 Issue 16 157

TDs R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: TDs scales the deriv-

ative value which will be used during the PD settling peri-
od.
Settle R2GPD tuning diagnostic parameter: Used to scale the
last cycle time. The result will be used for the PD settling
time.
Advanced Loop Master PID menu
Advanced Loop.Master PID
Control Action Reverse

PB Units Engineering
Derivative Type PV
PB 20.0
Ti 360.0 sec
Td 60.0 sec
CBH Auto
CBL Auto
MR 0.0 %
LBT 100 sec
Error limit 999999.0 sec
Figure 107 Advanced Loop master PID menu

‘Direct’ means that the output is on when PV is above SP.
PB Units Select ‘Engineering’ or ‘Percent’.
units (e.g. °C or °F).
(Range High - Range Low).
Deriv Type ‘Error’ means that changes to PV or SP cause changes to
shoot.
‘Error’ provides rapid response to small setpoint changes
which makes it ideal for temperature control systems.
chanics.
PB Proportional band. The proportional term in the units (En-
gineering units or %) set in ‘PBUnits’ above. See "PID
Control" on page 401 for more details.
Ti Integral time constant. Valid entries are1 to 9999.9 sec-
onds, or ‘Off’. If set Off, then inte-gral action is disabled.
Removes steady state control offsets by moving the output
up or down at a rate proportional to the error signal.
Td Derivative time constant. Valid entries are 1 to 9999.9 sec-
onds, or ‘Off’. If set Off, then derivative action is disabled.
Determines how strongly the controller reacts to the
158 HA030554 Issue 16

rate-of-change in the PV. Used to control overshoot and

undershoot and to restore the PV rapidly if there is a sud-
den change in demand.
CBH Cutback high. Valid entries ‘Auto’ (3´PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of
display units above setpoint at which the controller output
is forced to 0% or -100% (OP min), in order to modify un-
dershoot on cool down. See "High and Low cutback" on
page 405 for more details.
CBL Cutback low. Valid entries ‘Auto’ (3´PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of
display units below setpoint at which the controller output
is forced to 100% (OP max), in order to modify overshoot
on heat up. See "High and Low cutback" on page 405 for
more details.
MR Manual reset. Valid entries -100% to +100%. Introduces a fixed additional
power level to the output in order to eliminate steady state
error from proportional only control. Applied instead of the
integral component when Ti is set to ‘Off’.
LBT Loop break time. Valid entries are 1 to 99999 seconds, or ‘Off’. See "Loop
Break" on page 406 for more details.
Advanced Loop Slave PID menu
Advanced Loop.Slave PID
Control Action Reverse

PB Units Engineering
Derivative Type Error
Sched Type Remote

Number of Sets 3
Remote Input 0
Active Set Set3
Boundary 1-2 0
Boundary 2-3 0
PB 20.0
Ti 360 sec
Td 60 sec
R2G 1.0
CBH Auto
CBL Auto
MR 0.0%
LBT 100 sec

Output Low -100%
Output High 100%
PB2 23.0
Ti2 360.0 sec
Output Low 3 -90.0%

Output High 3 90.0%
Figure 108 Advanced Loop Slave PID Menu (Typical)

HA030554 Issue 16 159


‘Direct’ means that the output is ‘on’ when PV is above SP.
PB Units Select ‘Engineering’ or ‘Percent’.
units (e.g. °C or °F).
(Range High - Range Low).
Deriv Type ‘Error’ means that changes to PV or SP cause changes to
shoot. ‘Error’ provides rapid response to small setpoint
changes which makes it ideal for temperature control sys-
tems.
chanics.
Sched Type Selects the type of Gain Scheduling ("Gain Scheduling" on
page 407) to be applied.
Off. Gain Scheduling not active.
Set. The user selects the PID parameter set to be used.
Setpoint. Transfer from one set to the next depends on the
setpoint value.
PV. The transfer from one set to another depends on the
PV value.
Error. The transfer between sets depends on the value of
the error signal.
OP. Transfer depends on the value of the output.
Rem. Transfer is controlled by a remote input.
Number of Sets Allows the number of sets of PID parameters for use in
Gain scheduling to be selected.
Remote input For ‘Sched Type’ = ‘Rem’ only, this shows the current val-
ue of the remote input channel being used to select which
set is active. If the remote input value = the Boundary 1-2
value (see below) then set 1 is selected. If it is > Boundary
1-2 value but = Boundary 2-3 value then set 2 is used. If
the remote value is > Boundary 2-3 value, then set three is
used. If the Remote input is not ‘wired’, the value is user
editable from the front panel.
Active Set The set number currently in use.
Boundary 1-2 For all Sched Types except ‘Set’, this allows the user to en-
ter a ‘boundary’ value, which means that if the relevant val-
ue (SP, PV, Error etc.) rises above this boundary, the loop
switches from PID set 1 to PID set 2. If it falls below the
boundary value, the loop switches from set 2 to set 1.
Boundary 2-3 As above but for switching between sets 2 and 3.
PB/PB2/PB3 Proportional band for set one/two/three. The proportional
term in the units (Engineering units or %) set in ‘PBUnits’
in the Setup menu. See "PID Control" on page 401 for
more details.
Ti/Ti2/Ti3 Integral time constant for set one/two/three. Valid entries
are1 to 9999.9 seconds, or ‘Off’. If set Off, then integral ac-
tion is disabled. Removes steady state control offsets by
moving the output up or down at a rate proportional to the
error signal.
Td/Td2/Td3 Derivative time constant for set one/two/three. Valid en-
tries are 1 to 9999.9 seconds, or ‘Off’. If set Off, then deriv-
ative action is disabled. Determines how strongly the
controller reacts to the rate-of-change in the PV. Used to
160 HA030554 Issue 16

control overshoot and undershoot and to restore the PV

rapidly if there is a sudden change in demand.
R2G/R2G2/R2G3 Relative cool gain for set one/two/three. Appears only if
cooling has been configured (Ch2 Control not ‘Off’ in the
Setup menu). Valid entries are 0.1 to 10. Sets the cooling
proportional band which compensates for differences be-
tween heating and cooling power gains.
CBH/CBH2/CBH3 Cutback high for set one/two/three. Valid entries ‘Auto’
(3´PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of display units above
setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 0% or
-100% (OP min), in order to modify undershoot on cool
down. See "High and Low cutback" on page 405 for more
details.
CBL/CBL2/CBL3 Cutback low for set one/two/three. Valid entries ‘Auto’
(3´PB) or 0.1 to 9999.9. The number of display units below
setpoint at which the controller output is forced to 100%
(OP max), in order to modify overshoot on heat up. See
Section B2.3.2 for more details.
MR/MR2/MR3 Manual reset for set one/two/three. Valid entries 0 to
100%. Introduces a fixed additional power level to the out-
put in order to eliminate steady state error from proportion-
al only control. Applied instead of the integral component
when Ti is set to ‘Off’.
LBT/LBT2/LBT3 Loop break time for set one/two/three. Valid entries are 1
to 99999 seconds, or ‘Off’. See "Loop Break" on page 406
for more details.
Output Low/2/3 Output low limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in
the range Output High/2/3 to -100.
Output High/2/3 Output high limit for set one/two/three. Valid entries are in
the range Output Low/2/3 to +100.
HA030554 Issue 16 161

Advanced Loop Master SP menu
Advanced Loop.Master.SP
Range High 1372.0 V

Range Low -200 V
SP Select SP1
SP1 -0.9 V
SP2 0.0 V
SP High Limit 1372.0 V
SP Low Limit -200.0 V
Alt SP Enable No
Alt SP 0.0 V
Rate 123
Rate Done No
SP Rate Disable No
Servo to PV No
SP Trim 0.0 V
SP Trim High 0.0 V
SP Trim Low 0.0 V
Manual Track On
Setpoint Track On
Track PV 31.5 V
Track SP -0.9 V
SP Int Balance
Figure 109 Advanced Loop Master SP menu

Range High/Low Range limits. Range limits set absolute maxima and mini-
ma for control loop setpoints. If the proportional band is
configured as a percentage span, the span is derived from
the range limits.
SP select Select SP1 or SP2. SP1 is often considered to be the pri-
mary setpoint for the controller, and SP2 a secondary set-
point.
SP1, SP2 Allows values for Setpoints 1 and 2 to be entered. Valid en-
tries are any within the range ‘SPHigh Limit’ to ‘SPLow-
Lim’.
SP High Limit Maximum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are
in the range ‘Range Hi’ and ‘SP Low Limit’.
SP Low Limit Minimum setpoint limit for SP1 and SP2. Valid entries are
in the range ‘Range Lo’ and ‘SP High Limit’.
Alt SP Enable ‘Yes’ enables the alternative setpoint; ‘No’ disables it. May
be wired to an external or internal source.
Alt SP When wired this is a read only display of the alternative
setpoint value. Otherwise, the user may insert a value.
Valid values are limited by ‘Range Hi’ and ‘Range Lo’.
Rate Sets the maximum rate at which the working setpoint may
change in Engineering units per minute. Often used to pro-
tect the load from thermal shock caused by large step
changes in setpoint. ‘Off’ disables rate limiting.
162 HA030554 Issue 16

Rate Done Read only display. ‘Yes’ indicates that the working setpoint
has completed its change. ‘No’ indicates that the setpoint
is still ramping.
SP Rate Disable Appears only if Rate is not ‘Off’. ‘Yes’ disables rate limiting;
‘No’ enables rate limiting.
Servo To PV If ‘Rate’ is set to any value other than ‘Off’, and if ‘Servo to
PV’ is set to ‘Yes’ then any change in the current setpoint
value causes the working setpoint to servo to the current
PV before ramping to the new setpoint value.
SP Trim A positive or negative value added to the setpoint, for local
fine tuning. Valid entries are any value between ‘SP Trim
High’ and ‘SP Trim Low’.
SP Trim High/Low Setpoint trim high and low limits.
Manual Track ‘On’ enables manual tracking. Manual tracking removes
steps in setpoint when switching between ‘Man’ and ‘Auto’
modes. When the loop is switched from manual to auto the
target setpoint is set to the current PV. See "Manual Track-
ing" on page 423 for more details. ‘Off’ disables manual
tracking.
Setpoint Track ‘On’ enables setpoint tracking. When setpoint tracking is
enabled, it ensures ‘bumpless’ transfer in setpoint when
switching from Alternative setpoint to a local setpoint. See
"Setpoint Tracking" on page 423 for more details. ‘Off’ dis-
ables setpoint tracking.
Track PV The unit tracks the PV when it is servoing or tracking.
Track SP The SP to track in manual tracking -see ‘Setpoint Track’,
above.
SP Int Balance Allows the user to enable (tick) or disable (cross) debump
on PV change.
Advanced Loop Slave SP menu
Advanced Loop.Slave.SP
Range High 1372.0 V

Range Low -200 V
SP High Limit 1372.0
SP Low Limit -200

Local SP 1372.0
Trim Range High 100.0
Trim Range Low -100.0
Trim High Limit 100.0 V
Trim Low Limit -100 V

Remote FF 0.0
Remote FF Enable No
Remote FF High 1372.0
Remote FF Low -200

Manual Track Off
Sbrk Mode SbrkSP
Sbrk SP 0.0
Figure 110 Advanced Loop Slave Setpoint menu
HA030554 Issue 16 163

Range High/Low Range limits. Valid entries from 99999 to -99999. Range
limits set absolute maxima and minima for control loop set-
points. If the proportional band is configured as a percent-
age span, the span is derived from the range limits.
SP High Limit Maximum setpoint limit for the local setpoint. Valid entries
are in the range Range Hi’ and ‘SP Low Limit’.
SP Low Limit Minimum setpoint limit for the local setpoint. Valid entries
are in the range ‘Range Lo’ and ‘SP High Limit’.
Local SP The Slave local setpoint.
Trim Range High Trim Range upper limit. Appears only if ‘Cascade type’ has
been set to ‘Trim’ in the Setup menu (Figure 105).
Trim Range Low Trim Range upper limit. Appears only if ‘Cascade type’ has
been set to ‘Trim’ in the Setup menu (Figure 105).
Trim High Limit Maximum value for Trim High value. Appears only if ‘Cas-
cade type’ has been set to ‘Trim’ in the Setup menu (Figure
105).
Trim Low Limit Minimum value for Trim Low value. Appears only if ‘Cas-
cade type’ has been set to ‘Trim’ in the Setup menu (Figure
105).
Remote FF The current remote feedforward value.
Remote FF Enable Enables or disables the use of a remote Feedforward sig-
nal. Appears only if ‘Cascade type’ has been set to ‘Full
Scale’ in the Setup menu (Figure 105).
Remote FF High High limit for the remote feedforward signal value. Appears
only if ‘Cascade type’ has been set to ‘Full Scale’ in the
Setup menu (Figure 105).
Remote FF Low Low limit for the remote feedforward signal value. Appears
only if ‘Cascade type’ has been set to ‘Full Scale’ in the
Setup menu (Figure 105).
FF Select Allows the user to select the source of the feedforward sig-
nal from ‘master PV’, Master working setpoint’ or Remote
FF’. Appears only if ‘Cascade type’ has been set to ‘Trim’
in the Setup menu (Figure 105).
Manual Track ‘On’ enables manual tracking to allow the local SP to follow
the value of the current PV to allow bumpless transfer
when switching to Auto. See "Manual Tracking" on
page 423 for more details. ‘Off’ disables manual tracking.
Sbrk Mode Master sensor break mode. This defines the behaviour
when the master loop PV is bad i.e. the sensor has failed.
Value options:
0: SbrkSP
If the master sensor is broken and the mode is cascade,
the slave setpoint will be set to the SbrkSP.
1: Hold
If the master sensor is broken, the master loop will freeze
at the last output (setpoint) value calculated before the
sensor broke.
2: SlaveSB If the master sensor is broken, the strategy will
switch to the configured slave sensor break mode.
Sbrk SP Sensor break setpoint. This is the setpoint for the slave
loop when the master sensor has gone into sensor break
and the sensor break mode for the master is set to SbrkSP.
164 HA030554 Issue 16

Cascade Full Scale Mode
Figure 111 Cascade Full Scale Mode Block Diagram

Note: The parameter 'Cascade Mode' (Advanced Loop/Main menu) has three
settings:
Cascade The master loop has full control of the slave setpoint which
is read only and tracks the value written by the master.
Slave The master loop no longer controls the slave setpoint,
which has been made read/write, and can be changed
manually over comms. The switch away from the master's
control (SW2) is bumpless and any subsequent return to
Cascade control is also bumpless. The limits to the slave
setpoint which have been defined in SP High Limit and SP
Low Limit are still applied.
Manual The slave loop is in a conventional manual control situation
where the loop output is controlled manually or over
comms. Bumpless switching is still applied in both direc-
tions when switching between manual and slave states.
Note: This applies to operation of SW2, SW3 and SW4 when the loop is in cascade
mode and the master sensor fails (Master Sensor Break).
The parameter 'Master Sensor Break Mode' (In Advanced Loop Slave SP) has three
selections to define what happens in this situation.
SbrkSP (2) With this setting the Slave Loop Setpoint will be set to the
value set in SbrkSP.
Hold (1) This will arrange SW3and SW4 so that the slave loop set-
point will be locked at the current value via the Feedback
path.
SlaveSB (2) This will cause the slave loop's own setting (in Advanced
Loop/ Output) to be implemented. This has two options.
SbrkOP (0) The value set in Advanced Loop/Output/Sensor break out-
put will be used to set the output level from the loop.
Hold (1) The output value will be held at its current level.
Note: 'Remote Feedforward' in the Advanced Loop/Slave SP menu needs to be soft
wired to the required point.
HA030554 Issue 16 165

Note: SW1 operates during auto tuning of the master loop. The parameters
Tune/Output High Limit and Output Low Limit restrict the limits of the output from the
master loop (which is scaled to become the setpoint for the slave loop). Care is
needed in choosing these values to ensure that the tuning setpoint of the slave loop
is achievable. Excessive restriction of the setpoint may prevent completion of the
tuning process.
Cascade Trim Mode
Figure 112 Cascade Trim Mode Block Diagram

Notes:
1. In both Master and Slave loops the setpoint limits only RESTRICT the setpoint
value range which can be used. They have NO EFFECT on the calculation of the
proportional bands.
2. Range High and Range Low parameters in each of the loops
(Adv.Loop.Master.SP and Adv.Loop.Slave.SP) are absolute max. and min.
values and are used in the proportional band calculations. Changing these
values within a loop which is tuned will require re-tuning of the associated loop.
3. Cascade mode in the Main menu allows selection of the three ways in which the
Advanced Loop can operate.
(0) Cascade Both master and slave loops are operating. Target Set-
point defines the controlled temperature at the master sen-
sor. LocalSP in the Slave Loop tracks the SlaveWSP.
(1) Slave The master loop is not influencing the controlled tempera-
ture. This is set by the value of LocalSP. This can now be
directly modified and defines the temperature at which the
slave sensor will be controlled.
(2) Manual The level of the heater power is directly controlled manual-
ly. LocalSP will track the temperature at the slave sensor.
166 HA030554 Issue 16

Advanced Loop Output menu

"Output" on page 423 contains details of the output functions.
Advanced Loop.Output
Output High 100 %

Output Low -100 %
Ch1 Output 0.0
Ch2 Output 0.0

Ch2 Deadband Off
Rate 15
Rate Disable No
Ch1 Travel Time 22.0 sec
Ch2 Travel Time 22.0 sec

Ch1 Pot Pos 0
Ch1 Pot Brk Off
Ch2 Pot Pos 0
Ch2 Pot Brk Off
Pot Brk Mode Raise

Sbrk Mode Safe
Sbrk OP 0.0 %
Safe OP 0.0 %
Manual Mode Track

Manual Output 0.0 %
Forced Output 0.0 %
Manual Startup
Pff En Yes
Line Voltage 218 V

Cool Type Linear
FF Type SP
FF Gain 1.000
FF Offset 0
FF Trim Limit’ 100
FF Remote
FF Output 0%
Track Output 0
Track Enable Off
Rem. Output Low -100 %

Rem. Output High 100 %
Figure 113 Advanced Loop Output menu

Output High The maximum output power to be delivered by channels 1
and 2, where 100% is full power. The valid input range is
Output Low to 100.0%. Reducing this value reduces the
rate of change of the process, but it also reduces the con-
troller’s ability to react to perturbations and can even cause
it to fail to achieve setpoint.
HA030554 Issue 16 167

Output Low The minimum power, or the maximum ‘negative’ (i.e. cool-
ing) power to be delivered by the system.
Ch1 Output Displays the positive power values used by the heat out-
put.
Ch2 Output Displays the cooling power values for channel two. Ap-
pears as a value between Output High and -100%, where
-100% represents full cooling power.
Ch2 Deadband A gap (in percent) between output 1 switching off, and out-
put 2 switching on, and viceversa. Valid inputs are 0 (off)
to 100%.
Rate Limit on the rate at which the output from the PID can
change. Can be useful in preventing rapid changes in out-
put that could damage the process, heater elements etc.
Rate Disable The Output Rate limit may be disabled by setting its value
to 0.0. Alternatively, for some applications it is useful to be
able to wire to the Output Rate Disable so that ‘Rate’ can
be switched on/off during stages of the process. For exam-
ple, Rate Disable can be used with the programmer event
outputs to control the output rate of change during a par-
ticular segment.
Ch1 Travel Time Appears only if Setup menu (Figure 105) parameter ‘Slave
Channel 1’ is set to ‘VPB’. This is the valve travel time from
closed (0%) to open (100%). In a valve positioning appli-
cation, channel 1 output is connected by a single software
‘wire’ to a Valve Raise/Valve Lower relay pair. For
heat/cool applications, channel 1 is associated with the
heating valve. Valid entries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Ch2 Travel Time Appears only if Setup menu (Figure 105) parameter ‘Slave
Channel 2’ is set to ‘VPB’. This is the valve travel time from
closed (0%) to open (100%). For heat/cool applications,
channel 2 is associated with the cooling valve. Valid en-
tries: 0.0 to 1000.0 seconds.
Ch1 Pot Pos* The position of the channel one actuator as measured by
circuit.
Ch2 Pot Pos* The position of the channel two actuator as measured by
circuit.
Pot Brk Mode* Defines the action to be taken if a potentiometer break is
detected:
Raise: opens the valve
Lower: closes the valve
Rest: the valve remains in its current state.
Model: the controller tracks the position of the valve and
sets up a model of the system so that it continues to func-
tion if the potentiometer becomes faulty. This does not
mean that the potentiometer can be omitted with VPB, as
the accuracy of valve position control is reduced without it.
Note: These parameters appear only if the ‘Setup’ menu parameter ‘Slave Channel
1’ or ‘Slave Channel 2’ (as appropriate) is set to ‘VPB’. The Setup menu is described
in "Advanced Loop Setup menu" on page 154.
SBrk Mode Defines the action to be taken in the event of a sensor
break.
Safe: The output adopts the value configured in ‘Sbrk OP’,
below.
Hold: The output remains at its current level.
168 HA030554 Issue 16

Sbrk OP The value to be output if a Slave sensor break occurs, and

SBrk Mode (above) is set to ‘Safe’.
Safe OP The output level adopted when the loop is inhibited (Main
menu "Advanced Loop Main menu" on page 153).
Manual Mode Selects the type of transition to occur when changing to
manual cascade mode ("Advanced Loop Main menu" on
page 153):
Track: Whilst in Auto mode, the manual output tracks the
control output so that there is no change of output when
manual mode is switched to.
Step: On transition to manual mode, the output is set to the
value entered for ‘Forced-OP’ (below).
Last Man. Out: On transition to manual mode, the output
adopts the manual output value as last set by the operator.
Manual Output The output when the loop is in manual mode. In manual
mode the controller limits the maximum power, but it is not
recommended that it be left unattended at high power set-
tings. It is important that over range alarms are fitted to pro-
tect the process.
Note: It is recommended that all processes are fitted with an independent over
range detection system.
Forced Output Forced Manual output value. When ‘Manual Mode’ =
‘Step’, this is the output value adopted when changing
from Auto to Manual mode.
Manual Startup When set to off (cross symbol), the controller powers up in
the same (auto or manual) mode that obtained when it was
switched off. When set to on (tick symbol) the controller al-
ways powers up in manual mode.
Pff En Power feed forward enable. ‘Yes’ enables power feed for-
ward (adjusts the output signal to compensate for varia-
tions is supply voltage. ‘No’ disables Pff. See "Power Feed
Forward" on page 426 for further details.
Line Voltage Read only display of the current supply voltage.
Cool Type Appears only if ‘Ch2 Control’ = ‘PID’ in the setup menu
("Advanced Loop Setup menu" on page 154) and allows
the user to enter the appropriate type of cooling ("Cool
Type" on page 426):
Linear: For use when controller output changes linearly
with PID demand.
Oil: For oil cooled applications.
Water: For water cooled applications.
Fan: For forced air cooling.
FF Type Feed forward type ("Feed forward" on page 427):
None: No signal fed forward.
Remote: A remote signal is fed forward.
SP: Setpoint is fed forward.
PV: PV is fed forward.
FF Gain For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this scales the feed forward
signal.
FF Offset For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this defines the offset of the
scaled feed forward signal.
FF Trim Limit For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, defines symmetrical limits
about the PID output which are applied to the scaled feed
forward signal.
FF Remote Allows another value from the strategy to be used as the
primary control variable in the feed forward strategy. The
gain and offset are not applied to the remote value.
FF Output For FF types ‘PV’ and ‘SP’, this is the calculated (scaled,
offset and trimmed) feed forward signal. FF OP = FF gain
(input + FF Offset).
HA030554 Issue 16 169

Track Output If ‘Track Enable’ (below) is set to ‘Yes’, this is the value for
the loop output to track when output track is enabled.
Track Enable When set to ‘Yes’, the output follows the Track OP value
(above). When subsequently set to ‘Off’ the loop makes a
bumpless return to control.
Rem. Output Low/High
Used to limit the output when using a remote source.
These limits cannot exceed the ‘Output Low’ and ‘Output
High’ values described earlier in this section.
Advanced Loop Diagnostics menu

Master Error The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV
for the Master (Read only).
Slave Error The difference in value between the setpoint and the PV
for the Slave (Read only).
(M)Prop. Output Shows the proportional term contribution to the control out-
put of the Master (Read only).
(M)Integral Out Shows the integral term contribution to the control output
of the Master (Read only).
(M)Deriv. Output Shows the derivative term contribution to the control output
of the Master (Read only).
(S)Prop. Output Shows the proportional term contribution to the control out-
put of the Slave (Read only).
(S)Integral Out Shows the integral term contribution to the control output
of the Slave (Read only).
(S)Deriv. Output Shows the derivative term contribution to the control output
of the Slave (Read only).
Target Output The requested control output. The target of the active out-
put if rate limiting is active (Read only).
Loop Break (S) Loop Break Alarm (Read only). Becomes active ‘Yes’ if the
relevant loop break time (LBT1/2/3), set in the Slave PID
menu ("Advanced Loop Slave PID menu" on page 159) is
exceeded, otherwise ‘No’ is displayed.
Loop Break (M) Loop Break Alarm (Read only). Becomes active ‘Yes’ if the
Master loop break time (LBT), set in the Master PID menu
("Advanced Loop Master PID menu" on page 158) is ex-
ceeded, otherwise ‘No’ is displayed.
Sensor Break (S) Indicates Slave sensor break status (Read only). On (tick
symbol) indicates a sensor break has occurred; Off (cross
symbol) shows that no sensor breaks have been detected.
Sensor Break (M) Indicates Master sensor break status (Read only). On (tick
symbol) indicates a sensor break has occurred; Off (cross
symbol) shows that no sensor breaks have been detected.
Sched PB The scheduled proportional band for the current PID set.
Sched Ti The scheduled integral time for the current PID set.
Sched Td The scheduled derivative time for the current PID set.
Sched CBH The scheduled cutback high value for the current PID set.
Sched CBL The scheduled cutback low value for the current PID set.
Sched MR The scheduled manual reset value for the current PID set.
Sched Loop Break The scheduled loop break time for the current PID set.
Sched R2G The scheduled relative cool gain value for the current PID
set.
Sched Out High The scheduled output high limit for the current PID set.
Sched Out Low The scheduled output low limit for the current PID set.
Working Out Low The low limit for the working output (Read only). This is the
value used to limit the output power of the loop and is de-
170 HA030554 Issue 16

rived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and the
safety limit.
Working Out High The high limit for the working output (Read only). This is
the value used to limit the output power of the loop and is
derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limit and
the safety limit.
Master FB Master FB is the value of the master control output after
limiting and is used for Integral desaturation.
Calc OP Master P+I+D.
HiSatLim HiSatLim is an internally generated limit.
LoSatLim LoSatLim is an internally generated limit.
OPPID Master control output It will be the same as Calc OP if the
master is not in Cutback.
Programmer Configuration
The programmer option allows the user to configure a setpoint program with one or
two channels, as required. The program can be run from the Programmer operator
display page ("Programmer Display Mode" on page 59) or can be controlled by
inputs received from other parameters. In particular, the programmer is intended for
use with the loop or advanced loop options.
The programmer configuration is separated into a number of areas as depicted in the

overview below. The segment configuration (ramp type etc.) is carried out from the
programmer edit page, also described in "Programmer Display Mode" on page 59.
Programmer
Features FTP Set Up Run

("Programmer Features ("Programmer FTP ("Programmer Setup ("Programmer Run
menu" on page 172) menu" on page 174) menu" on page 175) menu" on page 178)
Holdback IP Address Channels Mode
PV Event Username Prog Mode Access Status
User Value password Prog Edit Access Ch1(2) PSP
Messages Prog Store Access Segment Name
FTP Store Rate Resolution Segment type
Ch1(2) Units Segment Time Left
Ch1(2) Resolution Segment Time Run
Ch1(2) Servo To Prog Time Left
Ch1(2) PV Input Prog Time Spent
Ch1(2) SP Input Prog Time Run
Power Fail Action Duration
Max Events Ch1(2) TSP
Reset Events 1 to 8 Ch1(2) rate
Reset Ch1(2) UV Ch1(2) Time
Run Cycles Left
Hold Ch1(2) User Val
Reset Ch1(2) PV Event
Run reset Event 1 to 8
Run Hold End Output
Wait Digital
Wait analogue 1(2)
Advance
Operation
Status
Program Number
HA030554 Issue 16 171

Programmer Features menu

This menu allows the user to enable/disable some of the items presented to the user
in the Programmer edit page described in "Programmer Display Mode" on page 59.
Features are enabled/disabled by using the up/down arrow keys to highlight the
required item and then using the scroll button to toggle between enabled (tick) and
disabled (cross). Typically, items would be left disabled in order to reduce the number
of configuration fields presented to a user who may not need all such features.
Programmer.Features
Holdback
PV Event
User Value
Messages
FTP Store
Figure 114 Programmer features menu

Holdback Holdback pauses the program (freezes the Programmer
setpoint (PSP) and the time remaining parameters) if the
difference between the Process value (PV) and the PSP
exceeds a user-specified amount (deviation). The program
remains paused until the PV returns to within the specified
deviation.
In ramp or step segments, holdback indicates that the PV
is lagging the SP by more than the specified amount and
that the program is waiting for the process to catch up. In
a dwell segment, holdback is used to guarantee that a
work piece stays at set-point within a specified tolerance
for the specified dwell duration.
Holdback type and deviation value are configured, on a per
program basis, to be applied to either the entire program
or to individual segments. See Program edit ("Programmer
Display Mode" on page 59) for details.
PV Event A PV Event is available for each channel in every segment
except for Wait and Go Back segment types. A PV Event
is an absolute or deviation analogue alarm on the channel
PV, and can be used to trigger a secondary process, or to
trigger an analogue alarm.
User Value A user value can be entered for every segment (except for
Wait or Go Back types) and when the segment is entered,
this value is transferred to the associated User Value Out-
put parameter, which could be wired to another parameter
to form part of an application strategy.
Messages Figure 115 lists the programmer specific events that gen-
erate messages that are displayed in the message sum-
mary and recorded into the history file. It is also possible to
trigger custom messages from any of the programmer out-
puts via user wiring. The program name and segment
name can be embedded in custom messages by inserting
the modbus address for the current program / segment
name parameters in square brackets i.e.:
[<current_program_name_modbus_address>]
[<current_segment_name_modbus_address>]
172 HA030554 Issue 16

Event Message
Program Run <program_name>: Run
Program End <program_name>: Complete
Program Hold <program_name>: <segment_name>: Hold
Program Resume <program_name>: <segment_name>: Resume
Program Reset <program_name>: <segment_name>: Reset
Segment Start <program_name>: <segment_name>: Segment Start
Advance <program_name>: <segment_name>: Advanced
Holdback <program_name>: <segment_name>: Holdback:Channel No.
PV Event <program_name>: <segment_name>: PV Eventchannel No.
Figure 115 Programmer messages

FTP Store If this feature is enabled, an FTP menu item appears in the
top level Programmer configuration menu. ‘FTP’ allows the
user to enter communications parameters for the host
computer which is to act as the ftp server. FTP Store al-
lows the user to set-up a centralised program store from
which several instruments can select their program.
Notes:
1. A maximum of 100 entries is supported on all drives. Directory trees are
supported for both USB and FTP, and if the root of the drive contains only files
(no directories), then up to 100 files are listed. If the root of the drive contains
directories then each directory can contain 100 entries (but one of these entries
will be taken up by '..' to return to the directory above).
2. Program files are in compressed XML (.uipz) file format.
3. As the loaded program resides in the current program database it is
automatically included in a clone file. In addition, program files stored in the
internal program drive are included in a clone file (refer to ‘Cloning’, below).
4. On the internal program drive only a flat directory structure is supported.
However, full tree directories are supported on both the USB memory stick and
FTP server (accessed via the HMI File Explorer).
5. It is not possible to store program files on an external device. Programs selected
from an external device can, however, be stored in the internal program store.
6. It is not possible to select a program from an external device over comms and
iTools.
Cloning
Each program file stored locally on the instrument IS included in a clone file as a
Binary Large Object (BLOB), similar to the Graphical Wiring Editor layout. Each
program file BLOB contains the program filename. When loading a clone file, existing
programs in the instrument’s internal drive are deleted, and program file BLOB(s) in
the clone are reformatted into program files by the instrument.
HA030554 Issue 16 173

Programmer FTP menu
Figure 116 Programmer FTP menu

Note: This menu item is accessible only if ‘FTP’ has been enabled in the
Programmer features menu described above.
IP Address The IP address of the FTP server.

Username The User Name entered when setting up the FTP server
Password The password associated with the above User Name.
"Setting Up An FTP Server Using Filezilla" on page 431 gives an example of how to
set up an FTP server using ‘Filezilla’.
174 HA030554 Issue 16

Programmer Setup menu
Programmer.Set Up
Channels 2
Prog Mode Access Operator
Prog Edit Access Supervisor
Prog Store Access Supervisor

Rate Resolution 1
Ch1 Units Deg C
Ch1 Resolution 0
Ch1 Servo To SP
Ch1 PV Input 23.7 V

Ch1 SP Input 0 Deg C
Ch2 Units l/sec
Ch2 Resolution 1
Ch2 Servo To PV
Ch2 PV Input 35.9 V
Ch2 SP Input 431 l/sec
Power Fail Action Ramp back
Max Events 2
Reset Event 1
Reset Event 2
Reset Ch1 UV 0.0
Reset Ch2 UV 0.0
Run No
Hold No
Reset Yes
Run Reset No
Run Hold No
Wait Digital
Wait Analog 1 10
Wait Analog 2 39.7

Advance No
Operation Select...
Status Success
Program Num 1
Figure 117 Programmer Set Up menu

Channels The number of channels to be profiled. 1 = single channel
mode, 2 = dual channel sync-all mode.
Prog Mode Access Sets the minimum access level (Logged off, Operator, Su-
pervisor) for allowing changes to the current program
mode (run, hold or reset).
Prog Edit Access Sets the minimum access level (Logged off, Operator, Su-
pervisor, Engineer) for loading programs, and for allowing
edits to the current program including permission to ad-
vance a segment.
HA030554 Issue 16 175

Prog Store Access Sets the minimum access level (Logged off, Operator, Su-
pervisor, Engineer) that allows users to copy, store and de-
lete programs.
Rate Resolution Sets the resolution (0 to 4 decimal places) of ramp rates
when read from / written to via scaled integer comms.
Ch1 Units Five-character (max.) descriptor for channel 1 units. If
wired, the units will be those of the wire source.
Ch1 Resolution Number of decimal places for channel 1 value. If wired, the
value will be that of the wire source.
Ch1 Servo To Determines whether the programmer starts running chan-
nel 1 from the control loop's configured set-point (servo to
SP), or from the current process value (servo to PV).
Ch1 PV Input Various programmer functions (for example Ch1 Servo to
PV), require the PV value of the loop that the programmer
is trying to control. The parameter is normally wired from
the loop's Track PV parameter.
Ch1 SP Input Various programmer functions (for example Ch1 Servo to
SP), require the SP value of the loop that the programmer
is trying to control - it is normally wired from the loop's
Track SP parameter.
Ch2 Units As ‘Ch1 Units’, above but for channel 2. Appears only if
‘Channels’ is set to ‘2’.
Ch2 Resolution As ‘Ch1 Resolution’, above, but for channel 2. Appears
only if ‘Channels’ is set to ‘2’.
Ch2 Servo To As ‘Ch1 Servo To’, above, but for channel 2. Appears only
if ‘Channels’ is set to ‘2’.
Ch2 PV Input As ‘Ch1 PV Input’, above, but for channel 2. Appears only
Ch1 SP Input As ‘Ch1 SP Input’, above, but for channel 2. Appears only
Power Fail Action If the power supplied to the instrument is interrupted, the
program status is retained and when power is restored, the
instrument performs the selected power fail action. Contin-
ue: The programmer set-point returns immediately to its
last value prior to the power down and the program contin-
ue to run from that point.
Reset: The program resets.
Ramp Back: The programmer servos the programmer
set-point to the channel PV, and ramps to the target
set-point at the rate prior to the power-fail. The time re-
maining for the segment is recalculated.
Notes:
1. If the interrupted segment was a 'time to target' ramp, then when power is
returned the calculated ramp rate prior to the interruption is used.
2. If the interrupted segment was ‘Dwell’, then the ramp rate is determined by the
previous ramp segment. On achieving the dwell set-point, the dwell period
continues.
3. If a previous ramp segment does not exist (i.e. the first segment of a program is a
dwell), the dwell continues at the 'servo to PV' programmer set-point.
Max Events Configures the maximum number of event outputs (0 to 8).
Reset Event N Sets the state of event output ‘N’ when the program is in
reset. Appears only if ‘Max Events’ is > (N-1).
Reset Ch1 UV Enter the value to be written to user value 1 when the pro-
gram is in reset. Appears only if ‘User Value’ feature is en-
abled in Programmer.Features configuration
("Programmer Features menu" on page 172).
176 HA030554 Issue 16

Reset Ch2 UV Enter the value to be written to user value 2 when the pro-
gram is in reset. Appears only if ‘User Value’ feature is en-
abled in Programmer.Features configuration
("Programmer Features menu" on page 172) and ‘Chan-
nels’ = ‘2’.
Run The input that causes the programmer to place the current
program in Run mode.
Hold The input that causes the programmer to place the current
program in Hold mode.
Reset The input that causes the programmer to place the current
program in Reset mode.
Run Reset Dual functionality input, that causes the programmer to
place the current program in Run or Reset mode.
Run Hold Dual functionality input, that causes the programmer to
place the current program in Run or Hold mode.
Wait Digital The Boolean input that is used in Wait segments.
Wait Analog 1 The analogue input associated with channel 1 that is used
in wait segments.
Wait Analog 2 The analogue input associated with channel 2 that is used
in wait segments. Appears only if ‘Channels’ = ‘2’.
Advance The input to advance the current segment.
Operation Program file operation selection parameter. See ‘Program
editing’ ("Programmer Display Mode" on page 59) for fur-
ther details.
Status Status indication of the selected file operation.See ‘Pro-
gram editing’ ("Programmer Display Mode" on page 59) for
further details.
Amended Indicates whether the current program has been amended
since being loaded (Comms only)
File Error Status File operation error status (Busy, OK, Load Open File Er-
ror, Store Open File Error, Delete File Fail, Copy File Fail,
Invalid Format, Invalid Device, Invalid Version, Invalid
Num Channels, Parameter Write Fail, Store Operation Did
Not Complete, Load Operation Did Not Complete, Delete
Operation Did Not Complete, Copy Operation Did Not
Complete, Invalid Filename, Unspecified Error). Available
only over Comms as the error is displayed on the display
screen.
'Parameter Write Fail' indicates that one or more pro-
gram/segment parameters failed to be written to during a
'Load' operation. This is generally caused by a program
that contains features (i.e. Holdback, User Values, PV
Events) which are disabled in the instrument's Program-
mer block, or the program contains more Event Outputs
than configured in the instrument's Programmer block.
Program Num A program name may be prefixed by a program number
from 1 to 99. This is necessary if a program is to be loaded
either using a BCD switch or via a single comms transac-
tion. The parameter shows the last program to be loaded
via the program number. See also "Programmer Display
Mode" on page 59. ‘Program Load Via a Program Num-
ber’.
HA030554 Issue 16 177

Programmer Run menu
Programmer.Run
Mode Run
Status Running
Ch1 PSP 43.3 V
Ch2 PSP 42.9 V

Segment Heat Init
Segment Type Ramp
Segment Time Left 00:00:33
Segment Time Run 00:01:17
Prog Time Left 00:18:48

Prog Time Spent 00:00:33
Prog Time Run 00:00:53
Duration 00:00:14
Ch1 TSP 43.3 V

Ch1 Time 00:01:00
Ch2 TSP 10.5 V
Ch2 Time 00:02:23
Cycles Left 10
Ch1 User Val 7
Ch2 User Val 3

Ch1 PV Event
Ch2 PV Event
Event 1
Event 2
End Output
Figure 118 Programmer.Run

Mode Current program mode (Run, Hold, Reset).
Status Current program status (Running, Holding, Holdback,
Waiting, Reset, Complete)
Ch1 PSP The output setpoint for channel 1.
Ch2 PSP The output setpoint for channel 2. Appears only if ‘Chan-
nels’ = ‘2’ in the Set Up menu ("Programmer Setup menu"
on page 175).
Segment Name of the current segment as entered in the Program
Edit page ("Programmer Display Mode" on page 59).
Segment Type Current segment type as entered in the Program Edit page
("Programmer Display Mode" on page 59).
Seg Time Left Indicates the minimum amount of time left in the current
segment.
Seg Time Run The length of time that the current segment has been run-
ning. This value does not include time spent in Hold, Hold-
back or Waiting.
Prog Time Left Shows the minimum amount of time left before the pro-
gram completes. Each segment can be up to 500 hours in
length. The maximum display is 500 hours, and if the
length of the entire program is greater than this, the display
178 HA030554 Issue 16

remains at 500 until the remaining time falls below 500

hours.
Prog Time Spent Indicates the length of time the current program has been
running, including time spent in Hold, Holdback or Waiting.
Prog Time Run The length of time the current program has been running.
This value does not include time spent in Hold, Holdback
or Waiting
Duration For Dwell segments only, this is the dwell duration.
Ch1 TSP For Ramp and Step segments, this is the current target
setpoint for channel 1.
Ch1 Time For Ramp segments, this is the configured time for chan-
nel 1 to reach its Target Setpoint (TSP).
Ch2 TSP For Ramp and Step segments, this is the current target
setpoint for channel 2. Appears only if ‘Channels’ = ‘2’ in
the Programmer Set Up menu ("Programmer Setup menu"
on page 175).
Ch2 Time For Ramp segments, this is the configured time for chan-
nel 2 to reach its Target Setpoint (TSP). Appears only if
‘Channels’ = ‘2’ in the Programmer Set Up menu ("Pro-
grammer Setup menu" on page 175)
Cycles Left The number of Go Back cycles remaining before the Go
Back loop ends.
Ch1 User Val The value of user value 1 in the current segment. Appears
only if the ‘User Value’ feature is enabled in the Program-
mer Features menu ("Programmer Features menu" on
page 172).
Ch2 User Val The value of user value 2 in the current segment. Appears
only if the ‘User Value’ feature is enabled in the Program-
mer Features menu ("Programmer Features menu" on
page 172) and if ‘Channels’ = ‘2’ in the Programmer Set Up
menu ("Programmer Setup menu" on page 175).
Ch1 PV Event The state of channel 1 PV event (Off = Cross symbol, On
= Tick). Appears only if the ‘PV Event’ feature is enabled.
Ch2 PV Event The state of channel 2 PV event (Off = Cross symbol, On
= Tick). Appears only if the ‘PV Event’ feature is enabled
and if ‘Channels’ = ‘2’ in the Programmer Set Up menu
("Programmer Setup menu" on page 175).
Event 1 to 8 The state of event output 1 to 8 for the current segment
(Off = Cross symbol, On = Tick). The number of events ap-
pearing is defined in the Programmer Set Up menu ("Pro-
grammer Setup menu" on page 175) (Max Events).
End Output The output that is set by the end segment (Off = Cross
symbol, On = Tick).
Connecting the programmer to a loop

Below are some examples of how programmers and loops may be soft-wired
together so that the programmer has access to the Loop PV and Loop setpoint. The
examples are taken from iTools (Section 9), but may be carried out through User
Wiring ("User Wiring") if more convenient.
HA030554 Issue 16 179

Figure 119 Advanced loop to Programmer basic wiring
Figure 120 Programmer to Loop basic wiring
180 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 121 Dual programmer to two loops basic wiring
Configuration by Modbus Comms

It is possible to configure, store, delete, or load a program via Modbus comms by
setting the Program and Segment parameters using either their scaled integer or
native Modbus addresses ("Parameter List" on page 232).
Example 1: Configure a Program

To configure a simple Ramp-Dwell-Ramp program via Modbus comms:
Set Segment.1.Type (address 15040) to Ramp (1)

Set Segment.1.Ch1TSP (address 15042) to 60.0 (600 -1dp)
Set Segment.1.Ch1Time (address 15044) to 60s (60s)
Set Segment.2.Type (address 15088) to Dwell (2)
Set Segment.2.Duration (address 15089) to 120s (120)
Set Segment.3.Type (address 15136) to Ramp (1)
Set Segment.3.Ch1TSP (address 15138) to 0.0 (0 -1dp)
Set Segment.3.Ch1Time (address 15140) to 180s (180)
HA030554 Issue 16 181

Example 2: Store a Program

To store the current program:
Set Programmer.FileList.FilenameEntry (address 27281) to required filename (e.g.

George)
Set Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) to Store (4)
Read Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) until it returns Select (1)
Read Programmer.Setup.Status (address 14913) to get the status of the store
operation (Success = 1, Failed = 2)
Example 3: List Stored Programs

To get a listing of stored program files:
Set Programmer.FileList.Operation (address 14976) to Get Listing (1)

Read Programmer.FileList.Operation (address 14976) until it returns Complete (0)
Read Programmer.FileList.Filename1 to 100 parameters (address 30976 - 31075)
Note: For each filename parameter perform a 21 register block read starting from
the base address of the parameter, 1st null string indicates end of List.
Example 4: Loading Programs

To load a program:
Get a listing as described above

Set Programmer.FileList.FilenameEntry (address 27281) to the filename to be loaded
(e.g. George)
Set Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) to Load (2)
Read Programmer.Setup.Operation (address 14912) until it returns Select (1)
Read Programmer.Setup.Status (address 14913) to get the status of the load
operation (Success = 1, Failed = 2).
Example 5: Loading a Program via a Program Number

Set Programmer.Setup.ProgNum (address 14920) to the program number to be
loaded.
Modbus Master Configuration

Modbus master configuration is divided into two areas: a) setting up the slave(s),
including diagnostics, and b) defining the locations of the parameters to be read.
Figure 122 shows an overview. "Modbus Master display mode" on page 78 shows
the Modbus Master display page, and describes the configuration options available
there.
Note: Versions 2.40 to 2.50 of the Mini8 Controller, and versions 2.70 to 3.20 of the
Model 3550 controller are supported. It is not guaranteed that later software versions
of these instruments will be fully compatible.
182 HA030554 Issue 16

Select configuration menu Select configuration menu

"Slave Main
menu" on
Programmer Slave 1 Programmer Main page 183
Modbus Master Slave 2 Modbus Master Diagnostics "Slave

Diagnostics
EtherNet/IP 1 Data/IP
menu" on
Digital I/O 2 Data I/O page 185
User Lin 3 User Lin
Custom Message 4 Custom Message
Zirconia 5 Zirconia
Programmer Data "Modbus

master data
Modbus Master
configuration"
Data items that have been configured Data/IP on page 186
as other than ‘Off are indicated by a
green triangle in the top right-hand Data I/O
corner User Lin
Custom Message
Zirconia
Figure 122 Modbus Master configuration top level menus
Slave Main menu

This allows the IP address, Unit ID and other communications parameters to be
entered for Slaves 1 and 2.
Modbus Master.Slave.1.Main
Descriptor nanodac
Online
Comms Failure No
IP Address 123.123.123.111
Unit ID 1
Search Device No
Available Priority selections
Search Result Available
Seconds Minutes Hours
Profile nanodac 0.125 1 1
0.25 2
Retries 3
0.5 5
Timeout (ms) 250 1 10
Max Block Size 124 2 20
5 30
High Priority 0.125 sec
10
Medium Priority 1 sec 20
Low Priority 2 secs 30
Figure 123 Modbus Master Slave 1 configuration (Slave 2 similar)
HA030554 Issue 16 183

Descriptor A descriptor for this instrument. For use in Modbus com-

munications, this is not the same as the ‘Name’ which ap-
pears in the Instrument Info configuration ("Custom
Messages" on page 198).
Online Disabled by default (Cross symbol). Must be enabled
(highlighted using the down arrow, then edited by the scroll
button) to allow the remaining configuration items to ap-
pear and to allow data transactions be processed. Setting
the slave offline temporarily disables data transactions - it
does not reconfigure them.
Comms Failure Active (yes) if a data item has failed to respond after all re-
tries.
IP Address The IP address of the Slave device.
Unit ID The Unit Id or Modbus address to use in each data trans-
action with the slave device. Limits are 1 to 255.
Search Device Setting this to ‘Yes’ searches the network to see if the de-
vice with the specified IP address and Unit ID is available.
If so, the descriptor will be overwritten to indicate what type
of device has been found.
Search Result The status of the selected 'Search Device' request
(Searching, Available, Unreachable). Search activity is in-
dicated by a rotating animated display in the ‘Searching’
field.
Profile A number of profiles are held within the instrument that
match a selection of known devices. If the device is
‘known’, its type, model number etc. is displayed. If the de-
vice is unknown, ‘3rd Party’ appears instead.
Retries The number of times (0 to 3) to re-send a data transaction
to the device if no response is received within the config-
ured timeout period (below).
Timeout The timeout period for each Modbus transaction in ms.
Max Block Size The maximum number of registers (16bit words) that a sin-
gle data transaction is permitted to contain.
High Priority The interval rate between each high priority data transac-
tion. Default = 0.125 second.
Medium Priority The interval rate between each medium priority data trans-
action. Default = 1 second.
Low Priority The interval rate between each low priority data transac-
tion. Default = 2 seconds.
Priority Levels
Three levels of update rate can be entered for use in data configuration ("Modbus
master data configuration" on page 186), to define how often a value is read or
written. In order to optimise performance, it is recommended that the slowest rate
consistent with requirements be selected. The intervals are selected from a scroll list
see Figure 123 above.
184 HA030554 Issue 16

Slave Diagnostics menu
Modbus Master.Slave.1.Diagnostics
Actual High 0.125

Actual Medium 1.000
Actual Low 2.000
Device Status Success

Loopback Test 15428
Total 15428
Successful 0
Failures 0
Retries 0
Timeouts 0
Illegal Function 0
illegal Address 0
0
Ilegal Data
Slave Failure 0
No Gateway Path 0
Reset No
Figure 124 Diagnostics menu

Note: Diagnostic values are reset on power up.
Actual High The high priority rate that this slave is actually running at.
This can never be faster than the high priority rate that was
configured for this device (Slave Main menu, above), but if
the master is heavily loaded the rate may be lower than
that specified.
Actual Medium The medium priority rate that this slave is running at. This
can never be faster than the medium priority rate that was
configured for this device (Slave Main menu, above), but if
the master is heavily loaded the rate may be lower than
that specified.
Actual Low The actual low priority rate that this slave is running at. This
can never be faster than the low priority rate that was con-
figured for this device (Slave Main menu, above), but if the
master is heavily loaded the rate may be lower than that
specified.
Device Status The status of the last transaction to this slave.
Success: The transaction was successfully actioned by the
slave device.
Timeout: There was no response from the slave device to
a given request within the configured time.
Illegal Address: The request to the slave device contained
an invalid Modbus address. The address may be for a read
only parameter.
Illegal Value: The request to the slave device contained in-
valid data for the specified parameter.
Bad Sub: The sub function code in the request was invalid.
Idle: This data item is currently idle and not communicating
with the slave device.
Illegal Code: The slave does not support the function code
transmitted by the master.
Pending: The request is waiting to be sent, the most likely
HA030554 Issue 16 185

cause being that the slave device has not been set to on-
line.
Loopback Test If set to ‘Yes’, Sends a function code 8 transaction to the
slave, and waits for a response.
Total A count of all the transactions sent to the slave including
reads, writes both good and failed transactions.
Successful A count of all the successful transactions sent to the slave.
Failures A count of all the unsuccessful (failed) transactions sent to
the slave. May be caused by Illegal Function, Illegal Ad-
dress etc. failures, as detailed below.
Retries The number of transactions that were re-sent because of
timed out responses from the slave devices.
Timeouts A count of all the transactions sent to the slave for which
no response was received within the configured timeout
period.
Illegal Function A count of all the transactions sent to the slave that the
slave claimed contained an invalid function code. Excep-
tion code (1).
Illegal Address A count of all the transactions sent to the slave that the
slave claimed contained an invalid Modbus register ad-
dress. Exception code (2).
Illegal Data A count of all the transactions sent to the slave that the
slave claimed contained an invalid value. Exception code
(3).
Slave Failure A count of all the times this slave device has failed to com-
municate. Exception code (4).
No Gateway Path A count of all the times it has not been possible to access
the slave device as it is on another network that requires a
gateway for access.
Master Rejects A count of all the transactions that the Modbus Master has
refused to send to the slave due to invalid configuration da-
ta.
Reset A one shot action that immediately resets all diagnostics
counts.
Modbus master data configuration

This is the area of configuration in which the individual data items are selected for
transmission across the Mod-bus master communications link. The configuration
fields that appear depends on the parameter selected, so the examples given here
will probably not match those that appear to the user. The parameters that appear in
the ‘Parameter List’ scroll menu depends on the slave model.
186 HA030554 Issue 16

Example 1: Target SP1 with Nanodac Slave
Select configuration menu Modbus Master.1.Data
Programmer Data Descriptor Data Item 1

Modbus Master PV 0.00
EtherNet/IP Status Success
Digital I/O Slave Device nanodac

User Lin Parameter List Target SP
Custom Message Number 1
Zirconia Priori Medium
Figure 125 Target Setpoint
Example 2 User Defined Parameter

This allows the user to enter a Modbus address (decimal) and a data type in order to
read the value of a parameter from or write a parameter value to the slave. Modbus
address and data types must be obtained from the documentation supplied with the
slave device. For convenience, this example uses a nanodac as the slave; the table
in "Parameter List" on page 232 of this document providing the required data.
Select configuration menu Modbus Master.1.Data
Programmer Data Descriptor Ch1 PV

Modbus Master PV 23.6
EtherNet/IP Status Success
Digital I/O Slave Device Slave 2

User Lin Parameter List User Defined
Custom Message Modbus Address 256
Zirconia Function Code Read Input (4)
Data Type REAL

Priority Medium
Figure 126 User defined parameters

DATA PARAMETERS
This lists all possible configuration fields that might appear, not just those shown in
the examples above.
Descriptor Up to 20 characters used to describe the current data item
(used in the Modbus Master user page ("Modbus Master
display mode" on page 78)).
PV The process value currently being read from the selected
slave. Visible only if data item is not an alarm type. The val-
ue must be wired to a virtual channel with ‘Operation’ =
‘Copy’ if it is to be trended and/or recorded.
Sys Alm status The status (e.g. None, Active) of the data item. Visible only
for specific read profiles. The value must be wired to a vir-
tual channel with ‘Operation’ = ‘Copy’ if it is to be trended
and/ or recorded.
HA030554 Issue 16 187

Chan. Alm Status The status of the data item. Visible only for specific read
profiles. The value must be wired to a virtual channel with
‘Operation’ = ‘Copy’ if it is to be trended and/or recorded.
Set Allows the user to set an on/off value. Visible only for spe-
cific write profiles.
Mode Allows the user to set an auto/manual value. Visible only
for specific write profiles.
Value Configured or wired value to be sent to the selected slave.
This parameter is available only with function codes 6 &
16.
Fall Back Value The value to be sent to the selected slave if the 'Value' pa-
rameter is wired and has a status other than GOOD_PV.
This parameter is available only with function codes 6 & 16
It is not possible to wire Fall Back Value from another pa-
rameter and it can be configured only manually.
Send A one shot action that sends the data in the 'Value' param-
eter or the 'Fall Back Value' parameter (depending upon
the status of 'Value') to the selected slave. This is classed
as an acyclic write and so is available only for function
codes 6 & 16. The 'Priority' parameter must be set to 'Acy-
clic'.
Status The status of the last transaction sent to the selected
slave.
Success: The transaction was successfully actioned by the
slave device.
Timeout: There was no response from the slave device to
a given request within the configured time.
Illegal Address: The request to the slave device contained
an invalid Modbus address. The address may be for a read
only parameter.
Illegal Value: The request to the slave device contained in-
valid data for the specified parameter.
Bad Sub: The sub function code in the request was invalid.
Idle: This data item is currently idle and not communicating
with the slave device
Illegal Code: The slave does not support the function code
transmitted by the master.
Pending: The request is waiting to be sent, the most likely
cause being that the slave device has not been set to on-
line.
Slave Device A list of available slaves that this data is to communicate
with.
Parameter List List of parameters available for the selected slave devices
profile. These parameters require no user configuration.
Number The channel, loop or group etc. instance.
Modbus Address The Modbus register address that this data is to be read or
written to. Limits are 0 - 65535.
Function Code The function code to use, this determines if the data is go-
ing to be read or written to the selected slave. Supported
function codes are:
Code Description Code Description

1 Read contiguous status coils 5 Write a single coil on or off
2 Read contiguous discrete inputs 6 Write to a single register
3 Read contiguous holding registers 8 Loopback test
4 Read contiguous input registers 16 Write to contiguous registers
188 HA030554 Issue 16

Data Type The data type that defines how this data is going to be rep-
resented. The data types listed below are supported.
8-bit signed byte (BYTE)
8-bit unsigned byte (UBYTE)
16-bit signed integer (INT)
16-bit unsigned integer (UINT)
32-bit signed long (DINT)
32-bit unsigned long (UDINT)
32-bit floating point IEEE (REAL)
32-bit signed long (little Endian, word swapped) (DINT
(Swap))
32-bit unsigned long (little Endian, word swapped) (UDINT
(Swap))
32-bit floating point IEEE (little Endian, word swapped)
(REAL (swap))
Bit from register (BIT)
By default all 16 & 32 bit data types (unless specified) will
be transmitted in Big Endian format, where the most signif-
icant byte in the value is sent first. Byte Ordering: (for big
Endian) (0x12 sent first)
16-bit 0x1234 0x12, 0x34
32-bit 0x12345678 0x12, 0x34, 0x56, 0x78
Bit Position The bit in the register to be extracted, this is only available
if the 'Data Type' selected is 'BIT In Register'.
Scaling The decimal placing for scaled 16 bit data types. Visible
depending on the 'Data Type' selected.
Priority The frequency with which this data will be managed. See
‘Priority Levels’, in "Slave Main menu" on page 183,
above.
Ethernet/IP Configuration
This area of configuration allows the ‘Client’ user to set up an EtherNet/IP
communications link with up to two Server units. The ‘Server’ user has a more limited
range of configurable items.
Note: Implicit I/O is used for continuous real-time transfer of multiple data items
from instrument to instrument. Explicit I/O is used as a ‘one-shot’ transfer of a single
data item. See "EtherNet/IP display mode" on page 80 for further details. Figure 127
shows that the configuration is split into three areas: Main, Implicit Inputs and Implicit
Outputs, but it should be noted that the implicit inputs and implicit outputs are read
only, as these can be configured only by using iTools, as described in the EtherNet/IP
display mode description ("EtherNet/IP display mode" on page 80).

"Ethernet/IP Configuration Main menu"
Channel Main on page 190
Virtual Channel Implicit Inputs "Implicit inputs/outputs" on page 191
Loop Implicit Outputs "Explicit inputs/outputs" on page 191
Advanced Loop
Programmer
Modbus Master
EtherNet/IP
Figure 127 Client configuration
HA030554 Issue 16 189

Ethernet/IP Configuration Main menu
EtherNet/IP.Main
IO Status Code Online

Implicit I/O 123.123.123.223
Explicit 1 No connection
Explicit 2 No connection
Mode Client (IO)
Server Address 123.123.123.223
Input Instance 100
Size (Bytes) 100

Output Instance 112
Size (Bytes) 100

Connection Type Point2Point
Priority Scheduled
RPI (ms) 1000

Reset Comms No
Figure 128 Ethernet/IP Main menu

Net Status Code Network status (Server only)
Offline: nanodac online but there are currently no CIP con-
nections
Online: nanodac online with at least 1 CIP connection
Connection Timeout: The connection has timed out
Duplicate IP: A duplicate IP address has been detected on
the network
Initialisation: nanodac is initialising comms
IO Status Code IO status (Client (IO) only). As above.
Tag Status code Tag status (Client (Tags) only. See Figure 129, below.
Implicit I/O Connected IO server IP address.
Multicast Connected IO server IP address (only if multicast select-
ed).
Explicit 1 Connected client/server IP address.
Explicit 2 Connected client/server IP address.
Mode Modes of operation: Server, Client (IO) or Client (Tags).
Server Address IO Server IP address (Client mode only).
Input Instance Input class instance number (client mode only).
Size (bytes) The size in bytes of data that the client is expecting to read
from the implicit input.
Output Instance Output class instance number (client mode only).
Size (bytes) The size of data that the client is expecting to write to the
server.
Connection Type Connection type (client mode only).
Priority Connection priority (client mode only).
Rpi IO connection speed (client mode only).
Reset Comms Applies all changes to the EtherNet/IP stack at the same
time. Or can be used to reset communications using the
current configuration.
Slot Number PLC slot number (zero indexed) when communicating us-
ing tags.
190 HA030554 Issue 16

Implicit inputs/outputs
This display provides a read-only display of the values in the input and output data
tables. Parameters are placed in the input and output tables using the proprietary
software tool called ‘iTools’, as described in "EtherNet/IP display mode" on page 80.
Explicit inputs/outputs
See "EtherNet/IP display mode" on page 80 for details.
0 Success. Service was successful

1 Connection Failed. A connection in the path failed
2 Invalid Parameter. A parameter associated with the request was invalid
3 Memory Unavailable. No available resources in the server to service the
request
4 Path Seqment Error. The syntax of all or some of the path was not understood
5 Path Dest. Error. The path references an unknown object, class or instance
6 Partial Transfer. Only part of the expected data was transferred
7 Connection Lost. The messaging connection was lost
8 Service Unsupported. Undefined service for requested object
9 Invalid Attribute. Invalid attribute data detected
10 Attribute Error. An attribute in the response has a non zero status
11 Already Requested. The object is already in the mode/state being requested
12 Object Conflict. The object cannot perform the requested service
13 Already Exists. The requested instance or object already exists
14 Attribute Error. Request to modify a non modifiable attribute received
15 No Privileges. Permission/Privilege check failed
16 State Conflict. The current state or mode prohibits the execution of the
requested service
17 Reply To Large. Response buffer too small for response data
18 Fragmented Value. For example this service request will return only half a
REAL data type
19 Not Enough Data. The service does not provide enough data to complete the
request
20 Invalid Attribute. Requested attribute is not supported
21 Too Much Data. The service supplied more than was expected
22 Object Non-Exist. The object specified does not exist in the device
23 Seq. Fragmentation. The fragmentation sequence for this service is not active
24 No Attribute Data. The attribute data for this object was not saved at the server
prior to this request service
25 Data Store Failure. The attribute data for this object was not saved due to a
failure during the attempt
26 Routing Failed. The service request packet was too large for transmission on a
network in the path to the destination. The routing device was forced to abort
the service
27 Routing Failed. The service request packet was too large for transmission on a
network in the path to the destination. The routing device was forced to abort
the service
28 Missing Attribute. The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes
that was needed by the service to perform the requested behaviour
HA030554 Issue 16 191

29 Invalid Attribute. The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with
status information for those attributes that were invalid
30 Embedded Tag Error. An embedded service resulted in an error. This is most
commonly an incorrectly formatted tag name
31 Vendor Error. A vendor specific error has encountered
32 Invalid Parameter. A parameter associated with the request was invalid
33 Write Once Error. An attempt to write to a write once only parameter occurred
34 Invalid Reply. An invalid reply was received
35 Buffer Overflow. The message received is larger than the receiving buffer
36 Format Error. The format of the received message is not supported
37 Key Path Failure. The key segment in the path does not match destination key
38 Path Size Error. The size of the path in the request is too large
39 Unexpected Attribute. Unable to set the attribute at this time
40 Invalid Member Id. The requested member id does not match class object
41 Member Is R/0. A request to modify a R/O member was received
42 Group 2 Server. Group 2 DeviceNet server response
43 Translation Error. A CIP Modbus translator request failed
44 Attribute Is R/0. A request to read a non readable attribute was received
64 No Tags Found. There were no tags configured in the input or output tables
65 Invalid Config. The total length in characters of all the tags in this table will
cause the PLC to exceed its internal buffer of 500 bytes. To eliminate this
problem, reduce the length of some or all tag names
Figure 129 Tag Status code definition
Web Server
Note: By default the Web Server will be enabled to use HTTPS.
The Web Server has been added from firmware versions V5.00 onwards and
provides the following features:
• Up to four unique client connections
• PC, Tablet and mobile phone client support (using appropriate browsers)
• Full URL translation support
• Runtime data
• Historical data
• Target information
• Alarm information
• Message log
• Promote page
• Full cookie support
• Safari, IE9 or greater and Google Chrome browser support
The web server provides visualisation only.
192 HA030554 Issue 16

Configuration Display
Web Server
Status Ready
Enabled Yes
Port 80
Security Yes
Username admin
Password admin
Figure 130 Web server configuration page

Status Read only.
Ready - the web server is running.
Inactive -the web server is not ready
Connected - the web server is connected. It is possible that
Status will flip between Ready and Connected during op-
eration.
Enabled Yes/No
Port 80 or 8080
Security Yes/No. Yes is the default.
Username Enter a customised user name. This will be required when
logging in to the webserver. Default is ‘admin’. Username
is only shown when ‘Security’ is set to ‘Yes’.
Password Enter a customised password. This will be required when
logging in to the webserver. Password is only shown when
‘Security’ is set to ‘Yes’
For further information regarding Web Server pages, see Appendix D: Web Server
(page 439).
Digital I/O
This area of configuration allows the digital I/O types to be selected.
Notes:
1. If 2A2B is set to ‘Valve Raise’, then 3A3B is set to ‘Valve Lower’. Similarly, if relay
4AC is set to ‘Valve Raise’, then relay 5AC is set to ‘Valve Lower’. When the loop
channel output is wired to the PV input of a Valve Raise function, then the PV
input of the associated Valve Lower function becomes unavailable for wiring, and
both outputs are controlled by the loop as a pair, using only the single wire.
2. See "Time Proportioning" on page 430 for a description of time proportioning.
Instrument 1A1B
Network 2A2B
Select configuration menu : Note: These
fields do not appear if they contain I/O Group LALC (Dig.In)
type ‘DC Output’.
Channel 3A3B
Virtual Channel LBLC (Dig.In)
Loop 4AC (Relay)

Digital I/O 5AC (Relay)
Figure 131 Digital I/O top level menu
HA030554 Issue 16 193

Digital input/output
This applies to signals at terminals 1A/1B (Figure 4). Highlight ‘1A1B’, then operate
the scroll key to reveal the configuration menu.
Module Ident Dig IO
Type On Off O/P, Time Prop O/P or Contact I/P (default)
PV For inputs, 0 = contact is open; 1 = contact is closed. For
On Off O/P, a value = 0.5 drives the output high, otherwise,
the output is driven low. For Time Prop O/P, the value is
the demanded output percentage.
Min On Time For Type = Time Prop O/P only, this allows a minimum on
time to be specified. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 sec-
onds
Invert Inverts the output sense for digital outputs; or the input sig-
nal for digital inputs.
Output Off = output being driven low; On = output being driven
high. Does not appear for Type = Contact I/P
Relay outputs
This may apply to terminal pairs 1A1B, 2A2B, 3A3B, 4AC, 5AC (Figure 4). Highlight
the relevant terminal pair, then operate the scroll key to reveal the configuration
menu.
Module Ident Relay.
Type (2A2B, 4AC) On Off O/P (default), Time Prop O/P, Valve Raise (not if
DC output I/O fitted).
Type (3A3B, 5AC) ‘On Off O/P’ (default), ‘Time Prop O/P’. The 3A3B relay is
not fitted if ‘DC Output’ I/O is fitted (see "Configuration Dis-
play" on page 193).
PV For On Off O/P, a value = 0.5 closes the relay contacts,
otherwise, the contacts are open. For Time Prop O/P, the
value is the demanded output percentage.
time to be specified to reduce relay wear. Configurable
range = 0.1 to 150 seconds.
Invert Inverts the output sense for the relays (not applicable if
Type = Valve Raise).
Inertia For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be en-
tered (in seconds) to take into account valve run-on.
Backlash For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be en-
tered (in seconds) in order to compensate for backlash in
the valve linkage.
Standby action For Type = Valve Raise only, this specifies the valve action
when the instrument is in standby mode.
Continue: Output continues at the demanded level.
Freeze: The valve stops being driven.
Output Off = relay contacts open; On = relay contacts closed.
Digital inputs
This applies to terminals pairs LALC, LBLC (Figure 4). Highlight the relevant terminal
pair, then operate the scroll key to reveal the configuration menu.
Module Ident Dig.In
Type Contact I/P
PV 0 = contact is open; 1 = contact is closed.
Invert Inverts the sense of the input.
194 HA030554 Issue 16

Digital outputs
This applies to terminal pair 2A2B (Figure 4). Highlight 2A2B, then operate the scroll
key to reveal the configuration menu.
Module Ident Dig.Out
Type On Off O/P, Time Prop O/P or Valve Raise
PV For On Off O/P, a value = 0.5 drives the output high, oth-
erwise, the output is driven low. For Time Prop O/P, the
value is the demanded output percentage.
time to be specified. Configurable range = 0.1 to 150 sec-
onds
Invert Inverts the output sense for digital outputs; or the input sig-
nal for digital inputs.
Inertia For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be en-
tered (in seconds) to take into account valve run-on.
Backlash For Type = Valve Raise only, this allows a value to be en-
tered (in seconds) in order to compensate for backlash in
the valve linkage.
Standby action For Type = Valve Raise only, this specifies the valve action
when the instrument is in standby mode. Continue: Output
continues at the demanded level. Freeze: The valve stops
being driven.
Output Off = output being driven low; On = output being driven
high.
DC Output
This option provides a voltage (terminals 3A3B only) or mA output. Terminal location
is shown in Figure 4.
DANGER
There are no mechanical interlocks to prevent a chassis with the DC output option
being fitted into a ‘sleeve’ or case' which has previously been wired for the standard
relay output. Before fitting the chassis into the case, it must be ensured that the
terminal wiring is not attached to live voltage supplies, as such voltages may cause
permanent damage to the instrument.
Configuration display
As shown in Figure 132, highlight the required DC output, then operate the scroll
button to reveal the configuration page.
HA030554 Issue 16 195

DC Output.3A3B (DC Op)
Select configuration menu Type V

PV 0.00
Network 3A3B (DC.Op)
Status Good
Group 2A2B (DC.Op)
OP Adjust State Adjusted Appears only if
Channel 1A1B (DC.Op) the DC Output
Resolution 2 has been ad-
Virtual Channel
Output Low 0.00 justed ("Output
Loop adjust" on
Output High 10.00 page 106)
Digital I/O
DC Output Scale Low 0.00
Scale High 100.00
Fallback PV 0.00
Measured Value 0.00
Figure 132 DC Output option configuration page (typical)
Parameters
Type Select V(olts) (3A3B only) or mA as the output type.
PV Input value to the function. Normally ‘wired’ to a suitable
parameter.
Status The status of the input parameter.
OP Adjust State Adjusted. Appears only if the Output Adjust facility ("Out-
put adjust" on page 106) has been used.
Resolution The number of decimal places to be used for this configu-
ration item.
Output Low The minimum output value in Volts or mA as appropriate.
Output High The maximum output value to be output in Volts or mA as
appropriate.
Scale Low See ‘SCALING INFORMATION’ below.
Scale High See ‘SCALING INFORMATION’ below.
Fallback PV The output value when the status of the input parameter is
not ‘good’.
Measured Value The Voltage or mA value appearing at the output terminals
Note: The output voltage or current can be calibrated by using the output adjust
procedure described in "Output adjust" on page 106.
Scaling Information
When PV = Scale Low, Output = output low value. When PV = Scale high, Output =
output high value. The PV is mapped via the scale range onto the output range
according to the equation:
PV – Scale Low
Output =  ----------------------------------------------------------- (Output High – Output Low) + Output Low
 Scale High – Scale Low
196 HA030554 Issue 16

User LIN
Allows the entry of up to four user linearisation tables, any one of which can be
selected as ‘Lin Type’ in Channel configuration ("Channel Main" on page 123).
Configuration consists of defining the number of points to be included (2 to 32) and
then entering an X and a Y value for each point, where X values are the inputs and
the Y values are the resulting outputs.
User linearisation table rules

1. Tables must be monotonic - i.e. there may not be more than one X value with the
same Y value assigned to it.
2. Each X value must be greater than the preceding one.
3. Each Y value must be greater than the preceding one.
4. If units other than temperature units are to be displayed, the channel scale high
and scale low values should be set to the same as the range high and low
values, and the required scale units entered.
Figure 133 shows the first part of the configuration table for an imaginary cylinder
example.
User Lin.1
Num. of Points 12
0.00
Volume (cubic metres)
0.00
0.50
0.07
1.00
0.58
Depth (metres)
Figure 133 User Linearisation table example

When configuring a channel ("Channel Main" on page 123) to use a User
linearisation table:
If Type = Thermocouple or RTD, then Range High/Low must be set to the highest
and lowest ‘Y’ values to be used, respectively. The instrument automatically looks up
the associated ‘X’ mV or Ohms values. If Type = mV, V or mA, then Range High/Low
must be set to the highest and lowest ‘Y’ values to be used, respectively. Input
High/Low should be set to the highest and lowest ‘X’ values in the table, respectively.
HA030554 Issue 16 197

Custom Messages
This feature allows the entry of up to 10 messages for sending to the history file,
when triggered by a wired source (e.g. an alarm going active).
The messages of up to 100 characters each are entered using either the virtual
keyboard, described in "Text Entry" on page 89, or by means of iTools configuration
software ("iTOOLS").
Up to three parameter values may be embedded in messages in the format

[Address], where ‘Address’ is the decimal Modbus address of the parameter
("Parameter List" on page 232). E.G. [256] embeds Channel 1 PV.
Zirconia Block Option

This option allows the calculation of Carbon Potential, Dew point or Oxygen
concentration. A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded
to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia. At elevated temperatures, such a probe develops an
emf across it which is proportional to the probe absolute temperature and to the log of
the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends.
The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R

thermocouple. The temperature effect on the thermocouple is such, that for
successful operation, the probe temperature must be greater than 973K (700C).
Definitions
Temperature Control
The sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is
common for a separate thermocouple to be used. The controller provides a heating
output which may be used to control gas burners. In some applications a cooling
output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.
Carbon Potential Control

The zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen
concentrations on the reference side of the probe (outside the furnace) to the amount
of oxygen in the furnace.
The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the
actual percentage of carbon in the furnace. This second loop generally has two
outputs. One output is connected to a valve which controls the amount of an
enrichment gas supplied to the furnace. The second output controls the level of
dilution air.
Sooting Alarm
In addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller, the instrument
can trigger an alarm when the atmospheric conditions are such that carbon will be
deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace. The alarm may be wired to an
output (e.g. relay) to initiate an external alarm.
198 HA030554 Issue 16

Clean Probe
As these sensors are used in furnace environments they require regular cleaning.
Cleaning (Burn Off) is performed by forcing compressed air through the probe.
Cleaning can be initiated either manually or automatically using a timed period.
During cleaning ‘PV Frozen’ is set to ‘Yes’.
Automatic Probe Cleaning

The instrument has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to
occur between batches or be manually requested. At the start of the cleaning process
a ‘snapshot’ of the probe mV is taken, and a short blast of compressed air is used to
remove any soot and other particles that may have accumulated on the probe. A
minimum and maximum cleaning time can be set by the user. If the probe mV has not
recovered to within 5% of the snapshot value within the maximum recovery time set
then an alarm is given. This indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or
refurbishment is due. During the cleaning and recovery cycle the PV is frozen,
thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation. The ‘PV Frozen’ parameter can be
used in an individual strategy, for example to hold the integral action during cleaning.
Endothermic Gas Correction

A gas analyser may be used to determine the carbon monoxide (CO) concentration
of the endothermic gas. If a 4 to 20mA output is available from the analyser, this can
be applied to the instrument to adjust the calculated percentage carbon reading
automatically. Alternatively, this value can be entered manually.
Oxygen Concentration
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the
atmosphere to be measured, whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere.
For most applications, air provides a suitable reference (reference input = 20.95 for
air).
Configuration
The configuration parameters appear in one of three lists as shown in Figure 134.
HA030554 Issue 16 199

Zirconia
Main Gas Ref Clean

Probe type CO Local Clean Frequency
Resolution CO Remote Clean Time
Min Calc Temp CO Remote Enable Min Rcv Time
Tolerance H2 Local Max Rcv Time
Oxygen Exp H2 remote Clean Valve
Temp Input H2 Remote Enable Clean Probe
Probe Input H2 In use Time2Cln
Temp Offset Clean Enable
Probe Offset Clean Max Temp
Carbon Potential Clean Abort
Dew Point Clean Rcov Time
Oxygen Last Clean
Soot Alarm Clean Msg Reset
PV Frozen Probe Fault
Probe Status Cant Clean
Balance Integral Clean Abort
Carb Act CO O2 Clean Temp
Probe state
Oxygen Type
Figure 134 Zirconia probe configuration layout.
Zirconia Main
The parameters that appear depend on the ‘Probe Type’ setting. For this reason, not
all the parameters listed appear for all probe types. Figure 135 shows a typical
configuration page.
Zirconia.Main
Probe Type Eurotherm
Resolution 2
Min Calc Temp 720

Tolerance 1.0
Oxygen Exp 2
Temp Input 0
Probe Input 0
Carbon Potential Off

Dew Point Off
Oxygen Off
Temp Offset 0
Probe Offset 0
Soot alarm No
PV Frozen Yes
Probe Status Min Calc Temp
Balance Integral No
Carb Act CO O2 0.0000
Probe State Not Ready
Oxygen type Nernst
200 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 135 Zirconia Probe configuration (typical)
Main Parameters
Probe Type Select from a variety of probe manufacturers. The subse-
quent parameter list depends on which manufacturer is se-
lected.
Resolution Enter the number of decimal places to be used for the val-
ue display.
Gas Reference Reference value for the hydrogen concentration in the at-
mosphere.
Rem Gas Ref Remote reference value for hydrogen concentration in the
atmosphere. Allows hydrogen concentration to be read
from an external source.
Rem Gas Enable ‘Yes’ allows remote gas measurement. ‘No’ uses the inter-
nal Gas Reference value.
Working Gas Read only. Working Reference Gas value.
Min Calc Temp* The minimum temperature at which the calculation is valid.
Oxygen Exp The exponent units of the log oxygen type calculation.
valid entries -24 to +24.
Tolerance Sooting tolerance multiplier. Allows the user to adjust the
sensitivity of the Sooting alarm, in order to reduce the inci-
dence of nuisance alarms.
Process Factor Process factor defined by the probe manufacturer.
Clean Frequency Allows the interval between probe cleaning cycles to be
entered in hours and minutes.
Clean Time Allows Probe clean time to be entered in hours and min-
utes.
Min Rcov Time The minimum recovery time after purging in hours and
minutes.
Max Rcov Time The maximum recovery time after purging in hours and
minutes.
Temp Input* Zirconia probe temperature input value.
Temp Offset* Allows a temperature offset to be entered for the probe.
Probe Input Zirconia probe mV input.
Probe mV Offset Allows an offset to be entered for the probe mV input.
Oxygen Read only. The calculated oxygen value.
Carbon Potential Read only. The calculated carbon potential.
Dew Point Read only. The dew point value derived from temperature
and remote gas reference inputs.
Soot Alarm Read only. Sooting alarm. Active if sooting is likely to take
place. The sensitivity of the alarm can be adjusted by using
the ‘Tolerance’ parameter, above.
Probe Fault ‘Yes’ indicates a sensor break.
PV Frozen Read only. Parameter set to ‘Yes’ during Probe cleaning.
Clean Valve Read only. Enable the Clean valve.
Clean State Read only. The burn off state of the zirconia probe: ‘Wait-
ing’, ‘Cleaning’ or ‘Recovering’.
Clean Probe ‘Yes’ = Initiate probe cleaning. ‘No’ = Do not clean probe.
Time to Clean Read only. The time remaining, in hours and minutes until
the next cleaning cycle is due.
Probe Status Read only. Current probe status:
OK Normal working
mV Sensor Brk Probe input sensor break
Temp Sensor Brk Temperature input sensor break
Min Calc Temp Probe deteriorating
HA030554 Issue 16 201

Balance Integral This output goes ‘true’ when a step change in the output
occurs, which requires an integral re-balance if the read-
ings are used for PID control.
Carb Act CO O2 The carbon activity for the surface gas reaction between
Carbon monoxide (CO) and Oxygen (O2).
Probe State Read only. The current state of the probe. If ‘Measuring’,
then the outputs are updated. For any other state (Clean,
Clean Recovery, Test impedance, Impedance Recovery,
Waiting), the outputs are not updated.
Oxygen Type Oxygen equation being used.
Gas References Parameters

CO Local Reference value for the carbon monoxide (CO) concentra-
tion in the atmosphere.
CO Remote Remote reference value for the carbon monoxide concen-
tration in the atmosphere. Allows the value to be read re-
motely.
CO Remote En ‘Yes’ allows remote CO measurement. ‘No’ uses the inter-
nal value.
CO in Use The CO gas measurement value currently being used.
H2 Local Reference value for the hydrogen (H) concentration in the
atmosphere.
H2 Remote Remote reference value for the hydrogen concentration in
the atmosphere. Allows the value to be read remotely.
H2 Remote En ‘Yes’ allows remote H measurement. ‘No’ uses the internal
value.
H2 In Use The H gas measurement value currently being used.
Clean Parameters
Clean Frequency Allows the interval between probe cleaning cycles to be
entered in hours and minutes.
Clean Time Allows Probe clean time to be entered in hours and min-
utes.
Min Rcov Time The minimum recovery time after purging in hours and
minutes.
Max Rcov time The maximum recovery time after purging in hours and
minutes.
Clean Valve Read only. Enable the Clean valve.
Clean Probe Initiate probe cleaning.
Time to Clean Read only. The time remaining, in hours and minutes until
the next cleaning cycle is due.
Clean Enable Enable probe cleaning.
Clean Max Temp Maximum temperature for cleaning. If the temperature ex-
ceeds this value, cleaning is aborted.
Clean Abort Abort probe cleaning.
Clean Rcov Time The time taken for the probe to recover to 95% of its origi-
nal value after the last clean. If the last clean did not recov-
er within the Max Rcov time, this value is set to 0.
Last Clean The mV output from the probe after the last clean.
Clean Msg Reset ‘Yes’ clears cleaning related alarms.
Probe Fault ‘Yes’ means that the probe failed to recover to 95% of its
original output, following a clean.
Cant Clean Conditions exist which prevent a clean cycle starting. Can
be cleared using ‘Clean Msg Reset’.
Clean Abort A clean cycle was aborted. Can be cleared using ‘Clean
Msg Reset’.
202 HA030554 Issue 16

Clean Temp A clean cycle was aborted because the temperature was
too high. Can be cleared using ‘Clean Msg Reset’.
Zirconia Probe Wiring

Figure 136 shows a typical wiring arrangement for a Zirconia probe.
Cooling
Outer electrode
solenoid
Inner electrode Zirconia
pellet
Screen
Dilution Air
Clean Probe
Thermocouple
Enrichment
gas
Power AI 1, AI 2 = analogue inputs

supply
AI1 (zirconia) input range must be
configured as 0 to 2V (max.), scaled to
mV.
I/O1= Logic output

Power
O/P2 to O/P 5 = Relay outputs
supply
DI A = Digital input
Gas valve
Figure 136 Typical Zirconia probe wiring
Steriliser Option
This block provides a means of recording complete sterilisation cycles, including for
example, venting and pumping as well as the actual sterilising period. See "Steriliser
Display Mode" on page 70 for display mode details. Data is stored in .uhh history files
for viewing in Review software.
HA030554 Issue 16 203

Steriliser
Cycle status Wait Start

Remaining 00:00:00
Equilibration 00:00:00
Sterilising 00:00:00
Total Cycle 00:00:00
F0 (A0) 00:00:00
Running Output No
Passed Output No
Start No
Start 121°C No
121°C Time 00:03:00
Start 134°C No
134°C Time 00:15:00

Target Time 00:03:00
Cycle Number 0
Auto Counter No
File by Tag
Input 1 Type Thermocouple
PV1 0
Target SP 134
Band Low 134

Band High 137
Failure Dwell 00:00:00
Input 2 Type Thermor Detect

Failure Dwell 00:00:00
Measured Temp. 115

Target Temp. 134
Z Temp. 10
Low Limit 134
Figure 137 Steriliser block configuration menu
Configuration parameters
Cycle Status Wait start: The cycle is waiting to be started.
Waiting: Waiting for input 1 to reach its target setpoint.
Equilibration: Currently in the equilibration period.
Sterilising: Currently in the sterilising phase.
Passed: The cycle has completed successfully.
Failed: The cycle has failed.
Test cycle: A test cycle is in progress
Remaining The sterilising time remaining for the current cycle.
Equilibration The equilibration time period for the current cycle.
Sterilising The time for which the load has currently been at sterilisa-
tion conditions.
Total Cycle The total cycle time.
F0 (A0) The current F0, FH or A0 value.
Running Output ‘Yes’ = Cycle running; ‘No’ = Cycle not running.
204 HA030554 Issue 16

Passed Output ‘Yes’ = Output passed; ‘No’ = Output did not pass.
Start Trigger to start a custom cycle (i.e. one for which High and
Low band and/or Target setpoint have been changed
from their default values.)
Start 121°C Trigger to start a pre-defined 121°C cycle (Setpoint, Band
Low/Band High etc. values are set to their 121° defaults
when the cycle is initiated).
121°C Time Target time for a 121°C cycle. Automatically copied to the
‘Target Time’ field when Start 121°C requested. Scrollable
value in hh:mm:ss format.
Start 134°C Trigger to start a pre-defined 134°C cycle (Setpoint, Band
Low/Band High etc. values are set to their 134° defaults
when the cycle is initiated)
134°C Time Target time for a134°C cycle. Automatically copied to the
‘Target Time’ field when Start 134°C requested. Scrollable
value in hh:mm:ss format.
Target Time The time for which the input values must remain at their
sterilisation values in order that the cycle shall pass. The
cycle fails if any input moves outside its specified band lim-
its during the Target Time. Scrollable value in hh:mm:ss
format.
Cycle Number Each execution of the Steriliser block uses a unique cycle
number. This may be entered manually, or can be set to in-
crement automatically by setting ‘Auto Counter’ (below) to
‘Yes’.
Auto Counter ‘Yes’ causes the Cycle Number (above) to increment auto-
matically each time a new cycle is initiated. If Auto counter
= ‘Yes’, the Cycle Number forms part of the historical data
and can be used to help identify data during later review.
File By Tag ‘Tick’ ensures that each cycle is recorded in its own unique
history file identified by cycle number and ‘File tag’ (below).
File tag This field appears only if ‘File By Tag’ is enabled (tick sym-
bol). File tag allows a four- character identifier to be en-
tered to be used with the Cycle Number (above) to identify
the history file.
Input n Type Select ‘Off’, ‘Thermocouple’, ‘Rising Pressure’, ‘Falling
pressure’, ‘Rise Air Detect’, or ‘Fall Air Detect’.
Off This input will not be included in
steriliser monitoring calculations.
Thermocouple Degrees Celsius input.
Rising pressure A mBar pressure input with a
rising pressure expected during
the cycle. This pressure input
would normally be synchronised
with a temperature input, in the
same chamber, when performing
a 121 °C or 134°C cycle.
Falling pressure As ‘Rising Pressure’ above, but
with a falling pressure expected
during the cycle.
Rise Air DetectA mBar pressure input with a rising
pressure expected during the
cycle. This pressure input is not
synchronised with a temperature
input when performing a 121 °C
or 134°C cycle, as it is (typically)
an outside chamber pressure.
Fall Air DetectAs ‘Rise Air Detect’ above, but with a
falling pressure expected during
the cycle.
HA030554 Issue 16 205

PV n Input value (wireable only). See Note 1 below.

Target SP Target setpoint for this input. (Does not appear if relevant
Input Type = ‘Off’.) See Note 2 below.
Band Low/High The low and high steriliser temperature or pressure band for this
input. (Does not appear if relevant Input Type = ‘Off’). See
Note 2 below. Values are effective only during Sterilisation
mode.
Failure Dwell A failure alarm is set if this input is out of band range for
more than the Failure Dwell time. Scrollable value in
hh:mm:ss format.
Notes:
1. n = 1 to 4, where typically, inputs 1 to 3 are temperature inputs and input 4 is a
pressure input.
2. Target SP and Band High/Low values are set to their relevant default values
when a 121°C or 134°C cycle is initiated.
Measured Temp. For F0 or A0 calculations, this value must be in °C. Typi-
cally wired to an input channel PV.
Target Temp. For F0 or A0 calculations, the target temperature (see
"Steriliser Display Mode" on page 70 for details). This typ-
ically is the same value as the Target SP (above).
Z Temp. For F0 or A0 calculations this is a temperature interval rep-
resenting a factor-of-10 increase in killing efficiency. Z =
10°C for F0 and A0, and 20°C for FH
Low Limit The temperature below which F0 or A0 calculations are
suspended.
Saturated Steam Option

This block provides the means to record the following attributes of saturated steam:
• Saturated Steam Mass Flow. Calculates mass flow in kg/s for saturated steam,
using either the steam temperature (°C) or pressure (MPa) as appropriate to the
process.
• Saturated Steam Heat Flow. Calculates the energy flow in kJ/s for saturated
steam, using either the steam temperature (°C) or pressure (MPa) as appropriate
to the process.
• Saturated Steam Heat Consumed. Calculates the heat consumed in kJ/s for
saturated steam, using the inlet steam temperature (°C) or pressure (MPa) (as
appropriate to the process), and the return (condensate) temperature.
• Saturated Steam Enthalpy. Calculates the enthalpy in kJ/kg for saturated steam,
using either the steam temperature (°C) or pressure (MPa) (as appropriate to the
process).
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a

number of factors outside the control of the data recorder manufacturer. For this
reason, the data recorder manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the
results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the nanodac
software.
Note: For the Saturated Steam block, Pressure is always in MPa and Temperature
in °C. Other units need to be converted accordingly.
There are two instances of the Saturated Steam block available on the instrument.
These can be configured independently of each other. The ‘Saturated Steam.2’ block
is fixed to ‘Enthalpy’. See the parameter descriptions, below for more details.
206 HA030554 Issue 16

Saturated Steam
1 2
Saturated Steam.1 Saturated Steam.2
(fixed to ‘Enthalpy’)
Figure 138 Saturated Steam configuration layout
Saturated Steam.1
Saturated Steam Mass Flow

Mass Flow Output 0.00
Heat Flow Output 0.00
Heat Consumed 0.00

Flow 0.00
Return Temp 0.00
Use Temperature
Pressure 0.0000
Temperature 0.00
Dryness 0.0
Resolution 2
Water Enth -0.04
Steam Enth 0.00
Calculate Value 0.00
Figure 139 Saturated Steam configuration

Saturated Steam The Saturated Steam Mode. One of: ‘Mass Flow’, ‘Heat
Flow’, ‘Heat Consumed’, ‘Heat- Mass Flow’, or ‘Enthalpy’.
Depending on the mode selected, other parameters in this
list may or may not be displayed. See individual parameter
descriptions for details.
Mass Flow Output The Mass Flow output of the saturated steam calculation.
Only shown when the Saturated Steam Mode is set to ei-
ther ‘Mass Flow’ or ‘Heat-Mass Flow’.
Heat Flow Output The Heat Flow output of the saturated steam calculation.
Only shown when the Saturated Steam Mode is set to ei-
ther ‘Heat Flow’ or ‘Heat-Mass Flow’.
Heat Consumed The Heat Consumed output of the saturated steam calcu-
lation. Only shown when the Saturated Steam Mode is set
to ‘Heat Consumed’.
Flow The flow input (m3/s). Not shown if the Saturated Steam
Mode is set to ‘Enthalpy’.
Return Temp The return (condensate) temperature input. Only shown when the
Saturated Steam Mode is set to ‘Heat Consumed’.
Use Selects either ‘Pressure’ or ‘Temperature’ as the basis for
the calculation.
Pressure The steam pressure input (MPa). Only shown when Use is
set to ‘Pressure’.
Temperature The steam temperature input (°C). Only shown when Use
is set to ‘Temperature’.
Dryness The dryness percentage of the steam (where 0% = no va-
pour and 100% = no liquid).
HA030554 Issue 16 207

Notes:The units of kg/s and m3/s are used here for simplicity. In fact, any time unit
can be used. For example, if the measured flow is in m3/hr, then the Mass flow will be
in kg/hr.
Note: ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.

Resolution The resolution (number of decimal places) of the output
values.
Water Enth The Water Enthalpy value (kJ/kg). Only shown when the
Saturated Steam Mode is set to ‘Enthalpy’.
Steam Enth The Total Steam Enthalpy (kJ/kg). Only shown when the
Saturated Steam Mode is set to ‘Enthalpy’.
Calculate Value When Use is set to ‘Temperature’, this is the correspond-
ing pressure (MPa). When Use is set to ‘Pressure’, this is
the corresponding temperature (°C).
Pressure Units Conversion

There is a wide range of pressure measuring units in use throughout the world. The
following table gives multiplication factors for converting some common units to MPa
(MegaPascals), to four significant figures. Further conversion factors can be found at
the websites: http://www.cleavebooks.co.uk/scol/ccpress.htm and
http://www.onlineconversion.com/pressure.htm, amongst others. (Where the
conversion is to Pascals, not to MegaPascals, the factors here have to be divided by
1,000,000.)
Multiplier for Multiplier for

Pressure units Pressure units
MPa MPa
Atmospheres 0.1013 Newtons/cm2 0.01
Bar 0.1 Newtons/m2 0.000 001
kg/cm2 0.09 807 Pascals 0.000 001
kNewton/m2 0.001 Tonnes/m2 0.009 807

kPa 0.001 Tons(UK)/ft2 0.1 073
mBar 0.0001 Tons(US)/ft2 0.09 576
Lb/ft2 0.00 004 788 Water (feet of) 0.002 989
Lb/in2 (PSI) 0.006 895 Water (inches of) 0.0 002 491
Mercury (inches of) 0.003 386 Water (mm of) 0.000 009 807
Mercury (mm of) 0.0 001 333
Figure 140 Pressure units conversion
Saturated Steam Mass Flow Calculation

The following calculation is performed:
For a given Volume V, Temperature T and dryness d the mass flow is given by:
V
MassFlow ( kg ⁄ s ) = -----------------------------------
d
V LT + ΔV T ---------
100
Where:
208 HA030554 Issue 16

VLT is VL at temperature T from the 1999 ASME steam tables.
ΔVT is ΔV at temperature T from the 1999 ASME steam tables.
A similar calculation is performed if pressure is used.
Saturated Steam Heat Flow Calculation

Uses a lookup from the 1999 ASME Steam Tables to determine the energy
(Enthalpy) of water and water vapour in the given volume of gas.
For a given Volume V, Temperature T and dryness d the energy flow is given by:
Where:
 
V d
Energy ( kJ ⁄ s ) =  -----------------------------------  h LT + Δh T ---------
 d  100
 V LT + ΔV T ---------
100
hLT is hL at temperature T from the 1999 ASME steam tables.
ΔhT is Δh at temperature T from the 1999 ASME steam tables.
Saturated Steam Heat Consumed Calculation

(Enthalpy) of water and water vapour in the given volume of gas.
For a given Volume V, Inlet Temperature T and inlet dryness d and condensate return
temperature T, the energy consumed is given by:
 
V d
Energy ( kJ ⁄ s ) =  -----------------------------------  h LT + Δh T --------- – h LT
 d  100 
 V LT + ΔV T ---------
100
Where:
ΔhT is Δh at temperature T from the 1999 ASME steam tables.
Note: This calculation assumes 100% wet saturated water in the condensate return,
it ignores any flash steam component. Also it is assumed that the same mass is
leaving the system as is entering it.
HA030554 Issue 16 209

Saturated Steam Enthalpy Calculation

(Enthalpy) of water and steam at the given Temperature or Pressure and Dryness.
The Water Enthalpy is unchanged from the value in the table, whilst the Steam
Enthalpy is reduced by the Dryness factor as follows:
d
SteamEnthalpy ( kJ ⁄ s ) = h ---------
100
where:
h is steam enthalpy at the required Temperature or Pressure from the 1999 ASME
steam tables. d is the Dryness factor.
In Temperature mode, the Calc Value parameter returns the equivalent Pressure for
the given Enthalpy value.
Similarly, in Pressure mode the Calc Value returns the equivalent Temperature.
Since there are separate tables for Temperature and Pressure, the Calc Value is
found by a reverse look-up in the inactive table.
Mass Flow Option

The Mass Flow option calculates mass flows from either linear or square root type
transducer outputs.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a

number of factors outside the control of the data recorder manufacturer. For this
reason, the data recorder manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the
results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the data recorder
software.
Note: The units of kg/s and m3/s are used here for simplicity. In fact, any time unit
can be used. For example, if the measured flow is in m3/hr, then the Mass flow will be
in kg/hr.
Note: ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
Linear Mass Flow Calculation

The equation solved is:
x
K - Flowx t AbzP t
QM xt =  ------------ x -----------------------------------
-
 Rg xZ Temp 
where:
QMxt = Mass flow with a dryness factor of x, at time t, in kg/sec.
K = Scaling factor (see below).
Rg = Specific gas constant in J/kg-K (see below).
210 HA030554 Issue 16

Z = Compressibility factor (see below).
Flowt = Measured value from the flow meter at time t.
AbsPt = Absolute pressure of the fluid at time t in kPa(A).
Temp = Temperature of the fluid in Kelvins.

Scaling factor (K) This is determined from an assumed value of QM at a
known Flow, AbsPt and Temp. The value is chosen to give
an output within the range low scale to high scale and is
given by the equation:
S
K = ---------------
ma max
where:
S = Full scale output from the flow meter in flow meter units.
mamax = Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flow meter units.
Specific gas constant
The specific gas constant for any gas is available from
published tables.
Compressibility factor (Z)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how
far a particular gas deviates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any
set of temperature and pressure conditions, and is given
by the equation:
P 1
Z = --- x ---
T ρ
where:
P = Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A).
T = Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins).
ρ = Gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables).
Root Mass Flow Calculation

The equation solved is:
 K2 DeltaP t x AbsP t
x - x -------------------------------------
QM xt =  ------------ -
 Rg Z Temp 
where:
QMxt = Mass flow with a dryness factor of x, at time t, in kg/s.
K = Scaling factor (see below).
Rg = Specific gas constant in J/kg-K from published tables.
Z = Compressibility factor (see below).
DeltaPt = Measured value across the orifice plate at time t.
HA030554 Issue 16 211

AbsPt = Absolute pressure of the fluid at the up-stream tapping at time t in kPa(A).
Temp = Temperature of the fluid at the up-stream tapping in Kelvins.

Scaling factor (K) This is determined from an assumed value of QM at a
known Flow, AbsPt and Temp. The value is chosen to give
an output within the range low scale to high scale and is
given by the equation:
S
K = ---------------
ma max
where:
S = Full scale output from the flow meter in flow meter units.
mamax = Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flow meter units.
Specific gas constant
The specific gas constant for any gas is available from
published tables.
Compressibility factor (Z)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how
far a particular gas deviates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any
set of temperature and pressure conditions, and is given
by the equation:
P 1
Z = --- x ---
T ρ
where:
P = Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A).
T = Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins).
ρ = Gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables).
Configuration
Mass Flow
Mass Flow Linear

Linear Flow 1.00
Sq. Root Flow 0.00
DeltaP 0
Flow 1
Temperature 1
Pressure 1
Scale Input 1
Ma 1
Gas Constant 1
Z 1
Resolution 2
212 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 141 Mass Flow configuration

Mass Flow The type of Mass Flow calculation. One of: ‘Linear’, or
‘Square Root’.
Linear Flow The output of the mass flow calculation. Only shown when
the mass flow calculation is set to ‘Linear’.
Sq. Root Flow The output of the mass flow calculation. Only shown when
the mass flow calculation is set to ‘Square Root’.
DeltaP The differential pressure input. Only shown when the mass
flow calculation is set to ‘Square Root’.
Flow The flow input. Only shown when the mass flow calculation
is set to ‘Linear’.
Temperature The fluid temperature input (Kelvin).
Pressure The absolute gas pressure input (kPa(A)).
Scale Output The full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units.
Ma The full scale input range of the ‘Flow’ channel (mamax).
Gas Constant The relevant gas constant (J/kg-K).
Z The compressibility factor.
Resolution The resolution (number of decimal places) of the output
values.
Humidity Block Option

This block uses wet and dry bulb temperatures, and atmospheric pressure inputs to
derive values for relative humidity and dew point.
Humidity
Resolution 2
Psychro Constant 6.66E-4
Pressure 1013.0
Wet Temperature 28.23

Wet Offset 0
Dry Temperature 29.65
Relative Hum. 89.93
Dew Point 27.83
Sensor Break No
Figure 142 Humidity calculation configuration
Resolution The number of decimal places for the Relative humidity
and Dew point displays.
Psychro constant The psychrometric constant (default = 6.66 x 10-4) (see
note below)
Pressure The current atmospheric pressure in mBar.
Wet Temperature The wet bulb thermometer temperature.
Wet Offset Offset for the wet bulb temperature.
Dry Temperature The dry bulb thermometer temperature.
Relative Hum. The relative humidity value calculated from the Wet tem-
perature, the Dry temperature and the Pressure inputs.
The number of decimal places depends on the Resolution
setting.
HA030554 Issue 16 213

Dew Point The dew point value calculated from the Wet temperature,
the Dry temperature and the Pressure inputs. The number
of decimal places depends on the Resolution setting.
Sensor Break ‘Yes’ implies that a break has occurred between one (or
more) of the temperature or pressure transducer and its in-
put.
Note: The default value 6.66 may be edited, but the multiplier is always 10-4 (i.e. it
cannot be edited).
BCD Input
Part of the ‘Toolkit Blocks’ option, this block derives decimal and two-decade binary
coded decimal (BCD) val-ues from eight discrete inputs, where input 1 is the least
significant input (20 = 1) and input 8 is the most signif-icant (27 = 128). The example
below shows that for inputs 2, 4, 6 and 8 high, the decimal input value is 170, but the
BCD value is invalid. In any such case, the maximum BCD value for each decade is
limited to 9.
Input number
Input status
Decimal input
BCD output
Figure 143 BCD block example
Input rules
Valid BCD outputs are produced only with the following inputs set:
1. Any combination of inputs 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7
2. Any combination of Inputs 1, 4, 5 and 8
Configuration
BCD Input.1
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Input active symbol
Digital Input 3
Digital Input 4
Digital Input 5 Input not active symbol
Digital Input 6
Digital Input 7
Digital Input 8
Decimal Byte 3 Switch wired as in the

Decimal Value 3 example in
"Programmer Display
Units 3 Mode" on page 59 and
Tens set to position 3.
0
Settle Time 0.0secs
214 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 144 BCD block configuration
Parameters
Digital Input N Digital inputs, wired (for example) to contact inputs at the
rear panel or to other suitable parameter outputs.
Decimal input The value defined by the active inputs, where input 1 = 1,
when active, input 2 = 2, input 3 = 4, input 4 = 8 and so on.
BCD Output A two digit output being the binary coded decimal version
of the input.
BCD LS Digit This least significant (right-most) digit represents the value
of inputs 1 to 4, where input 1 = 1, input 2 = 2, input 3 = 4,
input 4 = 8. Maximum value = 9, even if input is greater
than 9.
BCD MS Digit This most significant (left-most) digit represents the value
of inputs 5 to 8, where input 5 = 1, input 6 = 2, input 7 = 4,
input 8 = 8. Maximum value = 9, even if input is greater
than 9.
Settle Time As the switch is turned from one value to another, interme-
diate switch positions may be seen on the inputs which
could be used by subsequent blocks. Settle Time applies
a filter to prevent these values from affecting other blocks.
Logic (2 Input) Block

Part of the ‘Toolkit Blocks’ option, this block allows a number of logic and comparison
operations to be performed on a pair of inputs. For logic functions, the inputs can be
inverted to allow, for example, a NOR function to be implemented by inverting the
inputs to an AND function. 12 two-input logic blocks are available.
Logic (2 input).1
Operation OR
Input 1 1
Input 2 0
Fallback FalseBad
Invert None
Output On
Status Ok
Figure 145 Two-input logic block configuration
Parameters
Operation AND, OR, XOR, LATCH (boolean values only)
== (Input 1 = Input 2)
<> (Input 1 . Input 2)
< (Input 1 < Input 2}
<= (Input 1 = Input 2)
> (Input 1 > Input 2)
=> (Input 1 = Input 2)
Input 1(2) The inputs to the specified operation. For inverted inputs
(below), this shows the ‘real’ (non-inverted) state.
Fallback Configures the output and status values to be used if either
input has a status other than ‘Good’.
FalseBad: Output = False; Status = Bad
TrueBad: Output = True; Status = Bad
HA030554 Issue 16 215

FalseGood: Output = False; Status = Good

TrueGood: Output = True; Status = Good
Invert For logic operators only allows neither, either or both in-
puts to be inverted. Input 1 and Input 2 show the non-in-
verted state.
Output On or Off depending on input states etc.
Status The status of the result (‘Ok’ or ‘Error’).
Logic (8 Input) Block

Part of the ‘Toolkit Blocks’ option, this block allows AND, OR and cascading* XOR
logic operations to be carried out on up to eight inputs.
*Cascading XOR example for inputs 1 to 4: (((Input1 ⊕ Input2) ⊕ Input3) ⊕ Input4).
Logic (8 input).1
Operation OR
Number of Inputs 2
The number of invert ‘boxes’
Invert matches the ‘Number of inputs’
0 value (2 in this example)
Invert Output
Input 1
Input 2
Output Off
Figure 146 Eight input logic block configuration
Parameters
Operation AND, OR or XOR
Number of inputs The number of inputs to the logic operator
Invert Allows the user to invert individual inputs, as described be-
low.
Invert Output ‘Yes’ inverts the output status
Input 1 The status of input 1, ignoring the Invert status. Cross = off;
Tick = on.
Inputs 2 to N As for input 1, where N = the value of the ‘Number of In-
puts’ parameter.
Output On or Off. Includes the effect of ‘Invert Output’ status.
Input Inversion
1. Use the down arrow key to highlight the ‘Invert’ field and operate the scroll key to
enter edit mode
2. Use the up arrow key to highlight the first input to be inverted (the relevant input
numbers appear in the display boxes for uninverted inputs when highlighted).
3. Once the required input box is highlighted, use the scroll key to change the
numeric character to a tick symbol (to invert) or change the tick character to a
numeric character (to remove a previous inversion).
4. Repeat for any further inputs, then operate the page key to confirm the changes
and to quit edit mode.
216 HA030554 Issue 16

Schematic
Input 1
Invert 1
Input 2
Invert 2
Input 3
Invert 4
Input 4
Invert 8 Output
Input 5
OutInvert
Invert 16
Input 6
Invert 32
Input 7
Invert 64
Input 8
Invert 128
Figure 147 Logic (8 input) block schematic
Invert input decoding table

Over a communications link, the inversion status is transmitted as a decimal value,
which can be encoded/de-coded using the following table:
HA030554 Issue 16 217

Input Input Input Input

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Hex Dec 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Hex Dec 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Hex Dec 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Hex Dec
N N N N N N N N 00 0 N N 6 5 N N 2 1 33 51 N 7 6 I N 3 2 N 66 102 8 N N 5 4 N N 1 99 153
N N N N N N N 1 01 1 N N 6 5 N 3 N N 34 52 N 7 6 N N 3 2 1 67 103 8 N N 5 4 N 2 N 9A 154
N N N N N N 2 N 02 2 N N 6 5 N 3 N 1 35 53 N 7 6 N 4 N N N 68 104 8 N N 5 4 N 2 1 9E 155
N N N N N N 2 1 03 3 N N 6 5 N 3 2 1 36 54 N 7 6 N 4 N N 1 69 105 8 N N 5 4 3 N N 9C 156
N N N N N 3 N N 04 4 N N 6 5 N 3 2 1 37 55 N 7 6 N 4 N 2 N 6A 106 8 N N 5 4 3 N 1 9D 157
N N N N N 3 N 1 05 5 N N 6 5 4 N N N 38 56 N 7 6 N 4 N 2 1 6B 107 8 N N 5 4 3 2 N 9E 158
N N N N N 3 2 N 06 6 N N 6 5 4 N N 1 39 57 N 7 6 N 4 3 N N 6C 108 8 N N 5 4 3 2 1 9F 159
N N N N N 3 2 1 07 7 N N 6 5 4 N 2 N 3A 58 N 7 6 N 4 3 N 1 6D 109 8 N 6 N N N N N AO 160
N N N N 4 N N N 08 8 N N 6 5 4 N 2 1 3B 59 N 7 6 N 4 3 2 N 6E 110 8 N 6 N N N N 1 A1 161
N N N N 4 N N 1 09 9 N N 6 5 4 3 N N 3C 60 N 7 6 N 4 3 2 1 6F 111 8 N 6 N N N 2 N A2 162
N N N N 4 N 2 N 0A 10 N N 6 5 4 3 N 1 3D 61 N 7 6 5 N N N N 70 112 8 N 6 N N N 2 1 A3 163
N N N N 4 N 2 1 0B 11 N N 6 5 4 3 2 N 3E 62 N 7 6 5 N N N 1 71 113 8 N 6 N N 3 N N A4 164
N N N N 4 3 N N 0C 12 N N 6 5 4 3 2 1 3F 63 N 7 6 5 N N 2 N 72 114 8 N 6 N N 3 N 1 A5 165
N N N N 4 3 N 1 0D 13 N 7 N N N N N N 40 64 N 7 6 5 N N 2 1 73 115 8 N 6 N N 3 2 N Ac 166
N N N N 4 3 2 N 0E 14 N 7 N N N N N 1 41 65 N 7 6 5 N 3 N N 74 116 8 N 6 N N 3 2 1 A7 167
N N N N 4 3 2 1 0F 15 N 7 N N N N 2 N 42 66 N 7 6 5 N 3 N 1 75 117 8 N 6 N 4 N N N A8 168
N N N 5 N N N N 10 16 N 7 N N N N 2 1 43 67 N 7 6 5 N 3 2 N 76 118 8 N 6 N 4 N N 1 A9 169
N N N 5 N N N 1 11 17 N 7 N N N 3 N N 44 68 N 7 6 5 N 3 2 1 77 119 8 N 6 N 4 N 2 N AA 170
N N N 5 N N 2 N 12 18 N 7 N N N 3 N 1 45 69 N 7 6 5 4 N N N 78 120 8 N 6 N 4 N 2 1 AE 171
N N N 5 N N 2 1 13 19 N 7 N N N 3 2 N 46 70 N 7 6 5 4 N N 1 79 121 8 N 6 N 4 3 N N AC 172
N N N 5 N 3 N N 14 20 N 7 N N N 3 2 1 47 71 N 7 6 5 4 N 2 N 7A 122 8 N 6 N 4 3 N 1 AD 173
N N N 5 N 3 N 1 15 21 N 7 N N 4 N N N 48 72 N 7 6 5 4 N 2 1 7B 123 8 N 6 N 4 3 2 N AE 174
N N N 5 N 3 2 N 16 22 N 7 N N 4 N N 1 49 73 N 7 6 5 4 3 N N 7C 124 8 N 6 N 4 3 2 1 AF 175
N N N 5 N 3 2 1 17 23 N 7 N N 4 N 2 N 4A 74 N 7 6 5 4 3 N 1 7D 125 8 N 6 5 N N N N B0 176
N N N 5 4 N N N 18 24 N 7 N N 4 N 2 1 4E 75 N 7 6 5 4 3 2 N 7E 126 8 N 6 5 N N N 1 B1 177
N N N 5 4 N N 1 19 25 N 7 N N 4 3 N N 4C 76 N 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7F 127 8 N 6 5 N N 2 N B2 178
N N N 5 4 N 2 N 1A 26 N 7 N N 4 3 N 1 4D 77 8 N N N N N N N 80 128 8 N 6 5 N N 2 1 B3 179
N N N 5 4 N 2 1 IB 27 N 7 N N 4 3 2 N 4E 78 8 N N N N N N 1 81 129 8 N 6 5 N 3 N N B4 180
N N N 5 4 3 N N 1C 28 N 7 N N 4 3 2 1 4F 79 8 N N N N N 2 N 82 130 8 N 6 5 N 3 N 1 B5 181
N N N 5 4 3 N 1 ID 29 N 7 N 5 N N N N 50 80 8 N N N N N 2 1 83 131 8 N 6 5 N 3 2 N B6 182
N N N 5 4 3 2 N IE 30 N 7 N 5 N N N 1 51 81 8 N N N N 3 N N 84 132 8 N 6 5 N 3 2 1 B7 183
N N N 5 4 3 2 1 IF 31 N 7 N 5 N N 2 N 52 82 8 N N N N 3 N 1 85 133 8 N 6 5 4 N N N B8 184
N N 6 N N N N N 20 32 N 7 N 5 N N 2 1 53 83 8 N N N N 3 2 N 86 134 8 N 6 5 4 N N 1 B9 185
N N 6 N N N N 1 21 33 N 7 N 5 N 3 N N 54 84 8 N N N N 3 2 1 87 135 8 N 6 5 4 N 2 N BA 186
N N 6 N N N 2 N 22 34 N 7 N 5 N 3 N 1 55 85 8 N N N 4 N N N 88 136 8 N 6 5 4 N 2 1 BB 187
N N 6 N N N 2 1 23 35 N 7 N 5 N 3 2 N 56 86 8 N N N 4 N N 1 89 137 8 N 6 5 4 3 N N BC 188
N N 6 N N 3 N N 24 36 N 7 N 5 N 3 2 1 57 87 8 N N N 4 N 2 N 8A 138 8 N 6 5 4 3 N 1 BD 189
N N 6 N N 3 N 1 25 37 N 7 N 5 4 N N N 58 88 8 N N N 4 N 2 1 8B 139 8 N 6 5 4 3 2 N BE 190
N N 6 N N 3 2 N 26 38 N 7 N 5 4 N N 1 59 89 8 N N N 4 3 N N 8C 140 8 N 6 5 4 3 2 1 BF L91
N N 6 N N 3 2 1 27 3S N 7 N 5 4 N 2 N 5A 90 8 N N N 4 3 N 1 8D 141 8 7 N N N N N N CO 192
N N 6 N 4 N N N 28 40 N 7 N 5 4 N 2 1 5B 91 8 N N N 4 3 2 N 8E 142 8 7 N N N N N 1 Cl 193
N N 6 N 4 N N 1 29 41 N 7 N 5 4 3 N N 5C 92 8 N N N 4 3 2 1 8F 143 8 7 N N N N 2 N C2 194
N N 6 N 4 N 2 N 2A 42 N 7 N 5 4 3 N 1 5D 93 8 N N 5 N N N N 90 144 8 7 N N N N 2 1 C3 195
N N 6 N 4 N 2 1 2B 43 N 7 N 5 4 3 2 N 5E 94 8 N N 5 N N N 1 91 145 8 7 N N N 3 N N C4 196
N N 6 N 4 3 N N 2C 44 N 7 N 5 4 3 2 1 5F 95 8 N N 5 N N 2 N 92 146 7 N N N 3 N 1 C5 197
N N 6 N 4 3 N 1 2D 45 N 7 6 N N N N N 60 96 8 N N 5 N N 2 1 93 147 7 N N N 3 2 N C6 198
N N 6 N 4 3 2 N 2E 46 N 7 6 N N N N 1 61 97 8 N N 5 N 3 N N 94 148 8 7 N N N 3 2 1 C7 199
N N 6 N 4 3 2 1 2F 47 N 7 6 N N N 2 N 62 98 8 N N 5 N 3 N 1 95 149 8 7 N N 4 N N N C8 200
N N 6 5 N N N N 30 48 N 7 6 N N N 2 1 63 99 8 N N 5 N 3 2 N 96 150 8 7 N N 4 N N 1 C9 201
N N 6 5 N N N 1 31 4S N 7 6 N N 3 N N 64 100 8 N N 5 N 3 2 1 97 151 8 7 N N 4 N 2 N CA 202
N N 6 5 N N 2 N 32 50 N 7 6 N N 3 N 1 65 101 8 N N 5 4 N N N 98 152 8 7 N N 4 N 2 1 CB 203
Example: Decimal 146 means that inputs 8, 5 and 2 are inverted.
Multiplexer block
This ‘Toolkit’ option block selects one of eight analogue inputs to appear at its output.
218 HA030554 Issue 16

Multiplexer.1
High Limit 100000000.0

Low Limit -100000000.0
Fall Back Strategy Clip bad
Fall Back Value 0.0

Input Selector Input 1
Input 1 0.0
Input 2 0.0
Input 3 0.0
Input 8 0.0
PV Out 0
Status Ok
Resolution 0
Figure 148 Multiplexer block configuration
High Limit The high limit for input, output and fallback values. Mini-
mum value is Low Limit.
Low Limit The low limit for input and fallback values. Maximum value
is High Limit.
Fallback Strategy Clip Bad: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
‘Low Limit’, then the output value is set to the appropriate
limit, and the status is set to ‘Bad’. If the input signal is with-
in the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the
Fallback value.
Clip Good: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
limit, and the status is set to ‘Good’. If the input signal is
within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the
Fallback value.
Fall Bad: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
‘Low Limit’, then the output value is set to the Fallback val-
ue, and the status is set to ‘Bad’
Fall Good: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
‘Low Limit’, then the output value is set to the Fallback val-
ue, and the status is set to ‘Good’
Upscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is
above ‘High Limit’ or below ‘Low Limit’, the output value is
set to the High limit.
Downscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal
is above ‘High Limit’ or below ‘Low Limit’, the output value
is set to the Low limit.
Fallback Value The value to be adopted by the output, under error condi-
tions, if ‘Fallback Status’ is set to ‘Fall Good’ or ‘Fall Bad’.
Input Selector Selects which of the eight inputs is presented at the output.
When wired to a suitable parameter, Input Selector be-
comes read only. Input 1 is selected for an Input Selector
value of 1, Input 2 for a value of 2 and so on. Input Selector
values greater than 8 are ignored. If not wired, the user
may select the required input using the scroll keys.
Input 1 to 8 Wired to the relevant analogue inputs.
PV Out The output from the multiplexer block.
HA030554 Issue 16 219

Status Indicates the status of the operation as ‘Ok’ or ‘Error’.

Resolution The number of decimal places for the output value (maxi-
mum = 6).
Math (2 Input)
This ‘Toolkit’ option block allows one of a number of operations to be carried out
using two input values which may be analogue or digital in nature. Either or both of
the inputs can be scaled, using a ‘Multiplier’.
Input 1 Math (2 input)

block
Input 1 Multiplier Output
Input 2
Input 2 Multiplier
Figure 149 Block schematic
Math (2 input).1
Operation Sel1
Input 1 Multiplier 1.0
Input 2 Multiplier 1.0

Units DegC
Resolution 2
Low Limit 0.00 DegC
High limit 50.00 DegC
Fallback Strategy ClipGood

Fallback Value 0.0 DegC
Input Selector Input1
Input 1
30.28 °C
Input 2
1.40
Output 30.28 DegC
Status Ok
Figure 150 Block configuration (typical)
Parameters
Operation
Add Output = Input 1 + Input 2
Subtract Output = Input 1 - Input 2
Multiply Output = Input 1 x Input 2
Divide Output = Input 1 ÷ Input 2
Abs Diff Output = the difference between
Input 1 and Input 2, ignoring sign
Select Max Output = whichever is the larger
of Input 1 or Input 2
Select Min Output = whichever is the smaller
of Input 1 or Input 2
Hot Swap Output = Input 2 if Input 1 is ‘Bad’;
otherwise Output = Input 1
220 HA030554 Issue 16

Sample/Hold Output tracks Input 1 whilst Input

2 = 1. Output value is held whilst
Input 2 = 0 (See Section 6.26.2,
below, for more details)
Power* Output = Input 1 to the power of
Input 2. (Output = Input 1Input 2)
Square Root Output = Sqrt Input 1 (Input 2
ignored)
Log Base 10 Output = Log10 Input 1 (Input 2
ignored)
Log Base e Output = Ln Input 1 (Input 2
ignored)
Exponential Output = eInput1 (Input 2 ignored)
10 to the X Output = 10Input 1 (Input 2
ignored)
Sel1 Output = Input 1 if Input Selector
= Input1
Output = Input 2 if Input Selector
= Input2
Note: * For this implementation:

0 to the power 0 = 1.
Negative values raised to any power result in bad status.
0 raised to a negative power results in bad status.
Input 1(2) Multiplier The scaling factor for input 1(2). This multiplying factor is
applied to the input of the function, but does not affect the
displayed values of Input1 and Input 2 (below).
Units Allows a five-character string to be entered for the function
Resolution Sets the number of decimal places for the Output value. In-
put resolution (if applicable) is that of the relevant input.
High Limit The high limit for input, output and fallback values. Mini-
mum value is Low Limit.
Low Limit The low limit for input and fallback values. Maximum value
is High Limit.
Fallback Strategy Clip Bad: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
limit, and the status is set to ‘Bad’. If the input signal is with-
in the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the Fall
Back value.
Clip Good: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
limit, and the status is set to ‘Good’. If the input signal is
within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the
Fall Back value.
Fall Bad: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
‘Low Limit’, then the output value is set to the Fall Back val-
ue, and the status is set to ‘Bad’
Fall Good: If the input value is above ‘High Limit’ or below
‘Low Limit’, then the output value is set to the Fall Back val-
ue, and the status is set to ‘Good’
Upscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is
above ‘High Limit’ or below ‘Low Limit’, the output value is
set to the High limit.
Downscale: If the input status is bad, or if the input signal
is above ‘High Limit’ or below ‘Low Limit’, the output value
is set to the Low limit.
Fallback Value The value to be adopted by the output, under error condi-
tions, if ‘Fallback Status’ is set to ‘Fall Good’ or ‘Fall Bad’.
HA030554 Issue 16 221

Input Selector For ‘Select’ operation only. When wired to a suitable pa-
rameter, Input Select becomes read only. Input 1 is select-
ed if ‘Input Select’ = 1; Input 2 is selected if ‘Input Select’ =
2. Input Select values greater than 2 are ignored. If not
wired, the user may select the required input using the
scroll keys.
Input 1(2) Wired to suitable input parameters. Displayed values ig-
nore any input multiplier effects.
Output Gives the output value for the operation.
Status Shows the status of the output value, as ‘Ok’ or ‘Error’.
Sample and Hold details

As described above, Output follows Input1 as long as Input 2 is ‘High’. When Input 2
goes Low, the output adopts the instantaneous value of Input 1 until Input 2 goes
High again. When Input 2 goes high the output jumps to the current value of Input 1
and tracks it until Input 2 goes low.
Input 1
Input 2
Output
Output Output Output Output Output

tracks held tracks held tracks
Input 1 Input 1 Input 1
Figure 151 Sample and Hold example
Timer
This ‘Toolkit’ option allows the user to configure up to four timers as: ‘On Pulse’, ‘On
Delay’, ‘One Shot’ or ‘Min On’ types. The different types are described in "Timer
modes" on page 223, below.
Timer.1
Mode Off
Time 00:00:00
Elapsed Time 00:00:00
Trigger In
Output
Triggered
Figure 152 Timer configuration
Parameters
Mode Select ‘On pulse’, ‘On delay’, ‘One shot’ or ‘Min On’
Time Allows the user to enter a period for the timer.
222 HA030554 Issue 16

Elapsed time This read-only parameter shows timing progress

Trigger in Shows if the trigger source is active (tick) or inactive
(cross)
Output Shows if the output is on (tick) or off (cross)
Triggered Shows if the timer is currently triggered (can remain trig-
gered even after the trigger source has returned to off).
Timer modes
On Pulse
Output goes ‘on’ as soon as the trigger input goes active, and remains on until the
time period has elapsed. If the timer is re-triggered during the timing period, the timer
restarts.
Trigger
Time Time Time
Output
Re-trigger
Elapsed time
Triggered
Figure 153 ‘On Pulse’ definitions ON DELAY

Provides a delay between the trigger point and the timer output becoming active.
Rules
1. After the trigger goes active, the output switches on after the delay time has
elapsed, and stays on until the trigger goes inactive.
2. If the trigger goes inactive before the delay time has elapsed, the output does not
switch on.
Trigger
Time Time
Output
Elapsed time
Triggered
Figure 154 ‘On Delay’ definitions
One Shot
If the trigger input is active, countdown timing is initiated as soon as the entered time
value is confirmed (scroll key). The entered time decrements to zero, and must be
re-entered by the user before any further timer function can be initiated.
HA030554 Issue 16 223

Rules
1. The time value decrements only when the trigger input is active.
2. The output is On only when the trigger value is active (and the entered time value
has not elapsed).
3. The entered time value can be edited at any time to increase or decrease the
remaining time period.
Trigger
τ τ τ
t1 + t2 = Time
Output Time
Time edits
Elapsed time
Time
Triggered
Figure 155 ‘One Shot’ timer definitions
MIN On
Note: For ease of comparison the two time edits in the figure above were both to
the same value. This is not a necessary condition.
This ‘Off delay’ function provides an output signal that goes ‘on’ when the trigger
goes active and remains on for a specified period after the trigger goes inactive.
If the trigger goes inactive, then active again before the time period has elapsed, then
the elapsed time is reset to zero and the output remains on.
The ‘Triggered’ parameter is on whenever the elapsed time is counting down.
Trigger
Time Time Time
Output
Elapsed time
Triggered
Figure 156 ‘Min On’ timer definitions
224 HA030554 Issue 16

User Values
This ‘Toolkit’ option block allows up to 12 values to be configured for use as inputs to
other parameters.
User Value.1
Units
Resolution 2
High Limit 100000000.00
Low Limit -100000000.00

Value 0.00
Status Ok
Figure 157 User value configuration
Parameters
Units Allows a five-character string to be entered for the user val-
ue units.
Resolution The number of decimal places for the user value (max. =
6).
High/Low Limit Sets maximum and minimum values to which the User val-
ue can be set.
Value The user value, either entered manually, or wired to anoth-
er appropriate parameter.
Status The output status for the User Value.
Alarm Summary
Allows the user to view the overall status of the unit’s alarms, and to carry out a
global acknowledgement of active alarms if required.
Global Ack Allows the user to acknowledge all applicable alarms si-
multaneously. ‘Manual’ alarms must be non-active before
they can be acknowledged.
Any Channel alarm Indicates if there are any channel alarms active, acknowl-
edged etc.
Any Sys Alarm Indicates if there are any active system alarms.
Any Alarm Indicates if there are any channel or system alarms active.
Alarm Summary.Global
Global Ack No
Any Channel Alarm Yes NAck
Any Sys Alarm Yes

Any Alarm Yes
Figure 158 Alarm summary display
HA030554 Issue 16 225

Real Time Event Configuration

This allows the user to configure up to two events to trigger at a specific time and
date, or on a particular day, and to remain active for a configurable time, either
measured as a duration, or as a specific ‘Off’ time.
Typical applications would be to start and/or stop a programmer at a particular time,

or to act as an input to a ‘Wait’ segment.
Figure 159 shows the two types of timer: ‘Time and Day’, and ‘Time and Date’, for
Event 1.
Real Time Event.1 Real Time Event.1
Type Time and Day Type Time and Date
On Day Mon-Fri On Month October
On Time 16:00:00 On Date 11

Off Type Time On Time 14:50:00
Off day Monday Off Type Duration

Off Time 09:00:00 Duration 00:01:00
Output Output
Figure 159 Real Time Events (typical)

Type Selects the type of the real time event (Off, Time and Day,
Time and Date.
On Month For ‘Time and Date’ only, this is the month that the event
is to switch on (January, ... December or Every Month).
(Every Month was added in software version 5.5).
On Date For ‘Time and Date’ only, this is the date in the month that
the event is to switch on.
On Day For ‘Time and Day’ only, this is the day(s) of the week that
the event output is to switch on (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri,
Sat, Sun, Mon-Fri, Sat-Sun, Everyday).
On Time The time of day that the event output is to switch on
(00:00:00 to 23:59:59)
Off Type Selects the action that will switch the event off (Duration,
Time)
Off Month For ‘Time and Date’ only and with ‘Off Type’ set to ‘Time’,
this is the month that the event is to switch off. (January, ...
December or Every Month). (Every Month was added in
software version 5.5).
Off Date For ‘Time and Date’ only and with ‘Off Type’ set to ‘Time’,
this is the day number in the month that the event is to
switch off.
Off Day For ‘Time and Day’ only and with ‘Off Type’ set to ‘Time’,
this is the day of the week that the event output is to switch
off (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun, Mon-Fri, Sat-Sun,
Everyday).
Off Time The time at which the event output is to switch off
(00:00:00 - 23:59:59)
Duration For ‘Off type’ set to ‘Duration’, this specifies the duration
for which the event output is to remain on (00:00:01 to
23:59:59 for Time and Day, or 00:00:01 to 500:00:00 for
Time and Date)
Output The output for the real time event (Cross symbol = Off, Tick
= On) (Read only)
226 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller MODBUS TCP Slave Comms
MODBUS TCP Slave Comms

Installation
The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable
between the RJ45 connector at the rear of the unit to a host computer either directly
or via a network. A ‘straight-through’ cable can be used in either case (i.e. a
cross-over cable is not required).
Introduction
MODBUS TCP allows the instrument to act as a 'slave' device to one or more host
computers connected via the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder. Each
recorder must have a unique Internet Protocol (IP) address, set up as described in
"Termination details" on page 31 (Network.Interface).
MODBUS TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a variant of the MODBUS family of

communications protocols intended for supervision and control of automated
equipment specifically covering the use of MODBUS messaging in an intranet or
internet environment, using TCP/IP protocols. Much of the MODBUS detail in this
manual is derived from the document openmbus.doc, available at
http://www.modbus.org/default.htm. The above mentioned document also includes
implementation guidelines for users.
Note: The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or
written to in one transaction. For this reason, the maximum number of standard (16
bit) registers that can be accessed in one transaction is 255/2 = 127 and the
maximum number of IEEE (32-bit) registers is 127/2 = 63.
Function Codes
MODBUS function codes 3, 4, 6, 8 and 16, defined in Figure 160, are supported and
are fully described in "Parameter List" on page 232, below.
Code Modbus definition Description

03 Read holding Reads the binary contents if holding registers. In this
registers implementation codes 3 and 4 are identical in
operation.
04 Read input registers Reads the binary contents if holding registers. In this
implementation codes 3 and 4 are identical in
operation.
06 Preset single Writes a single value to a single register.
register
08 Diagnostics Performs a simple loop back test.
16 Preset multiple Writes values to multiple holding registers.
registers
Figure 160 MODBUS Function code definition
Diagnostic Codes
Function code 08, subfunction 00 (Return query data) echoes the query (Loop back).
HA030554 Issue 16 227

MODBUS TCP Slave Comms nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Exception Codes
MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions. These codes provide
error information relating to failed requests. Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being
added to the function code of the request, followed by one of the codes listed in
Figure 161.
Code Description (see Modbus specification for

Modbus definition
Dec Hex full details)
01 01 Illegal function An invalid function code was received

02 02 Illegal Data Address An invalid data address was received
03 03 Illegal Data Value An invalid data value was received
04 04 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred in the
instrument
09 09 Illegal Sub Function An invalid sub function was received
10 0A Gateway path Gateway misconfigured or overloaded
unavailable
11 0B Gateway target device Device not present on the network
failed to respond
Figure 161 Exception codes
Data types
The following data types are supported:
1. 2's complement signed 16-bit analogue values with implied decimal point. The
decimal point position must be configured in both the recorder and the host
computer.
2. 16, 32 and 64 bit signed integers.
3. 16-bit unsigned integer values.
4. 32 bit IEEE Floating point values.
5. Strings of limited size, can be transferred across Modbus TCP in Unicode format
using a single non-multiplexed set of consecutive registers.
Data Encoding
MODBUS uses what is called a 'Big endian' representation for addresses and data
items. This means that when a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is
transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first. For example a 32-bit hex value of
12345678 would be transmitted as 12, followed by 34, followed by 56 and finally 78.
Invalid multiple register writes

When a recorder receives a multi-register write request, it is possible that one or
more requests will be rejected. Under such a circumstance, the recorder accepts all
valid write requests and ignores any invalid writes. No error response is produced.
228 HA030554 Issue 16

Master communications timeout

Whilst the instrument is archiving, it is possible that communications responses slow
sufficiently to cause communications timouts. The Modbus master device should be
configured with a timout value large enough to ensure against nuisance timeouts
during archiving.
Non-volatile parameters in EEPROM
CAUTION
INOPERABLE EQUIPMENT
The parameters in the following list must not be written-to on a continuous basis.
damage.
If the parameters are continuously written-to, the EEPROM eventually wears out and
become unserviceable.
HA030554 Issue 16 229

AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ControlAction AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeHigh DigitalIO.2A2B.StandbyAction

AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackHigh AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeLow DigitalIO.2A2B.Type
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackLow AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SbrkSP DigitalIO.3A3B.Backlash
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeTime AdvancedLoop.Tune.Band DigitalIO.3A3B.Inertia
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeType AdvancedLoop.Tune.CycleNo DigitalIO.3A3B.Invert
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ErrorLimit AdvancedLoop.Tune.Hysteresis DigitalIO.3A3B.MinOnTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.IntegralTime AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputHighLimit DigitalIO.3A3B.StandbyAction
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.LoopBreakTime AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputLowLimit DigitalIO.3A3B.Type
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ManualReset AdvancedLoop.Tune.PBs DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Backlash
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.PBUnits AdvancedLoop.Tune.Settle DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Inertia
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ProportionalBand AdvancedLoop.Tune.TDs DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Invert
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ManualTrack AdvancedLoop.Tune.Timeout DigitalIO.DI_LALC.MinOnTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeHigh AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneHigh DigitalIO.DI_LALC.StandbyAction
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeLow AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneLow DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Type
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ServoToPV AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneR2G DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Backlash
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPHighLimit AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneType DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Inertia
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPIntBal BCDInput.N.InN DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Invert
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPLowLimit BCDInput.N.SettleTime DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.MinOnTime
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrack Channel.N.AlarmN.Amount DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.StandbyAction
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimHighLimit Channel.N.AlarmN.AverageTime DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Type
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimLowLimit Channel.N.AlarmN.Block DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Backlash
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1OnOffHysteresis Channel.N.AlarmN.ChangeTime DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Inertia
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1TravelTime Channel.N.AlarmN.Deviation DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Invert
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2Deadband Channel.N.AlarmN.Dwell DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.MinOnTime
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2OnOffHysteresis Channel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.StandbyAction
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2TravelTime Channel.N.AlarmN.Latch DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Type
AdvancedLoop.Output.CoolType Channel.N.AlarmN.Threshold DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Backlash
AdvancedLoop.Output.EnablePowerFeedfor- Channel.N.AlarmN.Type DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Inertia
ward Channel.N.Main.CJType DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Invert
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardGain Channel.N.Main.CloseString DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.MinOnTime
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardOffset Channel.N.Main.Descriptor DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.StandbyAction
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardTrimLimit Channel.N.Main.ExtCJTemp DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Type
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardType Channel.N.Main.FaultResponse EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputN
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualMode Channel.N.Main.Filter EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputN
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualStartup Channel.N.Main.InputHigh EthernetIP.InputTags.InputN
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit Channel.N.Main.InputLow EthernetIP.Main.ConfigInstance
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputLowLimit Channel.N.Main.LinType EthernetIP.Main.ConfigSize
AdvancedLoop.Output.PotBreakMode Channel.N.Main.Offset EthernetIP.Main.ConnectionType
AdvancedLoop.Output.Rate Channel.N.Main.Offset2 EthernetIP.Main.InputInstance
AdvancedLoop.Output.RateDisable Channel.N.Main.OpenString EthernetIP.Main.InputSize
AdvancedLoop.Output.SafeOutVal Channel.N.Main.RangeHigh EthernetIP.Main.Mode
AdvancedLoop.Output.SbrkOP Channel.N.Main.RangeLow EthernetIP.Main.OutputInstance
AdvancedLoop.Output.SlaveSensorBreak- Channel.N.Main.RangeUnits EthernetIP.Main.OutputSize
Mode Channel.N.Main.Resolution EthernetIP.Main.Priority
AdvancedLoop.Setup.CascadeType Channel.N.Main.ScaleHigh EthernetIP.Main.Rpi
AdvancedLoop.Setup.ManOutputAccess Channel.N.Main.ScaleHigh2 EthernetIP.Main.ServerAddress
AdvancedLoop.Setup.MasterName Channel.N.Main.ScaleLow EthernetIP.Main.SlotNumber
AdvancedLoop.Setup.ModeAccess Channel.N.Main.ScaleLow2 EthernetIP.OutputTags.OutputN
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SetpointAccess Channel.N.Main.SensorBreakType EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output2
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveChannel1 Channel.N.Main.Shunt Group.Recording.ChannelNEn
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveChannel2 Channel.N.Main.TestSignal Group.Recording.Compression
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveName Channel.N.Main.Type Group.Recording.Enable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.Boundary1-2 Channel.N.Main.Units Group.Recording.Interval
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.Boundary2-3 Channel.N.Trend.Colour Group.Recording.VirtualChanNEn
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ControlAction Channel.N.Trend.SpanHigh Group.Recording.VirtualChan28En
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh Channel.N.Trend.SpanLow Group.Trend.Descriptor
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh2 CustomMessage.MessageN Group.Trend.Interval
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh3 DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.FallbackPV Group.Trend.MajorDivisions
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OutputHigh Group.Trend.PointN
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow2 DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OutputLow Humidity.Pressure
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow3 DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution Humidity.PsychroConst
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.ScaleHigh Humidity.Resolution
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime2 DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.ScaleLow Humidity.WetOffset
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime3 DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Type Instrument.Display.AlarmPanel
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeType DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.FallbackPV Instrument.Display.Brightness
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.OutputHigh Instrument.Display.Cascade
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime2 DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.OutputLow Instrument.Display.DualLoopControl
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime3 DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Resolution Instrument.Display.EIPServerPage
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.ScaleHigh Instrument.Display.FutureTrend
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime2 DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.ScaleLow Instrument.Display.FutureTrend1Colour
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime3 DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Type Instrument.Display.FutureTrend2Colour
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.FallbackPV Instrument.Display.HistoryBackground
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset2 DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.OutputHigh Instrument.Display.HomePage
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset3 DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.OutputLow Instrument.Display.HorizontalBar
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.NumberOfSets DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Resolution Instrument.Display.HorizontalTrend
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.PBUnits DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.ScaleHigh Instrument.Display.HPageTimeout
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.ScaleLow Instrument.Display.HTrendScaling
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand2 DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Type Instrument.Display.LoopControl
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand3 DigitalIO.1A1B.Backlash Instrument.Display.LoopSetpointColour
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain DigitalIO.1A1B.Inertia Instrument.Display.ModbusMaster
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain2 DigitalIO.1A1B.Invert Instrument.Display.NumberFormat
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain3 DigitalIO.1A1B.MinOnTime
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RemoteInput DigitalIO.1A1B.StandbyAction
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.SchedulerType DigitalIO.1A1B.Type
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.FFSelect DigitalIO.2A2B.Backlash
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.ManualTrack DigitalIO.2A2B.Inertia
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.MasterSensorBreak- DigitalIO.2A2B.Invert
Mode DigitalIO.2A2B.MinOnTime
230 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.Display.Numeric Loop.N.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput Network.Archive.CSVHeadings

Instrument.Display.Programmer Loop.N.PID.SchedulerType Network.Archive.CSVIncludeValues
Instrument.Display.PromoteListView Loop.N.Setup.AutoManAccess Network.Archive.CSVMessages
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverAfter Loop.N.Setup.CH1ControlType Network.Archive.CSVTabDelimiter
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverBrightness Loop.N.Setup.CH2ControlType Network.Archive.Destination
Instrument.Display.SteriliserPage Loop.N.Setup.ControlAction Network.Archive.FileFormat
Instrument.Display.TrendBackground Loop.N.Setup.DerivativeType Network.Archive.OnFull
Instrument.Display.USBAutoScan Loop.N.Setup.LoopName Network.Archive.Period
Instrument.Display.VerticalBar Loop.N.Setup.ManOutputAccess Network.Archive.PrimaryPassword
Instrument.Display.VerticalTrend Loop.N.Setup.PBUnits Network.Archive.PrimaryUser
Instrument.Info.CloneState Loop.N.Setup.SPAccess Network.Archive.PServerIPAddress
Instrument.Info.Name Loop.N.SP.ManualTrack Network.Archive.RemotePath
Instrument.Locale.DateFormat Loop.N.SP.RangeHigh Network.Archive.SecondaryPassword
Instrument.Locale.DSTenable Loop.N.SP.RangeLow Network.Archive.SecondaryUser
Instrument.Locale.EndDay Loop.N.SP.ServoToPV Network.Archive.SServerIPAddress
Instrument.Locale.EndMonth Loop.N.SP.SPHighLimit Network.FTPserver.Password
Instrument.Locale.EndOn Loop.N.SP.SPIntBal Network.FTPserver.Username
Instrument.Locale.EndTime Loop.N.SP.SPLowLimit Network.Interface.DNSserver
Instrument.Locale.Language Loop.N.SP.SPTrack Network.Interface.Gateway
Instrument.Locale.StartDay Loop.N.SP.SPTrimHighLimit Network.Interface.IPaddress
Instrument.Locale.StartMonth Loop.N.SP.SPTrimLowLimit Network.Interface.IPType
Instrument.Locale.StartOn Loop.N.Tune.CycleNo Network.Interface.SubnetMask
Instrument.Locale.StartTime Loop.N.Tune.Diagnostics Network.Modbus.Address
Instrument.Locale.TimeZone Loop.N.Tune.OutputHighLimit Network.Modbus.InputTimeout
Instrument.Notes.NoteN Loop.N.Tune.OutputLowLimit Network.Modbus.PrefMasterIP
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteListName Loop.N.Tune.PBs Network.Modbus.SerialMode
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParamN Loop.N.Tune.Settle Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParamNDesc Loop.N.Tune.TDs Network.Modbus.UnitIdEnable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.ParameterN Loop.N.Tune.TuneR2G Program.ChNHoldback
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.ParameterN Loop.N.Tune.Type Program.ChNHoldbackVal
Instrument.Security.CommsPass Math2.N.Fallback Program.ChNRampUnits
Instrument.Security.DefaultConfig Math2.N.FallbackVal Program.HoldbackStyle
Instrument.Security.EngineerPassword Math2.N.HighLimit Program.RampStyle
Instrument.Security.OEMParamLists Math2.N.InN Programmer.Features.FTPStore
Instrument.Security.OEMPass Math2.N.InNMul Programmer.Features.Holdback
Instrument.Security.OperatorPassword Math2.N.LowLimit Programmer.Features.Messages
Instrument.Security.SupervisorPassword Math2.N.Oper Programmer.Features.PVEvent
Lgc2.N.FallbackType Math2.N.Resolution Programmer.Features.UserValue
Lgc2.N.In1 Math2.N.Select Programmer.FTP.IPAddress
Lgc2.N.In2 Math2.N.Units Programmer.FTP.Password
Lgc2.N.Invert ModbusMaster.N.Data.BitPosition Programmer.FTP.Username
Lgc2.N.Oper ModbusMaster.N.Data.DataType Programmer.SetUp.ChNResolution
Lgc8.N.InN ModbusMaster.N.Data.Descriptor Programmer.SetUp.ChNServoTo
Lgc8.N.InInvert ModbusMaster.N.Data.FallBackValue Programmer.SetUp.ChNUnits
Lgc8.N.NumIn ModbusMaster.N.Data.FunctionCode Programmer.SetUp.Channels
Lgc8.N.Oper ModbusMaster.N.Data.ModbusAddress Programmer.SetUp.MaxEvents
Lgc8.N.OutInvert ModbusMaster.N.Data.Mode Programmer.SetUp.PowerFailAction
Loop.N.Diag.LoopMode ModbusMaster.N.Data.Number Programmer.SetUp.ProgEditAccess
Loop.N.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis ModbusMaster.N.Data.ParameterList Programmer.SetUp.ProgModeAccess
Loop.N.OP.Ch1TravelTime ModbusMaster.N.Data.Priority Programmer.SetUp.ProgNum
Loop.N.OP.Ch2Deadband ModbusMaster.N.Data.Scaling Programmer.SetUp.ProgStoreAccess
Loop.N.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis ModbusMaster.N.Data.Set Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Loop.N.OP.Ch2TravelTime ModbusMaster.N.Data.SlaveDevice Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1UserVal
Loop.N.OP.CoolType ModbusMaster.N.Data.Value Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2UserVal
Loop.N.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.BitPosition Programmer.SetUp.ResetEventN
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardGain ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.DataType RealTimeEvent.N.Duration
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardOffset ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Descriptor RealTimeEvent.N.OffDate
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.FallBackValue RealTimeEvent.N.OffDay
Loop.N.OP.FeedForwardType ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.FunctionCode RealTimeEvent.N.OffMonth
Loop.N.OP.ManStartup ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.ModbusAddress RealTimeEvent.N.OffTime
Loop.N.OP.ManualMode ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Mode RealTimeEvent.N.OffType
Loop.N.OP.OutputHighLimit ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Number RealTimeEvent.N.OnDate
Loop.N.OP.OutputLowLimit ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.ParameterList RealTimeEvent.N.OnDay
Loop.N.OP.PotBreakMode ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Priority RealTimeEvent.N.OnMonth
Loop.N.OP.Rate ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Scaling RealTimeEvent.N.OnTime
Loop.N.OP.RateDisable ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Set RealTimeEvent.N.Type
Loop.N.OP.SafeOutVal ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.SlaveDevice Segment.N.ChNHoldback
Loop.N.OP.SbrkOP ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Data.Value Segment.N.ChNHoldbackVal
Loop.N.OP.SensorBreakMode ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Descriptor Segment.N.ChNPVEvent
Loop.N.PID.Boundary1-2 ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.HighPriority Segment.N.ChNPVEventUse
Loop.N.PID.Boundary2-3 ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.IPAddress Segment.N.ChNPVEventVal
Loop.N.PID.CutbackHigh ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.LowPriority Segment.N.ChNRate
Loop.N.PID.CutbackHighN ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.MaxBlockSize Segment.N.ChNTime
Loop.N.PID.CutbackLow ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.MediumPriority Segment.N.ChNTSP
Loop.N.PID.CutbackLowN ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Online Segment.N.ChNUserVal
Loop.N.PID.DerivativeTime ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Profile Segment.N.ChNWait
Loop.N.PID.DerivativeTimeN ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Retries Segment.N.ChNWaitVal
Loop.N.PID.IntegralTime ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.Timeout Segment.N.Cycles
Loop.N.PID.IntegralTimeN ModbusMaster.SlaveN.Main.UnitId Segment.N.Duration
Loop.N.PID.LoopBreakTime Mux8.N.Fallback Segment.N.EndType
Loop.N.PID.LoopBreakTimeN Mux8.N.FallbackVal Segment.N.EventN
Loop.N.PID.ManualReset Mux8.N.HighLimit Segment.N.GoBackTo
Loop.N.PID.ManualResetN Mux8.N.InN Segment.N.SegmentName
Loop.N.PID.NumSets Mux8.N.LowLimit Segment.N.Type
Loop.N.PID.ProportionalBand Mux8.N.Select Segment.N.WaitFor
Loop.N.PID.ProportionalBandN Network.Archive.ArchiveRate
Loop.N.PID.RelCh2Gain Network.Archive.CSVDateFormat
Loop.N.PID.RelCh2GainN Network.Archive.CSVHeaders
HA030554 Issue 16 231

Steriliser.AutoCounter VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Block Zirconia.GasRef

Steriliser.FailureDwellN VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.ChangeTime Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Ideal
Steriliser.FileByTag VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Deviation Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Local
Steriliser.FileTag VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Dwell Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_RemoteEn
Steriliser.InputNPV VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Hysteresis Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Local
Steriliser.InputTypeN VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Latch Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_RemoteEn
Steriliser.IP1BandHigh VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Threshold Zirconia.MaxRcovTime
Steriliser.IP1BandLow VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Type Zirconia.MinCalTemp
Steriliser.IP1TargetSP VirtualChannel.N.Main.Descriptor Zirconia.MinRcovTime
Steriliser.IP2BandHigh VirtualChannel.N.Main.HighCutOff Zirconia.NumResolution
Steriliser.IP2BandLow VirtualChannel.N.Main.LowCutOff Zirconia.OxygenExp
Steriliser.IP2TargetSP VirtualChannel.N.Main.Operation Zirconia.OxygenType
Steriliser.IP3BandHigh VirtualChannel.N.Main.Period Zirconia.ProbeOffset
Steriliser.IP3BandLow VirtualChannel.N.Main.PresetValue Zirconia.ProbeType
Steriliser.IP3TargetSP VirtualChannel.N.Main.Resolution Zirconia.ProcFactor
Steriliser.IP4BandHigh VirtualChannel.N.Main.RolloverValue Zirconia.RemGasEn
Steriliser.IP4BandLow VirtualChannel.N.Main.Type Zirconia.TempOffset
Steriliser.IP4TargetSP VirtualChannel.N.Main.Units Zirconia.Tolerance
Steriliser.LowLimit VirtualChannel.N.Main.UnitsScaler
Steriliser.MeasuredTemp VirtualChannel.N.Trend.Colour
Steriliser.TargetTemperature VirtualChannel.N.Trend.SpanHigh
Steriliser.TargetTime VirtualChannel.N.Trend.SpanLow
Steriliser.TargetTime121 WebServer.Enabled
Steriliser.TargetTime134 WebServer.Password
Steriliser.ZTemperatureInterval WebServer.Port
Timer.N.In WebServer.Security
Timer.N.Type WebServer.Username
UserLin.N.NumberOfBreakpoints Zirconia.Clean.CleanEnable
UserLin.N.XN Zirconia.Clean.CleanFreq
UsrVal.N.HighLimit Zirconia.Clean.CleanMaxTemp
UsrVal.N.LowLimit Zirconia.Clean.CleanTime
UsrVal.N.Resolution Zirconia.Clean.MaxRcovTime
UsrVal.N.Units Zirconia.Clean.MinRcovTime
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.Amount Zirconia.CleanFreq
VirtualChannel.N.AlarmN.AverageTime Zirconia.CleanTime
Parameter List
This list is arranged in alphabetical block order and gives the memory address for
each parameter in both hex and decimal.
The Modbus addresses, in the range 0x0001 -0x3FFF, listed in the table below give
access to the parameter values in a scaled integer format. It is possible to gain
access to the parameter values in native format by using the following formula:
Native address = (scaled integer address x 2) + 0x8000
The blocks are ordered as follows:
Advanced Loop Loop 1 User Lin 3 Virtual chan 15

Alarm summary Loop 2 User Lin 4 Virtual chan 16
Batch Mass Flow User values Virtual chan 17
BCD Input Math (2 input) Virtual chan 1 Virtual chan 18
Channel 1 Modbus Master Virtual chan 2 Virtual chan 19
Channel 2 Multiplexer Virtual chan 3 Virtual chan 20
Channel 3 Network Virtual chan 4 Virtual chan 21
Channel 4 OR block Virtual chan 5 Virtual chan 22
Custom messages Program Virtual chan 6 Virtual chan 23
DC Output Programmer Virtual chan 7 Virtual chan 24
Digital I/O Real Time Events Virtual chan 8 Virtual chan 25
EtherNet/!P Saturated Steam Virtual chan 9 Virtual chan 26
Group Segments Virtual chan 10 Virtual chan 27
Humidity Steriliser Virtual chan 11 Virtual chan 28
Instrument Timer Virtual chan 12 Virtual chan 29
Logic (2 Input) User Lin 1 Virtual chan 13 Virtual chan 30
Logic (8 input) User Lin 2 Virtual chan 14 Zirconia
232 HA030554 Issue 16

Parameter path Description Type Hex Dec Resolution
AdvancedLoop.Diag.CalcOP Calc OP float32 031f 799 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.HiSatLim HiSatLim float32 0320 800 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.LoSatLim LoSatLim float32 0321 801 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterDerivativeOutContrib Master derivative output contribution float32 0312 786 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterError Master error float32 030d 781 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterFB Master feedback float32 031e 798 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterIntegralOutContrib Master integral output contribution float32 0311 785 4dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterLoopBreakAlarm Master loop break (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 0323 803 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterPropOutContrib Master loop proportional output contribution float32 0310 784 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.MasterSensorBreak Master sensor break (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 0313 787 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Diag.OPPid OPPID float32 0322 802 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedCBH Scheduled cutback high float32 3195 12693 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedCBL Scheduled cutback low float32 3196 12694 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedLPBrk Scheduled loop break time float32 3198 12696 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedMR Scheduled manual reset float32 3197 12695 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedOutputHigh Scheduled output high limit float32 319a 12698 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedOutputLow Scheduled output low limit float32 319b 12699 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedPB Scheduled proportional band float32 3192 12690 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedR2G Scheduled relative cool gain float32 3199 12697 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedTd Scheduled derivative time float32 3194 12692 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SchedTi Scheduled integral time float32 3193 12691 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveDerivativeOutContrib Slave derivative output contribution float32 031d 797 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveError Slave error float32 031a 794 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveIntegralOutContrib Slave integral output contribution float32 031c 796 4dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveLoopBreakAlarm Slave loop break (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 030f 783 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlavePropOutContrib Slave loop proportional output contribution float32 031b 795 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.SlaveSensorBreak Slave sensor break (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 0325 805 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Diag.TargetOutput Target output float32 030e 782 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Diag.WorkingOutputHigh Slave output high limit float32 0315 789 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Diag.WorkingOutputLow Slave output low limit float32 0314 788 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Main.ActiveOut Working output float32 0303 771 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Main.CascadeMode Cascade mode (0 = Cascade; 1 = Slave; 2 = Manual) uint8 0316 790 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Main.Inhibit Control inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 0304 772 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterIntHold Master integral hold (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 0305 773 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV Master loop process variable float32 0317 791 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterWSP Master loop working setpoint float32 0318 792 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.Main.SlaveIntHold Slave integral hold (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 0306 774 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV Slave loop process variable float32 0300 768 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Main.SlaveWSP Slave loop working setpoint float32 0302 770 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.Main.TargetSetpoint Target setpoint float32 0301 769 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ControlAction Control action (0 = Reverse acting; 1 = Direct acting) uint8 3103 12547 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackHigh Cutback high (0 = Auto) float32 31af 12719 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.CutbackLow Cutback low (0 = Auto) float32 31b0 12720 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeTime Derivative time (0 = Off) float32 31ae 12718 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.DerivativeType Derivative type ( 0 = PV; 1 = Eror) uint8 3105 12549 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ErrorLimit Error limit float32 31cc 12748 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.IntegralTime Integral time (0 = Off) float32 31ad 12717 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.LoopBreakTime Loop break time (0 = Off) float32 31b2 12722 0dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ManualReset Manual reset float32 31b1 12721 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.PBUnits Proportional band units (0 = Engineering; 1 = Percentage) uint8 3104 12548 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterPID.ProportionalBand Proportional band float32 31ac 12716 1dp
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.AltSP Alternative setpoint float32 3160 12640 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.AltSPSelect Alternative setpoint enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 3161 12641 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ManualTrack Manual track enable (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 3167 12647 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeHigh Range high float32 3159 12633 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RangeLow Range low float32 315a 12634 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.Rate Setpoint rate limit value (0 = Off) float32 3162 12642 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RateDisable Setpoint rate limit disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 3163 12643 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.RateDone Setpoint rate limit complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 030a 778 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 233

AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.ServoToPV Servo to PV enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 316c 12652 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SP1 Setpoint 1 float32 315c 12636 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SP2 Setpoint 2 float32 315d 12637 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPHighLimit Setpoint high limit float32 315e 12638 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPIntBal SP integral balance (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 316b 12651 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPLowLimit Setpoint low limit float32 315f 12639 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPSelect Active setpoint select (0 - Setpoint 1; 1 = Setpoint 2) uint8 315b 12635 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrack Setpoint tracking enable (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 3168 12648 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrim Setpoint trim float32 3164 12644 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimHighLimit Setpoint trim high limit float32 3165 12645 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.SPTrimLowLimit Setpoint trim low limit float32 3166 12646 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.TrackPV Track PV float32 3169 12649 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.MasterSP.TrackSP Track SP float32 316a 12650 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1OnOffHysteresis Channel 1 on/off hysteresis float32 3172 12658 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1Output Channel 1 output value float32 030b 779 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1PotBreak Channel 1 potentiometer break (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 3179 12665 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1PotPosition Channel 1 valve position float32 3178 12664 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch1TravelTime Channel 1 travel time float32 3174 12660 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2Deadband Channel 2 deadband (0 = Off) float32 316f 12655 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2OnOffHysteresis Channel 2 on/off hysteresis float32 3173 12659 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2Output Channel 2 (cool) output value float32 030c 780 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-
ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2PotBreak Channel 2 potentiometer break (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 317b 12667 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2PotPosition Channel 2 valve position float32 317a 12666 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.Ch2TravelTime Channel 2 travel time float32 3175 12661 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.CoolType Cooling algorithm type uint8 3183 12675 Not applicable
0 = Linear 1 = Oil 2 = Water 3 = Fan
AdvancedLoop.Output.EnablePowerFeedforward Power feed forward enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 3181 12673 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardGain Feedforward gain float32 3185 12677 3dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardOffset Feedforward offset float32 3186 12678 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardOutput Feedforward output float32 3188 12680 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardRemote Feedforward remote float32 318d 12685 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardTrimLimit Feedforward trim limit float32 3187 12679 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.FeedForwardType Feedforward type uint8 3184 12676 Not applicable
0 = None 1 = Remote 2 = SP 3 = PV
AdvancedLoop.Output.ForcedOP Forced manual output value float32 318f 12687 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualMode Manual output mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = LastMOP) uint8 317f 12671 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualOutVal Manual output value float32 3180 12672 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.ManualStartup Manual startup mode (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3190 12688 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.MeasuredPower Measured mains voltage float32 3182 12674 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.NudgeLower Valve nudge lower (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 3177 12663 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.NudgeRaise Valve nudge raise (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 3176 12662 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputHighLimit Output high limit float32 316d 12653 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputLowLimit Output low limit float32 316e 12654 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.PotBreakMode Potentiometer break mode uint8 317c 12668 Not applicable
0 = Raise 1 = Lower 2 = Reset 3 = Model
AdvancedLoop.Output.Rate Output rate limit value (0 = Off) float32 3170 12656 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Output.RateDisable Rate disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 3171 12657 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.RemoteOutputHigh Remote output high limit float32 318c 12684 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.ActiveOut
AdvancedLoop.Output.RemoteOutputLow Remote output low limit float32 318b 12683 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.ActiveOut
AdvancedLoop.Output.SafeOutVal Safe output value float32 317e 12670 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.SbrkOP Sensor break output float32 318e 12686 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Output.SlaveSensorBreakMode Slave sensor break mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold) uint8 317d 12669 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.TrackEnable Enable output tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 318a 12682 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Output.TrackOutput Output track value float32 3189 12681 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Setup.CascadeType Cascade type (0 = Full scale; 1 = Trim) uint8 1606 5638 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Setup.MasterLoop Master loop type (0 = PID) uint8 31b3 12723 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Setup.MasterName Master loop name string_t 7010 28688 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Setup.ManOutputAccess Manual output access uint8 31a9 12713 Not applicable
234 HA030554 Issue 16

AdvancedLoop.Setup.ModeAccess Mode access uint8 31a8 12712 Not applicable
0 = R/W (Logged out) 1 = R/W (Operator) 2 = Read Only
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SetpointAccess Setpoint access (as Mode Access, above) uint8 31a7 12711 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveChannel1 Slave heat/channel 1 control type uint8 3101 12545 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = On/Off 2 = PID 3 = VPU 4 = VPB
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveChannel2 Slave cool/channel 2 control type (as above) uint8 3102 12546 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Setup.SlaveName Slave loop name string_t 7020 28704 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Setup.ManOutputAccess Manual output access uint8 31a9 12713 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ActiveSet Active set (1 = Set 1; 2 = Set 2; 3 = Set 3) uint8 3138 12600 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.Boundary1-2 Scheduler boundary 1-2 float32 3139 12601 0dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.Boundary2-3 Scheduler boundary 2-3 float32 133a 4922 0dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ControlAction Control action (0 = Reverse acting; 1 = Direct acting) uint8 3106 12550 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh Cutback high set 1 (0 = Auto) float32 313f 12607 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh2 Cutback high set 2 (0 = Auto) float32 3147 12615 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackHigh3 Cutback high set 3 (0 = Auto) float32 314f 12623 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow Cutback low set 1 (0 = Auto) float32 3140 12608 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow2 Cutback low set 2 (0 = Auto) float32 3148 12616 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.CutbackLow3 Cutback low set 3 (0 = Auto) float32 3150 12624 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime Derivative time set 1 (0 = Off) float32 313d 12605 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime2 Derivative time set 2 (0 = Off) float32 3145 12613 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeTime3 Derivative time set 3 (0 = Off) float32 314d 12621 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.DerivativeType Derivative type (0 = PV; 1 = Error) uint8 3305 13061 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime Integral time set 1 (0 = Off) float32 313c 12604 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime2 Integral time set 2 (0 = Off) float32 3144 12612 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.IntegralTime3 Integral time set 3 (0 = Off) float32 314c 12620 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime Loop break time set 1 (0 = Off) float32 3142 12610 0dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime2 Loop break time set 2 (0 = Off) float32 314a 12618 0dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.LoopBreakTime3 Loop break time set 3 (0 = Off) float32 3152 12626 0dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset Manual reset float32 3141 12609 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset2 Manual reset 2 float32 3149 12617 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ManualReset3 Manual reset 3 float32 3151 12625 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.NumberOfSets Number of PID sets uint8 3136 12598 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputHi2 Output high limit float32 3155 12629 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputHi3 Output high limit float32 3157 12631 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputHigh Output high limit float32 3153 12627 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputLo2 Output low limit 2 float32 3156 12630 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputLo3 Output low limit float32 3158 12632 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.OutputLow Output low limit float32 3154 12628 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.PBUnits Proportional band units (0 = Engineering; 1 = Percentage) uint8 3304 13060 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand Proportional band set 1 float32 313b 12603 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand2 Proportional band set 2 float32 3143 12611 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.ProportionalBand3 Proportional band set 3 float32 314b 12619 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain Relative cool/channel 2 gain float32 313e 12606 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain2 Relative cool/channel 2 gain 2 float32 3146 12614 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RelCh2Gain3 Relative cool/channel 2 gain 3 float32 314e 12622 1dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.RemoteInput Scheduler remote input float32 3137 12599 0dp
AdvancedLoop.SlavePID.SchedulerType Scheduler type uint8 3135 12597 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Manually set 2 = Setpoint 3 = PV
4 = Error 5 = Output 6 = Remote
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.FFSelect Feedforward select uint8 31bf 12735 Not applicable
0 = Master PV 1 = Master WSP 2 = Remote FF
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.LocalSP Local setpoint float32 31b4 12724 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.ManualTrack Manual track enable (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 31ca 12746 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.MasterSensorBreakMode Master sensor break mode uint8 31c2 12738 Not applicable
0 = SbrkSP 1 = Hold 2 = SlaveSB
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeHigh Range high float32 31c0 12736 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RangeLow Range low float32 31c1 12737 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFeedForward Remote feedforward input float32 31bb 12731 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFFEnable Remote feedforward enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 31be 12734 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFFHigh Remote feedforward high float32 31bc 12732 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.RemoteFFLow Remote feedforward low float32 31bd 12733 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SbrkSP Sensor break setpoint float32 31c3 12739 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
HA030554 Issue 16 235

AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SPHighLimit Setpoint high limit float32 31b5 12725 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.SPLowLimit Setpoint low limit float32 31b6 12726 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimHighLimit Trim high limit float32 31b9 12729 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimLowLimit Trim low limit float32 31ba 12730 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimRangeHigh Trim range high float32 31b7 12727 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.SlaveSP.TrimRangeLow Trim range low float32 31b8 12728 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.Tune.A1 A1 float32 320d 12813 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.A2 A2 float32 320e 12814 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Alpha Alpha float32 3211 12817 4dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Alpha_p Alpha_p float32 320f 12815 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ArgOP Argument Output float32 3209 12809 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ArgPV Argument PV float32 3208 12808 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Band Band float32 31c7 12743 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.CycleNo CycleNo float32 3213 12819 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Debug Debug float32 3212 12818 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Diagnostics Tuning diagnostics bool 31cb 12747 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Gain Gain float32 320a 12810 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Hysteresis Hysteresis float32 31c6 12742 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.MasterTune Master tune float32 3203 12803 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ModeMan Mode Man float32 3201 12801 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ModOP Modulus OP float32 3207 12807 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.ModPV Modulus PV float32 3206 12806 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OP Output float32 3202 12802 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OPDel OPDel float32 0319 793 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OPss OPss float32 3210 12816 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputHighLimit Output high float32 3132 12594 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Tune.OutputLowLimit Output low float32 3133 12595 Same as AdvancedLoop.Output.OutputH-

ighLimit
AdvancedLoop.Tune.PBs PBs float32 3214 12820 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Period Period float32 320c 12812 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Phase Phase float32 320b 12811 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Settle Settle float32 3216 12822 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Stage Stage uint8 0308 776 Not applicable
0 = Reset 1 = None 2 = Settling 3 = Current SP
4 = New SP 5 = To SP 6 = Wait Max. 7 = Wait Min
8 = Store 9 = CoolT 10 = PID 11 = Abort
12 = Complete 13 = New R2g 14 = 1: Half Cycle
15 = 2: Full Cycle 16 = 3: Full Cycle
17 = 4: Final cycle 18 = 5: Calculating
AdvancedLoop.Tune.StageTime Stage time float32 0309 777 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.State State uint8 0307 775 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Ready 2 - Running 3 = Complete
4 = Time-out 5 = Ti Limit 6 = R2G limit
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TDs TDs float32 3215 12821 2dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.Timeout Timeout float32 0326 806 0dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneEnable Autotune enable (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3131 12593 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneHigh Tune high float32 31c8 12744 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneLow Tune low float32 31c9 12745 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.SlavePV
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneR2G Slave R2G tuning type uint8 3130 12592 Not applicable
0 = Standard R2G tuning 1 = R2GPD tuning 2 = Off
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneSlave Tune slave float32 3204 12804 1dp
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneStatus Tune Status float32 3205 12805 0dp
0 = Not tuning 1 = Tuning the slave
2 = Tuning the master 3 = Tuning complete
-1 = Tuning aborted or timed-out
AdvancedLoop.Tune.TuneType Autotune algorithm type (0 = Slave; 1 = Master) uint8 31c5 12741 Not applicable
AdvancedLoop.Tune.WSP Working setpoint float32 3200 12800 Same as AdvancedLoop.Main.MasterPV
AlarmSummary.AnyAlarm 0 = No active alarms; 1 = one or more alarms active bool 01a2 418 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.AnyChanAlarm 0 = No channel alarms uint8 01a0 416 Not applicable
1 = Channel alarm(s) active but all ack’d.
2 = Channel alarm(s) active but not all ack’d
AlarmSummary.AnySystemAlarm 0 = No system alarms; 1 = 1 or more system alm(s) bool 01a1 417 Not applicable
236 HA030554 Issue 16

AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Ack Acknowledge the most recent channel alarm bool 1192 4498 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Num Channel and alarm number of most recent alarm uint8 1190 4496 Not applicable
0= No alarm 4 = Ch1;Al1 5 =Ch1;Al2

8 = Ch2;Al1 9 = Ch2Al2 12 = Ch3;Al1
13 = Ch3;Al2 16 = Ch4;Al1 17 = Ch4;Al2
132 = VC1;Al1 133 = VC1;Al2 136 = VC2;Al1
137 = VC2;Al2 140 = VC3;Al1 141 = VC3;Al2
144 = VC4;Al1 145 = VC4;Al2 148 = VC5;Al1
149 = VC5;Al2 152 = VC6;Al1 153 = VC6;Al2
156 = VC7;Al1 157 = VC7;Al2 160 = VC8;Al1
161 = VC8;Al2 164 = VC9;Al1 165 = VC9;Al2
168 = VC10;Al1 169 = VC10;Al2 172 = VC11;Al1
173 = VC11;Al2 176 = VC12;Al1 177 = VC12;Al2
180 = VC13;Al1 181 = VC13;Al2 184 = VC14;Al1
185 = VC14;Al2 188 = VC15;Al1 189 = VC15:Al2
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm1Status Status of most recent alarm uint8 1191 4497 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Active 2 = Safe unack 3 = Active unack
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm2Ack Acknowledge the 2nd most recent channel alarm bool 1195 4501 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm2Num As Alarm1Num, but for 2nd most recent alarm uint8 1193 4499 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm2Status As Alarm1Status, but for 2nd most recent alarm uint8 1194 4500 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm3Ack Acknowledge the 3rd most recent channel alarm bool 1198 4504 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm3Num As Alarm1Num, but for 3rd most recent alarm uint8 1196 4502 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm3Status As Alarm1Status, but for 3rd most recent alarm uint8 1197 4503 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm4Ack Acknowledge the 4th most recent channel alarm bool 119b 4507 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm4Num As Alarm1Num, but for 4th most recent alarm uint8 1199 4505 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm4Status As Alarm1Status, but for 4th most recent alarm uint8 119a 4506 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm5Ack Acknowledge the 5th most recent channel alarm bool 119e 4510 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm5Num As Alarm1Num, but for 5th most recent alarm uint8 119c 4508 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm5Status As Alarm1Status, but for 5th most recent alarm uint8 119d 4509 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm6Ack Acknowledge the 6th most recent channel alarm bool 11a1 4513 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm6Num As Alarm1Num, but for 6th most recent alarm uint8 119f 4511 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm6Status As Alarm1Status, but for 6th most recent alarm uint8 11a0 4512 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm7Num As Alarm1Num, but for 7th most recent alarm uint8 11a2 4514 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm9Ack Acknowledge the 9th most recent channel alarm bool 11aa 4522 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm10Ack Acknowledge the 10th most recent channel alarm bool 11ad 4525 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm10Num As Alarm1Num, but for 10th most recent alarm uint8 11ab 4523 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm10Status As Alarm1Status, but for 10th most recent alarm uint8 11ac 4524 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm11Ack Acknowledge the 11th most recent channel alarm bool 11b0 4528 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm11Num As Alarm1Num, but for 11th most recent alarm uint8 11ae 4526 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm11Status As Alarm1Status, but for 11th most recent alarm uint8 11af 4527 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm12Num As Alarm1Num, but for 12th most recent alarm uint8 11b1 4529 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm12Status As Alarm1Status, but for 12th most recent alarm uint8 11b2 4530 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm13Num As Alarm1Num, but for 13th most recent alarmr uint8 11b4 4532 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm14Num As Alarm1Num, but for 14th most recent alarmr uint8 11b7 4535 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm15Ack Acknowledge the 15th most recent channel alarm bool 11bc 4540 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm15Num As Alarm1Num, but for 15th most recent alarm uint8 11ba 4538 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm15Status As Alarm1Status, but for 15th most recent alarm uint8 11bb 4539 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm16Ack Acknowledge the 16th most recent channel alarm bool 11bf 4543 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm16Num As Alarm1Num, but for 16th most recent alarm uint8 11bd 4541 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm16Status As Alarm1Status, but for 16th most recent alarm uint8 11be 4542 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm17Ack Acknowledge the 17th most recent channel alarm bool 11c2 4546 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm17Num As Alarm1Num, but for 17th most recent alarm uint8 11c0 4544 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm17Status As Alarm1Status, but for 17th most recent alarm uint8 11c1 4545 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 237

AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm20Ack Acknowledge the 20th most recent channel alarm bool 11cb 4555 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm20Status As Alarm1Status, but for 20th most recent alarm uint8 11ca 4554 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm21Ack Acknowledge the 21st most recent channel alarm bool 11ce 4558 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm21Num As Alarm1Num, but for 21st most recent alarm uint8 11cc 4556 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm21Status As Alarm1Status, but for 21st most recent alarm uint8 11cd 4557 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm22Ack Acknowledge the 22nd most recent channel alarm bool 11d1 4561 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm22Num As Alarm1Num, but for 22nd most recent alarm uint8 11cf 4559 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm22Status As Alarm1Status, but for 22nd most recent alarm uint8 11d0 4560 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm23Ack Acknowledge the 23rd most recent channel alarm bool 11d4 4564 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm23Num As Alarm1Num, but for 23th most recent alarm uint8 11d2 4562 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm23Status As Alarm1Status, but for 23rd most recent alarm uint8 11d3 4563 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm24Ack Acknowledge the 24th most recent channel alarm bool 11d7 4567 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm24Status As Alarm1Status, but for 24th most recent alarm uint8 11d6 4566 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm25Ack Acknowledge the 25th most recent channel alarm bool 11da 4570 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm25Status As Alarm1Status, but for 25th most recent alarm uint8 11d9 4569 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm26Ack Acknowledge the 26th most recent channel alarm bool 11dd 4573 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm26Num As Alarm1Num, but for 26th most recent alarm uint8 11db 4571 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm26Status As Alarm1Status, but for 26th most recent alarm uint8 11dc 4572 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm27Ack Acknowledge the 27th most recent channel alarm bool 11e0 4576 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm27Num As Alarm1Num, but for 27th most recent alarm uint8 11de 4574 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm27Status As Alarm1Status, but for 27th most recent alarm uint8 11df 4575 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm28Num As Alarm1Num, but for 28th most recent alarm uint8 11e1 4577 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm28Status As Alarm1Status, but for 28th most recent alarm uint8 11e2 4578 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm31Ack Acknowledge the 31st most recent channel alarm bool 11ec 4588 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm31Num As Alarm1Num, but for 31st most recent alarm uint8 11ea 4586 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm31Status As Alarm1Status, but for 31st most recent alarm uint8 11eb 4587 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm32Ack Acknowledge the 32nd most recent channel alarm bool 11ef 4591 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm32Num As Alarm1Num, but for 32nd most recent alarm uint8 11ed 4589 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm32Status As Alarm1Status, but for 32nd most recent alarm uint8 11ee 4590 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm33Ack Acknowledge the 33rd most recent channel alarm bool 11f2 4594 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm33Num As Alarm1Num, but for 33rd most recent alarm uint8 11f0 4592 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm33Status As Alarm1Status, but for 33rd most recent alarm uint8 11f1 4593 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm34Ack Acknowledge the 34th most recent channel alarm bool 11f5 4597 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm34Num As Alarm1Num, but for 34th most recent alarm uint8 11f3 4595 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm34Status As Alarm1Status, but for 34th most recent alarm uint8 11f4 4596 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm35Ack Acknowledge the 35th most recent channel alarm bool 11f8 4600 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm35Status As Alarm1Status, but for 35th most recent alarm uint8 11f7 4599 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm36Ack Acknowledge the 36th most recent channel alarm bool 11fb 4603 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm36Status As Alarm1Status, but for 36th most recent alarm uint8 11fa 4602 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm37Ack Acknowledge the 37th most recent channel alarm bool 11fe 4606 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm37Num As Alarm1Num, but for 37th most recent alarm uint8 11fc 4604 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm37Status As Alarm1Status, but for 38th most recent alarm uint8 11fd 4605 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm38Ack Acknowledge the 38th most recent channel alarm bool 1201 4609 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm38Num As Alarm1Num, but for 38th most recent alarm uint8 11ff 4607 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.Channel.Alarm38Status As Alarm1Status, but for 38th most recent alarm uint8 1200 4608 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.GlobalAck Acknowledge all alarms. 0=No;1 = yes bool 01a3 419 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.StatusWord1 A summary of Channel 1-4 alarms int16 01a4 420 Not applicable
238 HA030554 Issue 16

Bit 0: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 1 = Channel 1 Alarm 1 not acknowledged
AlarmSummary.StatusWord2 A summary of Virtual Channel 1 to 4 alarms int16 01a5 421 Not applicable
Bit 0: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 1 = Virtual channel 1 Alarm 1 not ack’d
As for Status Word 2 but for virtual channels 5 to 8
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm1ID Most recent active system alarm uint8 1210 4624 Not applicable
0 = No Alarm 1 = Low battery

2 = Battery failure 3 = System clock fail
4 = Channel error 5 = Channel fail
6 = DHCP server fail 7 = FTP Archive file lost
8 = FTP Archive slow 9 = FTP Primary server failure
10 = FTP Secondary server failure
11 = Insufficient non-volatile memory
12 = Maths channel failure13 = Media archive file lost
14 = Media archive slow 15 = Network boot failure
16 = DC Output Cal. Error17 = Recording failure
18 = Media failure 19: = Media full
20 =SNTP failure 21 = Time synchronisation failure
22 = Media missing 23: Archive disabled
24 = Archiving failed 25 = Archiving timed out
26 = USB Over Current 27 = USB unsupported
28 = Invalid parameter database
29 = Invalid non-volatile data
30 = Flash write failure 31 = Wiring failure
32 = Broadcast Storm
33 = Non-volatile memory write frequency warning
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm2ID 2nd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 1211 4625 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm3ID 3rd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 1212 4626 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm4ID 4th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 1213 4627 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm11ID 11th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 121a 4634 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm12ID 12th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 121b 4635 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 239

AlarmSummary.System.Alarm13ID 13th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 121c 4636 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm14ID 14th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 121d 4637 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm15ID 15th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 121e 4638 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm16ID 16th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 121f 4639 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm21ID 21st most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 1224 4644 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm22ID 22nd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 1225 4645 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm23ID 23rd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 1226 4646 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm27ID 27th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 122a 4650 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm28ID 28th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 122b 4651 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm29ID 29th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 122c 4652 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm30ID 30th most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 122d 4653 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm31ID 31st most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 122e 4654 Not applicable
AlarmSummary.System.Alarm32ID 32nd most recent active system alarm (as Alarm1ID) uint8 122f 4655 Not applicable
Batch.OnStartLog The number of fields to log in history file on start uint8 3053 12371 Not applicable
Batch.BatchFields The number of batch fields the user must populate uint8 305a 12378 Not applicable
Batch.Start Trigger to start a batch bool 3058 12376 Not applicable
Batch.Stop Aborts the current batch bool 3059 12377 Not applicable
Batch.Active The current batch status uint8 3050 12368 Not applicable
Batch.Mode The selectable batch mode uint8 3051 12369 Not applicable
Batch.OnNewClear The number of fields to clear on a new batch start uint8 3055 12373 Not applicable
Batch.OnStopLog The number of fields to log in the history file on stop uint8 3054 12372 Not applicable
Batch.1FieldDescriptor1 Field descriptor (heading) for batch field 1 string_t 7801 30721 Not applicable
Batch1.FieldData1 Field data (content) for batch field 1 string_t 7807 30727 Not applicable
Batch1.FieldData4 Field data (content) for batch field 4 string_t 780a 30730 Not applicable
Batch1.FieldData5 Field data (content) for batch field 5 string_t 780b 30731 Not applicable
Batch1.FieldData6 Field data (content) for batch field 6 string_t 780c 30732 Not applicable
Batch.PrintVersion If to print version numbers bool 3056 12374 Not applicable
Batch.Duration The duration of the current batch time_t 0401 1025 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Batch.NameFileByBatch Generates a batch in a new history file by name bool 3057 12375 Not applicable
Batch.PVStart PV Start float32 0402 1026 0dp
Batch.BatchField1 Batch field 1 mode uint8 3052 12370 Not applicable
Batch.StartTime Batch start time time_t 0400 1024 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Batch.StartDate Batch start date string_t 77d5 30677 Not applicable
Batch.New New batch bool 305c 12380 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.BCDVal BCD1 BCD Value uint8 2ed1 11985 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.DecByte BCD1 Decimal Value uint8 2ed0 11984 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In1 BCD1 Input 1 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ec8 11976 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In2 BCD1 Input 2 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ec9 11977 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In3 BCD1 Input 3 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2eca 11978 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In4 BCD1 Input 4 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ecb 11979 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In5 BCD1 Input 5 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ecc 11980 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In6 BCD1 Input 6 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ecd 11981 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In7 BCD1 Input 7 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ece 11982 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.In8 BCD1 Input 8 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ecf 11983 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.Tens BCD1 Tens (MSD) uint8 2ed3 11987 Not applicable
BCDInput.1.Units BCD1 Units (LSD) uint8 2ed2 11986 Not applicable
240 HA030554 Issue 16

BCDInput.1.SettleTime Settle Time float32 3042 12354 1dp
BCDInput.2.BCDVal BCD2 BCD Value uint8 2edd 11997 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.DecByte BCD2 Decimal Value uint8 2edc 11996 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.In1 BCD2 Input 1 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2ed4 11988 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.In7 BCD2 Input 7 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2eda 11994 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.In8 BCD2 Input 8 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2edb 11995 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.Tens BCD2 Tens (MSD) uint8 2edf 11999 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.Units BCD2 Units (LSD) uint8 2ede 11998 Not applicable
BCDInput.2.SettleTime Settle Time float32 3043 12355 1dp
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = Acknowledge alarm bool 01b0 432 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = Alarm acknowledged bool 1850 6224 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Active 1 = Alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 184b 6219 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Amount Alarm amount float32 1848 6216 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm1.AverageTime Average time time_t 184a 6218 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.1.Alarm1.Block Blocking enable (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 1842 6210 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.ChangeTime Change time (0 = Per second; 1= Per minute; 2 =Per hour) uint8 1849 6217 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Deviation Alarm deviation float32 1847 6215 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time_t 1845 6213 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.1.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis float32 1844 6212 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = the alarm is safe and acknowledged bool 184e 6222 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = the alarm is inhibited bool 1851 6225 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Latch Alarm latch type uint8 1841 6209 Not applicable
0 = None 1 = Auto
2 = Manual 3 = Trigger
Channel.1.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = the alarm has not been acknowledged bool 184f 6223 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm1.Reference Alarm reference float32 1846 6214 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm1.Status Alarm status uint8 0102 258 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Active
2 = Safe not acknowledged 3 = Active not acknowledged
Channel.1.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm threshold float32 1843 6211 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm1.Type Alarm type uint8 1840 6208 Not applicable
0 = None 1 = Abs High 2 = Abs Low

3 = Dev high 4 = Dev Low 5 = Dev band
6 = ROC rising 7 = ROC falling 10 = Dig Off
11 = Dig high 12 = Dig Low
Channel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledge 1 = Acknowledge alarm bool 01b1 433 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = Alarm acknowledged bool 1870 6256 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Active 1 = Alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 186b 6251 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Amount Alarm amount float32 1868 6248 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm2.AverageTime Average time time_t 186a 6250 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.1.Alarm2.Block Blocking enable (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 1862 6242 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.ChangeTime Change time (0 = Per second; 1= Per minute; 2 =Per hour) uint8 1869 6249 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Deviation Alarm deviation float32 1867 6247 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time_t 1865 6245 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.1.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis float32 1864 6244 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = the alarm is safe and acknowledged bool 186e 6254 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = the alarm is inhibited bool 1871 6257 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Latch Configures the latching type of the alarm (As Alarm1.Latch) uint8 1861 6241 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = the alarm has not been acknowledged bool 186f 6255 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Reference Alarm reference float32 1866 6246 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm2.Status As Alarm1.Status uint8 0103 259 Not applicable
Channel.1.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm threshold float32 1863 6243 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Alarm2.Type Alarm type (as Alarm1.Type uint8 1860 6240 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.CJType Cold junction compensation type uint8 180c 6156 Not applicable
0 = None 1 = Internal 2 = External

3 = Remote (Ch1) 4 = Remote (Ch2) 5 = Remote (Ch3)
6 = Remote (Ch4)
Channel.1.Main.CloseString Close String string_t 4990 18832 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 241

Channel.1.Main.Descriptor Text string to describe the channel string_t 4900 18688 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.ExtCJTemp External CJ temperature float32 180d 6157 1dp
Channel.1.Main.FaultResponse Fault response. 0 = none; 1 = Drive high; 2 = Drive low uint8 1810 6160 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.Filter Filter time constant float32 180e 6158 1dp
Channel.1.Main.InputHigh Input range high value float32 1804 6148 1dp
Channel.1.Main.InputLow Input range low value float32 1803 6147 1dp
Channel.1.Main.InternalCJTemp Channel internal cold junction temperature float32 1815 6165 1dp
Channel.1.Main.IPAdjustState Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted) bool 1816 6166 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.IPAdjustState2 Secondary Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted) bool 181c 6172 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.LinType Linearisation type uint8 1806 6150 Not applicable
0 =Type B 1 = Type C 2 = Type D

3 = Type E 4 = Type G2 5 = Type J
6 =Type K 7 = Type L 8 = Type N
9 = Type R 10 = Type S 11 = Type T
12 = Type U 13 = NiMoNiCo 14 = Platinel
15 = NiNiMo 16 = Pt20RhPt40Rh 17 = User 1
18 = User 2 19 = User 3 20 = User 4
21 = Cu10 22 = Pt100 23 = Pt100A
24 = JPT100 25 = Ni100 26 = Ni120
27 = Cu53 28 = Linear 29 = Sqrt
30 = x3/2 32 = x5/2
Channel.1.Main.MeasuredValue Input value before linearisation, scaling, adjust etc. float32 1814 6164 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.MeasuredValue2 Measured value of the secondary input float32 1819 6169 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.Offset Fixed value to be added to/subtracted from PV float32 1817 6167 3dp
Channel.1.Main.Offset2 Secondary input offset (as above). float32 1818 6168 3dp
Channel.1.Main.OpenString Open String string_t 496c 18796 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.PV The process variable (output) of the channel float32 0100 256 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.PV2 The secondary input process variable (output) of the chan- float32 0110 272 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
nel
Channel.1.Main.RangeHigh Range high value float32 1808 6152 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.RangeLow Range low value float32 1807 6151 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.RangeUnits Range units: 0 = °C; 1 = °F; 2 = Kelvins uint8 1809 6153 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.Resolution Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places uint8 1801 6145 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.ScaleHigh Scale high value float32 180b 6155 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.ScaleHigh2 Scale high value for the secondary input float32 181b 6171 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.ScaleLow Scale low value float32 180a 6154 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.ScaleLow2 Scale low value for the secondary input float32 181a 6170 Set by Channel.1.Main.Resolution
Channel.1.Main.SensorBreakType Sensor break type: 0 =Off; 1 = Low; 2 = High uint8 180f 6159 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.SensorBreakVal Sensor break value uint8 1811 6161 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.Shunt Shunt value (Ohms) float32 1805 6149 2dp
Channel.1.Main.Status The PV (output) status uint8 0101 257 Not applicable
0 =Good 1 = Off 2 = Over range

3 = Under range 4 = HW error 5 = Ranging
6 = Overflow 7 = bad 8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data 12 = Comm channel error
Channel.1.Main.Status2 The secondary input PV (output) status (as above) uint8 0111 273 Not applicable
Channel.1.Main.TestSignal Channel test waveform uint8 1802 6146 Not applicable
0 = Triangle 5hr 1 = Triangle 40 min

2 = Triangle 4 min 3 = Triangle 40 sec
4 = Sine 5 hr 5 = Sine 40 min
6 = Sine 4 min 7 = Sine 40 sec
Channel.1.Main.Type Specifies the type of channel uint8 1800 6144 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = TC 2 = mV
3=V 4 = mA 5 = RTD
6 = Digital 7 = Test 8 = Ohms
9 = Dual mV 10 = Dual mA 11 = Dual TC
Channel.1.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4915 18709 Not applicable
Channel.1.Trend.Colour Configures the trend colour for this channel uint8 1820 6176 Not applicable
0 = Red 1 = Blue 2 = Green

3 = Honey 4 = Violet 5 = Russet
6 = Dark blue 7 = Jade 8 = Magenta
9 = Dusky rose 10 = Yellow 11 = Powder blue
12 = Dark red 13 = Avocado 14 = Indigo
15 = Dark brown 16 = Aegean 17 = Cyan
18 = Aubergine 19 = Dark orange 20 = Pale yellow
21 = Hyacinth 22 = Dark green 23 = Sugar pink
24 = Bluebell 25 = Orange 26 = Pink
27 = Buttersilk 28 = Terracotta 29 = Blue babe
30 = Lime 31 = Blue jive 32 = Cucumber
33 = Eurogreen 34 = Wheatgerm 35 = Sea Blue
36 = Ginger 37 = Aqua pool 38 = Pale red
39 = Pale blue 40 = Lilac 41 = Sky blue
42 = Wild moss 43 = Turquoise 44 = Pale green
45 = Coffee 49 = Dark Grey 53 = Light grey
Channel.1.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1822 6178 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1821 6177 Same as Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01b2 434 Not applicable
242 HA030554 Issue 16

Channel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 18d0 6352 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 18cb 6347 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 18c8 6344 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 18ca 6346 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.2.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 18c2 6338 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 18c9 6345 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 18c7 6343 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 18c5 6341 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.2.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 18c4 6340 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 18ce 6350 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = Alarm inhibited bool 18d1 6353 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Latch Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 18c1 6337 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 18cf 6351 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 18c6 6342 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm1.Status Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 0106 262 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 18c3 6339 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm1.Type Alarm type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 18c0 6336 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 18f0 6384 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 18eb 6379 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 18e8 6376 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 18ea 6378 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.2.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 18e2 6370 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 18e9 6377 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 18e7 6375 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 18e5 6373 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.2.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 18e4 6372 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 18ee 6382 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = Alarm inhibited bool 18f1 6385 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Latch Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 18e1 6369 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 18ef 6383 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 18e6 6374 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm2.Status Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 0107 263 Not applicable
Channel.2.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 18e3 6371 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Alarm2.Type Alarm type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 18e0 6368 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.CJType Cold junction compensation type (as for Channel.1.Main) uint8 188c 6284 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.CloseString Close String string_t 4999 18841 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.Descriptor Text string to describe the channel string_t 491b 18715 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.FaultResponse Input fault response uint8 1890 6288 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.InputHigh Input range high value float32 1884 6276 1dp
Channel.2.Main.InputLow Input range low value float32 1883 6275 1dp
Channel.2.Main.InternalCJTemp Channel 2 internal cold junction temperature float32 1895 6293 1dp
Channel.2.Main.IPAdjustState Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 =Adjusted) bool 1896 6294 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.LinType Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main) uint8 1886 6278 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.Offset2 Secondary input offset float32 1898 6296 3dp
Channel.2.Main.OpenString Open String string_t 4975 18805 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.PV The output (displayed) value of the channel. float32 0104 260 Set by Channel.2.Main.Resolution
nel
Channel.2.Main.RangeUnits Range units (as channel.1.Main) uint8 1889 6281 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 243

Channel.2.Main.SensorBreakType Sensor break type (as for Channel.1.Main) uint8 188f 6287 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.Shunt Shunt value in Ohms float32 1885 6277 2dp
Channel.2.Main.Status Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status) uint8 0105 261 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.Status2 The secondary input PV (output) status (as above) uint8 0115 277 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.TestSignal Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main) uint8 1882 6274 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.Type Channel function (as for Channel.1.Main.Type) uint8 1880 6272 Not applicable
Channel.2.Main.Units Channel units string string_t 4930 18736 Not applicable
Channel.2.Trend.Colour Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour) uint8 18a0 6304 Not applicable
Channel.2.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 18a2 6306 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.2.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 18a1 6305 Same as Channel.2.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1950 6480 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 194b 6475 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1948 6472 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 194a 6474 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.3.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on. uint8 1942 6466 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1949 6473 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1947 6471 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1945 6469 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.3.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1944 6468 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 194e 6478 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1951 6481 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Latch Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 1941 6465 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 194f 6479 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1946 6470 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.Status Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 010a 266 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1943 6467 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm1.Type Alarm type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 1940 6464 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1970 6512 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 196b 6507 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1968 6504 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 196a 6506 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.3.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on. uint8 1962 6498 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1969 6505 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1967 6503 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1965 6501 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.3.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1964 6500 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 196e 6510 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = Alarm inhibited bool 1971 6513 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Latch Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 1961 6497 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 196f 6511 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1966 6502 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm2.Status Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 010b 267 Not applicable
Channel.3.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1963 6499 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Alarm2.Type Alarm type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 1960 6496 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.CloseString Close String string_t 49a2 18850 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.FaultResponse Input fault response (As for Channel.1.Main) uint8 1910 6416 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.InputHigh Input range maximum value float32 1904 6404 1dp
Channel.3.Main.InputLow Input range minimum value float32 1903 6403 1dp
Channel.3.Main.IPAdjustState Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted) bool 1916 6422 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.LinType Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main.LinType) uint8 1906 6406 Not applicable
244 HA030554 Issue 16

Channel.3.Main.Offset Input offset float32 1917 6423 3dp
Channel.3.Main.OpenString Open String string_t 497e 18814 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.PV The output (displayed) value of the channel. float32 0108 264 Set by Channel.3.Main.Resolution
nel
Channel.3.Main.RangeUnits Range units uint8 1909 6409 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.Status Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status) uint8 0109 265 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.Status2 The secondary input PV (output) status uint8 0119 281 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.TestSignal Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main) uint8 1902 6402 Not applicable
Channel.3.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 494b 18763 Not applicable
Channel.3.Trend.Colour Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour) uint8 1920 6432 Not applicable
Channel.3.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1922 6434 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.3.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1921 6433 Same as Channel.3.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 19d0 6608 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 19cb 6603 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 19c8 6600 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 19ca 6602 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.4.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on. uint8 19c2 6594 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 19c9 6601 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 19c7 6599 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 19c5 6597 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.4.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 19c4 6596 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 19ce 6606 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 19d1 6609 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Latch Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 19c1 6593 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 19cf 6607 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 19c6 6598 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.Status Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 010e 270 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 19c3 6595 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm1.Type Alarm type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 19c0 6592 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 19f0 6640 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 19eb 6635 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 19e8 6632 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 19ea 6634 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.4.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 19e2 6626 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 19e9 6633 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 19e7 6631 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 19e5 6629 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Channel.4.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 19e4 6628 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 19ee 6638 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Latch Alarm latch type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 19e1 6625 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 19ef 6639 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 19e6 6630 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm2.Status Alarm status (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 010f 271 Not applicable
Channel.4.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 19e3 6627 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Alarm2.Type Alarm type (as for Channel.1.Alarm1) uint8 19e0 6624 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 245

Channel.4.Main.CloseString Close String string_t 49ab 18859 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.FaultResponse Input fault response (as for Channel.1.Main) uint8 1990 6544 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.InputHigh Input range maximum value float32 1984 6532 1dp
Channel.4.Main.InputLow Input range minimum value float32 1983 6531 1dp
Channel.4.Main.IPAdjustState Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted;1 =Adjusted) bool 1996 6550 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.IPAdjustState2 Secondary Input Adjust state (0 = Unadjusted; 1 = Adjusted bool 199c 6556 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.LinType Linearisation type (as for Channel.1.Main.LinType) uint8 1986 6534 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.OpenString Open String string_t 4987 18823 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.PV The output (displayed) value of the channel. float32 010c 268 Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
Channel.4.Main.PV2 The secondary input process variable (output) of the chan- float32 011c 284 Set by Channel.4.Main.Resolution
nel
Channel.4.Main.RangeUnits Range units (as channel.1.Main.RangeUnits) uint8 1989 6537 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.Status Channel status (as for Channel.1.Main.Status) uint8 010d 269 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.Status2 The secondary input PV (output) status uint8 011d 285 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.TestSignal Channel test waveform (as for Channel.1.Main.TestSignal) uint8 1982 6530 Not applicable
Channel.4.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4966 18790 Not applicable
Channel.4.Trend.Colour Trend colour (as for Channel.1.Trend.Colour) uint8 19a0 6560 Not applicable
Channel.4.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 19a2 6562 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
Channel.4.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 19a1 6561 Same as Channel.4.Main.PV
CustomMessage.Message1 Custom message No 1 string_t 5e00 24064 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message2 Custom message No 2 string_t 5e65 24165 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message3 Custom message No 3 string_t 5eca 24266 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message4 Custom message No 4 string_t 5f2f 24367 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message5 Custom message No 5 string_t 5f94 24468 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message6 Custom message No 6 string_t 5ff9 24569 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message7 Custom message No 7 string_t 605e 24670 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message8 Custom message No 8 string_t 60c3 24771 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message9 Custom message No 9 string_t 6128 24872 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Message10 Custom message No 10 string_t 618d 24973 Not applicable
CustomMessage.Trigger1 Trigger for custom message No 1 bool 28f0 10480 Not applicable
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.FallbackPV Fallback PV value float32 15c9 5577 Set by DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.MeasuredValue Measured Value float32 15ca 5578 2dp
246 HA030554 Issue 16

DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OPAdjustState 0 = Unadjusted, 1 = Adjusted bool 15c3 5571 Not applicable
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OutputHigh DC Output High value float32 15c6 5574 2dp
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.OutputLow DC Output Low value float32 15c5 5573 2dp
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.PV DC Output PV float32 15c1 5569 Set by DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places uint8 15c4 5572 Not applicable
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.ScaleHigh Scale High value float32 15c8 5576 Set by DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.ScaleLow Scale Low value float32 15c7 5575 Set by DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Status PV Status uint8 15c2 5570 Not applicable
0 = Good 1 = Off 2 = Over range

6 = Overflow 7 = Bad 8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data
DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Type DC Output Type (0 = Volts; 1 = mA) uint8 15c0 5568 Not applicable
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.FallbackPV Fallback PV value float32 15b9 5561 Set by DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.MeasuredValue Measured Value float32 15ba 5562 2dp
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.OPAdjustState 0 = Unadjusted, 1 = Adjusted bool 15b3 5555 Not applicable
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.OutputHigh DC Output High value float32 15b6 5558 2dp
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.OutputLow DC Output Low value float32 15b5 5557 2dp
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.PV DC Output PV float32 15b1 5553 Set by DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Resolution Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places uint8 15b4 5556 Not applicable
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.ScaleHigh Scale High value float32 15b8 5560 Set by DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.ScaleLow Scale Low value float32 15b7 5559 Set by DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Status PV Status (as DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Status) uint8 15b2 5554 Not applicable
DCOutput.2A2B_DCOP.Type DC Output Type (0 = Volts; 1 = mA) uint8 15b0 5552 Not applicable
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.FallbackPV Fallback PV value float32 15a9 5545 Set by DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.MeasuredValue Measured Value float32 15aa 5546 2dp
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.OPAdjustState 0 = Unadjusted, 1 = Adjusted bool 15a3 5539 Not applicable
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.OutputHigh DC Output High value float32 15a6 5542 2dp
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.OutputLow DC Output Low value float32 15a5 5541 2dp
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.PV DC Output PV float32 15a1 5537 Set by DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Resolution Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places uint8 15a4 5540 Not applicable
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.ScaleHigh Scale High value float32 15a8 5544 Set by DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.ScaleLow Scale Low value float32 15a7 5543 Set by DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Resolution
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Status PV Status (as DCOutput.1A1B_DCOP.Status) uint8 15a2 5538 Not applicable
DCOutput.3A3B_DCOP.Type DC Output Type (0 = Volts; 1 = mA) uint8 15a0 5536 Not applicable
DigitalIO.1A1B.Backlash Valve positioning backlash compensation (seconds) float32 1508 5384 1dp
DigitalIO.1A1B.Inertia Inertia value for the valve float32 1507 5383 1dp
DigitalIO.1A1B.Invert 1 = Invert; 0 = Do not invert bool 1503 5379 Not applicable
DigitalIO.1A1B.MinOnTime Time proportioned output minimum on time float32 1502 5378 2dp
DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent Module Identification uint8 150a 5386 Not applicable
0 = Digital I/O 1 = Relay output 2 = Triac output

3 = Digital input 4 = Digital output
DigitalIO.1A1B.Output 0 = Output off, 1 = Output on bool 1504 5380 Not applicable
DigitalIO.1A1B.PV For contact inputs, 0 = Open, 1 = Closed.
For On Off outputs, <0.5 = Drive low, else drive high float32 1501 5377 0dp
For Time Proportional outputs, PV = demanded output %
DigitalIO.1A1B.StandbyAction Valve positioning standby action (0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze). uint8 1509 5385 Not applicable
DigitalIO.1A1B.Type Specifies the type of the digital input / output uint8 1500 5376 Not applicable
0 = Contact closure input 1 = On Off output

2 = Time proportioning output 3 = Valve raise
4 = Valve lower
DigitalIO.2A2B.ModuleIdent As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent uint8 151a 5402 Not applicable
DigitalIO.2A2B.PV Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV) float32 1511 5393 0dp
DigitalIO.2A2B.Type Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type). uint8 1510 5392 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 247

DigitalIO.3A3B.ModuleIdent As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent uint8 153a 5434 Not applicable
DigitalIO.3A3B.PV Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV) float32 1531 5425 0dp
DigitalIO.3A3B.Type Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type). uint8 1530 5424 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Backlash Valve positioning backlash compensation (seconds) float32 1528 5416 1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Inertia Inertia value for the valve float32 1527 5415 1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Invert 1 = Invert; 0 = Do not invert bool 1523 5411 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.MinOnTime Time proportioned output minimum on time float32 1522 5410 2dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.ModuleIdent As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent uint8 152a 5418 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Output 0 = Output off, 1 = Output on bool 1524 5412 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.PV Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV) float32 1521 5409 0dp
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.StandbyAction Valve positioning standby action (0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze). uint8 1529 5417 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Type Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type). uint8 1520 5408 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Backlash Valve positioning backlash compensation (seconds) float32 1548 5448 1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Inertia Inertia value for the valve float32 1547 5447 1dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Invert 1 = Invert; 0 = Do not invert bool 1543 5443 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.MinOnTime Time proportioned output minimum on time float32 1542 5442 2dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.ModuleIdent As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent uint8 154a 5450 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Output 0 = Output off, 1 = Output on bool 1544 5444 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.PV Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV) float32 1541 5441 0dp
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.StandbyAction Valve positioning standby action (0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze). uint8 1549 5449 Not applicable
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Type Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type). uint8 1540 5440 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Backlash Valve positioning backlash compensation (seconds) float32 1558 5464 1dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Inertia Inertia value for the valve float32 1557 5463 1dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Invert 1 = Invert; 0 = Do not invert bool 1553 5459 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.MinOnTime Time proportioned output minimum on time float32 1552 5458 2dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.ModuleIdent As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent uint8 155a 5466 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Output 0 = Output off, 1 = Output on bool 1554 5460 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.PV Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV) float32 1551 5457 0dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.StandbyAction Valve positioning standby action (0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze). uint8 1559 5465 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Type Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type). uint8 1550 5456 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Backlash Valve positioning backlash compensation (seconds) float32 1568 5480 1dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Inertia Inertia value for the valve float32 1567 5479 1dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Invert 1 = Invert; 0 = Do not invert bool 1563 5475 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.MinOnTime Time proportioned output minimum on time float32 1562 5474 2dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.ModuleIdent As DigitalIO.1A1B.ModuleIdent uint8 156a 5482 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Output 0 = Output off, 1 = Output on bool 1564 5476 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.PV Digital I/O process value (as DigitalIO.1A1B.PV) float32 1561 5473 0dp
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.StandbyAction Valve positioning standby action (0 = Continue; 1 = Freeze). uint8 1569 5481 Not applicable
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Type Digital I/O type (as DigitalIO.1A1B.Type). uint8 1560 5472 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input1 Read only input from an EtherNet/IP client eint32 7e66 32358 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input2 See input 1 for details eint32 7e6a 32362 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input3 See input 1 for details eint32 7e6e 32366 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input4 See input 1 for details eint32 7e72 32370 Not applicable
248 HA030554 Issue 16

EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input16 See input 1 for details eint32 7ea2 32418 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input17 See input 1 for details eint32 7ea6 32422 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input18 See input 1 for details eint32 7eaa 32426 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input19 See input 1 for details eint32 7eae 32430 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input20 See input 1 for details eint32 7eb2 32434 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input21 See input 1 for details eint32 7eb6 32438 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input22 See input 1 for details eint32 7eba 32442 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input23 See input 1 for details eint32 7ebe 32446 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input24 See input 1 for details eint32 7ec2 32450 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input25 See input 1 for details eint32 7ec6 32454 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input26 See input 1 for details eint32 7eca 32458 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input27 See input 1 for details eint32 7ece 32462 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input28 See input 1 for details eint32 7ed2 32466 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input29 See input 1 for details eint32 7ed6 32470 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input30 See input 1 for details eint32 7eda 32474 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input31 See input 1 for details eint32 7ede 32478 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input32 See input 1 for details eint32 7ee2 32482 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input33 See input 1 for details eint32 7ee6 32486 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input34 See input 1 for details eint32 7eea 32490 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input35 See input 1 for details eint32 7eee 32494 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input36 See input 1 for details eint32 7ef2 32498 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input37 See input 1 for details eint32 7ef6 32502 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input38 See input 1 for details eint32 7efa 32506 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input39 See input 1 for details eint32 7efe 32510 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input40 See input 1 for details eint32 7f02 32514 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input42 See input 1 for details eint32 7f0a 32522 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input43 See input 1 for details eint32 7f0e 32526 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.Input47 See input 1 for details eint32 7f1e 32542 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue1 Value of the Input 1 parameter int16 7e68 32360 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue2 See input 1 value for details int16 7e6c 32364 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue3 See input 1 value for details int16 7e70 32368 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue15 See input 1 value for details int16 7ea0 32416 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue18 See input 1 value for details int16 7eac 32428 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue19 See input 1 value for details int16 7eb0 32432 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue22 See input 1 value for details int16 7ebc 32444 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue23 See input 1 value for details int16 7ec0 32448 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 249

EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue26 See input 1 value for details int16 7ecc 32460 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue27 See input 1 value for details int16 7ed0 32464 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue30 See input 1 value for details int16 7edc 32476 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue31 See input 1 value for details int16 7ee0 32480 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue34 See input 1 value for details int16 7eec 32492 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue35 See input 1 value for details int16 7ef0 32496 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue38 See input 1 value for details int16 7efc 32508 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue39 See input 1 value for details int16 7f00 32512 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitInputs.InputValue42 See input 1 value for details int16 7f0c 32524 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output1 Writeable output to the EtherNet/IP client eint32 7f2e 32558 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output2 See output 1 for details eint32 7f32 32562 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output4 See output 1 for details eint32 7f3a 32570 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output5 See output 1 for details eint32 7f3e 32574 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output30 See output 1 for details eint32 7fa2 32674 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output31 See output 1 for details eint32 7fa6 32678 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output32 See output 1 for details eint32 7faa 32682 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output33 See output 1 for details eint32 7fae 32686 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output34 See output 1 for details eint32 7fb2 32690 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output35 See output 1 for details eint32 7fb6 32694 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output36 See output 1 for details eint32 7fba 32698 Not applicable
250 HA030554 Issue 16

EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output37 See output 1 for details eint32 7fbe 32702 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output38 See output 1 for details eint32 7fc2 32706 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output39 See output 1 for details eint32 7fc6 32710 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output40 See output 1 for details eint32 7fca 32714 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output41 See output 1 for details eint32 7fce 32718 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output42 See output 1 for details eint32 7fd2 32722 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output43 See output 1 for details eint32 7fd6 32726 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output44 See output 1 for details eint32 7fda 32730 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output45 See output 1 for details eint32 7fde 32734 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output46 See output 1 for details eint32 7fe2 32738 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output47 See output 1 for details eint32 7fe6 32742 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output48 See output 1 for details eint32 7fea 32746 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output49 See output 1 for details eint32 7fee 32750 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.Output50 See output 1 for details eint32 7ff2 32754 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue1 Value of the Output 1 parameter int16 7f30 32560 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue2 See output 1 value for details int16 7f34 32564 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue4 See output 1 value for details int16 7f3c 32572 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue29 See output 1 value for details int16 7fa0 32672 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue32 See output 1 value for details int16 7fac 32684 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue33 See output 1 value for details int16 7fb0 32688 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue36 See output 1 value for details int16 7fbc 32700 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue37 See output 1 value for details int16 7fc0 32704 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue40 See output 1 value for details int16 7fcc 32716 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue41 See output 1 value for details int16 7fd0 32720 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue44 See output 1 value for details int16 7fdc 32732 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue45 See output 1 value for details int16 7fe0 32736 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 251

EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue48 See output 1 value for details int16 7fec 32748 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue49 See output 1 value for details int16 7ff0 32752 Not applicable
EthernetIP.ImplicitOutputs.OutputValue50 See output 1 value for details int16 7ff4 32756 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input1 A read only input from a PLC device string_t 7838 30776 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input2 See input 1 for details string_t 7839 30777 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input3 See input 1 for details string_t 783a 30778 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input4 See input 1 for details string_t 783b 30779 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input5 See input 1 for details string_t 783c 30780 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input6 See input 1 for details string_t 783d 30781 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input7 See input 1 for details string_t 783e 30782 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input8 See input 1 for details string_t 783f 30783 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input19 See input 1 for details string_t 784a 30794 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input20 See input 1 for details string_t 784b 30795 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input21 See input 1 for details string_t 784c 30796 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input22 See input 1 for details string_t 784d 30797 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input23 See input 1 for details string_t 784e 30798 Not applicable
EthernetIP.InputTags.Input24 See input 1 for details string_t 784f 30799 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.ConfigInstance Configuration assembly instance number int16 7ffa 32762 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.ConfigSize Configuration assembly data size in bytes int16 7ffb 32763 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.ConnectionType Implicit I/O connection type (0 = Point to point; 1 = Multicast) uint8 7ffe 32766 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.Explicit1 Explicit TCP connection 1 string_t 65f1 26097 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.Explicit2 Explicit TCP connection 2 string_t 6601 26113 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.ImplicitIO Implicit I/O data channel string_t 65e1 26081 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.InputInstance Implicit input assembly instance number int16 7ff6 32758 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.InputSize Implicit input assembly data size in bytes int16 7ff7 32759 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.Mode EtherNet/IP operation mode uint8 7fff 32767 Not applicable
0 = Server 1 = Client (IO) 2 = Client (Tags)
EthernetIP.Main.Multicast Implicit I/O data channel multicast address string_t 6611 26129 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.NetworkStatusCode EtherNet/IP communications network status uint8 7e64 32356 Not applicable
0 = Offline 2 = On line 3 = Connection timout

4 = Duplicate IP address 5 = Initialisation
EthernetIP.Main.OutputInstance Implicit output assembly instance number int16 7ff8 32760 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.OutputSize Implicit output assembly data size in bytes int16 7ff9 32761 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.Priority Level of message priority uint8 7ffc 32764 Not applicable
0 = Low 1 = High 2 = Scheduled 3 = Urgent
EthernetIP.Main.ResetComms Resets the client or server communications (0 = No; 1 = uint8 7e63 32355 Not applicable
Yes)
EthernetIP.Main.Rpi Requested Packet Interval (milliseconds) int16 7ffd 32765 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.ServerAddress IP address of a server device string_t 7129 28969 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.SlotNumber PLC slot number int16 7e60 32352 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.TagStatusCode EtherNet/IP Tag server status code (see Figure 129) uint8 7e62 32354 Not applicable
EthernetIP.Main.UCMM Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) string_t 65d1 26065 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output1 Writeable output to the PLC device string_t 7880 30848 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output2 See output 1 for details string_t 7881 30849 Not applicable
252 HA030554 Issue 16

EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output11 See output 1 for details string_t 788a 30858 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output12 See output 1 for details string_t 788b 30859 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output13 See output 1 for details string_t 788c 30860 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output14 See output 1 for details string_t 788d 30861 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output15 See output 1 for details string_t 788e 30862 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output16 See output 1 for details string_t 788f 30863 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output27 See output 1 for details string_t 789a 30874 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output28 See output 1 for details string_t 789b 30875 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output29 See output 1 for details string_t 789c 30876 Not applicable
EthernetIP.OutputTags.Output30 See output 1 for details string_t 789d 30877 Not applicable
Group.Recording.Channel1En Channel 1 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 1023 4131 Not applicable
Group.Recording.Compression The UHH file compression rate (0 = Normal; 1 = High) uint8 1040 4160 Not applicable
Group.Recording.Enable 0 = Recording disabled; 1 = Recording enabled uint8 1020 4128 Not applicable
Group.Recording.FlashDuration Time in days until flash history files begin to be overwritten float32 1039 4153 2dp
Group.Recording.FlashFree Size of the internal flash in MBytes float32 1038 4152 2dp
Group.Recording.FlashSize Size of the internal flash in MBytes float32 1037 4151 2dp
Group.Recording.Interval Recording interval int32 1022 4130 Not applicable
0 = 0.125 secs 1 = 0.25 secs 2 = 0.5 secs

3 = 1Hz 4 = 2 sec 5 = 5 sec
6 = 10 sec 7 = 20 sec 8 = 30 sec
9 = 1 min 10 = 2 min 11 = 5 min
12 = 10 min 13 = 20 min 14 = 30 min
15 = 1 hr
Group.Recording.Status Recording status int16 1036 4150 Not applicable
0 = Not recording 1 = Disabled

2 = Messages only 3 = Recording enabled
4 = Recording paused
Group.Recording.Suspend 1 = Suspend recording bool 1035 4149 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan1En Virtual Channel 1 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 1027 4135 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan4En Virtual Channel 4 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 102a 4138 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan5En Virtual Channel 5 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 102b 4139 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan6En Virtual Channel 6 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 102c 4140 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan7En Virtual Channel 7 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 102d 4141 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan8En Virtual Channel 8 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 102e 4142 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan9En Virtual Channel 9 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 102f 4143 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 253

Group.Recording.VirtualChan16En Virtual Channel 16 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 103b 4155 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan17En Virtual Channel 17 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 103c 4156 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan18En Virtual Channel 18 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 103d 4157 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan19En Virtual Channel 19 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 103e 4158 Not applicable
Group.Recording.VirtualChan20En Virtual Channel 20 enable (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) bool 103f 4159 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Descriptor Group descriptor string_t 5b00 23296 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Interval Trend interval. As Group.Recording.Interval, above int32 1002 4098 Not applicable
Group.Trend.MajorDivisions Number of major divisions uint8 1004 4100 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Point1 1st point in the group (VCh = Virtual channel) uint8 1006 4102 Not applicable
0 =No trend 1 = Channel 1 2 = Channel 2

3 = Channel 3 4 = Channel 4 5 = VCh1
6 = VCh2 7 = VCh3 8 = VCh4
9 = VCh5 10 = VCh6 11 = VCh7
12 = VCh8 13 = VCh9 14 = VCh10
15 = VCh11 16 = VCh12 17 = VCH13
18 = VCh14 19 = VCh15 20 = VCh 16
21 = VCh17 22 = VCh18 23 = VCh 19
24 = VCh20 25 = VCh21 26 = VCh 22
27 = VCh23 28 = VCh24 29 = VCh 25
30 = VCh26 31 = VCh27 32 = VCh 28
33 = VCh29 34 = VCh30
Group.Trend.Point2 As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 2nd point in group uint8 1007 4103 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Point3 As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 3rd point in group uint8 1008 4104 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Point4 As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 4th point in group uint8 1009 4105 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Point5 As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 5th point in group uint8 100a 4106 Not applicable
Group.Trend.Point6 As Group.Trend.Point1 but for 6th point in group uint8 100b 4107 Not applicable
Humidity.DewPoint Dewpoint float32 2e79 11897 Set by Humidity.Resolution
Humidity.DryTemp Dry Bulb Temperature Measurement float32 2e7d 11901 0dp
Humidity.Pressure Current Atmospheric Pressure float32 2e80 11904 1dp
Humidity.PsychroConst Psychrometric Constant float32 2e7f 11903 2dp
Humidity.RelHumid Calculated Relative Humidity float32 2e78 11896 Set by Humidity.Resolution
Humidity.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2e81 11905 Not applicable
Humidity.SBrk Sensor Broken (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 2e7e 11902 Not applicable
Humidity.WetOffset Offset of the Wet Bulb Temperature float32 2e7b 11899 Same as Humidity.WetTemp
Humidity.WetTemp Wet Bulb Temperature Measurement float32 2e7c 11900 0dp
Instrument.Clock.Date Local Date string_t 4400 17408 Not applicable
Instrument.Clock.DST 1 = DST active; 0 = DST not active bool 1082 4226 Not applicable
Instrument.Clock.Time Local time (including Zone and DST effects) time_t 1081 4225 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Instrument.Display.AlarmPanel 1 = Alarm Panel display mode enabled bool 10eb 4331 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.Brightness Display brightness 10 = 10%; 20 = 20% etc. (whole dec- uint8 1090 4240 Not applicable
ades)
Instrument.Display.Cascade 1 = Cascade control display mode enabled bool 10f2 4338 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.DualLoopControl 1 = Dual loop control display mode enabled bool 109b 4251 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.EIPServerPage 1 = EtherNet/IPdisplay mode enabled bool 10ef 4335 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.FaceplateCycling 1 = Faceplate cycling On bool 109e 4254 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.FutureTrend 1 = Future trend display mode enabled bool 10fb 4347 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.FutureTrend1Colour Future trend colour(1) (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour) uint8 10fc 4348 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.FutureTrend2Colour Future trend colour(2) (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour) uint8 10fd 4349 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.HistoryBackground History background colour uint8 10a8 4264 Not applicable
0 = Black; 1 = Dark grey; 2 = Light grey; 3 = White
Instrument.Display.HomePage Home page uint8 1093 4243 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.HorizontalBar 1 = Horizontal bar mode enabled bool 1098 4248 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.HorizontalTrend 1 = Horizontal trend mode enabled bool 1096 4246 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.HPageTimeout Home time out value in minutes (0 = no timeout) int16 1094 4244 Not applicable
254 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.Display.HTrendScaling 0 = hide horizontal trend scale; 1 = scale permanent uint8 109d 4253 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.LoopControl 1 = Loop control display mode enabled bool 109a 4250 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.LoopSetpointColour Loop setpoint colour (As Channel.1.Trend.Colour) uint8 109f 4255 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.ModbusMaster 1 = Modbus Master display mode enabled bool 10ee 4334 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.NumberFormat Number format (0 = Rounded; 1 - Truncated) uint8 10fe 4350 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.Numeric 1 = Numeric display mode enabled bool 1099 4249 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.Programmer 1 = Programmer interface display mode enabled bool 10f3 4339 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.PromoteListView 1 = Promote list display mode enabled bool 10ea 4330 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverAfter Screen save after (in minutes) int16 1091 4241 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.ScreenSaverBrightness Screen saver brightness 10 = 10%; 20 = 20% etc. uint8 1092 4242 Not applicable
(whole decades only)
Instrument.Display.SteriliserPage 1 = Steriliser display mode enabled bool 10ec 4332 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.TrendBackground Trend chart colour: uint8 109c 4252 Not applicable
0 = Black; 1 = Dark Grey; 2 = Light grey; 3 = White.
Instrument.Display.VerticalBar 1 = Vertical bar display mode enabled bool 1097 4247 Not applicable
Instrument.Display.VerticalTrend 1 = Vertical trend display mode enabled bool 1095 4245 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.Bootrom Instrument bootrom version string_t 447a 17530 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.CompanyID Company identification. Always returns 1280 int16 0079 121 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.ConfigRev The instrument configuration revision number int32 10a0 4256 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.IM Instrument mode uint8 00c7 199 Not applicable
Operating: All algorithms and I/O active.
Standby: Control o/p off. Absolute alarms active
Engineer: All outputs inactive.
Instrument.Info.LineVoltage Displays the current line voltage float32 10a6 4262 1dp
Instrument.Info.MicroBoardIssue Micro Board Issue uint8 10aa 4266 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.Name The instrument descriptor string_t 445f 17503 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.NvolWrites Displays the number of non-volatile writes performed int32 10a5 4261 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.PSUType PSU type. 0 = 240Vac; 1 = 24v ac/dc uint8 10a9 4265 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.SecurityRev The instrument security revision number int32 10a4 4260 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.Type Instrument type uint8 10a2 4258 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.Version Instrument version string_t 4474 17524 Not applicable
Instrument.Info.WiresFree Number of wires free int16 10ab 4267 Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.1A1B I/O fitted at terminals 1A1B uint8 10f4 4340 Not applicable
0 = Digital IO 1= Non-isolated dc op (mA only)

2 = Relay op 3 = TRIAC 1a1b
4 = Relay OP 5 = Isolated dc op (V/mA)
6 = Digital ip 7 = Isolated dc output (mA only)
8 = Digital op 9 = Relay op
10 = Triac 2A2B
Instrument.IOFitted.2A2B I/O fitted at terminals 2A2B (as for 1A1B above) uint8 10f5 4341 Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.3A3B I/O type fitted at terminals 3A3B (as for 1A1B above) uint8 10f7 4343 Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.4AC I/O type fitted at terminals 4AC (as for 1A1B above) uint8 10f9 4345 Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.5AC I/O type fitted at terminals 5AC (as for 1A1B above) uint8 10fa 4346 Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.LALC I/O type fitted at terminals LALC (as for 1A1B above) uint8 10f6 4342 Not applicable
Instrument.IOFitted.LBLC I/O type fitted at terminals LBLC (as for 1A1B above) uint8 10f8 4344 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.DateFormat Date format (0 = DDMMYY. 1 = MMDDYY; 2 = YYMMDD) uint8 10b1 4273 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.DSTenable 1 = Daylight Saving Time enabled bool 10b3 4275 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.EndDay Daylight savings: End day uint8 10ba 4282 Not applicable
0 = Sunday 1= Monday 2 = Tuesday

3 = Wednesday 4 = Thursday 5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
Instrument.Locale.EndMonth Daylight savings: End month uint8 10bb 4283 Not applicable
0 = January 1= February 2 = March

3 = April 4 = May 5 = June
6 = July 7 = August 8 = September
9 = October 10 = November 11 = December
Instrument.Locale.EndOn Week for changing to/from DST uint8 10b9 4281 Not applicable
0 = First 1= Second 2 = Third

3 = Fourth 4 = Last 5 = Second to last
Instrument.Locale.EndTime DST end time in hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds time_t 10b8 4280 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Instrument.Locale.Language Language (0 = English) uint8 10b0 4272 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.StartDay DST start day. As Instrument.Locale.EndDay, above uint8 10b6 4278 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.StartMonth DST start month As Instrument.Locale.EndMonth, above uint8 10b7 4279 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.StartOn Start DST on. As Instrument.Locale.EndOn, above uint8 10b5 4277 Not applicable
Instrument.Locale.StartTime DST start time. As Instrument.Locale.EndTime above time_t 10b4 4276 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Instrument.Locale.TimeZone Time zone uint8 10b2 4274 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 255

0 = GMT - 12 hours 1 = GMT - 11 hours

8 = GMT - 4 hours 9 = GMT - 3.5 hours
12 = GMT - 1 hour 13 = GMT
14 = GMT + 1 hour 15 = GMT + 2 hours
16 = GMT + 3 hours 17 = GMT + 3.5 hours
22 = GMT + 5.75 hours 23 = GMT + 6 hours
26 = GMT + 8 hours 27 = GMT + 9 hours
30 = GMT + 11 hours 31 = GMT + 12 hours
32 = GMT + 13 hours
Instrument.Notes.Note Operator Note string_t 5500 21760 Not applicable
Instrument.Notes.Note1 Operator note 1 string_t 5580 21888 Not applicable
Instrument.Notes.Note10 Operator note 10 string_t 5a00 23040 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteListName Promote list (operator view) title string_t 6d07 27911 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam1 Promote parameter (1) eint32 10e0 4320 Not applicable
strument.PromoteList.PromoteParam1Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (1) string_t 6300 25344 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam2Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (2) string_t 6315 25365 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam3Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (3) string_t 632a 25386 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam4Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (4) string_t 633f 25407 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam7Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (7) string_t 637e 25470 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam9Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (9) string_t 63a8 25512 Not applicable
Instrument.PromoteList.PromoteParam10Desc Descriptor for promote parameter (10) string_t 63bd 25533 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter1 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 1230 4656 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter11 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 123a 4666 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter12 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 123b 4667 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter13 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 123c 4668 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter14 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 123d 4669 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter15 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 123e 4670 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMConfigList.Parameter16 Parameter that is to be alterable eint32 123f 4671 Not applicable
256 HA030554 Issue 16

HA030554 Issue 16 257

Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter1 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 1294 4756 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter7 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 129a 4762 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter8 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 129b 4763 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter9 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 129c 4764 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter10 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 129d 4765 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter11 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 129e 4766 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter12 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 129f 4767 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter13 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12a0 4768 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter23 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12aa 4778 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter24 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ab 4779 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter25 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ac 4780 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter26 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ad 4781 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter27 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ae 4782 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter28 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12af 4783 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter29 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12b0 4784 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter39 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ba 4794 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter40 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12bb 4795 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter41 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12bc 4796 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter42 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12bd 4797 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter43 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12be 4798 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter44 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12bf 4799 Not applicable
258 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter45 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12c0 4800 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter55 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ca 4810 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter56 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12cb 4811 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter57 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12cc 4812 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter58 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12cd 4813 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter59 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ce 4814 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter60 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12cf 4815 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter61 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12d0 4816 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter71 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12da 4826 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter72 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12db 4827 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter73 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12dc 4828 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter74 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12dd 4829 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter75 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12de 4830 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter76 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12df 4831 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter77 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12e0 4832 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter87 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ea 4842 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter88 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12eb 4843 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter89 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ec 4844 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter90 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ed 4845 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter91 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ee 4846 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter92 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12ef 4847 Not applicable
Instrument.OEMSupervisorList.Parameter93 Parameter that is to be read only eint32 12f0 4848 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.Username User username string_t 6fc0 28608 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.Password User password string_t 6fe0 28640 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 040c 1036 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 040d 1037 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 040e 1038 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 259

Instrument.User1.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 040f 1039 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.Signing Signing permission bool 0410 1040 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.Authorising Authorising permission bool 0411 1041 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 0412 1042 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 0413 1043 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 0414 1044 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 0415 1045 Not applicable
Instrument.User1.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 0416 1046 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 0417 1047 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 0418 1048 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 0419 1049 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 041a 1050 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.Signing Signing permission bool 041b 1051 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.Authorising Authorising permission bool 041c 1052 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 041d 1053 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 041e 1054 Not applicable
Instrument.User2.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 041f 1055 Not applicable
Instrument.User3.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 0425 1061 Not applicable
Instrument.User3.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 042a 1066 Not applicable
Instrument.User3.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 042b 1067 Not applicable
Instrument.User3.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 042c 1068 Not applicable
Instrument.User4.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 042d 1069 Not applicable
Instrument.User4.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 042e 1070 Not applicable
Instrument.User4.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 042f 1071 Not applicable
Instrument.User5.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 043a 1082 Not applicable
Instrument.User5.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 043b 1083 Not applicable
Instrument.User5.Signing Signing permission bool 043c 1084 Not applicable
Instrument.User5.Authorising Authorising permission bool 043d 1085 Not applicable
Instrument.User5.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 043e 1086 Not applicable
Instrument.User5.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 043f 1087 Not applicable
260 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.User6.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 044a 1098 Not applicable
Instrument.User6.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 044b 1099 Not applicable
Instrument.User6.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 044c 1100 Not applicable
Instrument.User6.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 044d 1101 Not applicable
Instrument.User7.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 044e 1102 Not applicable
Instrument.User7.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 044f 1103 Not applicable
Instrument.User8.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 045a 1114 Not applicable
Instrument.User8.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 045b 1115 Not applicable
Instrument.User8.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 045c 1116 Not applicable
Instrument.User8.Signing Signing permission bool 045d 1117 Not applicable
Instrument.User8.Authorising Authorising permission bool 045e 1118 Not applicable
Instrument.User8.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 045f 1119 Not applicable
Instrument.User9.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 046a 1130 Not applicable
Instrument.User9.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 046b 1131 Not applicable
Instrument.User9.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 046c 1132 Not applicable
Instrument.User9.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 046d 1133 Not applicable
Instrument.User9.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 046e 1134 Not applicable
Instrument.User10.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 046f 1135 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 261

Instrument.User11.Username User username string_t 6fca 28618 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.Password User password string_t 6fea 28650 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 047a 1146 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 047b 1147 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 047c 1148 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 047d 1149 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.Signing Signing permission bool 047e 1150 Not applicable
Instrument.User11.Authorising Authorising permission bool 047f 1151 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.Username User username string_t 6fcb 28619 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.Password User password string_t 6feb 28651 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.Authorising Authorising permission bool 048a 1162 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 048b 1163 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 048c 1164 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 048d 1165 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 048e 1166 Not applicable
Instrument.User12.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 048f 1167 Not applicable
Instrument.User13.Username User username string_t 6fcc 28620 Not applicable
Instrument.User13.Password User password string_t 6fec 28652 Not applicable
Instrument.User13.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 049a 1178 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.Username User username string_t 6fcd 28621 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.Password User password string_t 6fed 28653 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 049b 1179 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 049c 1180 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 049d 1181 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 049e 1182 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.Signing Signing permission bool 049f 1183 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04a0 1184 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04a1 1185 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04a2 1186 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04a3 1187 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04a4 1188 Not applicable
Instrument.User14.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04a5 1189 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.Username User username string_t 6fce 28622 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.Password User password string_t 6fee 28654 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04a6 1190 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04a7 1191 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04a8 1192 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04a9 1193 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.Signing Signing permission bool 04aa 1194 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04ab 1195 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04ac 1196 Not applicable
262 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.User15.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04ad 1197 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04ae 1198 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04af 1199 Not applicable
Instrument.User15.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04b0 1200 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.Username User username string_t 6fcf 28623 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.Password User password string_t 6fef 28655 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04b1 1201 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04b2 1202 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04b3 1203 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04b4 1204 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.Signing Signing permission bool 04b5 1205 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04b6 1206 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04b7 1207 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04b8 1208 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04b9 1209 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04ba 1210 Not applicable
Instrument.User16.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04bb 1211 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.Username User username string_t 6fd0 28624 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.Password User password string_t 6ff0 28656 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04bc 1212 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04bd 1213 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04be 1214 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04bf 1215 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.Signing Signing permission bool 04c0 1216 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04c1 1217 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04c2 1218 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04c3 1219 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04c4 1220 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04c5 1221 Not applicable
Instrument.User17.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04c6 1222 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04c7 1223 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04c8 1224 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04c9 1225 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04ca 1226 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.Signing Signing permission bool 04cb 1227 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04cc 1228 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04cd 1229 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04ce 1230 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04cf 1231 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04d0 1232 Not applicable
Instrument.User18.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04d1 1233 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04d2 1234 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04d3 1235 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04d4 1236 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04d5 1237 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.Signing Signing permission bool 04d6 1238 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04d7 1239 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04d8 1240 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04d9 1241 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04da 1242 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04db 1243 Not applicable
Instrument.User19.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04dc 1244 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04dd 1245 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04de 1246 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04df 1247 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04e0 1248 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 263

Instrument.User20.Signing Signing permission bool 04e1 1249 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04e2 1250 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04e3 1251 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04e4 1252 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04e5 1253 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04e6 1254 Not applicable
Instrument.User20.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04e7 1255 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04e8 1256 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04e9 1257 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04ea 1258 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04eb 1259 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.Signing Signing permission bool 04ec 1260 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04ed 1261 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04ee 1262 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04ef 1263 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04f0 1264 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04f1 1265 Not applicable
Instrument.User21.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04f2 1266 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04f3 1267 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04f4 1268 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 04f5 1269 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 04f6 1270 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.Signing Signing permission bool 04f7 1271 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.Authorising Authorising permission bool 04f8 1272 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 04f9 1273 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 04fa 1274 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 04fb 1275 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 04fc 1276 Not applicable
Instrument.User22.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 04fd 1277 Not applicable
Instrument.User23.BatchControl Batch control permission bool 04fe 1278 Not applicable
Instrument.User23.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 04ff 1279 Not applicable
Instrument.User24.AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms permission bool 050a 1290 Not applicable
Instrument.User24.DemandArchiving Demand archiving permission bool 050b 1291 Not applicable
Instrument.User24.LoginDisabled Login disabled bool 050c 1292 Not applicable
Instrument.User24.Signing Signing permission bool 050d 1293 Not applicable
Instrument.User24.Authorising Authorising permission bool 050e 1294 Not applicable
Instrument.User24.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 050f 1295 Not applicable
264 HA030554 Issue 16

Instrument.User25.ArchiveInterval Archive interval permission bool 051a 1306 Not applicable
Instrument.User25.LoopControl Loop control permission bool 051b 1307 Not applicable
Instrument.User25.ProgramMode Program mode permission bool 051c 1308 Not applicable
Instrument.User25.ProgramEdit Program edit permission bool 051d 1309 Not applicable
Instrument.User25.ProgramStore Program store permission bool 051e 1310 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.CommsPass 1 = Password required for comms access bool 10c1 4289 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.DefaultConfig 1 = set all parameters to factory settings bool 10c2 4290 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.EngineerAccess 1 = Engineer access required bool 10c0 4288 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.EngineerPassword Engineer pass phrase (default 100) string_t 63d3 25555 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.Feature2Pass Features2 pass code int32 10c4 4292 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.Feature3Pass Features3 pass code int32 10c5 4293 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.FeaturePass Features pass code int32 10c3 4291 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.OEMEntry OEM pass phrase entry string_t 6d61 28001 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.OEMParamLists OEM Parameter Lists bool 10c7 4295 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.OEMPass OEM pass phrase string_t 6d30 27952 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.OEMStatus OEM status (0 = Unlocked; 1 = Locked) bool 10c6 4294 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.OperatorPassword Operator pass phrase (default = 100) string_t 6437 25655 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.PassPhrase The parameter to be written to if comms security is enabled string_t 4416 17430 Not applicable
Instrument.Security.SupervisorPassword Supervisor pass phrase (default = blank string_t 6405 25605 Not applicable
Lgc2.1.FallbackType Fallback Condition uint8 2efb 12027 Not applicable
0 = Output False; Status Bad.
1 = Output True; Status Bad
2 = Output False; Status Good.
3 = Output True; Status good
Lgc2.1.In1 Input Value 1 float32 2ef9 12025 0dp
Lgc2.1.In2 Input Value 2 float32 2efa 12026 0dp
Lgc2.1.Invert Sense of Input Values uint8 2efc 12028 Not applicable
0 = Neither input inverted
1 = Input 1 inverted
2 = Input 2 inverted
3 = Both inputs inverted
Lgc2.1.Oper Logic Operation uint8 2ef8 12024 Not applicable
0 = Off; 1 = AND; 2 = OR; 3 = XOR; 4 = 1 set/2 reset

5 = Input 1 = Input 2 6 = Input 1 ? Input 2
7 = Input 1 > Input 2 8 = Input 1< Input 2
9 = Input 1 = Input 2; 10 = Input 1 = Input 2
Lgc2.1.Out Output Value (0 = Off (false); 1 = On (true)) bool 2efd 12029 Not applicable
Lgc2.1.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2efe 12030 Not applicable
Lgc2.2.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1.FallbackType) uint8 2f02 12034 Not applicable
Lgc2.2.In1 Input Value 1 float32 2f00 12032 0dp
Lgc2.2.Invert Sense of Input Value (as Lgc2.1.Invert) uint8 2f03 12035 Not applicable
Lgc2.2.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1.Oper) uint8 2eff 12031 Not applicable
Lgc2.2.Out The result of the logic operation (as Lgc2.1.Out) bool 2f04 12036 Not applicable
Lgc2.2.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2f05 12037 Not applicable
Lgc2.3.Invert Sense of Input Value (as Lgc2.1.Invert) uint8 2f0a 12042 Not applicable
Lgc2.3.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1.Oper) uint8 2f06 12038 Not applicable
Lgc2.3.Out The result of the logic operation (as Lgc2.1.Out) bool 2f0b 12043 Not applicable
Lgc2.3.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2f0c 12044 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 265

Lgc2.4.In1 Input Value 1 float32 2f0e 12046 0dp
Lgc2.4.In2 Input Value 2 float32 2f0f 12047 0dp
Lgc2.4.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1.Oper) uint8 2f0d 12045 Not applicable
Lgc2.5.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2f1a 12058 Not applicable
Lgc2.6.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1.FallbackType) uint8 2f1e 12062 Not applicable
Lgc2.6.In1 Input Value 1 float32 2f1c 12060 0dp
Lgc2.6.In2 Input Value 2 float32 2f1d 12061 0dp
Lgc2.6.Invert Sense of Input Value (as Lgc2.1.Invert) uint8 2f1f 12063 Not applicable
Lgc2.6.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1.Oper) uint8 2f1b 12059 Not applicable
Lgc2.8.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1.FallbackType) uint8 2f2c 12076 Not applicable
Lgc2.8.In1 Input Value 1 float32 2f2a 12074 0dp
Lgc2.8.In2 Input Value 2 float32 2f2b 12075 0dp
Lgc2.8.Invert Sense of Input Value (as Lgc2.1.Invert) uint8 2f2d 12077 Not applicable
Lgc2.8.Out The result of the logic operation (as Lgc2.1.Out) bool 2f2e 12078 Not applicable
Lgc2.8.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2f2f 12079 Not applicable
Lgc2.10.FallbackType Fallback Condition (as Lgc2.1.FallbackType) uint8 2f3a 12090 Not applicable
Lgc2.10.Invert Sense of Input Value (as Lgc2.1.Invert) uint8 2f3b 12091 Not applicable
Lgc2.10.Out The result of the logic operation (as Lgc2.1.Out) bool 2f3c 12092 Not applicable
Lgc2.10.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2f3d 12093 Not applicable
Lgc2.11.In1 Input Value 1 float32 2f3f 12095 0dp
Lgc2.11.Oper Logic Operation (as Lgc2.1.Oper) uint8 2f3e 12094 Not applicable
266 HA030554 Issue 16

Lgc2.12.Out The result of the logic operation (as Lgc2.1.Out) bool 2f4a 12106 Not applicable
Lgc2.12.OutputStatus Output Status (0 = Good; 1 = Bad) uint8 2f4b 12107 Not applicable
Lgc8.1.In1 Input 1 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2f4f 12111 Not applicable
Lgc8.1.In2 Input 2 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2f50 12112 Not applicable
Lgc8.1.InInvert Invert Selected Inputs (See also section 4.20.3) uint8 2f4d 12109 Not applicable
Hex0001 = Invert input 1 Hex0010 = invert input 5

Hex0004 = invert input 4 Hex0040 = invert input 8
Lgc8.1.NumIn Number of Inputs uint8 2f4e 12110 Not applicable
Lgc8.1.Oper Logic Operation (0 = Off; 1 = AND; 2 = OR; 3 = XOR) uint8 2f4c 12108 Not applicable
Lgc8.1.Out Output Value (0 = Off (false); 1 = On (true)) bool 2f57 12119 Not applicable
Lgc8.1.OutInvert Invert the Output (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 2f58 12120 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.In1 Input 1 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2f5c 12124 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.In2 Input 2 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2f5d 12125 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.In3 Input 3 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2f5e 12126 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.In4 Input 4 Value (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 2f5f 12127 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.InInvert Invert Selected Inputs (as Lgc8.1.InInvert) uint8 2f5a 12122 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.NumIn Number of Inputs uint8 2f5b 12123 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.Oper Logic Operation (0 = Off; 1 = AND; 2 = OR; 3 = XOR) uint8 2f59 12121 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.Out Output Value (as Lgc8.1.Out) bool 2f64 12132 Not applicable
Lgc8.2.OutInvert Invert the Output (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 2f65 12133 Not applicable
Loop.1.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib Derivative Output Contribution float32 0212 530 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.Error Calculated error float32 020d 525 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.Diag.IntegralOutContrib Integral Output Contribution float32 0211 529 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm Loop Break (0 = No break; 1 = Break) bool 020f 527 Not applicable
Loop.1.Diag.LoopMode Mode of the Loop (0 = Auto; 1 = Man; 2 = Off) uint8 1691 5777 Not applicable
Loop.1.Diag.PropOutContrib Proportional Output Contribution float32 0210 528 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.SBrk Sensor Break Status (0 = No break; 1 = Break) bool 0213 531 Not applicable
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBH The Scheduled Cutback High (0 = Auto) float32 1695 5781 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedCBL The Scheduled Cutback Low (0 = Auto) float32 1696 5782 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedLPBrk The Scheduled Loop Break Time (0 = Off) float32 1698 5784 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedMR The Scheduled Manual Reset float32 1697 5783 1dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPHi The Scheduled Output High Limit float32 169a 5786 1dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedOPLo The Scheduled Output Low Limit float32 169b 5787 1dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedPB The Scheduled Proportional Band float32 1692 5778 1dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedR2G The Scheduled Relative Cool Gain float32 1699 5785 1dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTd The Scheduled Derivative Time (0 = Off) float32 1694 5780 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.SchedTi The Scheduled Integral Time (0 = Off) float32 1693 5779 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.TargetOutVal Target Output value float32 020e 526 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Diag.WrkOPHi Working Output High Limit float32 0215 533 0dp
Loop.1.Diag.WrkOPLo Working Output Low Limit float32 0214 532 0dp
Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut Working Output float32 0204 516 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan Auto/Manual Mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man) bool 0201 513 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 267

Loop.1.Main.Inhibit Control Inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 0205 517 Not applicable
Loop.1.Main.IntHold Integral action inhibit. 0 = No; 1 = Yes uint8 0206 518 Not applicable
Loop1.Maim.PV Process variable float32 0200 512 1dp
Loop.1.Main.TargetSP Target Setpoint float32 0202 514 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP Working Setpoint float32 0203 515 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis Ch1 On/Off Hysteresis in Engineering Units float32 1672 5746 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.OP.Ch1Out Channel 1 Output Value float32 020b 523 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.Ch1PotBreak Ch1 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 1679 5753 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.Ch1PotPosition Ch1 Valve Position float32 1678 5752 0dp
Loop.1.OP.Ch1TravelTime Channel 1 Travel Time float32 1674 5748 1dp
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Deadband Channel 2 Deadband float32 166f 5743 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis Ch2 On/Off Hysteresis in Eng Units float32 1673 5747 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.OP.Ch2Out Channel 2 (Cool) Output Value float32 020c 524 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.Ch2PotBreak Ch2 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 167b 5755 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.Ch2PotPosition Ch2 Valve Position float32 167a 5754 0dp
Loop.1.OP.CoolType Cooling Algorithm Type uint8 1683 5763 Not applicable
0 = Linear 1 = Oil 2 = Water 3 = Fan
Loop.1.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward 0 = Power Feedforward disabled; 1 = PFF enabled uint8 1681 5761 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardGain Feedforward Gain float32 1685 5765 3dp
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardOffset Feedforward Offset float32 1686 5766 0dp
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit Feedforward Trim Limit float32 1687 5767 0dp
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardType Feedforward Type (0 = None; 1 = Remote; 2 = SP; 3 = PV) uint8 1684 5764 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.FeedForwardVal Feedforward Value float32 1688 5768 0dp
Loop.1.OP.FF_Rem Remote Feed Forward Input float32 168d 5773 0dp
Loop.1.OP.ForcedOP Forced manual output value float32 168f 5775 1dp
Loop.1.OP.ManStartup Manual Startup Mode (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 1690 5776 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.ManualMode Manual Output Mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = Last MOP) uint8 167f 5759 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal Manual Output Value float32 1680 5760 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.MeasuredPower Measured Mains Voltage float32 1682 5762 0dp
Loop.1.OP.NudgeLower Valve Nudge Lower (1 = Lower) uint8 1677 5751 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.NudgeRaise Valve Nudge Raise (1 = Raise) uint8 1676 5750 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit Output High Limit float32 166d 5741 1dp
Loop.1.OP.OutputLowLimit Output Low Limit float32 166e 5742 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.PotBreakMode Potentiometer Break Mode uint8 167c 5756 Not applicable
(0 = Raise; 1 = Lower; 2 = Rest: 3 = Model)
Loop.1.OP.Rate Output Rate Limit Value (0 = Off) float32 1670 5744 1dp
Loop.1.OP.RateDisable Output Rate Limit Disable (1 = Disabled) bool 1671 5745 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.RemOPH Remote Output High Limit float32 168c 5772 Same as Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.1.OP.RemOPL Remote Output Low Limit float32 168b 5771 Same as Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.1.OP.SafeOutVal Safe Output Value float32 167e 5758 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.SbrkOP The output power in sensor break float32 168e 5774 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.OP.SensorBreakMode Sensor Break Mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold) uint8 167d 5757 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.TrackEnable Enable Output Tracking (0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled) uint8 168a 5770 Not applicable
Loop.1.OP.TrackOutVal Output Track Value float32 1689 5769 0dp
Loop.1.PID.ActiveSet Current PID Set uint8 1638 5688 Not applicable
Loop.1.PID.Boundary1-2 Threshold for swapping between set 1 and set 2 float32 1639 5689 0dp
Loop.1.PID.Boundary2-3 Threshold for swapping between set 2 and set 3 float32 163a 5690 0dp
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh Cutback high value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto) float32 163f 5695 1dp
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh2 Cutback high value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto) float32 1647 5703 1dp
Loop.1.PID.CutbackHigh3 Cutback high value for PID set 3 (0 = Auto) float32 164f 5711 1dp
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow Cutback low value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto) float32 1640 5696 1dp
Loop.1.PID.CutbackLow2 Cutback low value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto) float32 1648 5704 1dp
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime Derivative time for PID set 1 float32 163d 5693 0dp
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime2 Derivative time for PID set 2 float32 1645 5701 0dp
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime3 Derivative time for PID set 3 float32 164d 5709 0dp
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime Integral time for PID set 1 float32 163c 5692 0dp
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime2 Integral time for PID set 2 float32 1644 5700 0dp
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime3 Integral time for PID set 3 float32 164c 5708 0dp
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime Loop break time for PID set 1 float32 1642 5698 0dp
268 HA030554 Issue 16

Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime2 Loop break time for PID set 2 float32 164a 5706 0dp
Loop.1.PID.LoopBreakTime3 Loop break time for PID set 3 float32 1652 5714 0dp
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset Manual reset value for PID set 1 float32 1641 5697 1dp
Loop.1.PID.ManualReset2 Manual reset value for PID set 2 float32 1649 5705 1dp
Loop.1.PID.NumSets Number of PID Sets to be used (max = 3) uint8 1636 5686 Not applicable
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 1 float32 1653 5715 1dp
Loop.1.PID.OutputHi2 Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 2 float32 1655 5717 1dp
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 1 float32 1654 5716 1dp
Loop.1.PID.OutputLo2 Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 2 float32 1656 5718 1dp
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand Proportional band value for PID set 1 float32 163b 5691 1dp
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand2 Proportional band value for PID set 2 float32 1643 5699 1dp
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand3 Proportional band value for PID set 3 float32 164b 5707 1dp
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 1 float32 163e 5694 1dp
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain2 Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 2 float32 1646 5702 1dp
Loop.1.PID.RelCh2Gain3 Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 3 float32 164e 5710 1dp
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput Scheduler Remote Input float32 1637 5687 0dp
Loop.1.PID.SchedulerType Scheduler Type uint8 1635 5685 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Set 2 = SP 3 = PV
4 = Error 5 = OP 6 = Rem
Loop.1.Setup.AutoManAccess Edit access to ‘Auto Man’ in Loop display page uint8 16a8 5800 Not applicable
0 = Read/Write (R/W) all modes
1 = Editable in all modes except ‘Logged out’
2 = Editable only at Engineer and Supervisor levels
Loop.1.Setup.CH1ControlType Heat/Ch1 Control Type
0 =Off; 1 = On Off; 2 = PID; 3 = VPU; 4 = VPB uint8 1601 5633 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.CH2ControlType Channel 2 control type (As channel 1, above) uint8 1602 5634 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.ControlAction Control Action (0 = Reverse; 1 = Direct) uint8 1603 5635 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.DerivativeType Derivative Type (0 = PV; 1 = Error) uint8 1605 5637 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.ManOutputAccess Manual output access uint8 16a9 5801 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.LoopName Loop Name string_t 5d00 23808 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.LoopType Loop Type (0 = Single; 1 = Cascade; 2 = Override; 3 = Ra- uint8 1600 5632 Not applicable
tio)
Loop.1.Setup.PBUnits Proportional Band Units uint8 1604 5636 Not applicable
Loop.1.Setup.SPAccess Edit access to ‘SP’ in Loop display page uint8 16a7 5799 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.AltSP Alternative Setpoint float32 1660 5728 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.AltSPSelect Alternative Setpoint Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable) uint8 1661 5729 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.ManualTrack Manual Track Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable) uint8 1667 5735 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.RangeHigh Setpoint Range High Limit float32 1659 5721 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.RangeLow Setpoint Range Low Limit float32 165a 5722 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.Rate Setpoint Rate Limit Value (0 = Rate limit off) float32 1662 5730 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.RateDisable Setpoint Rate Limit Disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 1663 5731 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.RateDone Setpoint Rate Limit Complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 020a 522 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.ServoToPV Servo to PV Enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 166c 5740 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.SP1 Setpoint 1 float32 165c 5724 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.SP2 Setpoint 2 float32 165d 5725 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.SPHighLimit Setpoint High Limit float32 165e 5726 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.SPIntBal SP Integral Balance (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 166b 5739 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.SPLowLimit Setpoint Low Limit float32 165f 5727 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.SPSelect Active Setpoint Select (0 = SP1; 1 = SP2) uint8 165b 5723 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.SPTrack Enables setpoint tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 1668 5736 Not applicable
Loop.1.SP.SPTrim Setpoint Trim value float32 1664 5732 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimHighLimit Setpoint Trim High Limit float32 1665 5733 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.SPTrimLowLimit Setpoint Trim Low Limit float32 1666 5734 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.TrackPV Track PV float32 1669 5737 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.SP.TrackSP Manual Tracking Value float32 166a 5738 Same as Loop.1.Main.PV
Loop.1.Tune.Alpha Alpha float32 16ad 5805 4dp
Loop.1.Tune.Alpha_p Alpha_p float32 16ab 5803 2dp
HA030554 Issue 16 269

Loop.1.Tune.AutotuneEnable Autotune Enable (0 = Autotune Off; 1 = on) bool 1631 5681 Not applicable
Loop.1.Tune.CycleNo CycleNo float32 16af 5807 0dp
Loop.1.Tune.Debug Debug float32 16ae 5806 2dp
Loop.1.Tune.Diagnostics Tuning diagnostics bool 31cd 12749 Not applicable
Loop.1.Tune.OPss OPss float32 16ac 5804 2dp
Loop.1.Tune.OutputHighLimit Autotune High Output Power Limit float32 1632 5682 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Tune.OutputLowLimit Autotune Low Output Power Limit float32 1633 5683 Same as Loop.1.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.1.Tune.PBs PBs float32 16b0 5808 2dp
Loop.1.Tune.Settle Settle float32 16b2 5810 2dp
Loop.1.Tune.Stage Autotune stage uint8 0208 520 Not applicable
0 = Reset 1 = None 2 = Monitor

3 = Current SP 4 = NewSP 5 = ToSp
6 = Max 7 = Min
Loop.1.Tune.StageTime Time in this Stage of Tune float32 0209 521 0dp
Loop.1.Tune.State Tune status uint8 0207 519 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Ready 2 = Running

3 = Complete 4 = Timeout 5 = Ti Limit
6 = R2g limit
Loop.1.Tune.TDs TDs float32 16b1 5809 2dp
Loop.1.Tune.TuneR2G R2G Tuning Type uint8 1607 5639 Not applicable
Loop.1.Tune.Tuning Tuning float32 16aa 5802 0dp
Loop.1.Tune.Type Autotune Algorithm Type uint8 1630 5680 Not applicable
(0 = Cycle; 1 = Single; 2 = Adaptive; 3 = R2GPD)
Loop.2.Diag.DerivativeOutContrib Derivative Output Contribution float32 0292 658 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.Error Calculated Error float32 028d 653 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.Diag.IntegralOutContrib Integral Output Contribution float32 0291 657 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.LoopBreakAlarm Loop Break (0 = No break; 1 = Break) bool 028f 655 Not applicable
Loop.2.Diag.LoopMode Loop mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man; 2 = Off) uint8 1791 6033 Not applicable
Loop.2.Diag.PropOutContrib Proportional Output Contribution float32 0290 656 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.SBrk Sensor break status (0 = No break; 1 = Break) bool 0293 659 Not applicable
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBH The Scheduled Cutback Hi (0 = Auto) float32 1795 6037 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedCBL The Scheduled Cutback Lo (0 = Auto) float32 1796 6038 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedLPBrk The Scheduled Loop Break Time float32 1798 6040 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedMR The Scheduled Manual Reset float32 1797 6039 1dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPHi The Scheduled Output High Limit float32 179a 6042 1dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedOPLo The Scheduled Output Low Limit float32 179b 6043 1dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedPB The Scheduled Proportional Band float32 1792 6034 1dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedR2G The Scheduled Relative Cool Gain float32 1799 6041 1dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTd The Scheduled Derivative Time (0 = Off) float32 1794 6036 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.SchedTi The Scheduled Integral Time (0 = Off) float32 1793 6035 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.TargetOutVal Target Output float32 028e 654 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Diag.WrkOPHi Working Output Hi Limit float32 0295 661 0dp
Loop.2.Diag.WrkOPLo Working Output Lo Limit float32 0294 660 0dp
Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut Working Output float32 0284 644 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Main.AutoMan Auto/Manual Mode (0 = Auto; 1 = Man) bool 0281 641 Not applicable
Loop.2.Main.Inhibit Control Inhibit (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 0285 645 Not applicable
Loop.2.Main.IntHold Integral action inhibit. 0 = No; 1 = Yes uint8 0286 646 Not applicable
Loop.2.Main.PV Process Variable value float32 0280 640 1dp
Loop.2.Main.TargetSP Target Setpoint float32 0282 642 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP Working Setpoint float32 0283 643 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.OP.Ch1OnOffHysteresis Channel 1 hysteresis in engineering units float32 1772 6002 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.OP.Ch1Out Channel 1 Output Value float32 028b 651 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.Ch1PotBreak Ch1 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 1779 6009 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.Ch1PotPosition Ch1 Valve Position float32 1778 6008 0dp
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Deadband Channel 2 Deadband float32 176f 5999 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.Ch2OnOffHysteresis Channel 2 hysteresis in engineering units float32 1773 6003 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.OP.Ch2Out Channel 2 output value float32 028c 652 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.Ch2PotBreak Channel 2 Potentiometer Break (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 177b 6011 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.Ch2PotPosition Channel 2 Valve Position float32 177a 6010 0dp
Loop.2.OP.CoolType Cooling Algorithm Type uint8 1783 6019 Not applicable
0 = Linear; 1 = Oil; 2 = Water; 3 = Fan
270 HA030554 Issue 16

Loop.2.OP.EnablePowerFeedforward 0 = Power Feedforward disabled; 1 = PFF enabled uint8 1781 6017 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardGain Feedforward Gain float32 1785 6021 3dp
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardOffset Feedforward Offset float32 1786 6022 0dp
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardTrimLimit Feedforward Trim Limit float32 1787 6023 0dp
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardType Feedforward Type (0 = None; 1 = Remote; 2 = SP; 3 = PV) uint8 1784 6020 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.FeedForwardVal Feedforward Value float32 1788 6024 0dp
Loop.2.OP.FF_Rem Remote Feed Forward Input float32 178d 6029 0dp
Loop.2.OP.ForcedOP Forced manual output value float32 178f 6031 1dp
Loop.2.OP.ManStartup Manual Startup Mode (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 1790 6032 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.ManualMode Manual Output Mode (0 = Track; 1 = Step; 2 = Last MOP) uint8 177f 6015 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal Manual Output Value float32 1780 6016 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.MeasuredPower Measured Mains Voltage float32 1782 6018 0dp
Loop.2.OP.NudgeLower Valve Nudge Lower (1 = Lower) uint8 1777 6007 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.NudgeRaise Valve Nudge Raise (1 = Raise) uint8 1776 6006 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit Output High Limit float32 176d 5997 1dp
Loop.2.OP.OutputLowLimit Output Low Limit float32 176e 5998 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.PotBreakMode Potentiometer Break Mode uint8 177c 6012 Not applicable
(0 = Raise; 1 = Lower; 2 = Rest; 3 = Model)
Loop.2.OP.Rate Output Rate Limit Value (0 = off) float32 1770 6000 1dp
Loop.2.OP.RateDisable Output Rate Limit Disable (0 = No, 1 = Yes) bool 1771 6001 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.RemOPH Remote Output High Limit float32 178c 6028 Same as Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.2.OP.RemOPL Remote Output Low Limit float32 178b 6027 Same as Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut
Loop.2.OP.SafeOutVal Safe Output Value float32 177e 6014 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.SbrkOP The output power under sensor break conditions float32 178e 6030 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.OP.SensorBreakMode Sensor Break Mode (0 = SbrkOP; 1 = Hold) uint8 177d 6013 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.TrackEnable Enable Output Tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 178a 6026 Not applicable
Loop.2.OP.TrackOutVal Output Track Value float32 1789 6025 0dp
Loop.2.PID.ActiveSet Current PID set uint8 1738 5944 Not applicable
Loop.2.PID.Boundary1-2 Threshold for swapping between set 1 and set 2 float32 1739 5945 0dp
Loop.2.PID.Boundary2-3 Threshold for swapping between set 2 and set 3 float32 173a 5946 0dp
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh Cutback high value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto) float32 173f 5951 1dp
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh2 Cutback high value for PID set 2 (0 = Auto) float32 1747 5959 1dp
Loop.2.PID.CutbackHigh3 Cutback high value for PID set 3 (0 = Auto) float32 174f 5967 1dp
Loop.2.PID.CutbackLow Cutback low value for PID set 1 (0 = Auto) float32 1740 5952 1dp
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime Derivative time for PID set 1 float32 173d 5949 0dp
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime2 Derivative time for PID set 2 float32 1745 5957 0dp
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime3 Derivative time for PID set 3 float32 174d 5965 0dp
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime Integral time for PID set 1 float32 173c 5948 0dp
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime2 Integral time for PID set 2 float32 1744 5956 0dp
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime3 Integral time for PID set 3 float32 174c 5964 0dp
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime Loop break time for PID set 1 float32 1742 5954 0dp
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime2 Loop break time for PID set 2 float32 174a 5962 0dp
Loop.2.PID.LoopBreakTime3 Loop break time for PID set 3 float32 1752 5970 0dp
Loop.2.PID.ManualReset Manual reset value for PID set 1 float32 1741 5953 1dp
Loop.2.PID.NumSets Number of PID sets to be used (max. 3) uint8 1736 5942 Not applicable
Loop.2.PID.OutputHi Gain scheduled output high limit for PID set 1 float32 1753 5971 1dp
Loop.2.PID.OutputLo Gain scheduled output low limit for PID set 1 float32 1754 5972 1dp
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand Proportional band value for PID set 1 float32 173b 5947 1dp
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand2 Proportional band value for PID set 2 float32 1743 5955 1dp
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand3 Proportional band value for PID set 3 float32 174b 5963 1dp
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 1 float32 173e 5950 1dp
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain2 Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 2 float32 1746 5958 1dp
Loop.2.PID.RelCh2Gain3 Channel 2 relative cool gain value for PID set 3 float32 174e 5966 1dp
Loop.2.PID.SchedulerRemoteInput Scheduler Remote Input float32 1737 5943 0dp
HA030554 Issue 16 271

Loop.2.PID.SchedulerType Scheduler Type uint8 1735 5941 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Set 2 = SP 3 = PV
4 = Error 5 = OP 6 = Rem
Loop.2.Setup.AutoManAccess Edit access to ‘Auto Man’ in Loop display page uint8 17a8 6056 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.CH1ControlType Channel 1 Control Type uint8 1701 5889 Not applicable
0 =Off; 1 = On Off; 2 = PID; 3 = VPU; 4 = VPB
Loop.2.Setup.CH2ControlType Channel 2 Control Type (As channel 1, above) uint8 1702 5890 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.ControlAction Control Action (0 = Reverse; 1 = Direct) uint8 1703 5891 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.DerivativeType Derivative Type (0 = PV; 1 = Error) uint8 1705 5893 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.LoopName Loop Name string_t 5d10 23824 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.ManOutputAccess Manual output access uint8 17a9 6057 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.LoopType Loop Type (0 = single; 1 = cascade; 2 = override; 3 = ratio) uint8 1700 5888 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.PBUnits Proportional Band Units (0 = Engineering units; 1 = percent) uint8 1704 5892 Not applicable
Loop.2.Setup.SPAccess Edit access to ‘SP’ in Loop display page uint8 17a7 6055 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.AltSP Alternative Setpoint float32 1760 5984 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.AltSPSelect Select alternative setpoint (0 = No; 1 = Yes) uint8 1761 5985 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.ManualTrack Manual Track Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable) uint8 1767 5991 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.RangeHigh Setpoint Range High Limit float32 1759 5977 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.RangeLow Setpoint Range Low Limit float32 175a 5978 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.Rate Setpoint Rate Limit Value (0 = Rate limit off) float32 1762 5986 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.RateDisable Setpoint Rate Limit Disable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 1763 5987 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.RateDone Setpoint Rate Limit Complete (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 028a 650 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.ServoToPV Servo to PV Enable (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 176c 5996 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.SP1 Setpoint 1 float32 175c 5980 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.SP2 Setpoint 2 float32 175d 5981 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.SPHighLimit Setpoint High Limit float32 175e 5982 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.SPIntBal SP Integral Balance (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 176b 5995 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.SPLowLimit Setpoint Low Limit float32 175f 5983 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.SPSelect Active Setpoint Select (0 = SP1; 1 = SP2) uint8 175b 5979 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.SPTrack Enables setpoint tracking (0 = Off; 1 = On) uint8 1768 5992 Not applicable
Loop.2.SP.SPTrim Setpoint Trim float32 1764 5988 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimHighLimit Setpoint Trim High Limit float32 1765 5989 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.SPTrimLowLimit Setpoint Trim Low Limit float32 1766 5990 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.TrackPV PV for Programmer to Track float32 1769 5993 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.SP.TrackSP Manual Tracking Value float32 176a 5994 Same as Loop.2.Main.PV
Loop.2.Tune.Alpha Alpha float32 17ad 6061 4dp
Loop.2.Tune.Alpha_p Alpha_p float32 17ab 6059 2dp
Loop.2.Tune.AutotuneEnable Initiate autotune (0 = Autotune Off; 1 = on) bool 1731 5937 Not applicable
Loop.2.Tune.CycleNo CycleNo float32 17af 6063 0dp
Loop.2.Tune.Debug Debug float32 17ae 6062 2dp
Loop.2.Tune.Diagnostics Tuning diagnostics bool 31ce 12750 Not applicable
Loop.2.Tune.OPss OPss float32 17ac 6060 2dp
Loop.2.Tune.OutputHighLimit Autotune High Output Power Limit float32 1732 5938 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Tune.OutputLowLimit Autotune Low Output Power Limit float32 1733 5939 Same as Loop.2.OP.OutputHighLimit
Loop.2.Tune.PBs PBs float32 17b0 6064 2dp
Loop.2.Tune.Settle Settle float32 17b2 6066 2dp
Loop.2.Tune.Stage Stage of Tune uint8 0288 648 Not applicable
0 = Reset 1 = None 2 = Monitor

3 = Current SP 4 = NewSP 5 = ToSp
6 = Max 7 = Min
Loop.2.Tune.StageTime Time in this Stage of Tune float32 0289 649 0dp
Loop.2.Tune.State Autotune state uint8 0287 647 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Ready 2 = Complete

3 = Timeout 4 = Ti Lmit 5 = R2g limit
Loop.2.Tune.TDs TDs float32 17b1 6065 2dp
Loop.2.Tune.TuneR2G R2G Tuning Type uint8 1608 5640 Not applicable
Loop.2.Tune.Tuning Tuning float32 17aa 6058 0dp
Loop.2.Tune.Type Autotune Algorithm Type uint8 1730 5936 Not applicable
272 HA030554 Issue 16

(0 = Cycle; 1 = Single; 2 = Adaptive; 3 = R2GPD)
MassFlow.Mode The mode of mass flow calculation string_t 2e64 11876 Not applicable
MassFlow.Temperature Temperature Input float32 2e66 11878 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.DeltaP DeltaP Input float32 2e67 11879 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.Pressure Pressure Input float32 2e68 11880 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.ScaleInput Scale Input float32 2e69 11881 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.SquareRootFlow Square Root Mass Flow Output float32 2e6b 11883 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.Resolution Resolution to which the outputs are displayed float32 2e6c 11884 0dp
MassFlow.Ma Ma Input float32 2e6d 11885 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.GasConstant Gas specific Constant Input float32 2e6e 11886 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
MassFlow.Z Compressibility Factor Input float32 2e6f 11887 Set by MassFlow.Resolution
Math2.1.Fallback Fallback strategy uint8 2faf 12207 Not applicable
0 = Clip Bad; 1 = Clip Good; 2 = Fallback Bad
3 = Fallback Good; 4 = Up scale; 5 = Down scale.
Math2.1.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2fab 12203 Same as Math2.1.Out
Math2.1.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2fac 12204 Same as Math2.1.Out
Math2.1.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2fa7 12199 0dp
Math2.1.In1Mul Input 1 Multiplier float32 2fa6 12198 1dp
Math2.1.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2fa9 12201 0dp
Math2.1.In2Mul Input 2 Multiplier float32 2fa8 12200 1dp
Math2.1.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2fad 12205 Same as Math2.1.Out
Math2.1.Oper Operation uint8 2faa 12202 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Add 2 = Subtract

3 = Multiply 4 =Divide 5 = Abs diff
6 = Select Max 7 = Select Min 8 = Hot Swap
9 = Sample & Hold 10 = Power 11 = Square root
12 = Log 13 = Ln 14 = Exponential
15 = 10 to the X 51 = Select
Math2.1.Out Output Value float32 2fae 12206 Set by Math2.1.Resolution
Math2.1.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 2fb2 12210 Not applicable
Math2.1.Select Select Input 1 or Input 2 bool 2fb0 12208 Not applicable
Math2.1.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2fb1 12209 Not applicable
Math2.1.Units Output Units string_t 6944 26948 Not applicable
Math2.2.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 2fbc 12220 Not applicable
Math2.2.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2fb8 12216 Same as Math2.2.Out
Math2.2.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2fb9 12217 Same as Math2.2.Out
Math2.2.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2fb4 12212 0dp
Math2.2.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 2fb3 12211 1dp
Math2.2.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2fb6 12214 0dp
Math2.2.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 2fb5 12213 1dp
Math2.2.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2fba 12218 Same as Math2.2.Out
Math2.2.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 2fb7 12215 Not applicable
Math2.2.Out Output Value float32 2fbb 12219 Set by Math2.2.Resolution
Math2.2.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 2fbf 12223 Not applicable
Math2.2.Select Select Input 1 or Input 2 bool 2fbd 12221 Not applicable
Math2.2.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2fbe 12222 Not applicable
Math2.2.Units Output Units string_t 694a 26954 Not applicable
Math2.3.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 2fc9 12233 Not applicable
Math2.3.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2fc5 12229 Same as Math2.3.Out
Math2.3.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2fc6 12230 Same as Math2.3.Out
Math2.3.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2fc1 12225 0dp
Math2.3.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 2fc0 12224 1dp
Math2.3.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2fc3 12227 0dp
Math2.3.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 2fc2 12226 1dp
Math2.3.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2fc7 12231 Same as Math2.3.Out
Math2.3.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 2fc4 12228 Not applicable
Math2.3.Out Output Value float32 2fc8 12232 Set by Math2.3.Resolution
Math2.3.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 2fcc 12236 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 273

Math2.3.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 2fca 12234 Not applicable
Math2.3.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2fcb 12235 Not applicable
Math2.4.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 2fd6 12246 Not applicable
Math2.4.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2fd2 12242 Same as Math2.4.Out
Math2.4.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2fd3 12243 Same as Math2.4.Out
Math2.4.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2fce 12238 0dp
Math2.4.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 2fcd 12237 1dp
Math2.4.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2fd0 12240 0dp
Math2.4.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 2fcf 12239 1dp
Math2.4.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2fd4 12244 Same as Math2.4.Out
Math2.4.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 2fd1 12241 Not applicable
Math2.4.Out Output Value float32 2fd5 12245 Set by Math2.4.Resolution
Math2.4.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 2fd9 12249 Not applicable
Math2.4.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 2fd7 12247 Not applicable
Math2.4.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2fd8 12248 Not applicable
Math2.5.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 2fe3 12259 Not applicable
Math2.5.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2fdf 12255 Same as Math2.5.Out
Math2.5.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2fe0 12256 Same as Math2.5.Out
Math2.5.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2fdb 12251 0dp
Math2.5.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 2fda 12250 1dp
Math2.5.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2fdd 12253 0dp
Math2.5.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 2fdc 12252 1dp
Math2.5.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2fe1 12257 Same as Math2.5.Out
Math2.5.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 2fde 12254 Not applicable
Math2.5.Out Output Value float32 2fe2 12258 Set by Math2.5.Resolution
Math2.5.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 2fe6 12262 Not applicable
Math2.5.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 2fe4 12260 Not applicable
Math2.5.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2fe5 12261 Not applicable
Math2.5.Units Output Units string_t 695c 26972 Not applicable
Math2.6.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 2ff0 12272 Not applicable
Math2.6.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2fec 12268 Same as Math2.6.Out
Math2.6.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2fed 12269 Same as Math2.6.Out
Math2.6.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2fe8 12264 0dp
Math2.6.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 2fe7 12263 1dp
Math2.6.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2fea 12266 0dp
Math2.6.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 2fe9 12265 1dp
Math2.6.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2fee 12270 Same as Math2.6.Out
Math2.6.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 2feb 12267 Not applicable
Math2.6.Out Output Value float32 2fef 12271 Set by Math2.6.Resolution
Math2.6.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 2ff3 12275 Not applicable
Math2.6.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 2ff1 12273 Not applicable
Math2.6.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2ff2 12274 Not applicable
Math2.7.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 2ffd 12285 Not applicable
Math2.7.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2ff9 12281 Same as Math2.7.Out
Math2.7.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 2ffa 12282 Same as Math2.7.Out
Math2.7.In1 Input 1 Value float32 2ff5 12277 0dp
Math2.7.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 2ff4 12276 1dp
Math2.7.In2 Input 2 Value float32 2ff7 12279 0dp
Math2.7.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 2ff6 12278 1dp
Math2.7.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 2ffb 12283 Same as Math2.7.Out
Math2.7.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 2ff8 12280 Not applicable
Math2.7.Out Output Value float32 2ffc 12284 Set by Math2.7.Resolution
Math2.7.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 3000 12288 Not applicable
Math2.7.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 2ffe 12286 Not applicable
Math2.7.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 2fff 12287 Not applicable
274 HA030554 Issue 16

Math2.8.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 300a 12298 Not applicable
Math2.8.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 3006 12294 Same as Math2.8.Out
Math2.8.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 3007 12295 Same as Math2.8.Out
Math2.8.In1 Input 1 Value float32 3002 12290 0dp
Math2.8.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 3001 12289 1dp
Math2.8.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 3008 12296 Same as Math2.8.Out
Math2.8.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 3005 12293 Not applicable
Math2.8.Out Output Value float32 3009 12297 Set by Math2.8.Resolution
Math2.8.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 300d 12301 Not applicable
Math2.8.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 300b 12299 Not applicable
Math2.8.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 300c 12300 Not applicable
Math2.8.Units Output Units string_t 696e 26990 Not applicable
Math2.9.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 3017 12311 Not applicable
Math2.9.In1 Input 1 Value float32 300f 12303 0dp
Math2.9.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 300e 12302 1dp
Math2.9.Resolution Output Resolution uint8 301a 12314 Not applicable
Math2.9.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 3018 12312 Not applicable
Math2.9.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) uint8 3019 12313 Not applicable
Math2.10.In1 Input 1 Value float32 301c 12316 0dp
Math2.10.In1Mul Input 1 Scale float32 301b 12315 1dp
Math2.10.In2 Input 2 Value float32 301e 12318 0dp
Math2.10.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 301d 12317 1dp
Math2.10.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 301f 12319 Not applicable
Math2.10.Units Output Units string_t 697a 27002 Not applicable
Math2.11.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 302d 12333 Same as Math2.11.Out
Math2.11.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 302e 12334 Same as Math2.11.Out
Math2.11.In2 Input 2 Value float32 302b 12331 0dp
Math2.11.In2Mul Input 2 Scale float32 302a 12330 1dp
Math2.11.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 302f 12335 Same as Math2.11.Out
Math2.11.Oper Operation (as Math2.1.Oper) uint8 302c 12332 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 275

Math2.12.Fallback Fallback strategy (as Math2.1.Fallback) uint8 303e 12350 Not applicable
Math2.12.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 303a 12346 Same as Math2.12.Out
Math2.12.HighLimit Output High Limit float32 303b 12347 Same as Math2.12.Out
Math2.12.LowLimit Output Low Limit float32 303c 12348 Same as Math2.12.Out
Math2.12.Out Output Value float32 303d 12349 Set by Math2.12.Resolution
Math2.12.Select Select Between Input 1 and Input 2 bool 303f 12351 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (0 = No alarms; 1 = one or more alarms active) uint8 7dbb 32187 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d4f 32079 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status uint8 7ddb 32219 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Active 2 = Safe Nackd 3 = Active Nackd
ModbusMaster.1.Data.DataType Data type of the data being read/written uint8 7c06 31750 Not applicable
0 = Real 1 = DINT 2 = INT3 = Byte

4 = UDINT 5 = UINT 6 = UBYTE8 = Real (Swap)
9 = DINT (Swap) 10 = UDINT (Swap)11 = BIT
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 6687 26247 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e1b 32283 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7c7e 31870 2dp
ModbusMaster.1.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code uint8 7be8 31720 Not applicable
1 = Read coil 2 = Read discrete 3 = Read holding

4 = Read input 5 = Write coil 6 = Write single
16 = Write multiple
ModbusMaster.1.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7b8c 31628 0dp
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d9b 32155 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d13 32019 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cf5 31989 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Priority Frequency at which the data is read/written uint8 7c24 31780 Not applicable
0 = High 1 = Medium 2 = Low 3 = Acyclic
ModbusMaster.1.Data.PV Process value received from slave device float32 7b32 31538 2dp
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d31 32049 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cb9 31929 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7dfb 32251 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b14 31508 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Status Transaction status uint8 7cd7 31959 Not applicable
0 = Success 1 = Illegal function 2 = Ilegal address

6 = Slave busy 8 = Parity error 9 = Bad sub
10 = Bad gateway 11 = No response 12 = Idle
13 = Pending 14 = Timeout 15 = Unknown host
16 = Connect fail 17 = No sockets 18 = Loopback fail
19 = Login fail 20 = Unknown error 22 = Write fail
23 = Master reject
ModbusMaster.1.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7c42 31810
ModbusMaster.2.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dbc 32188 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d50 32080 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7ddc 32220 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c07 31751 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 669c 26268 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e1c 32284 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7c80 31872 2dp
ModbusMaster.2.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7be9 31721 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7b8e 31630 0dp
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d9c 32156 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c25 31781 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cba 31930 Not applicable
276 HA030554 Issue 16

ModbusMaster.2.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7dfc 32252 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7cd8 31960 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.2.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7c44 31812 2dp
ModbusMaster.3.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dbd 32189 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7ddd 32221 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 66b1 26289 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e1d 32285 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bea 31722 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7b90 31632 0dp
ModbusMaster.3.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d9d 32157 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cbb 31931 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7dfd 32253 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.3.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cd9 31961 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dbe 32190 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dde 32222 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 66c6 26310 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e1e 32286 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7beb 31723 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d9e 32158 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cbc 31932 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7dfe 32254 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.4.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cda 31962 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dbf 32191 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7ddf 32223 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c0a 31754 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 66db 26331 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e1f 32287 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written into the slave device float32 7c86 31878 2dp
ModbusMaster.5.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bec 31724 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d9f 32159 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.PV Process value received from slave device float32 7b3a 31546 2dp
HA030554 Issue 16 277

ModbusMaster.5.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cbd 31933 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7dff 32255 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cdb 31963 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.5.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7c4a 31818 2dp
ModbusMaster.6.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dc0 32192 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7de0 32224 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c0b 31755 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 66f0 26352 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e20 32288 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bed 31725 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7da0 32160 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cfa 31994 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.PV Process value received from slave device float32 7b3c 31548 2dp
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cbe 31934 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e00 32256 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cdc 31964 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.6.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7c4c 31820 2dp
ModbusMaster.7.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c0c 31756 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7c8a 31882 2dp
ModbusMaster.7.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bee 31726 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cfb 31995 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c2a 31786 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.PV Process value received from slave device float32 7b3e 31550 2dp
ModbusMaster.7.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cbf 31935 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b1a 31514 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cdd 31965 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.7.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7c4e 31822 2dp
ModbusMaster.8.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c0d 31757 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 671a 26394 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7c8c 31884 2dp
ModbusMaster.8.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bef 31727 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7b9a 31642 0dp
ModbusMaster.8.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d1a 32026 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cfc 31996 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c2b 31787 Not applicable
278 HA030554 Issue 16

ModbusMaster.8.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cc0 31936 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b1b 31515 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.8.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cde 31966 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c0e 31758 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 672f 26415 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bf0 31728 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7b9c 31644 0dp
ModbusMaster.9.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d1b 32027 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cfd 31997 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.Priority FRead/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c2c 31788 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b1c 31516 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.9.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cdf 31967 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c0f 31759 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7b9e 31646 0dp
ModbusMaster.10.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d1c 32028 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cfe 31998 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c2d 31789 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d3a 32058 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b1d 31517 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.10.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7ce0 31968 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.11.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bc0 31680 0dp
ModbusMaster.11.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d1d 32029 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.11.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7cff 31999 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.11.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c2e 31790 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 279

ModbusMaster.11.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d3b 32059 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.11.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b1e 31518 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d5a 32090 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 676e 26478 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d1e 32030 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d00 32000 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c2f 31791 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d3c 32060 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.12.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b1f 31519 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.13.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d5b 32091 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.13.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d1f 32031 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.13.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d3d 32061 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.14.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d5c 32092 Not applicable
280 HA030554 Issue 16

ModbusMaster.14.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d3e 32062 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.15.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d5d 32093 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.15.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 67ad 26541 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.15.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7c9a 31898 2dp
ModbusMaster.15.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d3f 32063 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dca 32202 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d5e 32094 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dea 32234 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 67c2 26562 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e2a 32298 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7c9c 31900 2dp
ModbusMaster.16.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bca 31690 0dp
ModbusMaster.16.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7daa 32170 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.16.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e0a 32266 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.17.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dcb 32203 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.17.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d5f 32095 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.17.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7deb 32235 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.17.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 67d7 26583 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.17.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e2b 32299 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.17.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bcc 31692 0dp
ModbusMaster.17.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7dab 32171 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 281

ModbusMaster.17.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e0b 32267 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dcc 32204 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dec 32236 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 67ec 26604 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e2c 32300 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7ca0 31904 2dp
ModbusMaster.18.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bce 31694 0dp
ModbusMaster.18.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7dac 32172 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.Priority FRead/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c35 31797 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cca 31946 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.18.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e0c 32268 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dcd 32205 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7ded 32237 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e2d 32301 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bfa 31738 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bd0 31696 0dp
ModbusMaster.19.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7dad 32173 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7ccb 31947 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.19.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e0d 32269 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dce 32206 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dee 32238 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e2e 32302 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bfb 31739 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7dae 32174 Not applicable
282 HA030554 Issue 16

ModbusMaster.20.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7ccc 31948 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e0e 32270 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.20.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cea 31978 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dcf 32207 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7def 32239 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c1a 31770 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 682b 26667 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 7e2f 32303 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bfc 31740 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7daf 32175 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7ccd 31949 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.Set Sets a digital value (1 = on; 0 = off) bool 7e0f 32271 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.21.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7ceb 31979 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7dd0 32208 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7df0 32240 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c1b 31771 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bfd 31741 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7db0 32176 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d0a 32010 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cce 31950 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.22.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cec 31980 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.23.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c1c 31772 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.23.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7caa 31914 2dp
ModbusMaster.23.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bfe 31742 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 283

ModbusMaster.23.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d0b 32011 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.23.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c3a 31802 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.23.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7ccf 31951 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.23.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b2a 31530 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.23.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7ced 31981 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c1d 31773 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 686a 26730 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7cac 31916 2dp
ModbusMaster.24.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7bff 31743 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bda 31706 0dp
ModbusMaster.24.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d2a 32042 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d0c 32012 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c3b 31803 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7cd0 31952 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b2b 31531 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.24.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cee 31982 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c1e 31774 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 687f 26751 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7cae 31918 2dp
ModbusMaster.25.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c00 31744 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bdc 31708 0dp
ModbusMaster.25.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d2b 32043 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d0d 32013 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c3c 31804 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b2c 31532 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.25.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cef 31983 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.DataType Type of data being read/written (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c1f 31775 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7cb0 31920 2dp
ModbusMaster.26.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7bde 31710 0dp
284 HA030554 Issue 16

ModbusMaster.26.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d2c 32044 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d0e 32014 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c3d 31805 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d4a 32074 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b2d 31533 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.26.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Modbus Master.1 uint8 7cf0 31984 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.27.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 68a9 26793 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.27.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7be0 31712 0dp
ModbusMaster.27.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d2d 32045 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.27.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d0f 32015 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.27.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c3e 31806 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.27.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d4b 32075 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.27.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b2e 31534 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.28.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d6a 32106 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.28.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 68be 26814 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.28.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d2e 32046 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.28.Data.Priority Read/Write frequency (as for Modbus Master.1) uint8 7c3f 31807 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.28.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d4c 32076 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.28.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7b2f 31535 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.29.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d6b 32107 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.29.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 70ff 28927 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 285

ModbusMaster.29.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d2f 32047 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.29.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d4d 32077 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.30.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d6c 32108 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.30.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d4e 32078 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (0 = none; 1 = one or more alarms active) uint8 7db9 32185 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d95 32149 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status uint8 7dd9 32217 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Active 2 = Safe Nak’d 3 = Active Nack’d
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.DataType Data type of the data being read/written uint8 7d7f 32127 Not applicable
0 = Real 1 = DINT 2 = INT3 = Byte

4 = UDINT 5 = UINT 6 = UBYTE8 = Real (Swap)
9 = DINT (Swap) 10 = UDINT (Swap) 11 = BIT
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 665d 26205 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 7e19 32281 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7d87 32135 2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code uint8 7d7d 32125 Not applicable
1 = Read coil 2 = Read discrete 3 = Read holding

4 = Read input 5 = Write coil 6 = Write single
16 = Write multiple
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7d79 32121 0dp
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d99 32153 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d91 32145 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d8f 32143 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Priority Frequency at which the data is read/written uint8 7d81 32129 Not applicable
0 = High 1 = Medium 2 = Low 3 = Acyclic
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.PV Process value received from slave device float32 7d73 32115 2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d93 32147 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7d8b 32139 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Set Sets a digital value to on (1) or off (0) bool 7df9 32249 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7d71 32113 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Status Transaction status uint8 7d8d 32141 Not applicable
286 HA030554 Issue 16

0 = Success 1 = Illegal function 2 = Ilegal address

3 = Illegal value 6 = Slave busy 8 = Parity error
9 = Bad sub 10 = Bad gateway 11 = No response
12 = Idle 13 = Pending 14 = Timeout
15 = Unknown host 16 = Connect fail 17 = No sockets
18 = Loopback fail 19 = Login fail 20 = Unknown error
22 = Write fail 23 = Master reject
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7d83 32131 2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.CommsFailure 1 = a device communications failure bool 7d97 32151 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Descriptor Device descriptor string_t 6633 26163 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.HighPriority High priority rate uint8 7b0c 31500 Not applicable
0 = 125ms 1 = 250ms 2 = 500 ms 3 = 1 sec

4 = 2 secs 5 = 5 secs 6 = 10 secs 7 = 20 secs
8 = 30 secs 9 = 1 min 10 = 2 mins 11 = 5 mins
12 = 10 mins 13 = 20 mins 14 = 30 mins 15 = 1 hr
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.IPAddress Internet Protocol (IP) address for a slave device string_t 68d3 26835 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.LowPriority Low priority rate (as ‘high priority’ above) uint8 7b10 31504 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.MaxBlockSize Maximum amount of data in a single transaction uint8 7b0a 31498 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.MediumPriority Medium priority rate (as ‘high priority’ above) uint8 7b0e 31502 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Online Enables communications (0 = offline; 1 = online) bool 7b00 31488 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Profile A profile that defines the device type uint8 7b12 31506 Not applicable
0 = 3rd party 1 = Mini8 2 = 3xxx3 = 35xx

4 = 2xxx 5 = 2500 6 = 50007 = 6000
8 = nanodac 9 = EPower
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Retries Transaction retries uint8 7b04 31492 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.SearchDevice Initiates a slave search (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 7d6d 32109 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.SearchResult Current search status uint8 7d6f 32111 Not applicable
0 = Searching 1 = Available 2 = Unavailable

3 = Unreachable 4 = Aborted
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.Timeout Time in milliseconds the master will wait for a response float32 7b06 31494 0dp
ModbusMaster.Slave1.Main.UnitId Unit id for a slave device uint8 7b02 31490 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.AlarmStatus Alarm status (0 = none; 1 = one or more alarms active) uint8 7dba 32186 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.BitPosition Bit position of the bit of interest in a 16 bit data type uint8 7d96 32150 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.ChanAlarmStatus Channel alarm status (as Slave1.Data) uint8 7dda 32218 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.DataType Data type of the data being read/written (as Slave1.Data) uint8 7d80 32128 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Descriptor Description for this data item string_t 6672 26226 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Digital Digital status (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 7e1a 32282 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.FallBackValue Fall back value to be written to the slave device float32 7d89 32137 2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.FunctionCode The Modbus function code (as Slave1.Data) uint8 7d7e 32126 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.ModbusAddress Modbus register address of the data to be read/written float32 7d7b 32123 0dp
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Mode Auto Manual mode selection (0 = Auto; 1 = Manual) uint8 7d9a 32154 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Number Used for multiple instance parameters uint8 7d92 32146 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.ParameterList Parameter list for a specific slave device uint8 7d90 32144 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Priority Frequency at which the data is read/written (as Slave1.Da- uint8 7d82 32130 Not applicable
ta)
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.PV Process value received from slave device float32 7d75 32117 2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Scaling Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types uint8 7d94 32148 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Send 1 = send the write value to the slave bool 7d8c 32140 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Set Sets a digital value to on (1) or off (0) bool 7dfa 32250 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.SlaveDevice Slave device to communicate with. uint8 7d72 32114 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Status Transaction status (as for Slave 1) uint8 7d8e 32142 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Data.Value The value to be written to the slave device float32 7d85 32133 2dp
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.CommsFailure 1 = a device communications failure bool 7d98 32152 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Descriptor Device descriptor string_t 6648 26184 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.HighPriority High priority rate (as for Slave 1) uint8 7b0d 31501 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.IPAddress Internet Protocol (IP) address for a slave device string_t 68e5 26853 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.LowPriority Low priority rate (as for Slave 1) uint8 7b11 31505 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.MaxBlockSize Maximum amount of data in a single transaction uint8 7b0b 31499 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.MediumPriority Medium priority rate (as for Slave 1) uint8 7b0f 31503 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Online Enables communications (0 = offline; 1 = online) bool 7b01 31489 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Profile A profile that defines the device type (as Slave1.Data) uint8 7b13 31507 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Retries Transaction retries uint8 7b05 31493 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.SearchDevice Initiates a slave search (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 7d6e 32110 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.SearchResult Current search status (as Slave1.Data) uint8 7d70 32112 Not applicable
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.Timeout Time in milliseconds the master will wait for a response float32 7b08 31496 0dp
ModbusMaster.Slave2.Main.UnitId Unit id for a slave device uint8 7b03 31491 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 287

Mux8.1.Fallback Fallback Strategy uint8 2f66 12134 Not applicable
0 = Clip Bad; 1 = Clip Good; 2 = Fallback Bad
3 = Fallback Good; 4 = Up scale; 5 = Down scale.
Mux8.1.FallbackVal Fallback Value float32 2f67 12135 1dp
Mux8.1.HighLimit High Limit float32 2f69 12137 1dp
Mux8.1.In1 Input 1 float32 2f6b 12139 1dp
Mux8.1.In2 Input 2 float32 2f6c 12140 1dp
Mux8.1.In3 Input 3 float32 2f6d 12141 1dp
Mux8.1.In4 Input 4 float32 2f6e 12142 1dp
Mux8.1.In5 Input 5 float32 2f6f 12143 1dp
Mux8.1.In6 Input 6 float32 2f70 12144 1dp
Mux8.1.LowLimit Low Limit float32 2f6a 12138 1dp
Mux8.1.Out Output float32 2f73 12147 Set by Mux8.1.Resolution
Mux8.1.Resolution Resolution uint8 2f75 12149 Not applicable
Mux8.1.Select Input Selection Switch uint8 2f68 12136 Not applicable
1 to 8 = input 1 to 8 (respectively) selected for output
Mux8.1.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) bool 2f74 12148 Not applicable
Mux8.2.Fallback Fallback Strategy (as Mux8.1.Fallback) uint8 2f76 12150 Not applicable
Mux8.2.Select Input Selection (as Mux8.1.Select) uint8 2f78 12152 Not applicable
288 HA030554 Issue 16

Mux8.4.In6 Input 6 float32 2fa0 12192 1dp
Mux8.4.Out Output float32 2fa3 12195 Set by Mux8.4.Resolution
Mux8.4.Resolution Resolution uint8 2fa5 12197 Not applicable
Mux8.4.Status Status. 0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error) bool 2fa4 12196 Not applicable
nano_ui.Access Access level uint8 2c00 11264 Not applicable
0 = Logged out; 1 = Operator; 2 = Supervisor; 3 = Engineer
nano_ui.Password Password string_t 5400 21504 Not applicable
Network.Archive.ArchiveRate Rate at which to archive history files uint8 1114 4372 Not applicable
0 = None 1 = Every minute 2 = Hourly

3 = Daily 4 = Weekly 5 = Monthly
6 = Automatic
Network.Archive.CSVDateFormat Date/Time format (0 = Text; 1 = spreadsheet numeric) uint8 111d 4381 Not applicable
Network.Archive.CSVHeaders Include header details (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 111b 4379 Not applicable
Network.Archive.CSVHeadings Include headings (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 111c 4380 Not applicable
Network.Archive.CSVIncludeValues Include process values (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 1119 4377 Not applicable
Network.Archive.CSVMessages Include messages (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 111a 4378 Not applicable
Network.Archive.CSVTabDelimiter Use Tab delimiter instead of comma (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 111e 4382 Not applicable
Network.Archive.Destination Archive destination. 0 = USB; 1 = FTP Server uint8 1111 4369 Not applicable
Network.Archive.FileFormat Archive file format (0 = Binary; 1 = CSV; 2 = both) uint8 1115 4373 Not applicable
Network.Archive.MediaDuration Time in days until the USB is full float32 1118 4376 2dp
Network.Interface.Gateway Default gateway internet protocol address string_t 4524 17700 Not applicable
Network.Interface.IPaddress Internet Protocol (IP) address of this instrument string_t 4500 17664 Not applicable
Network.Interface.IPType IP Lookup. 0 = DHCP, 1 = Fixed uint8 1102 4354 Not applicable
Network.Interface.MAC Media Access Control (MAC) address of this instrument string_t 4548 17736 Not applicable
Network.Interface.SubnetMask Sub network identification mask string_t 4512 17682 Not applicable
Network.Modbus.Address Modbus address for this instrument uint8 1140 4416 Not applicable
Network.Modbus.InputTimeout Modbus Input inactivity timeout (in seconds) int16 1141 4417 Not applicable
Network.Modbus.PrefMasterIP Preferred master IP string_t 469c 18076 Not applicable
Network.Modbus.SerialMode Modbus serial port mode uint8 1143 4419 Not applicable
Network.Modbus.TimeFormat Time parameter comms resolution uint8 1144 4420 Not applicable
Network.Modbus.UnitIdEnable Unit ident enable uint8 1142 4418 Not applicable
OR.1.Input1 OR Block 1, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on bool 2d00 11520 Not applicable
OR.1.Output OR Block 1, output. 0 = off; 1 = on bool 2d08 11528 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 289

290 HA030554 Issue 16

OR.11.Input1 OR Block 11, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on bool 2da0 11680 Not applicable
OR.11.Output OR Block 11, output. 0 = off; 1 = on bool 2da8 11688 Not applicable
OR.12.Input1 OR Block 12, input 1. 0 = off; 1 = on bool 2db0 11696 Not applicable
OR.12.Output OR Block 12, output. 0 = off; 1 = on bool 2db8 11704 Not applicable
Program.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3aa1 15009 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Low 2 = High 3 = Band
Program.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3aa3 15011 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Program.Ch1RampUnits Channel 1 ramp units uint8 3aa6 15014 Not applicable
Program.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type (as for Program.Ch1, above) uint8 3aa2 15010 Not applicable
Program.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3aa4 15012 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Program.Ch2RampUnits Channel 2 ramp units uint8 3aa7 15015 Not applicable
Program.HoldbackStyle Holdback style (0 = per segment; 1 = per program) uint8 3aa0 15008 Not applicable
Program.Program Program string_t 6abb 27323 Not applicable
Program.RampStyle Ramp style (0 = Time; 1 = Rate) uint8 3aa5 15013 Not applicable
Programmer.Features.FTPStore FTP store feature enable bool 3a04 14852 Not applicable
Programmer.Features.Holdback Holdback feature enable bool 3a00 14848 Not applicable
Programmer.Features.Messages Messages feature enable bool 3a03 14851 Not applicable
Programmer.Features.PVEvent PV Event feature enable bool 3a01 14849 Not applicable
Programmer.Features.UserValue User value feature enable bool 3a02 14850 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename1 Filename string_t 7900 30976 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename11 Filename string_t 790a 30986 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename12 Filename string_t 790b 30987 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename13 Filename string_t 790c 30988 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename14 Filename string_t 790d 30989 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename15 Filename string_t 790e 30990 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Filename16 Filename string_t 790f 30991 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 291

292 HA030554 Issue 16

Programmer.FileList.FilenameEntry Filename of the program to loaded or stored string_t 6a91 27281 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.Operation Operation (0 = Complete; 1 = Get listing; 2 = iTools only) uint8 3a80 14976 Not applicable
Programmer.FileList.RefreshList Refresh list (0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 3a81 14977 Not applicable
Programmer.FTP.IPAddress Internet Protocol address string_t 698c 27020 Not applicable
Programmer.FTP.Password Password string_t 6a2c 27180 Not applicable
Programmer.FTP.Username Username string_t 6a03 27139 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.Ch1PSP Channel 1 programmer set-point float32 3a53 14931 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Programmer.Run.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3a6c 14956 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3a5e 14942 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Programmer.Run.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3a5c 14940 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3a5a 14938 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Programmer.Run.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3a6a 14954 0dp
Programmer.Run.Ch2PSP Channel 2 programmer set-point float32 3a54 14932 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Programmer.Run.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3a6d 14957 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3a5f 14943 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Programmer.Run.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3a5d 14941 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3a5b 14939 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Programmer.Run.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3a6b 14955 0dp
Programmer.Run.CyclesLeft Cycles left (-1 = continuous) int16 3a60 14944 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.Duration Duration time_t 3a59 14937 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.EndOutput End output (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3a61 14945 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.Event1 Event 1 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3a62 14946 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.Intervention Intervention uint8 3a6f 14959 Not applicable
0 = No Program 1 = None
2 = User intervention 4 = PV Event
Programmer.Run.Mode Mode (1 = Reset; 2 = Run; 4 = Hold) uint8 3a50 14928 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeLeft Program time left time_t 3a57 14935 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeRunning Program time running time_t 3a70 14960 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.ProgTimeSpent Program time spent time_t 3a58 14936 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.Segment Segment string_t 6aa6 27302 Not applicable
Programmer.Run.SegmentType Segment type uint8 3a52 14930 Not applicable
0 = End 1 = Ramp 2 = Dwell

3 = Step 4 = Wait 5 = Go back
Programmer.Run.SegTimeLeft Segment time left time_t 3a55 14933 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.SegTimeRun Segment time run time_t 3a56 14934 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Programmer.Run.Status Status uint8 3a51 14929 Not applicable
1 = Reset 2 = Running 4 = Holding

8 = Holdback 16 = Waiting 32 = Complete
Programmer.SetUp.Advance Advance (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a42 14914 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Amended Amended (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a44 14916 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput Channel 1 PV input float32 3a26 14886 Set by Programmer.SetUp.Ch1Resolution
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1Resolution Channel 1 Resolution uint8 3a46 14918 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1ServoTo Channel 1 servo to (0 = PV; 1 = SP) uint8 3a2a 14890 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 293

Programmer.SetUp.Ch1SPInput Channel 1 SP input float32 3a28 14888 0dp
Programmer.SetUp.Ch1Units Channel 1 units string_t 6a85 27269 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput Channel 2 PV input float32 3a27 14887 Set by Programmer.SetUp.Ch2Resolution
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2Resolution Channel 2 Resolution uint8 3a47 14919 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2ServoTo Channel 2 servo to (0 = PV; 1 = SP) uint8 3a2b 14891 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2SPInput Channel 2 SP input float32 3a29 14889 0dp
Programmer.SetUp.Ch2Units Channel 2 units string_t 6a8b 27275 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Channels Number of channels uint8 3a20 14880 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.FileErrorStatus File error status uint8 3a45 14917 Not applicable
0 = Busy 1 = OK 2 = Load open file

3 = Store open file 4 =Delete fail 5 = Copy fail
6 = Invalid format 7 = Invalid device 8 = Invalid version
9 = Invalid number of channels
10 = Parameter write failed
11 = Store operation failed to complete
12 = Load operation failed to complete
13 = Delete operation failed to complete
14 = Copy operation failed to complete
15 = Invalid filename entered or selected
16 = General file operation error
17 = Would result in more than the ma.x no. of program files
Programmer.SetUp.Hold Hold (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a39 14905 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.MaxEvents Maximum events uint8 3a2d 14893 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Operation Operation uint8 3a40 14912 Not applicable
1 = Select 2 =Load 4 = Store

8 = Delete 16 = Delete All 32=Copy
64 = Copy All
Programmer.SetUp.PowerFailAction Power fail action (0 = ramp back; 1 = Reset; 2 = Continue) uint8 3a2c 14892 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.ProgEditAccess Program edit access level uint8 3a22 14882 Not applicable
0 = Logged out 1 = Operator
2 = Supervisor 3 = Engineer
Programmer.SetUp.ProgModeAccess Program mode access level (as Program Edit Access, uint8 3a21 14881 Not applicable
above)
Programmer.SetUp.ProgNum Program Number uint8 3a48 14920 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.ProgStoreAccess Program store access level (as Program Edit Access, uint8 3a23 14883 Not applicable
above)
Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution Rate resolution uint8 3a24 14884 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Reset Reset (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a3a 14906 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1UserVal Reset channel 1 user value float32 3a36 14902 1dp
Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2UserVal Reset channel 2 user value float32 3a37 14903 1dp
Programmer.SetUp.ResetEvent1 Reset event 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 3a2e 14894 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.ResetEvent2 Reset event 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 3a2f 14895 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.ResetEvent3 Reset event 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On) bool 3a30 14896 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Run Run (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a38 14904 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.RunHold Run Hold (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a3c 14908 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.RunReset Run Reset (0 = No 1 = Yes) bool 3a3b 14907 Not applicable
Programmer.SetUp.Status Status uint8 3a41 14913 Not applicable
0 = Inactive 1 = Success 2 = Failed

3 = Loading 4 = Storing 5 = Deleting
6 = Copying
Programmer.SetUp.WaitAnalog1 Wait analog input 1 float32 3a3e 14910 0dp
Programmer.SetUp.WaitAnalog2 Wait analog input 2 float32 3a3f 14911 0dp
Programmer.SetUp.WaitDigital Wait Digital (0 = Off 1 = On) bool 3a3d 14909 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.Duration Sets the duration for the event to remain On time_t 30e6 12518 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
RealTimeEvent.1.OffDate Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch off uint8 30e8 12520 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.OffDay Sets the day the event is to switch Off uint8 30e9 12521 Not applicable
294 HA030554 Issue 16

0 = Sunday 1 = Monday 2 = Tuesday

3 = Wednesday 4 = Thursday 5 = Friday
6 = Saturday 7 = Monday to Friday
8 = Saturday to Sunday
9 = Every day
RealTimeEvent.1.OffMonth The month number when the event is to switch off uint8 30e7 12519 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.OffTime Sets the time that the event is to switch Off time_t 30ea 12522 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
RealTimeEvent.1.OffType 0 = Duration; 1 = Time uint8 30e5 12517 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.OnDate Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch on uint8 30e2 12514 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.OnDay Sets the day on which event is to switch on (as ‘OffDay’, uint8 30e3 12515 Not applicable
above)
RealTimeEvent.1.OnMonth The month number when the event is to switch on uint8 30e1 12513 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.OnTime Sets the time that the event is to switch On time_t 30e4 12516 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
RealTimeEvent.1.Output The output from the real time event (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 30eb 12523 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.1.Type Selects the type of Real Time Event uint8 30e0 12512 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Time and Day 2 = Time and Date
RealTimeEvent.2.Duration Sets the duration for the event to remain On time_t 30f6 12534 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
RealTimeEvent.2.OffDate Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch off uint8 30f8 12536 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OffDay Sets the day the event is to switch Off (as for Event 1) uint8 30f9 12537 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OffMonth Sets the month that the event is to switch off uint8 30f7 12535 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OffTime Sets the time that the event is to switch Off time_t 30fa 12538 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
RealTimeEvent.2.OffType Selects the type that will switch off the event (as for Event 1) uint8 30f5 12533 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OnDate Sets the date in the month that the event is to switch on uint8 30f2 12530 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OnDay Sets the day the event is to switch on (as for Event 1) uint8 30f3 12531 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OnMonth Sets the month that the event is to switch on uint8 30f1 12529 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.OnTime Sets the time that the event is to switch On time_t 30f4 12532 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
RealTimeEvent.2.Output The output from the real time event (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 30fb 12539 Not applicable
RealTimeEvent.2.Type Selects the type of Real Time Event uint8 30f0 12528 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Time and Day 2 = Time and Date
SaturatedSteam.Mode The mode of steam calculation string_t 2e32 11826 Not applicable
SaturatedSteam.Flow Flow Input float32 2e33 11827 Set by SaturatedSteam.Resolution
SaturatedSteam.Use Use Temperature or Pressure string_t 2e35 11829 Not applicable
SaturatedSteam.Temperature Temperature Input float32 2e36 11830 Set by SaturatedSteam.Resolution
SaturatedSteam.Dryness Dryness Constant, % float32 2e38 11832 Set by SaturatedSteam.Resolution
SaturatedSteam.HeatFlow Heat flow output float32 2e39 11833 Set by SaturatedSteam.Resolution
SaturatedSteam.Resolution Resolution to which the steam parameters are displayed float32 2e3c 11836 0dp
Segment.1.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3ac9 15049 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Low 2= High 3 = Band
Segment.1.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3acb 15051 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.1.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3ad4 15060 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = Absolute High 2 = Absolute Low

3 = Deviation High 4 = Deviation Low 5 = Deviation Band
Segment.1.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use (0 = Trigger; 1 = Alarm) bool 3ae2 15074 Not applicable
Segment.1.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3ad6 15062 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.1.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3ac6 15046 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.1.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3ac4 15044 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.1.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3ac2 15042 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.1.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3ad8 15064 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.1.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait (Analogue 1 criterion) uint8 3ace 15054 Not applicable
1= Abs high 2 = Abs low 3 = Dev high 4 = Dev Low
Segment.1.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3ad0 15056 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.1.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type (as for Ch1Holdback, above) uint8 3aca 15050 Not applicable
Segment.1.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3acc 15052 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.1.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event (as for Ch1PVEvent, above) uint8 3ad5 15061 Not applicable
Segment.1.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use (as for Ch1PVEventUse, above) bool 3ae3 15075 Not applicable
Segment.1.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3ad7 15063 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.1.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3ac7 15047 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.1.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3ac5 15045 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.1.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3ac3 15043 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.1.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3ad9 15065 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
HA030554 Issue 16 295

Segment.1.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait (analogue 2 criterion; as for Ch1Wait, uint8 3acf 15055 Not applicable
above)
Segment.1.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3ad1 15057 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.1.Cycles Cycles (0 = Continuous) int16 3ad3 15059 Not applicable
Segment.1.Duration Duration time_t 3ac1 15041 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.1.EndType End type (0 = Dwell; 1 = Reset) uint8 3ac8 15048 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event1 Event 1 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3ada 15066 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event2 Event 2 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3adb 15067 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event3 Event 3 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3adc 15068 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event4 Event 4 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3add 15069 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event5 Event 5 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3ade 15070 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event6 Event 6 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3adf 15071 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event7 Event 7 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3ae0 15072 Not applicable
Segment.1.Event8 Event 8 (0 = Off; 1 = On) bool 3ae1 15073 Not applicable
Segment.1.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3ad2 15058 Not applicable
Segment.1.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6ad0 27344 Not applicable
Segment.1.Type Type uint8 3ac0 15040 Not applicable
0 = End 1 = Ramp 2 = Dwell

3 = Step 4 = Wait 5 = GoBack
Segment.1.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3acd 15053 Not applicable
0 = Digital High 1 = Wait analogue 1

2 = Wait analogue 2 3 = Wait analogue 1 and analogue 2
Segment 2 For parameter values and settings (enumerations) see Segment 1
Segment.2.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3af9 15097 Not applicable
Segment.2.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3afb 15099 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.2.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3b04 15108 Not applicable
Segment.2.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3b12 15122 Not applicable
Segment.2.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3b06 15110 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.2.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3af6 15094 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.2.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3af4 15092 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.2.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3af2 15090 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.2.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3b08 15112 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.2.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3afe 15102 Not applicable
Segment.2.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3b00 15104 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.2.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3afa 15098 Not applicable
Segment.2.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3afc 15100 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.2.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3af7 15095 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.2.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3af5 15093 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.2.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3af3 15091 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.2.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3aff 15103 Not applicable
Segment.2.Cycles Cycles int16 3b03 15107 Not applicable
Segment.2.Duration Duration time_t 3af1 15089 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.2.EndType End type uint8 3af8 15096 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event1 Event 1 bool 3b0a 15114 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event2 Event 2 bool 3b0b 15115 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event3 Event 3 bool 3b0c 15116 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event4 Event 4 bool 3b0d 15117 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event5 Event 5 bool 3b0e 15118 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event6 Event 6 bool 3b0f 15119 Not applicable
Segment.2.Event7 Event 7 bool 3b10 15120 Not applicable
Segment.2.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3b02 15106 Not applicable
Segment.2.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6ae5 27365 Not applicable
Segment.2.Type Type uint8 3af0 15088 Not applicable
Segment.2.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3afd 15101 Not applicable
296 HA030554 Issue 16

Segment.3.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3b29 15145 Not applicable
Segment.3.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3b2b 15147 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.3.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3b26 15142 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.3.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3b24 15140 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.3.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3b22 15138 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput

erVal
Segment.3.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3b2e 15150 Not applicable
Segment.3.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3b2a 15146 Not applicable
Segment.3.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3b2c 15148 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.3.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3b2f 15151 Not applicable
Segment.3.Duration Duration time_t 3b21 15137 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.3.EndType End type uint8 3b28 15144 Not applicable
Segment.3.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6afa 27386 Not applicable
Segment.3.Type Type uint8 3b20 15136 Not applicable
Segment.3.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3b2d 15149 Not applicable

erVal

erVal
HA030554 Issue 16 297

Segment.4.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6b0f 27407 Not applicable
Segment.5.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3ba2 15266 Not applicable

erVal
Segment.5.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3ba3 15267 Not applicable

erVal
Segment.5.Event7 Event 7 bool 3ba0 15264 Not applicable
Segment.5.Event8 Event 8 bool 3ba1 15265 Not applicable
Segment.5.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6b24 27428 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3bb9 15289 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3bbb 15291 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.6.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3bc4 15300 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3bd2 15314 Not applicable
298 HA030554 Issue 16

Segment.6.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3bc6 15302 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.6.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3bb6 15286 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.6.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3bb4 15284 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.6.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3bb2 15282 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.6.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3bc8 15304 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.6.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3bbe 15294 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3bc0 15296 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.6.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3bba 15290 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3bbc 15292 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.6.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3bc5 15301 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3bd3 15315 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3bc7 15303 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.6.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3bb7 15287 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.6.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3bb5 15285 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.6.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3bb3 15283 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.6.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3bc9 15305 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.6.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3bbf 15295 Not applicable
Segment.6.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3bc1 15297 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.6.Cycles Cycles int16 3bc3 15299 Not applicable
Segment.6.Duration Duration time_t 3bb1 15281 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.6.EndType End type uint8 3bb8 15288 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event1 Event 1 bool 3bca 15306 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event2 Event 2 bool 3bcb 15307 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event3 Event 3 bool 3bcc 15308 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event4 Event 4 bool 3bcd 15309 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event5 Event 5 bool 3bce 15310 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event6 Event 6 bool 3bcf 15311 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event7 Event 7 bool 3bd0 15312 Not applicable
Segment.6.Event8 Event 8 bool 3bd1 15313 Not applicable
Segment.6.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3bc2 15298 Not applicable
Segment.6.Type Type uint8 3bb0 15280 Not applicable
Segment.6.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3bbd 15293 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3be9 15337 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3beb 15339 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.7.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3bf4 15348 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3c02 15362 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3bf6 15350 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.7.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3be6 15334 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.7.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3be4 15332 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.7.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3be2 15330 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.7.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3bf8 15352 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.7.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3bee 15342 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3bf0 15344 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.7.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3bea 15338 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3bec 15340 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.7.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3bf5 15349 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3bf7 15351 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.7.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3be7 15335 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.7.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3be5 15333 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.7.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3be3 15331 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.7.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3bf9 15353 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.7.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3bef 15343 Not applicable
Segment.7.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3bf1 15345 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.7.Cycles Cycles int16 3bf3 15347 Not applicable
Segment.7.Duration Duration time_t 3be1 15329 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
HA030554 Issue 16 299

Segment.7.EndType End type uint8 3be8 15336 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event1 Event 1 bool 3bfa 15354 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event2 Event 2 bool 3bfb 15355 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event3 Event 3 bool 3bfc 15356 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event4 Event 4 bool 3bfd 15357 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event5 Event 5 bool 3bfe 15358 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event6 Event 6 bool 3bff 15359 Not applicable
Segment.7.Event7 Event 7 bool 3c00 15360 Not applicable
Segment.7.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3bf2 15346 Not applicable
Segment.7.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6b4e 27470 Not applicable
Segment.7.Type Type uint8 3be0 15328 Not applicable
Segment.7.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3bed 15341 Not applicable
Segment.8.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3c19 15385 Not applicable
Segment.8.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3c1b 15387 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.8.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3c24 15396 Not applicable
Segment.8.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3c26 15398 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.8.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3c16 15382 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.8.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3c14 15380 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.8.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3c12 15378 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.8.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3c28 15400 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.8.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3c1e 15390 Not applicable
Segment.8.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3c20 15392 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.8.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3c1a 15386 Not applicable
Segment.8.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3c1c 15388 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.8.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3c1f 15391 Not applicable
Segment.8.Cycles Cycles int16 3c23 15395 Not applicable
Segment.8.Duration Duration time_t 3c11 15377 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.8.EndType End type uint8 3c18 15384 Not applicable
Segment.8.Event1 Event 1 bool 3c2a 15402 Not applicable
Segment.8.Event2 Event 2 bool 3c2b 15403 Not applicable
Segment.8.Event3 Event 3 bool 3c2c 15404 Not applicable
Segment.8.Event4 Event 4 bool 3c2d 15405 Not applicable
Segment.8.Event5 Event 5 bool 3c2e 15406 Not applicable
Segment.8.Event6 Event 6 bool 3c2f 15407 Not applicable
Segment.8.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3c22 15394 Not applicable
Segment.8.Type Type uint8 3c10 15376 Not applicable
Segment.8.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3c1d 15389 Not applicable
300 HA030554 Issue 16


erVal

erVal

erVal

erVal
HA030554 Issue 16 301

Segment.10.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6b8d 27533 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3ca9 15529 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3cab 15531 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.11.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3cb4 15540 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3cc2 15554 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3cb6 15542 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.11.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3ca6 15526 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.11.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3ca4 15524 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.11.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3ca2 15522 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.11.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3cb8 15544 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.11.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3cae 15534 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3cb0 15536 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.11.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3caa 15530 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3cac 15532 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.11.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3cb5 15541 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3cc3 15555 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3cb7 15543 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.11.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3ca7 15527 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.11.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3ca5 15525 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.11.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3ca3 15523 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.11.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3cb9 15545 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.11.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3caf 15535 Not applicable
Segment.11.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3cb1 15537 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.11.Cycles Cycles int16 3cb3 15539 Not applicable
Segment.11.Duration Duration time_t 3ca1 15521 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.11.EndType End type uint8 3ca8 15528 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event1 Event 1 bool 3cba 15546 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event2 Event 2 bool 3cbb 15547 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event3 Event 3 bool 3cbc 15548 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event4 Event 4 bool 3cbd 15549 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event5 Event 5 bool 3cbe 15550 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event6 Event 6 bool 3cbf 15551 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event7 Event 7 bool 3cc0 15552 Not applicable
Segment.11.Event8 Event 8 bool 3cc1 15553 Not applicable
Segment.11.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3cb2 15538 Not applicable
Segment.11.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6ba2 27554 Not applicable
Segment.11.Type Type uint8 3ca0 15520 Not applicable
Segment.11.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3cad 15533 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3cd9 15577 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3cdb 15579 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.12.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3ce4 15588 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3cf2 15602 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3ce6 15590 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.12.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3cd6 15574 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.12.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3cd4 15572 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.12.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3cd2 15570 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.12.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3ce8 15592 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.12.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3cde 15582 Not applicable
302 HA030554 Issue 16

Segment.12.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3ce0 15584 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.12.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3cda 15578 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3cdc 15580 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.12.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3ce5 15589 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3cf3 15603 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3ce7 15591 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.12.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3cd7 15575 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.12.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3cd5 15573 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.12.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3cd3 15571 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.12.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3ce9 15593 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.12.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3cdf 15583 Not applicable
Segment.12.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3ce1 15585 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.12.Cycles Cycles int16 3ce3 15587 Not applicable
Segment.12.Duration Duration time_t 3cd1 15569 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.12.EndType End type uint8 3cd8 15576 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event1 Event 1 bool 3cea 15594 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event2 Event 2 bool 3ceb 15595 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event3 Event 3 bool 3cec 15596 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event4 Event 4 bool 3ced 15597 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event5 Event 5 bool 3cee 15598 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event6 Event 6 bool 3cef 15599 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event7 Event 7 bool 3cf0 15600 Not applicable
Segment.12.Event8 Event 8 bool 3cf1 15601 Not applicable
Segment.12.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3ce2 15586 Not applicable
Segment.12.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6bb7 27575 Not applicable
Segment.12.Type Type uint8 3cd0 15568 Not applicable
Segment.12.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3cdd 15581 Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3d09 15625 Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3d0b 15627 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.13.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3d14 15636 Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3d22 15650 Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3d16 15638 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.13.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3d06 15622 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.13.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3d04 15620 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.13.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3d02 15618 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.13.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3d18 15640 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.13.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3d0e 15630 Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3d10 15632 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.13.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3d0a 15626 Not applicable
Segment.13.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3d0c 15628 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.13.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3d0f 15631 Not applicable
Segment.13.Cycles Cycles int16 3d13 15635 Not applicable
Segment.13.Duration Duration time_t 3d01 15617 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.13.EndType End type uint8 3d08 15624 Not applicable
Segment.13.Event1 Event 1 bool 3d1a 15642 Not applicable
Segment.13.Event2 Event 2 bool 3d1b 15643 Not applicable
Segment.13.Event3 Event 3 bool 3d1c 15644 Not applicable
Segment.13.Event4 Event 4 bool 3d1d 15645 Not applicable
Segment.13.Event5 Event 5 bool 3d1e 15646 Not applicable
Segment.13.Event6 Event 6 bool 3d1f 15647 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 303

Segment.13.Event7 Event 7 bool 3d20 15648 Not applicable
Segment.13.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3d12 15634 Not applicable
Segment.13.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6bcc 27596 Not applicable
Segment.13.Type Type uint8 3d00 15616 Not applicable
Segment.13.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3d0d 15629 Not applicable

erVal

erVal
Segment.14.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6be1 27617 Not applicable

erVal
304 HA030554 Issue 16


erVal
Segment.15.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6bf6 27638 Not applicable
Segment.16.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3da4 15780 Not applicable
Segment.16.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3db2 15794 Not applicable
Segment.16.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3da6 15782 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.16.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3da8 15784 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.16.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3da0 15776 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.16.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3da5 15781 Not applicable
Segment.16.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3db3 15795 Not applicable
Segment.16.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3da7 15783 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.16.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3da9 15785 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.16.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3da1 15777 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.16.Cycles Cycles int16 3da3 15779 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event1 Event 1 bool 3daa 15786 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event2 Event 2 bool 3dab 15787 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event3 Event 3 bool 3dac 15788 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event4 Event 4 bool 3dad 15789 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event5 Event 5 bool 3dae 15790 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event6 Event 6 bool 3daf 15791 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event7 Event 7 bool 3db0 15792 Not applicable
Segment.16.Event8 Event 8 bool 3db1 15793 Not applicable
Segment.16.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3da2 15778 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 305

Segment.16.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6c0b 27659 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3dc9 15817 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3dcb 15819 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.17.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3dd4 15828 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3de2 15842 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3dd6 15830 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.17.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3dc6 15814 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.17.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3dc4 15812 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.17.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3dc2 15810 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.17.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3dd8 15832 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.17.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3dce 15822 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3dd0 15824 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.17.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3dca 15818 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3dcc 15820 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.17.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3dd5 15829 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3de3 15843 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3dd7 15831 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.17.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3dc7 15815 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.17.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3dc5 15813 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.17.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3dc3 15811 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.17.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3dd9 15833 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.17.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3dcf 15823 Not applicable
Segment.17.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3dd1 15825 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.17.Cycles Cycles int16 3dd3 15827 Not applicable
Segment.17.Duration Duration time_t 3dc1 15809 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.17.EndType End type uint8 3dc8 15816 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event1 Event 1 bool 3dda 15834 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event2 Event 2 bool 3ddb 15835 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event3 Event 3 bool 3ddc 15836 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event4 Event 4 bool 3ddd 15837 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event5 Event 5 bool 3dde 15838 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event6 Event 6 bool 3ddf 15839 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event7 Event 7 bool 3de0 15840 Not applicable
Segment.17.Event8 Event 8 bool 3de1 15841 Not applicable
Segment.17.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3dd2 15826 Not applicable
Segment.17.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6c20 27680 Not applicable
Segment.17.Type Type uint8 3dc0 15808 Not applicable
Segment.17.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3dcd 15821 Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3df9 15865 Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3dfb 15867 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.18.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3e04 15876 Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3e12 15890 Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3e06 15878 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.18.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3df6 15862 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.18.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3df4 15860 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.18.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3df2 15858 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.18.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3e08 15880 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.18.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3dfe 15870 Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3e00 15872 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.18.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3dfa 15866 Not applicable
Segment.18.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3dfc 15868 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
306 HA030554 Issue 16

Segment.18.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3df7 15863 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.18.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3df5 15861 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.18.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3df3 15859 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.18.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3dff 15871 Not applicable
Segment.18.Cycles Cycles int16 3e03 15875 Not applicable
Segment.18.Duration Duration time_t 3df1 15857 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.18.EndType End type uint8 3df8 15864 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event1 Event 1 bool 3e0a 15882 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event2 Event 2 bool 3e0b 15883 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event3 Event 3 bool 3e0c 15884 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event4 Event 4 bool 3e0d 15885 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event5 Event 5 bool 3e0e 15886 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event6 Event 6 bool 3e0f 15887 Not applicable
Segment.18.Event7 Event 7 bool 3e10 15888 Not applicable
Segment.18.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3e02 15874 Not applicable
Segment.18.Type Type uint8 3df0 15856 Not applicable
Segment.18.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3dfd 15869 Not applicable
Segment.19.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3e29 15913 Not applicable
Segment.19.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3e2b 15915 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.19.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3e26 15910 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.19.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3e24 15908 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.19.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3e22 15906 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput

erVal
Segment.19.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3e2e 15918 Not applicable
Segment.19.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3e2a 15914 Not applicable
Segment.19.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3e2c 15916 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.19.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3e2f 15919 Not applicable
Segment.19.Duration Duration time_t 3e21 15905 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.19.EndType End type uint8 3e28 15912 Not applicable
Segment.19.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6c4a 27722 Not applicable
Segment.19.Type Type uint8 3e20 15904 Not applicable
Segment.19.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3e2d 15917 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 307


erVal

erVal
Segment.20.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6c5f 27743 Not applicable
Segment.21.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3ea2 16034 Not applicable

erVal
Segment.21.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3ea3 16035 Not applicable
308 HA030554 Issue 16


erVal
Segment.21.Event7 Event 7 bool 3ea0 16032 Not applicable
Segment.21.Event8 Event 8 bool 3ea1 16033 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3eb9 16057 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3ebb 16059 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.22.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3ec4 16068 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3ed2 16082 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3ec6 16070 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.22.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3eb6 16054 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.22.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3eb4 16052 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.22.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3eb2 16050 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.22.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3ec8 16072 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.22.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3ebe 16062 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3ec0 16064 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.22.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3eba 16058 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3ebc 16060 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.22.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3ec5 16069 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch2PVEventUse Channel 2 PV event use bool 3ed3 16083 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3ec7 16071 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.22.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3eb7 16055 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.22.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3eb5 16053 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.22.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3eb3 16051 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.22.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3ec9 16073 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.22.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3ebf 16063 Not applicable
Segment.22.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3ec1 16065 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.22.Cycles Cycles int16 3ec3 16067 Not applicable
Segment.22.Duration Duration time_t 3eb1 16049 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.22.EndType End type uint8 3eb8 16056 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event1 Event 1 bool 3eca 16074 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event2 Event 2 bool 3ecb 16075 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event3 Event 3 bool 3ecc 16076 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event4 Event 4 bool 3ecd 16077 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event5 Event 5 bool 3ece 16078 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event6 Event 6 bool 3ecf 16079 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event7 Event 7 bool 3ed0 16080 Not applicable
Segment.22.Event8 Event 8 bool 3ed1 16081 Not applicable
Segment.22.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3ec2 16066 Not applicable
Segment.22.Type Type uint8 3eb0 16048 Not applicable
Segment.22.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3ebd 16061 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3ee9 16105 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 309

Segment.23.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3eeb 16107 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.23.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3ef4 16116 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch1PVEventUse Channel 1 PV event use bool 3f02 16130 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3ef6 16118 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.23.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3ee6 16102 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.23.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3ee4 16100 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.23.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3ee2 16098 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.23.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3ef8 16120 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.23.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3eee 16110 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3ef0 16112 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.23.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3eea 16106 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3eec 16108 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.23.Ch2PVEvent Channel 2 PV event uint8 3ef5 16117 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch2PVEventVal Channel 2 PV event value float32 3ef7 16119 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.23.Ch2Rate Channel 2 rate float32 3ee7 16103 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.23.Ch2Time Channel 2 time time_t 3ee5 16101 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.23.Ch2TSP Channel 2 target set-point float32 3ee3 16099 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput
Segment.23.Ch2UserVal Channel 2 user value float32 3ef9 16121 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh2Us-

erVal
Segment.23.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3eef 16111 Not applicable
Segment.23.Ch2WaitVal Channel 2 wait value float32 3ef1 16113 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait2
Segment.23.Cycles Cycles int16 3ef3 16115 Not applicable
Segment.23.Duration Duration time_t 3ee1 16097 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.23.EndType End type uint8 3ee8 16104 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event1 Event 1 bool 3efa 16122 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event2 Event 2 bool 3efb 16123 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event3 Event 3 bool 3efc 16124 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event4 Event 4 bool 3efd 16125 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event5 Event 5 bool 3efe 16126 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event6 Event 6 bool 3eff 16127 Not applicable
Segment.23.Event7 Event 7 bool 3f00 16128 Not applicable
Segment.23.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3ef2 16114 Not applicable
Segment.23.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6c9e 27806 Not applicable
Segment.23.Type Type uint8 3ee0 16096 Not applicable
Segment.23.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3eed 16109 Not applicable
Segment.24.Ch1Holdback Channel 1 holdback type uint8 3f19 16153 Not applicable
Segment.24.Ch1HoldbackVal Channel 1 holdback value float32 3f1b 16155 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.24.Ch1PVEvent Channel 1 PV event uint8 3f24 16164 Not applicable
Segment.24.Ch1PVEventVal Channel 1 PV event value float32 3f26 16166 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.24.Ch1Rate Channel 1 rate float32 3f16 16150 Set by Programmer.SetUp.RateResolution
Segment.24.Ch1Time Channel 1 time time_t 3f14 16148 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.24.Ch1TSP Channel 1 target set-point float32 3f12 16146 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch1PVInput
Segment.24.Ch1UserVal Channel 1 user value float32 3f28 16168 Same as Programmer.SetUp.ResetCh1Us-

erVal
Segment.24.Ch1Wait Channel 1 Wait uint8 3f1e 16158 Not applicable
Segment.24.Ch1WaitVal Channel 1 wait value float32 3f20 16160 Same as Programmer.SetUp.PVWait1
Segment.24.Ch2Holdback Channel 2 holdback type uint8 3f1a 16154 Not applicable
Segment.24.Ch2HoldbackVal Channel 2 holdback value float32 3f1c 16156 Same as Programmer.SetUp.Ch2PVInput

erVal
Segment.24.Ch2Wait Channel 2 Wait uint8 3f1f 16159 Not applicable
310 HA030554 Issue 16

Segment.24.Cycles Cycles int16 3f23 16163 Not applicable
Segment.24.Duration Duration time_t 3f11 16145 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Segment.24.EndType End type uint8 3f18 16152 Not applicable
Segment.24.Event1 Event 1 bool 3f2a 16170 Not applicable
Segment.24.Event2 Event 2 bool 3f2b 16171 Not applicable
Segment.24.Event3 Event 3 bool 3f2c 16172 Not applicable
Segment.24.Event4 Event 4 bool 3f2d 16173 Not applicable
Segment.24.Event5 Event 5 bool 3f2e 16174 Not applicable
Segment.24.Event6 Event 6 bool 3f2f 16175 Not applicable
Segment.24.GoBackTo Go back to uint8 3f22 16162 Not applicable
Segment.24.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6cb3 27827 Not applicable
Segment.24.Type Type uint8 3f10 16144 Not applicable
Segment.24.WaitFor Wait for uint8 3f1d 16157 Not applicable

erVal

erVal
Segment.25.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6cc8 27848 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 311


erVal

erVal
Segment.26.SegmentName Segment name string_t 6cdd 27869 Not applicable
Steriliser.AutoCounter Automatically increments the cycle number bool 2e0f 11791 Not applicable
Steriliser.CycleNumber Current cycle number int32 2e04 11780 Not applicable
Steriliser.CycleStatus The current cycle status. uint8 2e08 11784 Not applicable
0 = Waiting start 1 = Waiting 2 = Equilibrisation

3 = Sterilising 4 = Passed 5 = Failed
6 = Aborted 7 = Test cycle
Steriliser.CycleTime The total cycle time time_t 2e25 11813 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.EquilibrationTime The equilibration time period for the current cycle. time_t 2e0c 11788 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.FailureDwell1 Failure alarm dwell time for input 1 time_t 2e22 11810 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.FailureDwell2 Failure alarm dwell time for input 2 time_t 2e2b 11819 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.FailureDwell3 Failure alarm dwell time for input 3 time_t 2e2c 11820 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.FailureDwell4 Failure alarm dwell time for input 4 time_t 2e2d 11821 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.FileByTag Name historical files by cycle number and tag bool 2e21 11809 Not applicable
0 = File by Tag Off; 1 = File by Tag On
Steriliser.FileTag Used as part of the historical filename string_t 68f7 26871 Not applicable
Steriliser.Fvalue F0 (A0) time_t 2e26 11814 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.Input1PV Input 1 float32 2e00 11776 0dp
Steriliser.InputType1 Input type 1 uint8 2e1d 11805 Not applicable
0 = Off 1 = thermocouple 2 = Rising pressure

3 = Falling pressure 4 = Rise air detect 5 = Fall air detect
Steriliser.InputType2 Input type 2 (as Input type 1, above) uint8 2e1e 11806 Not applicable
Steriliser.InputType3 Input type 3 (as Input type 1, above) uint8 2e1f 11807 Not applicable
Steriliser.InputType4 Input type 4 (as Input type 1, above) uint8 2e20 11808 Not applicable
Steriliser.IP1BandHigh Sterilisation temperature input 1 band high. float32 2e0a 11786 Same as Steriliser.Input1PV
Steriliser.IP1BandLow Sterilisation temperature input 1 band low. float32 2e0b 11787 Same as Steriliser.Input1PV
312 HA030554 Issue 16

Steriliser.IP1TargetSP Input 1 target setpoint float32 2e07 11783 Same as Steriliser.Input1PV
Steriliser.IP2BandHigh Sterilisation temperature input 2 band high. float32 2e10 11792 Same as Steriliser.Input2PV
Steriliser.IP2BandLow Sterilisation temperature input 2 band low. float32 2e11 11793 Same as Steriliser.Input2PV
Steriliser.LowLimit Low temperature limit for the F0 calculation. float32 2e2a 11818 0dp
Steriliser.MeasuredTemp Measured Temperature used in the F0 calculation. float32 2e27 11815 0dp
Steriliser.PassedOutput 1 = cycle passed; 0 = cycle failed. uint8 2e1c 11804 Not applicable
Steriliser.Remaining The holding time remaining for the current cycle. time_t 2e0e 11790 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.RunningOutput 1 = cycle running; 0 = cycle not running uint8 2e1b 11803 Not applicable
Steriliser.Start121 Start a predefined 121°C cycle bool 2e19 11801 Not applicable
Steriliser.Start134 Start a predefined 134°C cycle bool 2e1a 11802 Not applicable
Steriliser.StartCycle Start a custom cycle bool 2e05 11781 Not applicable
Steriliser.SterilisingTime The total time the load was at sterilisation conditions. time_t 2e0d 11789 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.TargetTemperature Target Temperature for the F0 calculation. float32 2e29 11817 0dp
Steriliser.TargetTime The target time of the sterilisation period. time_t 2e09 11785 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.TargetTime121 The target time for a 121°C cycle time_t 2e23 11811 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.TargetTime134 The target time for a 134°C cycle time_t 2e24 11812 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Steriliser.ZTemperatureInterval The Z temperature interval for the F0 calculation. float32 2e28 11816 0dp
Timer.1.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time_t 2ee0 12000 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.1.In Trigger/Gate input bool 2ee5 12005 Not applicable
Timer.1.Out Output (1 = On; 0 = Off) bool 2ee1 12001 Not applicable
Timer.1.Time Period for the timer (hh:mm:ss) time_t 2ee2 12002 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.1.Triggered 1 = Timer triggered; 0 = Timer not triggered bool 2ee3 12003 Not applicable
Timer.1.Type Type of Timer uint8 2ee4 12004 Not applicable
0 = Disabled (off) 1 = On Pulse 2 = On delay

3 = One shot 4 = Min on.
Timer.2.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time_t 2ee6 12006 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.2.In Trigger/Gate input bool 2eeb 12011 Not applicable
Timer.2.Out Output (1 = On; 0 = Off) bool 2ee7 12007 Not applicable
Timer.2.Time Period for the timer (hh:mm:ss) time_t 2ee8 12008 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.2.Triggered 1 = Timer triggered; 0 = Timer not triggered bool 2ee9 12009 Not applicable
Timer.2.Type Type of Timer (as Timer.1.Type) uint8 2eea 12010 Not applicable
Timer.3.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time_t 2eec 12012 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.3.In Trigger/Gate input bool 2ef1 12017 Not applicable
Timer.3.Out Output (1 = On; 0 = Off) bool 2eed 12013 Not applicable
Timer.3.Time Period for the timer (hh:mm:ss) time_t 2eee 12014 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.3.Triggered 1 = Timer triggered; 0 = Timer not triggered bool 2eef 12015 Not applicable
Timer.3.Type Type of Timer (as Timer.1.Type) uint8 2ef0 12016 Not applicable
Timer.4.ElapsedTime Elapsed Time time_t 2ef2 12018 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.4.In Trigger/Gate input bool 2ef7 12023 Not applicable
Timer.4.Out Output (1 = On; 0 = Off) bool 2ef3 12019 Not applicable
Timer.4.Time Period for the timer (hh:mm:ss) time_t 2ef4 12020 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Timer.4.Triggered 1 = Timer triggered; 0 = Timer not triggered bool 2ef5 12021 Not applicable
Timer.4.Type Type of Timer (as Timer.1.Type) uint8 2ef6 12022 Not applicable
UserLin.1.NumberOfBreakpoints Number of points in user linearisation table 1 uint8 2900 10496 Not applicable
UserLin.1.X1 User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 1 float32 2901 10497 2dp
UserLin.1.X6 User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 6 float32 290b 10507 2dp
HA030554 Issue 16 313

UserLin.1.X7 User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 7 float32 290d 10509 2dp
UserLin.1.X8 User linearisation table 1 ‘X’ value 8 float32 290f 10511 2dp
UserLin.1.Y1 User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 1 float32 2902 10498 2dp
UserLin.1.Y5 User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 5 float32 290a 10506 2dp
UserLin.1.Y6 User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 6 float32 290c 10508 2dp
UserLin.1.Y7 User linearisation table 1 ‘Y’ value 7 float32 290e 10510 2dp
UserLin.2.NumberOfBreakpoints Number of points in user linearisation table 2 uint8 29c0 10688 Not applicable
UserLin.2.X1 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 1 float32 29c1 10689 2dp
314 HA030554 Issue 16

UserLin.2.X6 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 6 float32 29cb 10699 2dp
UserLin.2.X7 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 7 float32 29cd 10701 2dp
UserLin.2.X8 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 8 float32 29cf 10703 2dp
UserLin.2.X9 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 9 float32 29d1 10705 2dp
UserLin.2.X14 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 14 float32 29db 10715 2dp
UserLin.2.X15 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 15 float32 29dd 10717 2dp
UserLin.2.X16 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 16 float32 29df 10719 2dp
UserLin.2.X17 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 17 float32 29e1 10721 2dp
UserLin.2.X22 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 22 float32 29eb 10731 2dp
UserLin.2.X23 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 23 float32 29ed 10733 2dp
UserLin.2.X24 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 24 float32 29ef 10735 2dp
UserLin.2.X25 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 25 float32 29f1 10737 2dp
UserLin.2.X30 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 30 float32 29fb 10747 2dp
UserLin.2.X31 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 31 float32 29fd 10749 2dp
UserLin.2.X32 User linearisation table 2 ‘X’ value 32 float32 29ff 10751 2dp
UserLin.2.Y1 User linearisation table 2 ‘Y’ value 1 float32 29c2 10690 2dp
UserLin.2.Y5 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 5 float32 29ca 10698 2dp
UserLin.2.Y6 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 6 float32 29cc 10700 2dp
UserLin.2.Y7 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 7 float32 29ce 10702 2dp
UserLin.2.Y8 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 8 float32 29d0 10704 2dp
UserLin.2.Y13 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 13 float32 29da 10714 2dp
UserLin.2.Y14 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 14 float32 29dc 10716 2dp
UserLin.2.Y15 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 15 float32 29de 10718 2dp
UserLin.2.Y16 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 16 float32 29e0 10720 2dp
UserLin.2.Y21 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 21 float32 29ea 10730 2dp
UserLin.2.Y22 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 22 float32 29ec 10732 2dp
UserLin.2.Y23 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 23 float32 29ee 10734 2dp
UserLin.2.Y24 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 24 float32 29f0 10736 2dp
UserLin.2.Y29 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 29 float32 29fa 10746 2dp
UserLin.2.Y30 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 30 float32 29fc 10748 2dp
UserLin.2.Y31 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 31 float32 29fe 10750 2dp
UserLin.2.Y32 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 32 float32 2a00 10752 2dp
HA030554 Issue 16 315

UserLin.3.NumberOfBreakpoints Number of points in user linearisation table 32 uint8 2a80 10880 Not applicable
UserLin.3.X1 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 1 float32 2a81 10881 2dp
UserLin.3.X6 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 6 float32 2a8b 10891 2dp
UserLin.3.X7 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 7 float32 2a8d 10893 2dp
UserLin.3.X8 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 8 float32 2a8f 10895 2dp
UserLin.3.X14 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 14 float32 2a9b 10907 2dp
UserLin.3.X15 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 15 float32 2a9d 10909 2dp
UserLin.3.X16 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 16 float32 2a9f 10911 2dp
UserLin.3.X17 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 17 float32 2aa1 10913 2dp
UserLin.3.X22 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 22 float32 2aab 10923 2dp
UserLin.3.X23 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 23 float32 2aad 10925 2dp
UserLin.3.X24 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 24 float32 2aaf 10927 2dp
UserLin.3.X25 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 25 float32 2ab1 10929 2dp
UserLin.3.X30 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 30 float32 2abb 10939 2dp
UserLin.3.X31 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 31 float32 2abd 10941 2dp
UserLin.3.X32 User linearisation table 3 ‘X’ value 32 float32 2abf 10943 2dp
UserLin.3.Y5 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 5 float32 2a8a 10890 2dp
UserLin.3.Y6 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 6 float32 2a8c 10892 2dp
UserLin.3.Y7 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 7 float32 2a8e 10894 2dp
UserLin.3.Y13 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 13 float32 2a9a 10906 2dp
UserLin.3.Y14 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 14 float32 2a9c 10908 2dp
UserLin.3.Y15 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 15 float32 2a9e 10910 2dp
UserLin.3.Y16 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 16 float32 2aa0 10912 2dp
UserLin.3.Y21 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 21 float32 2aaa 10922 2dp
UserLin.3.Y22 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 22 float32 2aac 10924 2dp
UserLin.3.Y23 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 23 float32 2aae 10926 2dp
UserLin.3.Y24 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 24 float32 2ab0 10928 2dp
316 HA030554 Issue 16

UserLin.3.Y29 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 29 float32 2aba 10938 2dp
UserLin.3.Y30 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 30 float32 2abc 10940 2dp
UserLin.3.Y31 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 31 float32 2abe 10942 2dp
UserLin.3.Y32 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 32 float32 2ac0 10944 2dp
UserLin.4.NumberOfBreakpoints Number of points in user linearisation table 4 uint8 2b40 11072 Not applicable
UserLin.4.X1 User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 1 float32 2b41 11073 2dp
UserLin.4.X5 User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value v5 float32 2b49 11081 2dp
UserLin.4.X6 User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 6 float32 2b4b 11083 2dp
UserLin.4.X7 User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 7 float32 2b4d 11085 2dp
UserLin.4.X8 User linearisation table 4 ‘X’ value 8 float32 2b4f 11087 2dp
UserLin.4.Y1 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 1 float32 2b42 11074 2dp
UserLin.4.Y5 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 5 float32 2b4a 11082 2dp
UserLin.4.Y6 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 6 float32 2b4c 11084 2dp
UserLin.4.Y7 User linearisation table 4 ‘Y’ value 7 float32 2b4e 11086 2dp
HA030554 Issue 16 317

UsrVal.1.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2e8c 11916 Set by UsrVal.1.Resolution
UsrVal.1.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2e8d 11917 Set by UsrVal.1.Resolution
UsrVal.1.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2e90 11920 Not applicable
UsrVal.1.Status User Value 1 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2e8f 11919 Not applicable
UsrVal.1.Units Units of the value string_t 68fc 26876 Not applicable
UsrVal.1.Val The User Value float32 2e8e 11918 Set by UsrVal.1.Resolution
UsrVal.2.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2e91 11921 Set by UsrVal.2.Resolution
UsrVal.2.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2e92 11922 Set by UsrVal.2.Resolution
UsrVal.2.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2e95 11925 Not applicable
UsrVal.2.Status User Value 2 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2e94 11924 Not applicable
UsrVal.2.Units Units of the value string_t 6902 26882 Not applicable
UsrVal.2.Val The User Value float32 2e93 11923 Set by UsrVal.2.Resolution
UsrVal.3.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2e96 11926 Set by UsrVal.3.Resolution
UsrVal.3.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2e97 11927 Set by UsrVal.3.Resolution
UsrVal.3.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2e9a 11930 Not applicable
UsrVal.3.Status User Value 3 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2e99 11929 Not applicable
UsrVal.3.Val The User Value float32 2e98 11928 Set by UsrVal.3.Resolution
UsrVal.4.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2e9b 11931 Set by UsrVal.4.Resolution
UsrVal.4.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2e9c 11932 Set by UsrVal.4.Resolution
UsrVal.4.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2e9f 11935 Not applicable
UsrVal.4.Status User Value 4 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2e9e 11934 Not applicable
UsrVal.4.Units Units of the value string_t 690e 26894 Not applicable
UsrVal.4.Val The User Value float32 2e9d 11933 Set by UsrVal.4.Resolution
UsrVal.5.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2ea0 11936 Set by UsrVal.5.Resolution
UsrVal.5.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2ea1 11937 Set by UsrVal.5.Resolution
UsrVal.5.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2ea4 11940 Not applicable
UsrVal.5.Status User Value 5 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2ea3 11939 Not applicable
UsrVal.5.Val The User Value float32 2ea2 11938 Set by UsrVal.5.Resolution
UsrVal.6.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2ea5 11941 Set by UsrVal.6.Resolution
UsrVal.6.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2ea6 11942 Set by UsrVal.6.Resolution
UsrVal.6.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2ea9 11945 Not applicable
UsrVal.6.Status User Value 6 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2ea8 11944 Not applicable
UsrVal.6.Units Units of the value string_t 691a 26906 Not applicable
UsrVal.6.Val The User Value float32 2ea7 11943 Set by UsrVal.6.Resolution
UsrVal.7.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2eaa 11946 Set by UsrVal.7.Resolution
UsrVal.7.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2eab 11947 Set by UsrVal.7.Resolution
UsrVal.7.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2eae 11950 Not applicable
UsrVal.7.Status User Value 7 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2ead 11949 Not applicable
UsrVal.7.Val The User Value float32 2eac 11948 Set by UsrVal.7.Resolution
UsrVal.8.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2eaf 11951 Set by UsrVal.8.Resolution
UsrVal.8.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2eb0 11952 Set by UsrVal.8.Resolution
UsrVal.8.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2eb3 11955 Not applicable
UsrVal.8.Status User Value 8 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2eb2 11954 Not applicable
318 HA030554 Issue 16

UsrVal.8.Val The User Value float32 2eb1 11953 Set by UsrVal.8.Resolution
UsrVal.9.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2eb4 11956 Set by UsrVal.9.Resolution
UsrVal.9.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2eb5 11957 Set by UsrVal.9.Resolution
UsrVal.9.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2eb8 11960 Not applicable
UsrVal.9.Status User Value 9 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2eb7 11959 Not applicable
UsrVal.9.Units Units of the value string_t 692c 26924 Not applicable
UsrVal.9.Val The User Value float32 2eb6 11958 Set by UsrVal.9.Resolution
UsrVal.10.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2eb9 11961 Set by UsrVal.10.Resolution
UsrVal.10.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2eba 11962 Set by UsrVal.10.Resolution
UsrVal.10.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2ebd 11965 Not applicable
UsrVal.10.Status User Value 10 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2ebc 11964 Not applicable
UsrVal.10.Val The User Value float32 2ebb 11963 Set by UsrVal.10.Resolution
UsrVal.11.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2ebe 11966 Set by UsrVal.11.Resolution
UsrVal.11.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2ebf 11967 Set by UsrVal.11.Resolution
UsrVal.11.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2ec2 11970 Not applicable
UsrVal.11.Status User Value 11 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2ec1 11969 Not applicable
UsrVal.11.Val The User Value float32 2ec0 11968 Set by UsrVal.11.Resolution
UsrVal.12.HighLimit User Value High Limit float32 2ec3 11971 Set by UsrVal.12.Resolution
UsrVal.12.LowLimit User Value Low Limit float32 2ec4 11972 Set by UsrVal.12.Resolution
UsrVal.12.Resolution Result Resolution uint8 2ec7 11975 Not applicable
UsrVal.12.Status User Value 12 Status (0 = Good (OK); 7 = Bad (Error)) bool 2ec6 11974 Not applicable
UsrVal.12.Units Units of the value string_t 693e 26942 Not applicable
UsrVal.12.Val The User Value float32 2ec5 11973 Set by UsrVal.12.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01c0 448 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1c50 7248 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1c4b 7243 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1c48 7240 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1c4a 7242 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1c42 7234 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1c49 7241 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1c47 7239 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1c45 7237 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1c44 7236 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1c4e 7246 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1c51 7249 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Latch Alarm latch type (0 = None; 1 = Auto; 2 = Manual; 3 = Trig- uint8 1c41 7233 Not applicable
ger
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1c4f 7247 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1c46 7238 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Status Indication of the active and acknowledge status uint8 0122 290 Not applicable
0 = Unacknowledged 1 = None
2 = Active 3 = Inactive
4 = Acknowledged
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1c43 7235 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm1.Type Alarm type uint8 1c40 7232 Not applicable
0 = None 1 = Abs High 2 = Abs Low

3 = Dev high 4 = Dev Low 5 = Dev band
6 = ROC rising 7 = ROC falling 10 = Dig Off
11 = Dig High 12 = Dig Low
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1c70 7280 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1c6b 7275 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1c6a 7274 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time uint8 1c69 7273 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 319

VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1c6e 7278 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1c71 7281 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1c61 7265 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1c6f 7279 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Status As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status uint8 0123 291 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1c60 7264 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4b00 19200 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1c23 7203 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.HighCutOff High cut off value for totalisers and counters float32 1c05 7173 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Input1 Input 1 value float32 1c07 7175 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.LowCutOff Low cutoff value for totalisers and counters float32 1c04 7172 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1c06 7174 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Operation Specifies the operation of the virtual channel uint8 1c01 7169 Not applicable
0 = Off 2 = Add 3 = Subtract

4 = Multiply 5 = Divide 6 = Group avg
7 = Group min 8 = Group max 9 = Modbus i/p
11 = Copy 20 = Grp min latch 21 = Grp max latch
34 = Chan max 35 = Chan min 36 = Chan avg
43 = Config rev 64 = Off 65 = On
80 = Off 81 = On
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 1c0a 7178
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1c0c 7180 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.PresetValue The preset value float32 1c0d 7181 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV The virtual channel output value float32 0120 288 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1c0b 7179 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1c02 7170 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1c11 7185 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1c12 7186 Set by VirtualChannel.1.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Status Virtual Channel output status uint8 0121 289 Not applicable
0 =Good 1 = Off 2 = Over range

6 = Overflow 7 = bad 8 = HW exceeded
9 = No data 12 = Comms channel error
VirtualChannel.1.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 1c09 7177 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1c0e 7182 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Type Specifies the type of virtual channel uint8 1c00 7168 Not applicable
1 = Maths; 2 = Totaliser; 3 = Counter
VirtualChannel.1.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4b15 19221 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.1.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1c03 7171 1dp
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.Colour Configures the trend colour for this virtual channel uint8 1c20 7200 Not applicable
0 = Red 1 = Blue 2 = Green

3 = Honey 4 = Violet 5 = Russet
6 = Dark blue 7 = Jade 8 = Magenta
9 = Dusky rose 10 = Yellow 11 = Powder blue
12 = Dark red 13 = Avocado 14 = Indigo
15 = Dark brown 16 = Aegean 17 = Cyan
18 = Aubergine 19 = Dark orange 20 = Pale yellow
21 = Hyacinth 22 = Dark green 23 = Sugar pink
24 = Bluebell 25 = Orange 26 = Pink
27 = Buttersilk 28 = Terracotta 29 = Blue babe
30 = Lime 31 = Blue jive 32 = Cucumber
33 = Eurogreen 34 = Wheatgerm 35 = Sea Blue
36 = Ginger 37 = Aqua pool 38 = Pale red
39 = Pale blue 40 = Lilac 41 = Sky blue
42 = Wild moss 43 = Turquoise 44 = Pale green
45 = Coffee 49 = Dark Grey 53 = Light grey
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1c22 7202 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.1.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1c21 7201 Same as VirtualChannel.1.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1cd0 7376 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1ccb 7371 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1cc8 7368 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1cca 7370 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1cc2 7362 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1cc9 7369 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1cc7 7367 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1cc5 7365 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1cc4 7364 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
320 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1cce 7374 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1cd1 7377 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1cc1 7361 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1ccf 7375 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1cc6 7366 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1cc3 7363 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1cc0 7360 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1cf0 7408 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1ceb 7403 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1ce8 7400 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1cea 7402 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1ce2 7394 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1ce9 7401 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1ce7 7399 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1ce5 7397 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1ce4 7396 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1cee 7406 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1cf1 7409 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1ce1 7393 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1cef 7407 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1ce6 7398 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1ce3 7395 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1ce0 7392 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4b1b 19227 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1ca3 7331 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1c85 7301 Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.2.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1c84 7300 Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1c81 7297 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 1c8a 7306 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1c8c 7308 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1c8d 7309 Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1c8b 7307 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places uint8 1c82 7298 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1c91 7313 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1c92 7314 Set by VirtualChannel.2.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Status As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status uint8 0125 293 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1c8e 7310 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1c80 7296 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1ca0 7328 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.2.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1ca2 7330 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.2.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1ca1 7329 Same as VirtualChannel.2.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1d50 7504 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1d4b 7499 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1d48 7496 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1d4a 7498 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1d42 7490 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1d49 7497 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1d47 7495 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1d45 7493 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1d44 7492 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
HA030554 Issue 16 321

VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1d4e 7502 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1d51 7505 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1d41 7489 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1d4f 7503 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1d46 7494 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Status As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status uint8 012a 298 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1d43 7491 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1d40 7488 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1d6b 7531 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1d68 7528 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1d6a 7530 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1d62 7522 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1d69 7529 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1d67 7527 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1d65 7525 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1d64 7524 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1d6e 7534 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1d61 7521 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1d6f 7535 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1d66 7526 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Status As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status uint8 012b 299 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1d63 7523 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1d60 7520 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1d23 7459 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1d05 7429 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Input1 Input 1 float32 1d07 7431 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Input2 Input 2 float32 1d08 7432 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1d04 7428 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1d06 7430 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1d01 7425 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 1d0a 7434 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1d0c 7436 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1d0d 7437 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1d0b 7435 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1d02 7426 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1d11 7441 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1d12 7442 Set by VirtualChannel.3.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.3.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 1d09 7433 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1d0e 7438 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1d00 7424 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4b4b 19275 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1d03 7427 1dp
VirtualChannel.3.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1d20 7456 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.3.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1d22 7458 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.3.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1d21 7457 Same as VirtualChannel.3.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1dd0 7632 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1dcb 7627 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1dc8 7624 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1dca 7626 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1dc2 7618 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1dc9 7625 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1dc7 7623 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1dc5 7621 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1dc4 7620 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1dce 7630 Not applicable
322 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1dd1 7633 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1dc1 7617 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1dcf 7631 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1dc6 7622 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Status As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status uint8 012e 302 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1dc3 7619 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1dc0 7616 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1df0 7664 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1deb 7659 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1de8 7656 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1dea 7658 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1de2 7650 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1de9 7657 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ time_t 1de5 7653 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1de4 7652 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1dee 7662 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1df1 7665 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1de1 7649 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1def 7663 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1de6 7654 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Status As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Status uint8 012f 303 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1de3 7651 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1de0 7648 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1da3 7587 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1d85 7557 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Input1 Input 1 value float32 1d87 7559 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Input2 Input 2 value float32 1d88 7560 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1d84 7556 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1d86 7558 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1d81 7553 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Period Averaging period int32 1d8a 7562 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1d8c 7564 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1d8d 7565 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV The virtual channel output value float32 012c 300 Set by VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1d8b 7563 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1d82 7554 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Status As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status uint8 012d 301 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 1d89 7561 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1d8e 7566 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1d80 7552 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1d83 7555 1dp
VirtualChannel.4.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1da0 7584 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.4.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1da2 7586 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.4.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1da1 7585 Same as VirtualChannel.4.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1e50 7760 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1e4b 7755 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1e48 7752 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1e4a 7754 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1e42 7746 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1e49 7753 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1e47 7751 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1e45 7749 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1e44 7748 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1e4e 7758 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1e51 7761 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 323

VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1e41 7745 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1e4f 7759 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1e46 7750 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1e43 7747 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1e40 7744 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1e70 7792 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1e6b 7787 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1e6a 7786 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1e6e 7790 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1e71 7793 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1e6f 7791 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4b6c 19308 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1e23 7715 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1e05 7685 Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Input1 Input 1 value float32 1e07 7687 Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1e04 7684 Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1e06 7686 Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1e01 7681 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 1e0a 7690 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1e0c 7692 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1e0d 7693 Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1e0b 7691 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1e02 7682 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1e11 7697 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1e12 7698 Set by VirtualChannel.5.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.5.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 1e09 7689 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1e0e 7694 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1e00 7680 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1e03 7683 1dp
VirtualChannel.5.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1e20 7712 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.5.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1e22 7714 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.5.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1e21 7713 Same as VirtualChannel.5.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01ca 458 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1ed0 7888 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1ecb 7883 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1ec8 7880 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1eca 7882 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1ec2 7874 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1ec9 7881 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1ec7 7879 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1ec5 7877 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1ec4 7876 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1ece 7886 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1ed1 7889 Not applicable
324 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1ec1 7873 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1ecf 7887 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1ec6 7878 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1ec3 7875 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1ec0 7872 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01cb 459 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1ef0 7920 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1eeb 7915 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1ee8 7912 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1eea 7914 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1ee2 7906 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1ee9 7913 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1ee7 7911 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1ee5 7909 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1ee4 7908 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1eee 7918 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1ef1 7921 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1ee1 7905 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1eef 7919 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1ee6 7910 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1ee3 7907 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1ee0 7904 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1ea3 7843 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1e85 7813 Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1e84 7812 Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1e86 7814 Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1e81 7809 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 1e8a 7818 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1e8c 7820 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1e8d 7821 Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1e8b 7819 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1e82 7810 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1e91 7825 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1e92 7826 Set by VirtualChannel.6.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.6.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 1e89 7817 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1e8e 7822 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1e80 7808 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4b9c 19356 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1e83 7811 1dp
VirtualChannel.6.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1ea0 7840 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.6.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1ea2 7842 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.6.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1ea1 7841 Same as VirtualChannel.6.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01cc 460 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1f50 8016 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1f4b 8011 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1f48 8008 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1f4a 8010 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1f42 8002 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1f49 8009 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1f47 8007 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1f45 8005 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1f44 8004 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1f4e 8014 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1f51 8017 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 325

VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1f41 8001 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1f4f 8015 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1f46 8006 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1f43 8003 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1f40 8000 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01cd 461 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1f6b 8043 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1f68 8040 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1f6a 8042 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1f62 8034 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1f69 8041 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1f67 8039 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1f65 8037 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1f64 8036 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1f6e 8046 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1f61 8033 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1f6f 8047 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1f66 8038 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Status As VirtualChanneAlarm trigger thresholdAlarm threshold float32 1f63 8035 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1f60 8032 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4ba2 19362 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1f23 7971 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1f05 7941 Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Input1 Input 1 value float32 1f07 7943 Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1f04 7940 Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1f06 7942 Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1f01 7937 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Period Averaging period int32 1f0a 7946 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1f0c 7948 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1f0d 7949 Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1f0b 7947 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1f02 7938 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1f11 7953 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1f12 7954 Set by VirtualChannel.7.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.7.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before calculation is made time_t 1f09 7945 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1f0e 7950 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1f00 7936 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4bb7 19383 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1f03 7939 1dp
VirtualChannel.7.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1f20 7968 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.7.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1f22 7970 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.7.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1f21 7969 Same as VirtualChannel.7.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01ce 462 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1fd0 8144 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1fcb 8139 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1fc8 8136 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1fca 8138 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1fc2 8130 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1fc9 8137 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1fc7 8135 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1fc5 8133 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1fc4 8132 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1fce 8142 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1fd1 8145 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1fc1 8129 Not applicable
326 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1fcf 8143 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1fc6 8134 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1fc3 8131 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1fc0 8128 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01cf 463 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 1ff0 8176 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 1feb 8171 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 1fe8 8168 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 1fea 8170 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 1fe2 8162 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 1fe9 8169 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 1fe7 8167 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 1fe5 8165 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 1fe4 8164 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 1fee 8174 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 1ff1 8177 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 1fe1 8161 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 1fef 8175 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 1fe6 8166 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 1fe3 8163 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Alarm2.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 1fe0 8160 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4bbd 19389 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 1fa3 8099 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1f85 8069 Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 1f84 8068 Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 1f86 8070 Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 1f81 8065 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 1f8a 8074 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1f8c 8076 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 1f8d 8077 Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1f8b 8075 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 1f82 8066 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 1f91 8081 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 1f92 8082 Set by VirtualChannel.8.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.8.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 1f89 8073 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 1f8e 8078 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 1f80 8064 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4bd2 19410 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 1f83 8067 1dp
VirtualChannel.8.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 1fa0 8096 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.8.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1fa2 8098 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.8.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 1fa1 8097 Same as VirtualChannel.8.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01d0 464 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Acknowledgement 1 = alarm acknowledged bool 2050 8272 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 204b 8267 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount’ float32 2048 8264 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 204a 8266 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Block 0 = Blocking alarms off; 1 = Blocking alarms on uint8 2042 8258 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.ChangeTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Change Time’ uint8 2049 8265 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Deviation Deviation alarm ‘Deviation Value’ float32 2047 8263 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Dwell Alarm dwell time time_t 2045 8261 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Hysteresis Alarm hysteresis value float32 2044 8260 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 204e 8270 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = alarm inhibited bool 2051 8273 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Latch As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Latch uint8 2041 8257 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 327

VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 204f 8271 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Reference Deviation alarm ‘Reference’ value float32 2046 8262 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Threshold Alarm trigger threshold float32 2043 8259 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm1.Type As VirtualChannel1.Alarm1.Type uint8 2040 8256 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Amount Rate-of-change alarm ‘Amount float32 2068 8296 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Alarm2.Inhibit Inhibit bool 2071 8305 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4bd8 19416 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 2023 8227 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.HighCutOff The highest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 2005 8197 Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Input1 Input 1 value float32 2007 8199 Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.LowCutOff The lowest input value that will be totalised/counted float32 2004 8196 Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.ModbusInput Modbus input value float32 2006 8198 Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Operation As VirtualChannel1.Main.Operation uint8 2001 8193 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 200a 8202 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 200c 8204 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.PresetValue The Preset value float32 200d 8205 Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 200b 8203 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution Number of decimal places (0 to 6) uint8 2002 8194 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Rollover A pulse signal to indicate PV (output) has just rolled over bool 2011 8209 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.RolloverValue Rollover value float32 2012 8210 Set by VirtualChannel.9.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.9.Main.TimeRemaining Time remaining before the calculation is made time_t 2009 8201 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 200e 8206 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Type As VirtualChannel1.Main.Type uint8 2000 8192 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4bed 19437 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Main.UnitsScaler Units scaler for totalisers float32 2003 8195 1dp
VirtualChannel.9.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 2020 8224 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.9.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 2022 8226 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.9.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 2021 8225 Same as VirtualChannel.9.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 20cb 8395 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 20ca 8394 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 20ce 8398 Not applicable
328 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.10.Alarm1.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 20cf 8399 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Active 1 = alarm source active, or safe but not ack’d bool 20eb 8427 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.AverageTime Rate-of-change alarm ‘Average time’ time_t 20ea 8426 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.Inactive 1 = alarm source safe and ack’d (if necessary) bool 20ee 8430 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Alarm2.NotAcknowledged 1 = alarm has not been acknowledged bool 20ef 8431 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4bf3 19443 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Disable 1 = Virtual channel disabled bool 20a3 8355 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Period Averaging period int32 208a 8330 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4c08 19464 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Trend.Colour As VirtualChannel1.Trend.Colour uint8 20a0 8352 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.10.Trend.SpanHigh Specifies the highest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 20a2 8354 Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.10.Trend.SpanLow Specifies the lowest PV (output value) to be displayed float32 20a1 8353 Same as VirtualChannel.10.Main.PV
HA030554 Issue 16 329

VirtualChannel.11.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4c0e 19470 Not applicable
330 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.12.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4c29 19497 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.12.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4c3e 19518 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 331

VirtualChannel.14.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01da 474 Not applicable
332 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.14.Alarm2.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01db 475 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.14.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4c5f 19551 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.14.Main.PresetValue The preset value float32 228d 8845 Set by VirtualChannel.14.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.15.Alarm1.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01de 478 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.15.Alarm1.Inhibit 1 = Alarm inhibited bool 2351 9041 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 333

VirtualChannel.15.Alarm2.Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge alarm bool 01dd 477 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.15.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4c7b 19579 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.15.Main.Operation Specifies the operation of the virtual channel uint8 2301 8961 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.15.Main.PresetValue Specifies the preset value float32 230d 8973 Set by VirtualChannel.15.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.15.Main.Resolution Specifies the resolution/number of decimal places uint8 2302 8962 Not applicable
334 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.16.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4cab 19627 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4cb1 19633 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Period The time period over which the calculation is made int32 23ca 9162 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Preset Initiate preset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 23cc 9164 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.PresetValue Specifies the preset value float32 23cd 9165 Set by VirtualChannel.17.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.17.Main.PV The virtual channel output value float32 015e 350 Set by VirtualChannel.17.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Reset Initiate reset. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 23cb 9163 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Status As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status uint8 015f 351 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes bool 23ce 9166 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.17.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4cc6 19654 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.18.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4ccc 19660 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.18.Main.Trigger Increment/decrement counter. 0 = No; 1 = Yes) bool 240e 9230 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.18.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4ce1 19681 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 335

VirtualChannel.19.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4ce7 19687 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.19.Main.Status TAs VirtualChannel1.Main.Statusv uint8 0163 355 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.19.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4cfc 19708 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.20.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4d02 19714 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.20.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4d17 19735 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.21.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4d1d 19741 Not applicable
336 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.22.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4d4d 19789 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.23.Main.PV The virtual channel output value float32 016a 362 Set by VirtualChannel.23.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.23.Main.Status As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status uint8 016b 363 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 337

VirtualChannel.24.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4d6e 19822 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.25.Main.PV The virtual channel output value float32 016e 366 Set by VirtualChannel.25.Main.Resolution
VirtualChannel.25.Main.Status As VirtualChannel1.Main.Status uint8 016f 367 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.25.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4d9e 19870 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.26.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4da4 19876 Not applicable
338 HA030554 Issue 16

VirtualChannel.26.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4db9 19897 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.27.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4dbf 19903 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.27.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4dd4 19924 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.28.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4dda 19930 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 339

VirtualChannel.28.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4def 19951 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.29.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4df5 19957 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.29.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4e0a 19978 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.30.Main.Descriptor Virtual Channel descriptor string_t 4e10 19984 Not applicable
VirtualChannel.30.Main.Units Units descriptor string_t 4e25 20005 Not applicable
340 HA030554 Issue 16

WebServer.Status Status uint8 3044 12356 Not applicable
WebServer.Enabled Enabled uint8 3045 12357 Not applicable
WebServer.Port Port uint8 3046 12358 Not applicable
WebServer.Security Security uint8 3047 12359 Not applicable
WebServer.Username Username string_t 776f 30575 Not applicable
WebServer.Password Password string_t 77d4 30676 Not applicable
Zirconia.aC_CO_O2 Carbon Activity Between CO and O2 float32 289e 10398 4dp
Zirconia.BalanceIntegral Balance Integral bool 289d 10397 Not applicable
Zirconia.CarbonPot Calculated Carbon Potential float32 2892 10386 Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Zirconia.Clean.AbortClean 1 = Abort cleaning process bool 28b5 10421 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.CantClean 1 = can’t clean bool 28c3 10435 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanAbort 1 = Cleaning cycle has been aborted bool 28c4 10436 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanEnable 1 = probe cleaning allowed bool 28b2 10418 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanFreq Interval between probe cleaning cycles time_t 28aa 10410 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.Clean.CleanMaxTemp Maximum temperature for cleaning. If, during the cleaning float32 28b4 10420 0dp
cycle, the probe temperature exceeds this value, cleaning is
aborted.
Zirconia.Clean.CleanMsgReset 1 = Clear cleaning related alarms bool 28b3 10419 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanProbe 1 = Initiate a probe cleaning cycle bool 28b0 10416 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.CleanRecoveryTime The time taken to recover from last clean. time_t 28b6 10422 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
0 = max. clean recovery time exceeded last time
Zirconia.Clean.CleanTemp 1 = Clean cycle aborted because cleaning temperature was bool 28c5 10437 Not applicable
too high.
Zirconia.Clean.CleanTime The time for which the probe is cleaned time_t 28ab 10411 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.Clean.CleanValve 1 = Enable probe cleaning valve bool 28af 10415 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.LastCleanMv Probe output after last clean, in mV float32 28b7 10423 0dp
Zirconia.Clean.MaxRcovTime Max. recovery time after a purge time_t 28ad 10413 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.Clean.MinRcovTime Min. recovery time after a purge time_t 28ac 10412 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.Clean.ProbeFault 1 = Probe failed to recover following the clean cycle bool 28ae 10414 Not applicable
Zirconia.Clean.Time2Clean Time to next cleaning cycle time_t 28b1 10417 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.CleanFreq Interval between cleaning cycles time_t 2889 10377 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.CleanProbe Initiates a demand cleaning cycle bool 289a 10394 Not applicable
Zirconia.CleanState Cleaning State (0 = Waiting, 1 = Cleaning, 2 = Recovering) uint8 2899 10393 Not applicable
Zirconia.CleanTime The time for which the probe is cleaned time_t 288a 10378 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.CleanValve 1 = Enable probe cleaning valve bool 2898 10392 Not applicable
Zirconia.DewPoint Calculated Dewpoint float32 2893 10387 Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Zirconia.GasRef Reference value for hydrogen concentration float32 2882 10370 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Ideal Gas ref value when Oxygen Type = Nernst float32 28a9 10409 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_InUse The CO gas measurement value being used float32 28a4 10404 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Local Reference value for CO concentration float32 28a1 10401 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_Remote CO concentration from remote source float32 28a2 10402 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.CO_RemoteEn 1 = Allow remote gas measurement bool 28a3 10403 Not applicable
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_InUse The hydrogen gas measurement value being used float32 28a8 10408 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Local Reference value for hydrogen concentration float32 28a5 10405 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_Remote Hydrogen concentration from remote source float32 28a6 10406 1dp
Zirconia.GasRefs.H2_RemoteEn 1 = Allow remote gas measurement bool 28a7 10407 Not applicable
Zirconia.MaxRcovTime Maximum recovery time after a purge time_t 288c 10380 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.MinCalTemp Min. temp at which the calculation is valid float32 2886 10374 Same as Zirconia.TempInput
Zirconia.MinRcovTime Minimum recovery time after a purge time_t 288b 10379 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.NumResolution Number of decimal places uint8 2881 10369 Not applicable
Zirconia.Oxygen Calculated Oxygen value float32 2894 10388 Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Zirconia.OxygenExp Exponent used by log oxygen calculations int16 288d 10381 Not applicable
Zirconia.OxygenType The oxygen equation being used. uint8 28a0 10400 Not applicable
0 = Nernst 1=Nernst Bosch

2 = Nernst CP 3= Ferronova
Zirconia.ProbeFault Probe Clean Recovery Warning bool 2896 10390 Not applicable
Zirconia.ProbeInput Probe input in mV float32 2890 10384 0dp
Zirconia.ProbeOffset Probe offset in mV float32 2891 10385 Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Zirconia.ProbeState State of the probe measurement system uint8 289f 10399 Not applicable
HA030554 Issue 16 341

0 = Measuring 1 = Cleaning
2 = Clean Recovery 3 = Test impedance
4 = Impedance recovery 5 = Not ready
Zirconia.ProbeStatus Status of Probe uint8 289c 10396 Not applicable
0 = OK 1 = mVSbr
2 = TempSbr 3 = MincalcT
Zirconia.ProbeType Type of Probe uint8 2880 10368 Not applicable
25 = MMI
26 = AACC 27 = Dray 28 = Accu
29 = SSI 30 = MacD 31 = Bosch
32 = Barber 33 = ferono 34 = PrbmV
35 = Eurotherm
Zirconia.ProcFactor Process Factor (Value defined by probe manufacturer) float32 2888 10376 1dp
Zirconia.PVFrozen 1 = PV frozen bool 2897 10391 Not applicable
Zirconia.RemGasEn 1 = Enable use of remote gas reference bool 2884 10372 Not applicable
Zirconia.RemGasRef Remote Gas Reference Value float32 2883 10371 1dp
Zirconia.SootAlm 1 = Soot alarm active bool 2895 10389 Not applicable
Zirconia.TempInput Probe temperature Input float32 288e 10382 0dp
Zirconia.TempOffset Temperature Offset float32 288f 10383 Set by Zirconia.Resolution
Zirconia.Time2Clean Time To Next Clean time_t 289b 10395 Set by Network.Modbus.TimeFormat
Zirconia.Tolerance Sooting Tolerance float32 2887 10375 1dp
Zirconia.WrkGas Working Reference Gas Value float32 2885 10373 1dp
342 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller BACnet
BACnet
BACnet Objects
In BACnet, objects are collections of properties, each representing some bit of
information. In addition to standard defined properties, objects may include
vendor-defined properties as long as they function in accordance with the standard.
BACnet also defines the expected behaviour from each property for that object. What
makes the object-oriented approach work is that every object and every property as
defined by the system is accessible in exactly the same manner. See Section
"BACnet Object Mapping" on page 343 for further details.
BACnet Services
The process of reading or writing to a property is what BACnet calls a service.
Services are the methods used by any BACnet device when it communicates with
another BACnet device, including retrieving information, transmitting information or
communicating an action. The standard defines a wide range of services for
accessing objects and their properties. See Section "BACnet Services" on page 347
for further details.
BACnet Object Mapping
Mapping to I/O and Loop Data Points

BACnet objects are mapped to nanodac I/O and Loop data points as shown in Table
2.
Object types are denoted in the table as follows:
AI – Analogue Input
AV – Analogue Value
BI – Binary Input
BV – Binary Value
CS – Character String
MSI – Multi State Input
Input channels 5-8 are instantiated as BACnet objects if the 'Dual Input Channels'
option is set to ‘05..08’.
Table 2: BACnet Object Representation of I/O and Loops
Object Name Type Data Parameter Equivalent Modbus Path R/W

AI PV Channel.1.Main.PV
Channel.1.Main.PV R
PV Status Channel.1.Main.Status
Channel.1.Alarm1.Threshold AV AL1 Threshold Channel.1.Alarm1.Threshold R/W
Input Channel 1
Channel.1.Alarm1.Status MSI AL1 Status Channel.1.Alarm1.Status R
HA030554 Issue 16 343

BACnet nanodac™ Recorder / Controller

Channel.2.Main.PV R
Input Channel 2
Channel.3.Main.PV R
Input Channel 3
Channel.4.Main.PV R
Input Channel 4
Input Channel
Instantiated similar to above (if required)
5-8
Process
Loop.1.Main.PV AV Loop.1.Main.PV R/W
Variable
Loop.1.Main.TargetSP AV Target SP Loop.1.Main.TargetSP R/W
Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP AI Working SP Loop.1.Main.WorkingSP R
Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut AI Working OP Loop.1.Main.ActiveOut R
Loop.1.Main.AutoMan AV Auto/Manual Loop.1.Main.AutoMan R/W
Loop 1 Manual OP
Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal AV Loop.1.OP.ManualOutVal R/W
Value
Proportional
Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand AV Loop.1.PID.ProportionalBand R/W
Value
Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime AV Integral Value Loop.1.PID.IntegralTime R/W
Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime AV Derivative Value Loop.1.PID.DerivativeTime R/W
Loop.1.Setup.LoopName CS Loop Name Loop.1.Setup.LoopName R
Process
Loop.2.Main.PV AV Loop.2.Main.PV R/W
Variable
Loop.2.Main.TargetSP AV Target SP Loop.2.Main.TargetSP R/W
Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP AI Working SP Loop.2.Main.WorkingSP R
Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut AI Working OP Loop.2.Main.ActiveOut R
Loop.2.Main.AutoMan AV Auto/Manual Loop.2.Main.AutoMan R/W
Loop 2 Manual OP
Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal AV Loop.2.OP.ManualOutVal R/W
Value
Proportional
Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand AV Loop.2.PID.ProportionalBand R/W
Value
Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime AV Integral Value Loop.2.PID.IntegralTime R/W
Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime AV Derivative Value Loop.2.PID.DerivativeTime R/W
Loop.2.Setup.LoopName CS Loop Name Loop.2.Setup.LoopName R
344 HA030554 Issue 16


Steam.1.HeatFlow AI HeatFlow Steam.1.HeatFlow R
Steam.1.MassFlow AI MassFlow Steam.1.MassFlow R
Steam.1.HeatConsumed AI HeatConsumed Steam.1.HeatConsumed R
Steam Tables
Steam.2.WaterEnth AI WaterEnth Steam.2.WaterEnth R
Steam.2.SteamEnth AI SteamEnth Steam.2.SteamEnth R
Steam.2.CalcValue AI CalcValue Steam.2.CalcValue R
DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Output BI Dig In A DigitalIO.DI_LALC.Output R
DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Output BI Dig In B DigitalIO.DI_LBLC.Output R
DigitalIO.1A1B.Output BI I/O 1 - Output DigitalIO.1A1B.Output R
DigitalIO.1A1B.PV AI I/O 1 - Input DigitalIO.1A1B.PV R
Digital I/O
DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Output BI Relay Out 4 DigitalIO.RELAY_4AC.Output R
DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Output BI Relay Out 5 DigitalIO.RELAY_5AC.Output R
Mapping to Virtual Channels

BACnet objects are mapped to nanodac virtual channels as shown in Table 3. A
maximum of 30 virtual channel objects are supported.
Table 3: BACnet Object Representation of Virtual Channels
Data
Object Name Type Equivalent Modbus Path R/W
Parameter
PV VirtualChannel.n.Main.PV
VirtualChannel.n.Main.PV AI VirtualChannel.n.Main.Sta R
PV Status
tus
AL1 VirtualChannel.n.Alarm1.T
VirtualChannel.n.Alarm1.Threshold AV R/W
Threshold hreshold
Virtual Channel
(n, m) VirtualChannel.n.Alarm1.S
VirtualChannel.n.Alarm1.Status MSI AL1 Status R
tatus
AL2 VirtualChannel.n.Alarm2.T
VirtualChannel.n.Alarm2.Threshold AV R/W
Threshold hreshold
VirtualChannel.n.Alarm2.S
VirtualChannel.n.Alarm2.Status MSI AL2 Status R
tatus
HA030554 Issue 16 345

Read/Write Access to Internal Modbus Registers

Read/write access to any internal Modbus register is provided using pairs of BACnet
objects named ‘User Parameters’ as shown in Table 4.
30 User Parameter pairs (numbered 1 to 30) are supported.
Table 4: Modbus Register Access
Object Name Type Data Parameter Internal Path R/W

UserParameter.n.Address AV VirtualChannel.n.Alarm1.Threshold R/W
R/W User Parameter n
UserParameter.n.Value AV VirtualChannel.n.Alarm1.Status R/W
This functionality allows the BACnet user to access any internal parameter that is
available in the standard Modbus address space. Pairs of values as shown in Table 4
are implemented as two BACnet Analog Value objects. The BACnet client (typically a
BMS) will write the first value with the Modbus address for the data parameter
required as shown in Figure 162. The user may obtain the Modbus address from
"Parameter List" on page 232 of this manual.
Figure 162 BMS Client writes address of required parameter

The BMS client may then read or write to the data referenced by this address, as
shown in Figure 163.
Figure 163 BMS Client reads/writes to data parameter

Note: The data value will always be represented over BACnet as a floating point,
even if the internal source data is of a different type (e.g. Bool). Strings will not be
accessible using this mechanism.
Note: Values written to device parameters via BACnet may be overwritten (with
different values) internally by the device firmware under certain device configurations.
Due to this, when the values of the BACnet objects are read back, they may be
different to the value requested via the preceding BACnet write command.
346 HA030554 Issue 16

Optional parameters
The following optional parameters shall be implemented in addition to the standard
required parameters for all relevant object types:
Table 5: Optional Parameters
Property R/W Description

Alphanumeric description of channel function,
Description R
eg “Furnace 1”.
Alphanumeric description of Input type for the
Device_Type Rr
channel eg ‘Off’, ‘Thermocouple’, ‘mV’
BACnet Services
Services required by the BACnet Application Specific Controller Profile (B-ASC) are
supported, as detailed in the following table:
Table 6: Services Required by B-ASC Profile
Application Service Description Service Type

Request the value of one property
ReadProperty Object Access
of a BACnet object
Modify value of a single property (if
WriteProperty Object Access
permitted)
Allows an operator to take device
DeviceCommunicationC
communications on or off-line. With Remote Device Management
ontrol
support for password.
Asks about the presence of
Who-Is Remote Device Management
specified BACnet devices
Asks about the presence of
Who-Has specified Objects either by type and Remote Device Management
instance or by name
HA030554 Issue 16 347

Foreign Device Registration

A ‘foreign device’ has a different subnet address from the devices on the BACnet/IP
network that it wishes to join. The device must register with a BBMD (BACnet
Broadcast Management Device) which then forwards broadcast messages allowing
full participation in the BACnet/IP network.
Figure 164 Foreign Device Registration
BACnet Configuration
"BACnet" on page 116 provides details for configuring BACnet on the instrument.
The BACnet parameters described in Section "BACnet Object Mapping" on page 343
can be configured using the iTools software.
348 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller iTOOLS
iTOOLS
iTools software running on a PC allows quick and easy access to the configuration of
the unit. The parameters used are generally the same as those described in
"Configuration", with the addition of various diagnostic parameters. iTools also gives
the user the ability to create software wiring between function blocks, such wiring
being carried out using the Graphical Wiring Editor feature.
Note: nanodac allows for multiple masters to access the device simultaneously. If
unauthorized user(s) with malicious intent gain access to the network on which
nanodac is operating, they may be able to modify configuration parameters without
authorization if the device is already in configuration mode due to an existing
authorized user session. To avoid such misuse, it is recommended to configure the
device in isolation from other devices in the network. Refer Additionally, refer to
Cybersecurity Good Practices Guide, Part Number HA032968 on
https:\\www.eurotherm.com which provides an overview of cybersecurity principles to
consider.
A further feature - the display mode ‘Promote List’, is populated using iTools -see
"Promote list" on page 77 for details. In addition to the guidance given here, there are
two on-line Help systems available within iTools: Parameter help and iTools help.
Parameter help is accessed by clicking on ‘Help’ in the toolbar (opens the complete
parameter help system), by right-clicking on a parameter and selecting ‘Parameter
Help’ from the resulting context menu, or by clicking on the Help menu and selecting
‘Device Help’. iTools help is accessed by clicking on the Help menu, and selecting
‘Contents’. iTools help is also available in manual format under part number
HA028838, either as a physical manual or as a PDF file.
Figure 165 Help access
iTools Connection
The following descriptions assume that iTools software has been correctly installed
on the PC.
Ethernet (Modbus TCP) communications

Note: The following description is based on Windows 7.
It is first necessary to determine the IP address of the unit, as described under

‘Network.Interface’ in "Interface" on page 110. Once the Ethernet link has been
correctly installed, carry out the following actions at the PC:
1. Click on ‘Start’.
2. Click on ‘Control Panel’.
3. Double-click on ‘iTools (32-bit)’.
4. Click on the TCP/IP tab in the Registry settings configuration.
5. Click on ‘Add...’ The ‘New TCP/IP Port’ dialogue box opens.
HA030554 Issue 16 349

iTOOLS nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
6. Type-in a name for the port, then click ‘Add...’ again.
7. Type the IP address of the unit in the ‘Edit Host’ box which appears. Click OK.
8. Check the details in the ‘New TCP/IP Port’ box, then click on ‘OK’.
9. Click on ‘OK’ in the ‘Registry settings’ box to confirm the new port.
Figure 166 Adding a new Ethernet port

To check that the PC can now communicate with the instrument, Click ‘Start’. ‘All
Programs’, ‘Accessories’,
‘Command Prompt’ when the Command Prompt box appears, type in:
Ping<Space>IP1.IP2.IP3.IP4<Enter> (where IP1 to IP4 are the IP address of the
instrument).
If the Ethernet link to the instrument is operating correctly, the ‘successful’ reply
arrives. Otherwise, the ‘failed’ reply arrives, in which case, the Ethernet link, IP
address, and PC port details should be verified.
350 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 167 Command prompt ‘Ping’ screens (typical)

Once the Ethernet link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be
started (or shut down and restarted), and the Scan toolbar icon used, to
‘find’ the instrument. The scan can be stopped at any time by clicking on
the Scan icon a second time.
See Section "Scanning for Instruments" on page 353 for more details of the scan
procedure.
HA030554 Issue 16 351

Direct Connection
This section describes how to connect a PC directly to the instrument.
Wiring
Connection is made from the Ethernet connector at the rear of the
Instrument to an Ethernet RJ45 connector, usually located at the rear of
the PC. The cable can be either a ‘cross-over’ or ‘straight through’ type.
Once wired correctly, and powered up, it is necessary to enter a suitable PC Ethernet
IP address and subnet mask into the Comms configuration of the Driver connector.
Module. This information can be found as follows:
1. At the PC, click ‘Start’. ‘All Programs’, ‘Accessories’, ‘Command Prompt’.
2. When the Command Prompt box appears, type IPConfig and press <Enter>.
The response is a display, such as that shown below, giving the IP address and
Subnet mask of the PC. Choose an address in the range covered by these two
values.
A subnet mask element of 255 means that the equivalent element of the IP
address must be used unchanged. A subnet mask element of 0 means that the
equivalent element of the IP address may take any value between 1 and 255
(0 is not allowed). In the example below, the range of IP addresses which may be
chosen for the Driver Module is 123.123.123.2 to 123.123.123.255.
(123.123.123.0 is not allowed and 123.123.123.1 is the same as the PC’s
address, and may therefore not be used.)
Figure 168 IP Config command

3. In Network.Interface configuration ("Interface" on page 110) enter the selected IP
address and the subnet mask (as it appears in the command prompt window) in
the relevant parts of the menu.
4. Check communications by ‘pinging’ as described in Section "Ethernet (Modbus

TCP) communications" on page 349.
352 HA030554 Issue 16

Once the link to the instrument has been verified, iTools can be started (or shut down
and re-started), and the Scan toolbar icon used, to ‘find’ the instrument. The scan can
be stopped at any time by clicking on the Scan icon a second time.
See Section "Scanning for Instruments" on page 353 for more details of the scan
procedure.
Subnet Masks and IP addresses.

Subnet Masks are most readily understood when looked at in binary format.
For example, a mask of 255.255.240.10 can be re-written as:
11111111.11111111.11110000.00001010. In such a case, IP addresses
11111111.11111111.1111xxxx.xxxx1x1x would be recognised (where x can be either a 0 or a 1).
Subnet mask
IP addresses
(Binary)
IP addresses
(decimal)
255 255 240 to 255 10, 11, 14, 15,
26, 27, 30, 31,
42, 43, 46, 47 etc.
Scanning for Instruments

Clicking on the ‘Scan’ toolbar icon causes a dialogue box (Figure 169) to appear.
This allows the user to define a search range of addresses.
Notes:
1. The relevant instrument address is that entered in the Network.Modbus
configuration item ("Modbus TCP" on page 115, and it can take any value
between 1 and 254 inclusive, as long as it is unique to the comms link.
2. The default selection (Scan all device addresses...) will detect any instrument on
the serial link, which has a valid address.
As the search progresses, any instruments detected by the scan appear as

thumbnails (faceplates) in the ‘Panel Views’ area, normally located at the bottom of
the iTools screen. (options/Panel Views position allows this area to be moved to the
top of the window, or the Close icon can be used to close it. Once closed it can be re-
opened by clicking on ‘Panel Views’ in the ‘View’ menu.)
Figure 169 Scan range enable
HA030554 Issue 16 353

Figure 170 iTools initial window with one instrument detected

Once the instrument has been detected stop the scan. When the instrument has
synchronised, click on the ‘Access’ button to enter configuration mode (a password
might be required). Once the editing session is complete, click on the ‘Access’ button
again to quit configuration mode.
Graphical Wiring Editor

Clicking on the Graphical Wiring Editor tool bar icon causes the Graphical wiring
window for the current instrument configuration to open.
Figure 171 Graphical wiring Editor
354 HA030554 Issue 16

The graphical wiring editor allows:
1. Function blocks, notes, comments etc. to be ‘drag and dropped’ into the wiring
diagram from the tree list (left pane).
2. Parameters to be wired to one another by clicking on the output, the clicking on

the required input.
3. Viewing and/or editing of parameter values by right-clicking on a function block

and selecting ‘Function Block View’.
4. The user to select parameter lists and to switch between parameter and wiring
editors.
5. Completed wiring to be downloaded to the instrument (function blocks and wiring

items with dashed outlines are new, or have been edited since the last
download).
Tool bar
Download wiring to instrument.
Mouse select. Select normal mouse operation. Mutually exclusive with

‘Mouse Pan’ below.
Mouse Pan. When active, this causes the mouse cursor to change to a
hand-shaped icon. Allows the graphical wiring diagram to be
click-dragged within the GWE window aperture.
Zoom. Allows the magnification factor of the wiring diagram to be
selected.
Pan tool. Whilst left clicked, the cursor appears as a rectangle showing
which part of the wiring diagram is currently displayed. Click dragging
allows the rectangle to be moved freely about the diagram. The size of
the rectangle depends on the zoom setting.
Show/Hide grid. This toggles an alignment grid on and off.
Undo, redo. Allows the user to undo the last action, or, once an undo
action has taken place, to undo the undo. Short cuts are <Ctrl>+<Z>.
for undo; <Ctrl>+<V>, for redo.
Cut, Copy, Paste. Normal Cut (copy and delete), Copy (copy without
delete) and Paste (insert into) functions. Shortcuts are: <Ctrl> + <X> for
‘Cut’; <Ctrl> + <C> for copy and <Ctrl> + <V> for Paste.
Copy diagram fragment; Paste diagram fragment. Allows a part of the
wiring diagram to be selected, named and be saved to file. The
fragment may then be pasted into any wiring diagram, including the
source diagram.
Create compound; Flatten compound. These two icons allow
compounds to be created and ‘un-created’ (flattened).
Wiring Editor Operating Details
Component Selection
Single wires are shown with boxes at ‘corners’ when selected. When more than one
wire is selected, as part of a group, the wire colour changes to magenta. All other
items have a dashed line drawn round them when selected.
HA030554 Issue 16 355

Clicking on a single item selects it. An Item can be added to the selection by holding
down the control key (Ctrl) whilst clicking on the item. (A selected item can be
deselected in the same way.) If a block is selected, then all its associated wires are
also selected.
Alternatively, the mouse can be click-dragged on the background to create a ‘rubber

band’ round the relevant area; anything within this area being selected when the
mouse is released.
<Ctrl>+<A> selects all items on the active diagram.
Block Execution Order

The order in which the blocks are executed by the instrument depends on the way in
which they are wired. Each block displays its place in its sequence in a coloured
block in the bottom left-hand corner (Figure 172).
Function Blocks
A Function Block is an algorithm which may be wired to and from other function
blocks to make a control strategy. Each function block has inputs and outputs. Any
parameter may be wired from, but only parameters that are alterable in Operator
Mode may be wired to. A function block includes any parameters that are needed to
configure or operate the algorithm. The inputs and outputs which are considered to
be of most use are always shown. In most cases all of these need to be wired before
the block can perform a useful task.
If a function block is not faded in the tree (left hand pane) it can be dragged onto the
diagram. The block can be dragged around the diagram using the mouse.
A Channel block is shown below as an example. When block type information is

alterable (as in this case) click on the box with the down arrow in it to display a
dialogue box allowing the value to be edited.
Down arrow
Position in
execution order
Figure 172 Function block example

If it is required to wire from a parameter, which is not shown as a
recommended output, click on the ‘Click to Select Output’ icon in the bottom
right hand corner to display a full list of parameters in the block (Figure 175,
below). Click on one of these to start a wire.
356 HA030554 Issue 16

Function Block Context Menu

Right-click in the function block to display the context
menu.
Function block view Displays a list of parameters
associated with the function
block. ‘Hidden’ parameters
can be displayed by de-se-
lecting ‘Hide Parameters and
Lists when not Relevant in
the options menu ‘Parameter
availability setting...’ item.
Re-Route wires Redraws all wiring associated
with the function block.
Re-route input wires Redraws all input wiring as-
sociated with the function
block.
Re-route output wires
Redraws all output wiring as-
sociated with the function
block.
Figure 173 Function block
Show wiring using tags
context menu
Wires are not drawn, but their
start and end destinations are
indicated by tags instead. Reduces wire clutter in diagrams
where source and destination are widely separated.
Hovering the cursor over the tag shows both its source and
destination parameters and their values.
Figure 174 Function block context menu

Hide unwanted connections
Causes the display to include only wired items.
Cut Allows one or more selected items to be moved to the
Clipboard ready for pasting into another diagram or
compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope.
The original items are greyed out, and function blocks and
wires are shown dashed until next download, after which
they are removed from the diagram. Short cut =
<Ctrl>+<X>. Cut operations carried out since the last
download can be ‘undone’ by using the ‘Undo’ tool bar
icon, by selecting ‘Undelete’ or by using the short cut
<Ctrl>+<Z>.
Copy Allows one or more selected items to be copied to the
Clipboard ready for pasting into another diagram or
compound, or for use in a Watch window, or OPC scope.
The original items remain in the current wiring diagram.
Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>. If items are pasted to the same
diagram from which they were copied, the items will be
replicated with different block instances. Should this result
in more instances of a block than are available, an error
display appears showing details of which items couldn’t be
copied.
HA030554 Issue 16 357

Paste Copies items from the Clipboard to the current wiring

diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<V>. If items are pasted to the
same diagram from which they were copied, the items will
be replicated with different block instances. Should this
result in more instances of a block than are available, a
Paste error display appears showing details of those items
which could not be copied.
Delete Marks all selected items for deletion. Such items are
shown dashed until next download, after which they are
removed from the diagram. Short cut = <Del>.
Undelete Reverses ‘Delete’ and ‘Cut’ operations carried out on
selected item(s) since the last download.
Bring to Front Brings selected items to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back Sends the selected items to the back of the diagram.
Edit Parameter Value...
This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an
editable parameter. Selecting this menu item causes a
pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to edit the
parameter value.
Parameter Properties
This menu item is active if the cursor is hovering over an
editable parameter. Selecting this menu item causes a
pop-up window to appear, which allows the user to view
the parameter properties, and also, to view the parameter
Help (by clicking on the ‘Help’ tab).
Parameter Help Produces Parameter Properties and Help information for
the selected function block or parameter, depending on the
hover position of the cursor, when the right-click occurs.
Wires
To make a wire:
1. Drag two (or more) blocks onto the diagram from

the function block tree.
Figure 175 Output selection

dialogue box.
358 HA030554 Issue 16

2. Start a wire by either clicking on a recommended output or clicking on the ‘Click

to Select output’ icon at the bottom right corner of the block to bring up the
connection dialogue, and clicking on the required parameter. Recommended
connections are shown with a green plug symbol; other parameters which are
available being shown in yellow. Clicking on the red button causes all parameters
to be shown. To dismiss the connection dialogue either press the escape key on
the keyboard, or click the cross at the bottom left of the dialogue box.
3. Once the wire has started a dashed wire is drawn from the output to the current
mouse position. To complete the wire click on the required destination
parameter.
4. Wires remain dashed until they are downloaded.
Routing wires
When a wire is placed it is auto-routed. The auto routing algorithm searches for a
clear path between the two blocks. A wire can be auto-routed again using the context
menus or by double clicking the wire. A wire segment can be edited manually by
click-dragging. If the block to which it is connected is moved, the end of the wire
moves with it, retaining as much of the path as possible.
If a wire is selected by clicking on it, it is drawn with small boxes on its corners.
Wire Context Menu
Right click on a wire to display the wire block context menu:

Force Exec Break When wires form a loop, a break
point must be introduced, where the
value written to the block comes from
a source which was last executed
during the previous cycle. A break is
automatically placed by iTools, and
appears in red . Force Exec Break
allows the user to define where a
break must be placed. Surplus
breaks appear in black.
Task Break Not used in this product.
Re-Route wire Replaces the current wire route with
a new route generated from scratch.
Use Tags Toggles between wire and tag mode between parameters.
Tag mode is useful for sources and destinations which are
widely separated.
Find Start Goes to the source of the wire.
Find End Goes to the destination of the wire.
Cut, Copy, Paste Not used in this context.
Delete Marks the wire for deletion. The wire is redrawn as a
dashed line (or dashed tags) until next download.
Operation can be reversed until after next download.
Undelete Reverses the effect of the Delete operation up until the
next download, after which, Undelete is disabled.
Bring to Front Brings the wire to the front of the diagram.
Push to Back Sends the wire to the back of the diagram.
Wire Colours
Black Normal functioning wire.
Red The wire is connected to a non-changeable parameter.
Values are rejected by the destination block.
Magenta A normal functioning wire is being hovered-over by the
mouse cursor.
Purple A red wire is being hovered-over by the mouse cursor.
HA030554 Issue 16 359

Green New Wire (dashed green wire changes to solid black after
being downloaded).
Comments
Comments are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the Function
Block tree onto the diagram.
As soon as the mouse is released, a dialogue box opens to allow the comment text to
be entered. Carriage returns are used to control the width of the comment. Once text
entry is complete, ‘OK’ causes the comment to appear on the diagram. There are no
restrictions on the size of a comment. Comments are saved to the instrument along
with the diagram layout information.
Comments can be linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at
the bottom right-hand cor-ner of the comment box and then clicking again on the
required block or wire. A dashed line is drawn to the top of the block or to the
selected wire segment (Figure 177).
Note: Once the comment has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears
when the mouse cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the comment
box.
Comment Context Menu

Edit Opens the Comment dialogue box to
allow the comment text to be edited.
Unlink Deletes the current link from the
comment.
Cut Moves the comment to the Clipboard,
ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short cut
= <Ctrl>+<X>. Figure 176 Com-
Copy Copies the comment from the wiring ment context
diagram to the Clipboard, ready to be menu
pasted elsewhere. Short cut =
<Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste Copies a comment from the Clipboard to the wiring
diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Delete Marks the comment for deletion at next download.
Undelete Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken
place since.
Monitors
Monitor points are added to a wiring diagram by click-dragging them from the
Function Block tree onto the diagram. A monitor shows the current value (updated at
the iTools parameter list update rate) of the parameter to which it is linked. By default
the name of the parameter is shown. To hide the parameter name either double click
on the monitor box or ‘Show Names’ in the context (right-click) menu can be used to
toggle the parameter name on and off.
Monitors are linked to function blocks and wires by clicking on the chain icon at the
bottom right-hand corner of the box and then clicking again on the required
parameter. A dashed line is drawn to the top of the block or the selected wire
segment.
Note: Once the monitor has been linked, the Chain icon disappears. It re-appears
when the mouse cursor is hovered over the bottom right-hand corner of the monitor
box
360 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 177 Comment and Monitor appearance

Monitor Context Menu
Show names Toggles parameter names on and
off in the monitor box. Unlink
Deletes the current link from the
monitor.
Cut Moves the monitor to the Clipboard,
ready to be pasted elsewhere. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy Copies the monitor from the wiring
diagram to the Clipboard, ready to
be pasted elsewhere. Short cut = Figure 178 Moni-
<Ctrl>+<C>. tor context menu
Paste Copies a monitor from the Clipboard
to the wiring diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Delete Marks the monitor for deletion at next download.
Undelete Undoes the Delete command if download has not taken
place since.
Bring to Front Moves the item to the ‘top’ layer of the diagram.
Push to Back Moves the item to the ‘bottom’ layer of the diagram.
Parameter Help Shows parameter help for the item.
Downloading
When the wiring editor is opened the current wiring and diagram layout is read from
the instrument. No changes are made to the instrument function block execution or
wiring until the download button is pressed. Any changes made using the operator
interface after the editor is opened are lost on download.
When a block is dropped onto the diagram, instrument parameters are changed to
make the parameters for that block available. If changes are made and the editor is
closed without saving them there is a delay while the editor clears these parameters.
During download, the wiring is written to the instrument which then calculates the
block execution order and starts executing the blocks. The diagram layout including
comments and monitors is then written into instrument flash memory along with the
current editor settings. When the editor is reopened, the diagram is shown positioned
as it was when it was last downloaded.
Colours
Items on the diagram are coloured as follows:
Red Items which totally or partially obscure other items and
items which are totally or partially obscured by other items.
Wires that are connected to unalterable or non-available
parameters. Execution breaks.
Blue Non-available parameters in function blocks.
HA030554 Issue 16 361

Green Items added to the diagram since last download are shown
as green dashed lines.
Magenta All selected items, or any item over which the cursor is
hovering.
Purple Red wires when being hovered over by the mouse cursor.
Black All items added to the diagram before the last download.
Redundant execution breaks. Monitor and comment text.
Diagram Context Menu

Cut Active only when the right click
occurs within the bounding
rectangle which appears when
more than one item is selected.
Moves the selection off the
diagram to the Clipboard. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy As for ‘Cut’, but the selection is
copied, leaving the original on the
diagram. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste Copies the contents of the
Clipboard to the diagram. Short
cut = <Ctrl>+<V>.
Re-Route wires Reroutes all selected wires. If no Figure 179 Diagram
wires are selected, all wires are context menu
re-routed.
Align Tops Aligns the tops of all blocks in the
selected area.
Align Lefts Aligns the left edges of all blocks in the selected area.
Space Evenly Spaces selected items such that their top left corners are
spaced evenly across the width of the diagram. Click on
the item which is to be the left-most item, then <Ctrl>+<left
click> the remaining items in the order in which they are to
appear.
Delete Marks the item for deletion at next download time. Can be
‘Undeleted’ up until download occurs.
Undelete Reverses the action of ‘Delete’ on the selected item.
Select All Selects all items on the current diagram.
Create Compound Active only when the right click occurs, in the top level
diagram, within the bounding rectangle which appears
when more than one item is selected. Creates a new wiring
diagram as described in ‘Compound’, below.
Rename Allows a new name to entered for the current wiring
diagram. This name appears in the relevant tab.
Copy Graphic Copies the selected items (or the whole diagram if no
items are selected) to the clipboard as a Windows metafile,
suitable for pasting into a documentation application.
Wiring entering/leaving the selection (if any) are drawn in
tag mode.
Save Graphic... As for ‘Copy Graphic’ above, but saves to a user-specified
file location instead of the clipboard.
Copy Fragment To File...
Copies selected items to a user-named file in folder ‘My
iTools Wiring Fragments’ located in ‘My Documents’.
Paste Fragment From File
Allows the user to select a stored fragment for inclusion in
the wiring diagram.
Centre Places the display window at the centre of the selected
items. If ‘Select All’ has previously been clicked-on, then
the display widow is placed over the centre of the diagram.
362 HA030554 Issue 16

Compounds
Compounds are used to simplify the top level wiring diagram, by allowing the placing
of any number of function blocks within one ‘box’, the inputs and outputs of which
operate in the same way as those of a normal function block.
Each time a compound is created, a new tab appears at the top of the wiring
diagram. Initially compounds and their tabs are named ‘Compound 1’, ‘Compound 2’,
etc. but they can be renamed by right clicking either on the compound in the top level
diagram, or anywhere within an open Compound, selecting ‘Rename’ and typing in
the required text string (16 characters max).
Compounds cannot contain other compounds (i.e. they can be created only in the top
level diagram).
Compound creation
1. Empty compounds are created within the top level diagram by clicking on the
‘Create Compound’ tool bar icon.
2. Compounds can also be created by highlighting one or

more function blocks in the top level diagram and then
clicking on the ‘Create Compound’ tool bar icon. The Create Flatten
compound compound
highlighted items are moved from the top level diagram
3. Compounds are ‘uncreated’ (flattened), by highlighting the relevant item in the

top level menu and then clicking on the ‘Flatten Compound’ tool bar icon. All the
items previously con-tained within the compound appear on the top level
diagram.
4. Wiring between top level and compound parameters is carried out by clicking on
the source parameter, then clicking on the compound (or the compound tab) and
then clicking on the destination parameter. Wir-ing from a compound parameter
to a top level parameter or from compound to compound is carried out in similar
manner.
5. Unused function blocks can be moved into compounds by dragging from the tree
view. Existing blocks can be dragged from the top level diagram, or from another
compound, onto the tab associated with the destination compound. Blocks are
moved out of compounds to the top level diagram or to another com-pound in a
similar way. Function blocks can also be ‘cut and pasted’.
6. Default compound names (e.g. ‘Compound 2’) are used only once, so that if, for
example, Compounds 1 and 2 have been created, and Compound 2 is
subsequently deleted, then the next compound to be cre-ated will be named
‘Compound 3’.
7. Top level elements can be click-dragged into compounds.
Tool Tips
Hovering the cursor over the block displays ‘tooltips’ describing that part of the block
beneath the cursor. For function block parameters the tooltip shows the parameter
description, its OPC name, and, if downloaded, its value. Similar tooltips are shown
when hovering over inputs, outputs and over many other items on the iTools screen.
A Function Block is enabled by dragging the block onto the diagram, wiring it, and
finally downloading it to the instrument. Initially blocks and associated wires are
drawn with dashed lines, and when in this state the parameter list for the block is
enabled but the block is not executed by the instrument.
HA030554 Issue 16 363

The block is added to the instrument function block execution list when the
‘Download’ icon is operated and the items are redrawn using solid lines. If a block
which has been downloaded is deleted, it is shown on the diagram in a ghosted form
until the download button is pressed. (This is because it and any wires to/from it are
still being executed in the instrument. On download it will be removed from the
instrument execution list and the diagram.) A ghosted block can be ‘undeleted’ as
described in ‘Context menu’, above.
When a dashed block is deleted it is removed immediately.
Parameter Explorer
This view can be displayed:
1. by clicking on the ‘Parameter Explorer’ toolbar icon,
2. by double clicking on the relevant block in the tree pane or in the graphical wiring
editor,
3. by selecting ‘Function Block View’ from the Function block context menu in the
Graphical wiring Editor,
4. by selecting ‘parameter Explorer from the ‘View’ menu,
5. by using the short cut <Alt>+<Enter>,
In each case the function block parameters appear in the iTools window in tabular
form, such as the example in Figure 180, below.
Figure 180 Parameter table example

The figure above shows the default table layout. Columns can be added/deleted from
the view using the ‘Columns’ item of the Explorer or context menus (Figure 181).
364 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 181 Column enable/disable
Parameter explorer detail

Figure 182 shows a typical parameter table. This particular parameter has a number
of subfolders associated with it, and each of these is represented by a ‘tab’ across
the top of the table.
Figure 182 Typical parameter table

Notes:
1. Parameters in blue are non-editable (Read only). In the example above all the
parameters are read only. Read/write parameters are in black and have a ‘pencil’
symbol in the ‘read/ Write access column at the left edge of the table. A number
of such items are shown in Figure 182, above.
2. Columns. The default explorer window (Figure 179) contains the columns
‘Name’, ‘Description’, ‘Address’, ‘Value’, and ‘Wired From’. As can be seen from
Figure 180, the columns to be displayed can be selected, to a certain extent,
using either the ‘Explorer’ menu or the context menu.
3. Hidden Parameters. By default, iTools hides parameters which are considered
irrelevant in the current context. Such hidden parameters can be shown in the
table using the ‘Parameter availability’ settings item of the options menu (Figure
183). Such items are displayed with a shaded background.
HA030554 Issue 16 365

4. The full pathname for the displayed parameter list is shown at the bottom left
hand corner of the window.
Figure 183 Show/Hide parameters
Explorer tools
A number of tool icons appear above the parameter list:
Back to: and Forward to:. The parameter explorer contains a history buffer
of up to 10 lists that have been browsed in the current instance of the
window. The ‘Back to: (list name)’ and ‘Forward to: (list name)’ icons allow
easy retracing or repeating of the parameter list view sequence.
If the mouse cursor is hovered over the tool icon, the name of the
parameter list which will appear if the icon is clicked-on appears. Clicking
on the arrow head displays a pick list of up to 10 previously visited lists
which the user can select. Short cut = <Ctrl>+<B> for ‘Back to’ or
<Ctrl>+<F> for ‘Forward to’.
Go Up a Level, Go Down a Level. For nested parameters, these buttons
allow the user to navigate ‘vertically’ between levels. Short cut =
<Ctrl>+<U> for ‘Go Up a Level’ or <Ctrl>+<D> for ‘Go Down a Level’.
Push pin to give the window global scope. Clicking on this icon causes the
current parameter list to be permanently displayed, even if another
instrument becomes the ‘current device’.
Context Menu
Copy Parameter Copies the clicked-on parameter to the clipboard

Parameter properties
Displays parameter properties for the clicked-on
parameter
Parameter Help... Displays help information for the clicked-on parameter
Edit/Paste/Delete/Follow Wire
Not used in this application
Columns Allows the user to enable/disable a number of parameter
table columns (Figure 182).
366 HA030554 Issue 16

Watch/Recipe Editor
The watch/recipe editor is opened by clicking on the Watch/Recipe tool icon, by
selecting ‘Watch/Recipe’ in the ‘Views’ menu or by using the short cut <Ctrl>+<A>.
The window is in two parts: the left part containing the watch list; the right-hand part
containing one or more data sets, initially empty and unnamed.
The Watch/Recipe window is used:
1. To monitor a list of parameters. This list can contain parameters from many
different, and otherwise unrelated parameter lists within the same device. It
cannot contain parameters from different devices.
2. To create ‘data sets’ of parameter values which can be selected and downloaded
to the device in the sequence defined in the recipe. The same parameter may be
used more than once in a recipe.
Figure 184 Watch/Recipe Editor window (with context menu)
Creating a Watch List

After opening the window, parameters can be added to it as described below. The
values of the parameters update in real-time, allowing the user to monitor a number
of values simultaneously.
Adding Parameters to the Watch List

1. Parameters can be click-dragged into the watch list from another area of the
iTools window (for example, the parameter explorer window, the graphical wiring
editor, the browse tree). The parameter is placed either in an empty row at the
bottom of the list, or if it is dragged on top of an already existing parameter, it is
inserted above this parameter, with the remaining parameters being moved down
one place.
2. Parameters can be dragged from one position in the list to another. In such a
case, a copy of the parameter is produced, the source parameter remaining in its
original position.
3. Parameters can be copied <Ctrl>+<C> and pasted <Ctrl>+<V> either within the
list, or from a source external to it, for example the parameter browse window or
the graphical wiring editor.
4. The ‘Insert item...’ tool button the ‘Insert Parameter’ item in the Recipe or
context menu or the short cut <Insert> can be used to open a browse window
from which a parameter is selected for insertion above the currently selected
parameter.
HA030554 Issue 16 367

Data Set Creation

Once all the required parameters have been added to the list, select the empty data
set by clicking on the column header. Fill the data set with current values using one of
the following methods:
1. Clicking on the ‘Capture current values into a data set’ tool icon (also known
as the ‘Snapshot Values’ tool).
2. Selecting ‘Snapshot Values’ from the Recipe or Context (right-click) menu.
3. Using the short cut <Ctrl>+<A>.
Individual data values can now be edited by typing directly into the grid cells. Data
values can be left blank or cleared, in which case, no values will be written for those
parameters at download. Data values are cleared by deleting all the characters in the
cell then either moving to a different cell or pressing <Enter>.
The set is called ‘Set 1’ by default, but it can be renamed by either by using the
‘Rename data set...’ item in the Recipe or context menus, or by using the short cut
<Ctrl>+<R>.
New, empty data sets can be added using one of the following:
1. Clicking on the ‘Create a new empty data set’ toolbar icon.
2. Selecting ‘New Data Set’ in the Recipe or context menus
3. Using the short cut <Ctrl>+<W>
Once created, the data sets are edited as described above.
Finally, once all the required data sets have been created, edited and saved, they
can be downloaded the instrument, one at a time, using the Download tool, the
‘Download Values’ item in the Recipe or context menus, or the short cut <Ctrl>+<D>.
Watch Recipe toolbar icons

Create a new watch/recipe list. Creates a new list by clearing out all
parameters and data sets from an open window. If the current list has not
been saved, confirmation is requested. Short cut <Ctrl>+<N>
Open an existing watch/recipe file. If the current list or data set has not been
saved, confirmation is requested. A file dialogue box then opens allowing the
user to select a file to be opened. Short cut <Ctrl>+<O>
Save the current watch/recipe list. Allows the current set to be saved to a
user specified location. Short cut <Ctrl>+<S>.
Download the selected data set to the device. Short cut <Ctrl>+<D>
Insert item ahead of selected item. Short cut <Insert>.
Remove recipe parameter. Short cut <Ctrl>+<Delete>.
Move selected item. Up arrow moves selected parameter up the list; down
arrow move the selected parameter down the list.
Create a new empty data set. Short cut <Ctrl>+<W>.
Delete an empty data set. Short cut <Ctrl>+<Delete>
Capture current values into a data set. Fills the selected data set with values.
Short cut <Ctrl>+<A>.
Clear the selected data set. Removes values from the selected data set.
Short cut <Shift>+<Delete>.
Open OPC Scope. Opens a separate utility that allows trending, data logging
and Dynamic Data Exchange
368 HA030554 Issue 16

Watch/Recipe Context Menu

The Watch/Recipe Context menu items have the same functions as described above
for toolbar items.
Programmer Option
Clicking on the Programmer tool bar icon opens the programmer configuration
window, displaying the program currently loaded in the instrument, in Segment
Parameter view. If no program is loaded, the programmer display opens with just one
segment, defined as an ‘End’ Segment.
Figure 185 shows a simple program for example purposes. Parameters are defined
in section 3.4.9 and section 4.8.
Figure 185 Programmer display

As can be seen from the example, the segments appear below a graphical
representation of the program.
Segment parameter editing
Segment Name
To edit the segment name, click in the segment name field (as shown),
and type in the required text, of up to 20 characters. Alternatively,
double click on the existing name and edit it as desired.
Segment Type
Clicking on the down arrow symbol to the right of the existing segment
type field, produces a pick list from which a segment type can be
selected. The type of segment selected defines which configuration
fields appear for that segment.
HA030554 Issue 16 369

End Type
Allows the selection of ‘Dwell’ or ‘Reset’ as the action to be taken by
the End segment.
Go Back to
For GoBack segments only, this allows the user to enter a segment number for the
program to return to.
Cycles
For GoBack segments only, this allows the number of times the program returns to
the ‘Go Back To’ segment, before continuing.
Duration
Sets the amount of time for which Dwell
segments are to operate. Times are entered
using a hours/minutes/seconds/ milliseconds
display which appears when the ellipsis button
to the right of the duration field is clicked on.
Wait for
Select an analogue or digital input as the wait criterion. For single
channel programs only one analogue input is available; for
two-channel programmers one digital and two analogue inputs
are available, as shown.
CH1 (2) TSP

The channel 1 (2) target setpoint, editable by the user in a similar way as that used
for segment name editing, described above. Ch2 TSP appears only for two channel
programmers.
Time
For programs where ‘Ramp Style’ = ‘Time’, this allows the user to enter time periods
for ramp segments, in a similar way, as described for ‘Duration’, above. For two
channel programmers, two times can be entered, and if the two times are different,
the channel with the shorter time waits at its setpoint value until the other channel’s
time has elapsed.
Rate
For programs where ‘Ramp Style’ = ‘Rate’, this allows the user to enter a rate value
for Ramp segments. This value is entered in the same way as that used for segment
name editing, described above. For two channel programmers, two rates can be
entered.
Other Parameters
Holdback, PV Event etc. parameters may or may not appear depending on the
programmer features enabled, and they are all edited in the ways described above.
370 HA030554 Issue 16

Digital Event display

Clicking on the ‘Digital Events Output’ tool bar icon produces a segment display,
allowing the user to select the events on or off as required, for each segment. Figure
186 shows a programmer where the number of events is four.
The number of events which appear (maximum eight) is configured in the

Programmer Setup menu as described in "Programmer Setup menu" on page 175.
Figure 186 Event on/off configuration
Program parameters
The number of parameters which appear in this display depends on which program
features are enabled. Figure 187 shows a basic set of parameters which allows the
user to select Rate or Time as the Ramp style, and to select a value for Rate units.
Figure 187 Program parameter display
HA030554 Issue 16 371

Adding and deleting segments
Insert Segment
As shown in Figure 188, to insert a segment, click in the segment number field of the
segment to the right of where the new segment is to be located. This causes the
whole segment to highlight. Click on the blue down arrow tool icon to insert the new
segment. The new segment name is the segment number, and the segment
configuration is that of the segment to the right, unless that segment is a Goback or
End segment, in which case the new segment is a ramp segment.
To insert more than one segment, press the Shift key whilst clicking on the range of
contiguous segments to be copied.
Figure 188 Insert a segment

Alternatively the mouse can be right-clicked anywhere in a segment, and the ‘Insert
segment’ item selected, or one or more segment can be highlighted and the ‘Insert’
key on the PC keyboard used to initiate the process. See Section "Context Menu" on
page 366 for more details of the right-click (context) menu.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Segments

The process of highlighting one or more segments causes the cut and copy toolbar
icons to become active.
The cut tool removes the highlighted segments from the program and stores them on
the pasteboard ready for re-use. The copy tool copies the selected segment(s) to the
paste board, leaving the original segment(s) in place. Once one or more segments
have been cut or copied, the ‘Paste insert’ and ‘Paste over’ icons become active
allowing the user to paste the contents of the pasteboard in front of a selected
segment (Paste insert), or to overwrite the existing highlighted segment(s) (Paste
over). When using the Paste over tool, the number of segments being pasted over
must match the number of segments on the paste board.
372 HA030554 Issue 16

Deleting Segments
Once one or more segments have been highlighted, the highlighted segments can be
removed using the Delete toolbar icon, by using the Delete Segment item in the
right-click (context) menu, or by operating the PC keyboard ‘Ctrl’ and Delete’ keys
simultaneously.
Loading and Saving programs

The four program operation keys at the top left of the programmer window allow the
user to load a program from or save a program to either the currently connected
instrument or to a PC. The fourth icon allows the user to select a program to be
deleted from the connected instrument. See Section "Toolbar icons" on page 373 for
more details.
Toolbar icons
The toolbar icons appearing at the top of the programmer window have the following
properties:
Load Program. Opens a browser window allowing the user to select a

program on the PC, or a program stored in the connected instrument to load.
Short cut: <Ctrl>+<L>.
Save current program to file. Opens a browser window allowing the user to
select a location on the pc in which to save the current program. This file is
saved with a ‘.upiz’ extension and can be saved to a USB memory stick for
downloading to an instrument, or it can be transferred to the instrument via
an FTP server. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<S>.
Store current program on device. Allows the user to save the program to the
program store on the instrument. Short cut: <Shift>+<Ctrl>+<S>.
Delete Programs from Device. Allows the user to delete programs from the
program store on the connected instrument. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<F>.
Cut. Removes the highlighted segment(s) from the program and places
them on the pasteboard. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<X>.
Copy. Copies the selected segment(s) to the pasteboard, leaving the original
segments in place. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<C>.
Paste insert. Inserts the segments on the pasteboard into a location to the
left of the highlighted segment. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<V>.
Paste over. Overwrites the highlighted segment(s) with the segment(s) on
the pasteboard. The number of segments on the pasteboard must match the
number of segments being overwritten. Short cut:
<Shift>+<Ctrl>+<V>.
Insert. Inserts a new segment to the left of the highlighted segment. If more
than one segment is highlighted, then the same number of segments are
inserted as are highlighted. Copies the segment type of the segment to the
right of the insertion point except if that segment is an ‘End’ or ‘GoBack’
segment, when newly inserted segments are of type ‘Ramp’. Short cut:
<Insert>.
Delete. Deletes the highlighted segment(s). Short cut: <Ctrl>+<Delete>.
Go to first. Moves the user to the first segment. Useful in very long
programs. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<Left arrow>.
Go to last. Moves the user to the end segment. Useful in very long
programs. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<Right arrow>.
Analog. Selects the analogue trace chart for display and segment
configuration. Short cut: <Ctrl>+<G>.
HA030554 Issue 16 373

Digital Event Outputs. Selects the Event output chart for display and
configuration.Short cut: <Ctrl>+<D>.
Logarithmic. Switches the vertical scale to logarithmic. Short cut:
<Ctrl>+<M> (Figure 188).
Figure 189 Logarithmic scale example
Context menus
Segment Context Menu

Right-clicking when the mouse cursor is hovering over a
segment in the ana-logue segment parameters view
produces the segment context menu shown. The various
items copy the relevant tool bar icons described above,
with the following additions:
Select All Selects all parameters
Parameter propertiesDisplays the properties
window for the parameter
right-clicked on, including a
‘Help’ tag for that parameter.
Program Context Menu

Right-clicking when the mouse cursor is
hovering in the program param-eters view
produces the program context menu
shown.
Parameter properties
Displays the
properties
window for the parameter right-clicked on, including a
‘Help’ tag for that parameter.
Columns Allows the user to enable/disable columns in the program
parameters display.
Chart Context Menu

Right-clicking when the mouse cursor is hovering over the
analogue chart or the digital event chart produces the segment
context menu shown. This allows the user to copy the chart to
the pasteboard, from where it can be pasted into (for example) a standard word
processing document.
374 HA030554 Issue 16

Programmer menu
Clicking on the ‘Programmer’ menu item near the top of the iTools window causes
the Programmer menu (Figure 190) to appear. The items contained within this menu
are described in the ‘Toolbar icons’ and ‘Context menu’ sections (Section "Toolbar
icons" on page 373 and Section "Context Menu" on page 366, respectively) above.
Figure 190 Programmer menu
Two channel programs

The display and editing of segment and program parameters for two-channel
programmers is carried out in the same way as described above, for single channel
programs. The major difference in appearance is that there are two sets of
parameters for each segment, instead of one. The background colour for channel 1
parameters is pink; that for channel 2 parameters is green.
The number of channels and the program features enabled are set up at the
instrument as described in "Steriliser Display Mode" on page 70 and "Programmer
Configuration" on page 171.
HA030554 Issue 16 375

Figure 191 Two channel program display
To Set Up OEM Security

This will be illustrated by the following two examples:
Example 1:
Make the parameter Network.Modbus.TimeFormat read/write when OEM security is
enabled and the instrument is in Engineer access level and leave the remaining
parameters in this list as read only.
Select
Engineer
(Configuratio
n) access
level
With OEM
status
unlocked set
‘OEMParam
sLists’ to On.
376 HA030554 Issue 16

Open
‘Network.Mo
dbus list
Open
‘Instrument.
OEMConfig
List’
Drag and
drop the
parameter(s
) which are
required to
be
read/write in
Engineer level when OEM security is enabled. In this example the parameter
‘TimeFormat’.
Example 2:
Make the parameter ‘Loop1.PID.ProportionalBand’ read only when OEM security is
enabled and the instrument is in Supervisor access level and leave the remaining
parameters in this list as read/write.
Drag and drop the parameter(s) which are required to be read only in Supervisor
level when OEM security is enabled.
In this example the parameter Loop1 Proportional band.
HA030554 Issue 16 377

378 HA030554 Issue 16

To Enable OEM Security

In ‘OEMEntry’ enter the security code. This is the same code as entered in Engineer
level in ‘OEMPass’, "Security menu" on page 98. The ‘OEMStatus’ parameter will
change to ‘Locked’.
Figure 192 OEMStatus parameter set to ‘Locked’

As in Figure 192 above, the parameter ‘TimeFormat’ is alterable in Engineer level
and the parameter ‘Loop1 Proportional Band’ is locked when OEM security is
enabled.
HA030554 Issue 16 379

380 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller User Wiring
User Wiring
User wiring, created from the instrument front panel, allows parameters to be wired
together so that, for example, a counter can be configured to be incremented when
an alarm goes active. This can be used as an alternative to iTools.
This section is presented as two examples that show the general techniques used to
create and delete wires from the instrument user interface.
Notes:
1. These examples refer to Channel Configuration and to Virtual Channel
configuration, descriptions of which are to be found in "Input Channel
Configuration" on page 123 and "Virtual Channel Configuration" on page 133,
respectively.
2. The destination parameter field has a small green triangle at the top right corner
to indicate that it has a wire routed to it.
Drive Relay Example

To drive the relay whose terminal contacts are 3A/3B, whilst the temperature being
measured by Channel 2 exceeds 30°C. For this example Channel 2 alarm 1 and a
hysteresis of 4°C will be used.
1. In channel 2, Alarm 1 page (see note), set the following parameters:

Type: Abs. High
Threshold: 30
Hysteresis: 4
Latch: None
Block: Off
Dwell:00:00:00
Acknowledge: No
Channel. 2.Alarm1
Type Abs Hi
Status Active Not ackd
Threshold 30.0
Hysteresis 4.0
Latch None
Block Off
Dwell 00:00:00
Acknowledge No
Active Yes
Inactive No
N.acknowledged Yes
Acknowledgement No
Inhibit
Figure 193 Channel 2, Alarm 1 set up
HA030554 Issue 16 381

User Wiring nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Note: The channel alarm areas of configuration become accessible only once the
channel with which they are associated has been configured with a suitable ‘Type’
("Channel Main" on page 123).
2. Highlight the ‘Active’ field, and press and User Wiring

hold the scroll button for a few seconds, Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
until the top level User Wiring page To Destination
appears. The name of the selected Add new wire
parameter appears at the top of the page.
Any already existing wires from this
parameter would appear below the ‘Add
new wire’ area.
3. With ‘Add new wire’ highlighted operate

the scroll button. User Wiring
Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
Instrument
Network
Group
4. Use the down arrow to highlight ‘Digital Channel
Virtual Channel
I/O’ and press the scroll button.
Loop
Digital I/O
User Wiring
Loop
5. Use the down arrow to highlight ‘3A3B
Digital I/O
(Relay)’ and press the scroll button. 1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
3A3B (Relay)
LBLC (Dig.In)
6. Use the down arrow to highlight ‘PV’ and User Wiring

press the scroll button. (If this parameter Channel.2.Alarm1.Active
is already wired-to, the ‘wired’ symbol Loop
Digital I/O
appears to the left of the parameter). 1A1B (Dig.IO)
2A2B (Relay)
LALC (Dig.In)
7. When the confirmation window appears, 3A3B (Relay)
use the up or down arrow to highlight ‘Ok’, PV
then operate the scroll button again.
Create New Wire?
Cancel Ok
User Wiring
8. The top level user wiring page reappears,
showing the destination parameter. To Destination
Add new wire
Digital I/O.3A3B (Relay).PV
382 HA030554 Issue 16

Wire removal
At the top level user wiring page, use the up and down arrow buttons to highlight the
wire to be deleted, and operate the scroll key. In the ‘Delete Wire’ confirmation
window, highlight ‘Ok’ and operate the scroll key again. The wire is deleted without
further confirmation.
Counter Example
This example shows how to set up a counter to be incremented each time Channel 1
Alarm 1 becomes active, and reset each time channel 2, alarm 1 is acknowledged.
For this example, Virtual Channel 3 will be configured as the counter, with a preset
value of 0.
1. At Channel.1.Main, set:
Type = test
Test Signal = Sine 4 min.
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
2. At Channel.1.Alarm1, set:
Type = Abs Hi
Threshold = 50
Latch = None
3. At Channel.2.Main, set:
Type = Test
Test Signal = Sine 40 min.
Scale Low = 0
Scale High = 100
4. At Channel.2.Alarm 1, set:
Type = Abs Hi
Threshold = 90
Latch = Manual
5. At Virtual Channel.3.Main, set:
Type = Counter
Operation = On
Input = 1
All the other parameters can be left at their defaults.
6. Still at Virtual Channel 3 (Main), use the up/down arrow buttons to highlight
‘Trigger’. Press and hold the scroll key. The top level User Wiring page appears,
this time with a ‘From Source’ tab as well as the ‘To Destination’ tab of example
1. This is because this parameter is read/write, whereas Alarm Active is read only
(i.e. its value may be read but not changed).
7. Use the up (or down) arrow button to select the ‘From Source’ tab.
HA030554 Issue 16 383

Virtual Channel.3.Main User Wiring
Status Good Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger
Resolution 0 To Destination From Source

Add new wire
Units
Input 1
Preset No
Preset Value 0
Trigger No
User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger
To Destination From Source
Add new wire
Figure 194 Wiring a counter: part 1

8. Operate the Scroll key to highlight ‘Add new wire’, then again to display the top
level parameter list.
9. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Channel’ and operate the scroll button.
10. Operate the scroll button to select ‘1’.
11. Highlight ‘Alarm 1’ and operate the scroll button.
12. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Active’. Operate the Scroll button again,
and create the new wire.
13. Use the Page button twice to return to the Virtual Channel 3 menu.
384 HA030554 Issue 16

User Wiring User Wiring
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger

Channel
Add new wire
1
Main
Trend
Alarm1
Alarm2
2
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger

Instrument Alarm1
Network Type
Group Status
Channel Threshold
Virtual Channel Dwell
Loop Acknowledge
Digital I/O Active
User Wiring Create New Wire?
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Trigger Cancel OK

Instrument
Network User Wiring
Group
Virtual Channel.3.MainTrigger
Channel
1
Add new wire
2
Channel.1.Alarm1.Acktive
3

14. At Virtual Channel.3.Main, use the down arrow to select ‘Preset’. Press and hold
the scroll key. The top level User Wiring page appears.
15. Use the up (or down) arrow button to select the ‘From Source’ tab, if not already
selected.
16. Operate the Scroll key to highlight ‘Add new wire’, then again to display the top
level parameter list.
17. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Channel’ and operate the scroll button.
18. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘2’ and operate the scroll button.
19. Highlight ‘Alarm 1’ and operate the scroll button.
20. Use the down arrow button to highlight ‘Acknowledgement’ (not ‘Acknowledge’).
Operate the Scroll button again, and create the new wire.
HA030554 Issue 16 385

Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset

To Destination From Source Channel
Add new wire 1
2
Main
Trend
Alarm1
Alarm2
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset

Instrument Alarm1
Network Type
Group Status
Channel Threshold
Virtual Channel Inactive
N.acknowledged
Loop
Digital I/O Acknowledgement
User Wiring Create New Wire?
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset Cancel OK

Instrument
Network User Wiring
Group
Virtual Channel.3.Main.Preset
Channel
1
Add new wire
2
Channel.2.Alarm1.Acknowledgement
3
386 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller USB Devices
USB Devices
The devices listed below can be plugged into the USB connector at the back of the
instrument, providing that the maximum current required is less than 100mA.
1. Memory Stick
2. Barcode reader
3. Keyboard
Notes:
1. See ‘"Symbols" on page 16’ in the Safety Notes section of the manual.
2. See "Recorder Specification" on page 389 for the USB port specification.
3. The use of USB hubs is not supported by this instrument.
Memory Stick
The use of the memory stick as an archiving device, or to facilitate software upgrades
is well documented in the relevant sections of this manual.
Barcode Reader
If ‘USB Auto Scan is set to ‘Yes’ in Display Configuration ("Display configuration" on
page 94) then, with the barcode reader plugged into the USB port, the scanned data
input stream is packaged into a general message displayed on the vertical trend and
message displays and included in the .uhh history file. The format of the message is:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS 123--13 (where 123--13 represents the ASCII data read from
the barcode).
Note: The message and the vertical trend displays do not auto refresh so the
display is not automatically updated when the barcode scanner is used. The
message is, however, updated in the message list.
If ‘USB auto Scan’ is set to ‘No, the ASCII data read from the barcode is displayed as
a message ready for editing prior to being sent to the display etc. Figure 197 shows
an example.
Note: The barcode reader must be configured to use a carriage return (decimal 13)
terminating character.
Edit the message, if required, then use the page, arrow and scroll pushbuttons to
confirm the message.
USB ASCII Input Edit the message, if required,

then use the page, arrow and
scroll pushbuttons to confirm
the message.
Accept changes?
Cancel No Yes
Figure 197 Barcode reader display
HA030554 Issue 16 387

USB Devices nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
USB Keyboard
A QWERTY keyboard may be plugged into the rear USB port to act in parallel with
the virtual keyboard ("Text Entry" on page 89). The editing keys listed below are
supported in addition to the standard alpha-numeric characters.
Left arrow Moves the cursor leftwards through the text string (stops at
the start of the string).
Right arrow Moves the cursor rightwards through the text string (stops
at the end of the string).
Backspace Deletes the character immediately to the left of the cursor.
Delete Removes the character immediately to the right of the
cursor.
End Moves the cursor to the end of the string.
Home Moves the cursor to the start of the string.
Insert Highlights the entire string, for overwriting.
Esc Exit without saving changes.
388 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Appendix A: Technical Specification
Appendix A: Technical Specification

Installation Category and Pollution Degree
This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II
and pollution degree 2, defined as follows:
Installation Category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V mains is 2500V.
Pollution Degree 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary
conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected.
Recorder Specification
I/O types
Analogue i/p: Four (eight if dual input option fitted)
Digital i/p: Digital (logic) o/p Two See Table A1 for options
Relay o/p: See Table A1 for options
DC output: See Table A1 for options
Features : CSV archive format

EtherNet/IP (Option)
File transfer protocol (FTP)
Messages
Modbus Master (Option)
Modbus TCP slave
Set point programmer (option)
uhh (history file) archiving
USB port at rear of instrument
User linearisation tables (four)
Two control loops (optional)
Advanced Loop (optional)
Zirconia probe support (optional)
15 Virtual channels (each configurable as maths, totaliser or
counter).
30 Virtual channels if Modbus Master or EtherNet/IP options
fitted (no alarms on virtual channels 16 to 30)
Table 7: Table A1 Output options
Default
Options
L = Logic output; R = Relay; D = DC output

OP4 and OP5 share Common terminals.
HA030554 Issue 16 389

Appendix A: Technical Specification nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Environmental performance
Ambient temperature range
Operating: 0 to 55°C
Storage: -20 to +70°C
Humidity range Operating: 5% to 85% RH non condensing
storage: 5% to 85% RH non condensing
Protection Front panel
(Standard): IP65
Front panel (Wash down): IP66, NEMA12
Behind panel: IP10 (International)
Shock/Vibration To BS EN61131-2 (5 to 150 Hz. at 1g; 1 octave per min.)
Altitude <2000 metres
Atmosphere Not suitable for use in explosive or corrosive atmospheres.
Electrical safety BS EN61010-1 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions (standard units): BS EN61326 Class B - Light industrial.
Emissions (Low voltage option): BS EN61326 Class A - Heavy industrial
Immunity BS EN61326 Industrial
Other approvals and compliance details

General: CE and cUL, EN61010
PV input AMS2750E compliant
RoHS EU; China
Packaging BS EN61131-2 section 2.1.3.3.
Physical
Panel mounting: 1/4 DIN
Weight: 0.44kg (15.52 oz.)
Panel cutout dimension: 92mm x 92mm (both -0.0 +0.8)
or 3.62 in x 3.62 in (both -0.00 +0.03 in) (Figure 2)
Depth behind panel: 90mm (3.54in) (Figure 2) excluding wiring.
Operator interface
Display: 3.5” TFT colour display (320 pixels wide x 240 pixels high)
Controls: Four navigation pushbuttons below the display screen (Page,
Scroll, Lower and Raise)
Power requirements
Supply voltage
Standard: 100 to 230Vac ± 15% at 48 to 62Hz.
Low voltage option: 24Vac (+10% - 15%), at 48 to 62Hz, or 24Vdc (+20% -15%)
Power dissipation: 9W
Fuse type: None
Interrupt protection Standard: Holdup >20ms at 85V RMS supply voltage.
Low voltage option: Holdup >20ms at 20.4V RMS supply voltage.
Battery backup
Stored data: Time, date.
Support time
(for real-time clock): Minimum of 1 year with unit unpowered.
Replacement period: Three years typical
Type: poly-carbonmonofluoride / lithium (BR2330) (PA260195)
Ethernet communications
Type: 10/100baseT Ethernet (IEEE802.3)
Protocols: Modbus TCP/IP slave, FTP, DHCP
Cable type: Category 5
Maximum length: 100metres (110 yards)
Termination: RJ45. Green LED illuminated = link connected; Amber LED
flashing shows link activity.
390 HA030554 Issue 16

USB port
Number of ports: One at rear of instrument
Standard: USB1.1
Transmission speeds: 1.5Mbits/sec (low speed device)
Maximum current: <100mA
Peripherals supported: Memory stick (8GB max), Bar code reader, QWERTY
keyboard
Update/Archive rates
Sample rate (input/output) 8Hz (4Hz for digital inputs) (4Hz for dual input channels)
Trend update 8Hz max. Archive sample value Latest value at archive time Display
value Latest value at display update time.
HA030554 Issue 16 391

Analogue Input Specification
General
Number of analogue inputs Four
Input types Standard: Optional: dc Volts, dc mV, dc mA (external shunt required),
thermocouple, RTD (2-wire and 3-wire), digital (contact
closure). dual mA, dual mV, dual thermocouple.
Input type mix Freely configurable
Sample rate 8Hz (125ms)
Conversion method 16 bit delta sigma.
Input ranges See below.
Mains rejection (48 to 62Hz)
Series mode: >95dB
Common mode: >179dB
Common mode voltage 250Vac max.
Series mode voltage 280mV at lowest range; 5V peak-to-peak, at highest range.
Input impedance See relevant Range specification, below.
Overvoltage protection
Continuous: ± 30V RMS
Transient (<1ms): ±200V pk-pk between terminals.
Sensor break detection Type ac sensor break on each input giving quick response with no
associated dc errors.
Recognition time: <3 secs.
Minimum break resistance: 40mV, 80mV ranges: 5kΩ; other ranges: 12.5kΩ
Shunt (mA inputs only) Values 1Ω to 1kΩ, mounted externally.

additional error due to shunt: 0.1% input
Isolation Channel to channel: 300V RMS or dc (single insulation)
Channel to common electronics: 300V RMS or dc (single insulation)
Channel to ground: 300V RMS or dc (single insulation)
Dielectric strength Test: BS EN61010, 1 minute type test
Channel to channel: 2500Vac
Channel to ground: 1500Vac
DC input ranges
Ranges 40mv, 80mV, 2V; 10V (-4.0 to +10V)
40mV Range Range: -40mV to + 40mV

Resolution 1.9µV (unfiltered)
Measurement noise: 1.0µV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
Linearity error: 0.003% (best fit straight line)
Calibration error: ±4.6µV ±0.053% of measurement at 25°C ambient
Temperature coefficient: ±0.2µV/°C ±13ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
Input leakage current: ±14nA
Input resistance: 100MΩ
80mV Range Range: -80mV to + 80mV

Resolution 3.2µV (unfiltered)
Measurement noise: 3.3µV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
Calibration error: ±7.5µV ±0.052% of measurement at 25°C ambient
Temperature coefficient: ±0.2µV/°C ± 13ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
2V Range Range: ±2V

Resolution 82µV
Measurement noise: 90µV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
Calibration error: ±420µV ±0.044% of measurement at 25°C ambient
Temperature coefficient: ±125µV/°C ±13ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
10V Range Range: -3V to +10V

Resolution 500µV
Measurement noise: 550µV peak-to-peak with 1.6s input filter
Linearity error: 0.007% (best fit straight line) for zero source resistance. Add
0.003% for each 10Ω source and lead resistance
Calibration error: ±1.5mV ±0.063% measurement at 25°C ambient
Temperature coefficient: ±66µV/°C ± 45ppm/°C of measurement from 25°C ambient
Input resistance: 62.5kΩ for input voltages > 5.6V. 667kΩ for input ranges <
5.6V.
Note: The 10V range is not available for dual input channels
392 HA030554 Issue 16

Resistance input ranges

Temperature scale: ITS90
RTD Types,
ranges and accuracies: See table
Maximum source current: 200µA
Resistance input figures

Range: 0 to 400Ω (-200 to +850°C)
Resolution: 0.05°C
Measurement noise: 0.05°C peak-peak with 1.6s input filter
Calibration error: ±0.31°C ±0.023% of measurement in °C at 25°C ambient
Temperature coefficient: ±0.01°C/°C ±25ppm/°C measurement in °C from 25°C
ambient
Lead resistance 0 to 22Ω matched lead resistances
Bulb current: 200µA nominal
Table 8: RTD type details
Max. linearisation
RTD type Overall range °C Standard
error
Cu10 -20 to + 400 General electric Co. 0.02°C
Cu53 -70 to + 200 RC21-4-1966 <0.01°C
JPT100 -220 to + 630 JIS C1604:1989 0.01°C
Ni100 -60 to + 250 DIN43760:1987 0.01°C
Ni120 -50 to + 170 DIN43760:1987 0.01°C
Pt100 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01°C
Pt100A -200 to + 600 Eurotherm Recorders SA 0.09°C
HA030554 Issue 16 393

Thermocouple data
Temperature scale: ITS90
CJCTypes: Off, internal, external, remote.
Remote CJC source: Any input channel
Internal CJC error:<1°C max, with instrument at 25°C
Internal CJC rejection ratio:
40:1 from 25°C
Upscale/downscale drive: High, low or none independently configurable for each
channel’s sensor break detection.
Types, ranges and accuracies: See Figure A.2
Table 9: Thermocouple types, ranges and accuracies
T/C type Overall range (°C) Standard Max. linearisation error

B 0 to + 1820 IEC584.1 0 to 400°C = 1.7°C
400 to 1820°C = 0.03°C
C 0 to + 2300 Hoskins 0.12°C
D 0 to + 2495 Hoskins 0.08°C
E -270 to + 1000 IEC584.1 0.03°C
G2 0 to + 2315 Hoskins 0.07°C
J -210 to + 1200 IEC584.1 0.02°C
K -270 to + 1372 IEC584.1 0.04°C
L -200 to + 900 DIN43710:1985 0.02°C
(to IPTS68)
N -270 to + 1300 IEC584.1 0.04°C
R -50 to + 1768 IEC584.1 0.04°C
S -50 to + 1768 IEC584.1 0.04°C
T -270 to + 400 IEC584.1 0.02°C
U -200 to + 600 DIN43710:1985 0.08°C
NiMo/Ni -50 to + 1410 ASTM E1751-95 0.06°C
Co
Platinel 0 to + 1370 Engelhard 0.02°C
Mi/NiMo 0 to + 1406 Ipsen 0.14°C
Pt20%R 0 to + 1888 ASTM E1751-95 0.07°C
h/Pt40%/
Rh
394 HA030554 Issue 16

Relay and Logic I/O Specification
OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4 and OP5 logic input, logic output and relay
specification.
Active (current on) current sourcing logic output

Voltage output
across terminals: +11V min; +13V max.
Short circuit output current: 6mA min. (steady state); 44mA max. (switch current)
Inactive (current off) current sourcing logic output (OP1 or OP2

only)
Voltage output
across terminals: 0V (min.); 300mV (max.)
Output source leakage
current into short circuit: 0µA (min.); 100µA max.
Active (current on) contact closure sourcing logic input (OP1 and
OP2 only)
Input current
Input at 12V: 0mA (min.); 44mA (max.)
input at 0V: 6mA min. (steady state); 44mA max. (switch current)
Open circuit input voltage: 11V (min.); 13V (max.)
Open circuit (inactve)
resistance: 500Ω (min.); ∞ (max.)
Closed
circuit (active) resistance: 0Ω (min.); 150Ω (max.)
Relay contacts (OP1, OP2 and OP3) - AgCdO

Contact
switching power (resistive): Max: 2A at 230V RMS ±15%; Min: 100mA @ 12V.
Maximum
current through terminals: 2A
Estimated mechanical life: >10,000,000 operations
Relay contacts (OP4 and OP5) - AgNi

Contact
switching power (resistive): Max: 1A at 230V RMS ±15%
Min: 5mA @ 5V.
Maximum
current through terminals: 1A
Estimated mechanical life: >10,000,000 operations
HA030554 Issue 16 395

Digital Inputs
DigInA, DigInB, contact closure logic input
Contact closure
Short circuit
sensing current (source): 5.5mA (min.); 6.5mA (max.)
Open circuit
(inactive) resistance: 600 Ω (min.); ∞ (max.)
Closed circuit
(active) resistance: 0Ω (min.); 300Ω (max.)
Maximum frequency: 8Hz
Minimum pulse width: 62.5ms
396 HA030554 Issue 16

DC Outputs
OP1, OP2, OP3 DC analogue outputs
Current outputs (OP1, OP2 and OP3)

Output ranges: Configurable within 0 to 20mA
Load resistance: 500Ω Max.
Calibration accuracy: <±100µA ±1% of reading
Voltage outputs (OP3 only)

Output range: Configurable within 0 to 10V
Output impedance: 500O Min.
Calibration accuracy: <±50mV ±1% of reading
General
Isolation: 300Vac double insulated from instrument and other I/O
Resolution: >11 bits
Thermal drift: <100ppm/°C
Blocks Supported
‘Toolkit’ Blocks
BCD input
Eight-input logic
Eight input multiplexer
Timers
Two-input logic
Two-input maths
User values
Application Blocks
Humidity
Steriliser
Zirconia
HA030554 Issue 16 397

398 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Appendix B: Control Loops
Appendix B: Control Loops

Note: See "Loop Option Configuration" on page 142 and "Advanced Loop
Configuration" on page 152 for Loop configuration details.
Introduction
With this recorder, two control loops are available, each loop containing two outputs
(Channel 1 and Channel 2) which can be individually configured for PID, On/Off or
valve position. For temperature control, channel 1 is normally configured for heating
and channel 2 for cooling.
Example (Heat Only)

Controller (simplified) Process under control
Control algorithm Control Power

output
(PID, On/Off, VP) (OP) regulator
Error
Control Temperature
Setpoint loop
transducer
(SP) Heater
PV (Measured
temperature)
Figure 198 Control loop example

The measured temperature (process variable, or ‘PV’) is connected to the input of the
controller, where it is compared with the ‘Setpoint’ (SP) (the target temperature). If
there is a difference between the PV and the SP, the controller calculates and outputs
a heating demand. This output is applied to the process heating device, which in turn
causes a change in the PV in a direction intended to result in a zero error.
HA030554 Issue 16 399

Appendix B: Control Loops nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Control Loop Definitions
Auto/Manual
In manual mode, if ‘On/Off’ control is configured, the output power may be edited by
the user but the only power values allowed are: +100% (heat on; cool off) for positive
user entries, 0% (heat off; cool off) for zero entry or -100%. (heat off; cool on) for
negative entries.
In manual mode, for ‘PID’ control the output may be edited between +100% and (if
‘cool’ is configured), -100%. The actual output value is subject to limiting and output
rate limit.
In manual mode, for valve position control, the up and down arrow buttons directly
control (nudge) the raise and lower relay outputs respectively. It is also possible to
control the valve by sending nudge commands over a serial link, or by software
wiring from a suitable parameter. A single nudge command moves the valve by 1
minimum on time; longer nudge demands produce longer valve movements. See
"Valve nudge" on page 429 for more details.
If sensor break occurs while the controller is in automatic the controller outputs the
sensor break output power. In such a case the user can switch to manual control and
edit the output power. On returning to automatic control, the controller checks again
for sensor break.
If autotune is enabled while in manual mode, the autotune remains in a reset state
such that when the user puts the controller into automatic control the autotune starts.
Types of Control Loop
On/Off control
This form of control turns heating power on when the process value is below the
setpoint, and turns it off when it is above the setpoint (see also Figure 217). If cooling
is configured, it has its own relay which operates in a similar way. In Direct Acting
mode, the behaviour is inverted. On/off is suitable for controlling switching devices
such as relays.
Because of the thermal inertia of the load, a certain amount of oscillation will take
place, and this can affect the quality of the product. For this reason, On/Off control is
not recommended for critical applications.
Depending on the nature of the process being controlled, some hysteresis may have
to be included to prevent continuous operation or chatter in the controlling device.
400 HA030554 Issue 16

PID Control
Also known as ‘three term control’, this type of control continuously adjusts the output
demand, according to a set of rules, in order to control the process as closely as
possible to requirements. PID provides more stable control than On/Off control but is
more complex to set up as the parameters must match the characteristics of the
process under control.
The three major parameters are: Proportional band (PB), Integral time (Ti) and
Derivative time (Td) and the output from the controller is the sum of these three
terms. This output is a function of the size and duration of the error value and the
rate-of-change of the process value.
It is possible to disable the integral and/or derivative terms and control on

proportional only, on proportional plus integral (PI) or proportional plus derivative
(PD).
PI control is often used when the PV is noisy and/or subject to rapid variations, where
derivative action would cause the output power to fluctuate wildly.
Proportional Band
The proportional band (PB) delivers an output which is proportional to the size of the
error signal. It is the range over which the output power is continuously adjustable in
a linear fashion from 0% to 100% (for a heat only controller). Below the proportional
band the output is full on (100%), above the proportional band the output is full off
(0%) as shown in Figure 199.
The width of the proportional band determines the magnitude of the response to the
error. If PB is too narrow (high gain) the system oscillates; if it is too wide (low gain)
control is sluggish. The ideal situation is when the proportional band is as narrow as
possible without causing oscillation.
Figure 199 also shows the effect of narrowing proportional band to the point of
oscillation. A wide proportional band results in straight line control but with an
appreciable initial error between setpoint and actual temperature. As the band is
narrowed the temperature gets closer to setpoint until eventually, it becomes
unstable.
The proportional band may be set in engineering units or as a percentage of the

controller range.
Wide
Narrow Proportional
band Setpoint
Increasing
Temperature
Output
proportional band
Temperature Time
SP
Figure 199 Proportional band action (reverse acting)
HA030554 Issue 16 401

Integral Term
In a proportional only controller, as seen in the previous section, an error must exist
between setpoint and PV in order for the controller to deliver power. Integral is used
to achieve zero steady state control error.
The integral term slowly modifies the output level as a result of any error between
setpoint and measured value. If the measured value is below setpoint the integral
action gradually increases the output in an attempt to correct the error. If it is above
setpoint integral action gradually decreases the output or increases the cooling
power to correct the error.
Figure 200 shows proportional plus integral action.
SP
Temperature
Time
Figure 200 Proportional + Integral Control

The integral term is set in seconds. The longer the integral time constant, the more
slowly the output is modified and the more sluggish the response. Too small an
integral time causes the process to overshoot, and perhaps to start oscillating. The
integral action may be disabled by setting its value to Off.
Derivative Term
Derivative (or rate) action provides a sudden change in output linked to the rate of
change in error, whether this is caused by PV alone (derivative on PV) or by a
change in the SP as well (derivative on error selection). If the measured value falls
quickly, derivative provides a large change in output in an attempt to correct the
perturbation before it goes too far. It is most beneficial in recovering from small
perturbations.
SP
Temperature
Time
Figure 201 Proportional + Integral + Derivative Action
402 HA030554 Issue 16

Derivative is used to improve the performance of the loop. There are, however,
situations where derivative may be the cause of instability. For example, if the PV is
noisy, then derivative can amplify that noise and cause excessive output changes, in
these situations it is often better to disable the derivative and re-tune the loop.
Derivative should not be used to curb overshoot in situations when the output is
saturated at Op High or Op Low for extended periods, such as process start up, since
to do so degrades the steady state performance of the system. Overshoot inhibition
is best left to the approach control parameters, High and Low Cutback.
If Derivative is set to Off, no derivative action will be applied.
Derivative can be calculated on change of PV or change of Error. If configured on

error, then changes in the setpoint will be transmitted to the output. For applications
such as furnace temperature control, it is common practice to select Derivative on PV
to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of output as a result of a
change in setpoint.
Motorised valve control

Designed specifically for driving motorised valves this type of control can operate in
‘Unbounded’ mode (VPU) or ‘Bounded’ mode (VPB). Relay outputs are used to drive
the valve motor.
VPB Position Velocity = Mechanical linkage VPU Velocity = Mechanical linkage
Motor Motor
PID Time Valve Load PID Time pro- Valve Load
SP proportioning S portioning
ChN
Temp Temp
sensor Manual input sensor
Manual input (Pulses)
Pot.
Figure 202 VPB and VPU comparison

Unbounded valve positioning (VPU) does not require a position feedback
potentiometer in order to operate because it controls directly the direction and
velocity of the movement of the valve in order to minimise the error between the
setpoint (SP) and the process variable (PV). Control is performed by delivering a
‘raise’ or ‘lower’ pulse to control the velocity of the valve in response to the control
demand signal.
Bounded VP (VPB) control uses PID (or any other combination of the three terms) to
set a required valve position. A feedback potentiometer linked to the valve provides a
signal giving actual valve position. This allows the control loop to calculate the
difference between required and actual position dynamically, and adjust control
output accordingly. Control is performed by delivering a ‘raise’ or ‘lower’ pulse to
adjust the valve position.
HA030554 Issue 16 403

Manual Mode
Bounded VP controls in manual mode because the inner positional loop is still
running against the potentiometer feedback, so it is operating as a position loop.
In boundless mode the algorithm is a velocity mode positioner. When manual is

selected then the up and down arrow produce +100% or –100% velocity respectively
for the duration of the key press.
In boundless mode it is essential that the motor travel time is set accurately in order
to allow the integral time to calculate correctly. Motor travel time is defined as (valve
fully open – valve fully closed). This is not necessarily the time printed on the motor
since, if mechanical stops have been set on the motor, the travel time of the valve
may be different.
Every time the valve is driven to its end stops the algorithm is reset to 0% or 100% to
compensate for any changes which may occur due to wear in linkages or other
mechanical parts.
This technique makes boundless VP look like a positional loop in manual even
though it is not. This enables combinations of heating and cooling e.g. PID heat, VPU
cool with manual mode working as expected.
Motorised Valve Output Connections

The loop output which has been configured as valve position can be wired to the PV
input of one of the pairs of relays 2A2B/3A3B or 4AC/5AC which has been configured
as Type = ‘Valve Raise’. Only one relay input needs to be wired as the other relay of
the pair will be automatically set to ‘Valve Lower’. For example, if Loop 1 Channel 1
output is wired to Relay 2A2B and the ‘Type’ is configured as ‘Valve Raise’ then the
Type for Relay 3A3B will be ‘Valve Lower’.
Loop Parameters
Relative cool gain (R2G)

This is the gain of channel 2 control output, relative to the channel 1 control output
and is used to compensate for the different quantities of power available to heat and
to cool a process. For example, water cooling applications might require a relative
cool gain of 0.25 because cooling is four times greater than the heating process at
the operating temperature.
By default, this parameter is set automatically when an Autotune is performed, but

setting the Tune menu parameter (see "Tune menu parameters" on page 145)
‘AT.R2G’ to ‘No’ causes the R2G value(s) entered in the PID menu (see "PID menu
parameters" on page 145) to be used instead.
404 HA030554 Issue 16

High and Low cutback

Cutback high ‘CBH’ and Cutback low ‘CBL’ are values that modify the amount of
overshoot, or undershoot, that occurs during large step changes in PV under start-up
conditions, for example. They are independent of the PID terms which means that the
PID terms can be set for optimal steady state response and the cutback parameters
used to modify any overshoot which may be present.
Cutback involves moving the proportional band towards the cutback point nearest the
measured value whenever the latter is outside the proportional band and the power is
saturated (at 0 or 100% for a heat only controller). The proportional band moves
downscale to the lower cutback point and waits for the measured value to enter it. It
then escorts the measured value with full PID control to the setpoint. In some cases it
can cause a ‘dip’ in the measured value as it approaches setpoint as shown in Figure
203 but generally decreases the time to needed to bring the process into operation.
The action described above is reversed for falling temperature.
If cutback is set to Auto the cutback values are automatically configured to 3 × PB.
Upper cutback point (CBH)
SP 0% output
Temperature
100% output
Lower cutback point (CBL)
Time
Figure 203 Cutback operation

Briefly, if PV < CBL then the output is set to its maximum.
If PV > CBH, then the output is set to its minimum
If PV lies within the range CBH-CBL, then PID calculations take control.
Manual Reset
With PID control, the integral term automatically removes the steady state error from
the setpoint. With PD control, the integral term is set to ‘OFF’, and the measured
value will not settle precisely at the setpoint. The Manual Reset parameter (MR in the
PID menu - see "PID menu parameters" on page 145) represents the value of the
power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. This value must be set
manually in order to remove the steady state error.
HA030554 Issue 16 405

Integral Hold
If ‘Integral Hold’ (Main menu - "Main menu parameters" on page 143) is set to ‘Yes’,
the integral component of the PID calculation is frozen, that is, it holds its current
value but does not integrate any disturbances in the plant. This is equivalent to
switching into PD control with a manual reset value preconfigured.
Integral Hold may be used, in a situation where the loop is expected to open. For
example, it may be necessary to turn heaters off for a short period or to switch into
manual at low power. In this case it may be advantageous to wire Integral Hold to a
digital input which activates when the heaters are turned off. When the heaters are
switched on again, because the integral is at its previous value, overshoot is
minimised.
Integral De-bump
This feature is not accessible to the user. When changing from Manual to Auto
control. the integral component is forced to: (out put value – proportional component
– derivative component) (I = OP – P – D).
This ensures that no change occurs in output at the point of switch over, (‘Bumpless
Transfer’). The output power then gradually changes in accordance with the demand
from the PID algorithm.
If manual mode = ‘Track’, bumpless transfer also occurs when changing from Auto to
Manual control. At the point of changeover the output power remains the same as the
demand in the auto state. The value can then be altered by the operator. For other
modes, the output steps to the ‘Forced output’ or ‘Last MOP’ value as appropriate.
See ‘Manual Mode’ in Output menu items ("Output menu items" on page 148) for
further details.
Loop Break
Loop Break attempts to detect loss of restoring action in the control loop by checking
the control output, the process value and its rate of change. Since response times
vary from process to process, the Loop Break Time (LBT) parameter (PID menu -
"PID menu parameters" on page 145) allows a time to be set before a Loop Break
Alarm (Loop Break - Diagnostics menu) becomes active. LBT is set automatically in
Autotune.
The Loop Break Alarm parameter has no direct effect on control. In order to define
behaviour under Loop Break conditions, the parameter must be wired, for example,
to a relay, which can then activate an external indicator.
It is assumed that, so long as the requested output power is within the output power
limits of a control loop, the loop is operating in linear control and is therefore not in a
loop break condition. If, however, the output becomes saturated then the loop is
operating outside its linear control region. If the output remains saturated at the same
output power for a significant duration, then this might be symptomatic of a fault in the
control loop. The source of the loop break is not important, but the loss of control
could be catastrophic.
406 HA030554 Issue 16

Since the worst case time constant for a given load is usually known, a worst case
time can be calculated over which the load should have responded with a minimum
movement in temperature. By performing this calculation the corresponding rate of
approach towards setpoint can be used to determine if the loop can no longer control
at the chosen setpoint. If the PV was drifting away from the setpoint or approaching
the setpoint at a rate less than that calculated, the loop break condition would be met.
If an autotune is performed the loop break time is automatically set to Ti ´ 2 for a PI or

PID loop, or to 12 ´ Td for a PD loop. For an On/Off controller loop break detection is
based on loop range settings as 0.1 ´ Span where Span = Range High – Range Low.
Therefore, if the output is at limit and the PV has not moved by 0.1Span in the loop
break time a loop break will occur.
If the loop break time is 0 (off) the loop break time can be set manually. Then, if the
output is in saturation and the PV has not moved by >0.5 ´ PB in the loop break time,
a loop break condition is considered to have occurred.
Gain Scheduling
In some processes the tuned PID set may be different at low temperatures from that
at high temperatures particularly in control systems where the response to the
cooling power is significantly different from that of the heating power, or when
changes in the process have occurred. Gain scheduling allows a number of PID sets
to be stored and provides automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values
and another. For this instrument, the maximum number of sets is three which means
that two boundaries are provided to select when the next PID set is used. When a
boundary is exceeded the next PID set is selected bumplessly. Hysteresis is used to
stop scheduling oscillation at the boundaries.
Gain scheduling is basically a look up table which can be selected using different
strategies or types. Auto tune tunes to the active scheduled PID set.
The following Gain Scheduled types are offered using the PID menu parameter
‘Sched Type’ ("PID menu parameters" on page 145):
Set Required set selected by the user. Alternatively soft wiring
may be used to control the PID set selection.
Setpoint Transfer between sets is dependent on the setpoint value.
PV Transfer between sets is dependent on the process value.
Error Transfer between sets is dependent on the error value.
Output Transfer between sets is dependent on the output demand
value.
Remote A remote parameter may be wired into the scheduler. The
PID set is then selected according to the value of this input.
PV (e.g.)
2 - 3 boundary
1 - 2 boundary
Time
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3
Figure 204 Gain scheduling
HA030554 Issue 16 407

Tuning
Introduction
The balancing of the P, I and D terms varies from process to process. In a plastics
extruder, for example, there are different responses to a die, casting roll, drive loop,
thickness control loop or pressure loop. In order to achieve the best performance
from an extrusion line all loop tuning parameters must be set to their optimum values.
Tuning involves setting the following PID menu parameters ("PID menu parameters"
on page 145):
Proportional Band (PB), Integral Time (Ti), Derivative Time (Td), Cutback High
(CBH), Cutback Low (CBL), and Relative Cool Gain (R2G - applicable to heat/cool
systems only).
The recorder/controller is shipped with these parameters set to default values. In

many cases the default values give adequate, stable, straight-line control, but the
response of the loop may not be ideal. Because process characteristics vary it is
often necessary to adjust the control parameters to achieve best control. To
determine the optimum values for any particular loop or process it is necessary to
carry out a procedure called loop tuning. If significant changes are later made to the
process which affect the way in which it responds it may be necessary to retune the
loop.
Users have the choice of tuning the loop automatically or manually. Both procedures
require the loop to oscillate and both are described in the following sections.
Loop Response
Ignoring loop oscillation, there are three categories of loop performance viz Under
damped, Critically damped and Over damped:
Under Damped
In this situation the parameters are set to prevent oscillation but lead to an overshoot
of the Process Value (PV) followed by decaying oscillation until the PV finally settles
at the Setpoint. This type of response can give a minimum time to Setpoint but
overshoot may cause problems in certain situations and the loop may be sensitive to
sudden changes in PV, resulting in further decaying oscillations before settling once
again.
Critically Damped
This represents an ideal situation where noticeable overshoot to small step changes
does not occur and the process responds to changes in a controlled, non oscillatory
manner.
Over Damped
In this situation the loop responds in a controlled but sluggish manner which results in
a non-ideal and unnecessarily slow loop performance.
408 HA030554 Issue 16

Initial Settings
In addition to the tuning parameters listed above, there are a number of other
parameters which can affect loop response. These parameters must be correctly
configured before tuning is initiated. Parameters include, but are not limited to:-
Setpoint
Before tuning, the loop conditions should be set as closely as practicable to the
actual conditions which will be met in normal operation. For example, in a furnace or
oven application a representative load should be included, an extruder should be
running, etc.
Output High, Output Low

These Output menu heat and cool limits define the overall maximum and minimum
power which may be delivered to the process by the control loop. For a heat only
controller the default values are 0 and 100%. For a heat/cool controller the defaults
are -100 and 100%. Although most processes are designed to work between these
limits there may be instances where it is desirable to limit the power delivered to the
process.
Rem. Output Low, Rem. Output High

If these Remote Output Limits parameters (Output menu - "Output menu items" on
page 148) are used, they are effective only if they lie within the Heat/Cool Limits
above.
CH2 DeadBand
Heat/Cool Dead band. If a second (cool) channel is configured, a parameter ‘Ch2
Deadband’ is also available in the Output menu which sets the distance between the
heat and cool proportional bands. The default value is 0% which means that heating
will cease to be available at the same time as cooling becomes available. The dead
band may be set to ensure that there is no possibility of the heat and cool channels
operating together, particularly when cycling output stages are installed.
Minimum On Time
If either or both of the output channels is fitted with a relay or logic output, the
parameter ‘Min On Time’ appears in the output menu. This is the cycling time for a
time proportioning output and should be set correctly before tuning is started.
Filter
The ‘Filter’ parameter is found in the Channel ‘Main’ menu ("Channel Main" on
page 123). It is used to remove noise from slowly changing signals so that the
underlying trend can be seen more clearly.
Rate
Sets the maximum PID rate-of-change. The output rate limit is active during tuning
and can affect the tuning results. Rate is useful in preventing rapid changes in output
from damaging the process or heater elements. The parameter ‘Rate’ is found in the
‘Setpoint’ menu ("Setpoint menu parameters" on page 147).
HA030554 Issue 16 409

CH1 Travel Time, CH2 Travel Time

Valve Travel Time. If the output is a motor valve positioner the ‘Ch1 Travel Time’ and
Ch2 Travel Time’ Output menu parameters must be set correctly. The valve travel
time is the time taken for the valve to travel from 0% (closed) to 100% (open). This
may be different from the motor travel time limits because the mechanical linkage
between the motor and the valve, setting of limit switches etc. can modify behaviour.
In a valve positioner application, the channel output is wired to the ‘PV’ input of relay
2A2B or 4AC. Configuring this relay as Type = Valve Raise causes the associated
relay (3A3C or 5AC respectively) to be configured automatically as Type = Valve
Lower, and the action of the relay pair is controlled by the single wire. In a heat/cool
application, channel one is the heat valve and channel two is the cool valve.
Other tuning considerations

If a process includes adjacent interactive zones, each zone should be tuned
independently with the adjacent zones at operating temperature.
It is recommended that a tuning process be initiated when the PV and setpoint are far
apart. This allows start up conditions to be measured and cutback values to be
calculated more accurately. Cutback is not set for ‘Tune at setpoint’.
In a programmer/controller tuning should only be attempted during dwell periods and

not during ramp stages. If a programmer/controller is tuned automatically the
controller should be placed in ‘Hold’ during each dwell period whilst autotune is
active.
Note: Tuning, carried out in dwell periods which are at different extremes of
temperature may give different results owing to non linearity of heating (or cooling).
This may provide a convenient way to establish values for Gain Scheduling.
If an auto tune is initiated there are two further parameters (High Output’ and ‘Low
Output’) which need to be set. These are found in the ‘Tune’ menu ("Tune menu
parameters" on page 145).
High Output Sets a high output limit to be imposed during autotune.
Must be ≤ Output High, set in the Output menu.
Low Output Sets a low output limit to be imposed during autotune.
Must be ≥ Output Low, set in the Output menu.
The above values must be set correctly, otherwise sufficient power to achieve SP
might not be available during tuning, and the tune will eventually fail.
410 HA030554 Issue 16

Autotune
Autotune automatically sets the following PID menu parameters ("PID menu
parameters" on page 145):
PB Proportional band.
Ti Integral time. If previously set to ‘Off’ Ti will remain off after
an autotune.
Td Derivative time. If previously set to ‘Off’ Td will remain off
after an autotune.
CBH, CBL Cutback high and low values. If either is set to ‘Auto’, it will
remain so after auto tuning. In order that Autotune set the
cutback values for the user, a value other than ‘Auto’ must
be selected before Autotune is initiated. Autotune never
returns cutback values less than 1.6 × PB
R2G Calculated only if the unit is configured as Heat/Cool.
Following an Autotune, R2G lies between 0.1 and 10. If the
calculated value lies outside this range, a ‘Tune Fail’ alarm
is set.
LBT Loop break time. Following an autotune, LBT is set to 2 ×
Ti (if Ti was not previously set ‘Off’), or to 12 × Td (if Ti was
previously set to ‘Off’).
Autotune can be performed at any time, but normally it is performed only once, during
the initial commissioning of the process. However, if the process under control
subsequently becomes unsatisfactory (because its characteristics have changed), it
may be necessary to tune again for the new conditions.
The auto tune algorithm reacts in different ways depending on the initial conditions of
the plant. The explanations given later in this section are for the following example
conditions:-
1. Initial PV is below the setpoint and, therefore, approaches the setpoint from
below for a heat/cool control loop
2. As above, but for a heat only control loop
3. Initial PV is at the same value as the setpoint (tune at setpoint). That is, within
0.3% of the range of the controller if ‘PB Units’ (Setup menu) is set to ‘Percent’,
or +1 engineering unit (1 in 1000) if the ‘PB Units’ is set to ‘Eng’. Range is defined
as ‘Range High’ – ‘Range Low’ for process inputs or the thermocouple or RTD
range defined in section A3 for temperature inputs. If the PV is just outside the
range stated above the autotune will attempt a tune from above or below SP.
Autotune and Sensor Break

When the controller is autotuning and sensor break occurs, the autotune aborts and
the controller outputs the sensor break output power ‘Sbrk OP’ set up in the Output
menu ("Output menu items" on page 148). Autotune must be re-started when the
sensor break condition is no longer present.
Autotune and Inhibit Or Manual

If the Loop Inhibit is asserted or the controller is put into Manual Mode, any tune in
progress will be aborted and will need to be restart once the condition has been
removed. Note that it is not possible to start an autotune sequence if the loop is
inhibited or in Manual control.
HA030554 Issue 16 411

Autotune and Gain Scheduling

When gain scheduling is enabled and an autotune is performed, the calculated PID
values are written into the PID set that is active, on completion of the tune. Therefore,
the user may tune within the boundaries of a set and the values will be written into the
appropriate PID set. However, if the boundaries are close (because the range of the
loop is not large), then, at the completion of the tune, it cannot be guaranteed that the
PID values will be written to the correct set particularly if the schedule type is PV or
OP. In this situation the scheduler (‘Sched Type’) should be switched to ‘Set’ and the
‘active set’ chosen manually.
Initial Conditions
Configure the parameters described in "Initial Settings" on page 409 and "Other
tuning considerations" on page 410.
Notes:
1. The ‘tighter’ power limit applies. For example, if ‘High Output’ is set to 80% and
‘Output High’ is set to 70% then the output power will be limited to 70%.
2. The PV must oscillate to some degree to allow the tuner to calculate the relevant
values. The limits must be set so as to allow oscillation about the setpoint.
Initiating the Autotune

In the Loop Tune menu ("Tune menu parameters" on page 145) for the relevant loop,
set ‘Tune Enable’ to ‘On’.
Example 1: Autotune From Below Sp (Heat/Cool)

The point at which Automatic tuning is performed (Tune Control Point) lies just below
the setpoint at which the process is normally expected to operate (Target Setpoint).
This ensures that the process is not significantly overheated or overcooled. The Tune
Control Point is calculated as follows:
Tune Control Point = Initial PV + 0.75(Target Setpoint – Initial PV).
The Initial PV is the PV measured after a 1 minute settling period (point ‘B’ in the
figure below).
Examples:
If Target Setpoint = 500°C and Initial PV = 20°C, then the Tune Control Point is
380°C.
If Target Setpoint = 500°C and Initial PV = 400°C, then the Tune Control Point is
475°C.
This is because the overshoot is likely to be less as the process temperature

approaches the target setpoint.
Figure 205 shows the auto tune sequence.
412 HA030554 Issue 16

It is not guaranteed that

PV will not exceed SP
Target SP 1st Peak to
overshoot peak
PV
True control point Hysteresis
High output
Zero output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure 205 Autotune heat/cool process
Key
A Start of Autotune
A to B Heating and Cooling off for one minute allows steady state
conditions to be established.
B to D First heat/cool cycle to establish first overshoot. Cutback
low (CBL) value calculated from the overshoot magnitude
(unless CBL set to ‘Auto’).
B to F Two cycles of oscillation allow peak-to-peak value and os-
cillation period to be determined. PID terms are calculated.
F Heating is switched on.
G Heating (and cooling) are switched off allowing the plant to
respond naturally. Measurements over the period F to G
are used to calculate the Relative Cool Gain (R2G). Cut-
back High is calculated from the equation (CBH = CBL ×
R2G).
H Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control
at the target setpoint using the new control terms.
Note: Recommended external fuse ratings are: 2A Type T 250V.
HA030554 Issue 16 413

Example 2: Autotune From Below Sp (Heat Only)

The sequence of operation for a heat only loop is the same as that described above
for a heat/cool loop, except that the sequence ends at ‘F’ since there is no need to
calculate ‘R2G’ (R2G is set to 1.0 for heat only processes). At ‘F’ autotune is turned
off and the process is allowed to control using the new control terms.
For a tune from below setpoint ‘CBL’ is calculated on the basis of the size of the
overshoot (assuming it was not set to Auto in the initial conditions). CBH is then set to
the same value as CBL.
Note: Autotune can also occur when the initial PV is above SP. The sequence is the
same as tuning from below setpoint except that the sequence starts with natural
cooling applied at ‘B’ after the first one minute settling time. In this case CBH is
calculated and CBL is then set to the same value as CBH.
Target SP
1st Peak to
overshoot peak
PV
True control point
Hysteresis
High output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure 206 Autotune heat only process (from below SP)

A Start of Autotune
A to B Heating off for one minute to allow steady state conditions
to be established.
B to D First heat cycle to establish first overshoot. Cutback low
(CBL) value calculated from the overshoot magnitude (un-
less CBL set to ‘Auto’).
D to F Calculate PID terms.
F Autotune is turned off and the process is allowed to control
at the target setpoint using the new control terms.
414 HA030554 Issue 16

Example 3: Autotune At Sp (Heat /Cool)

It is sometimes necessary to tune at the actual setpoint being used as shown below.
For a tune at setpoint, autotune does not calculate cutback since there was no initial
start up response to the application of heating or cooling. Cutback values of less than
1.6 ´ PB will not be returned.
Peak to
peak
Hysteresis
Target SP
PV
High output
Zero output
OP
Low output
B - A = 1 minute
Figure 207 Autotune at setpoint

A Start of Autotune. A test is done at the start of autotune to
establish conditions for a tune at setpoint. Conditions are
that SP must remain within 0.3% of the range of the con-
troller if ‘PB Units’ (Setup menu - "Setup menu parame-
ters" on page 144) is set to ‘Percent’, or +1 engineering
unit (1 in 1000) if the ‘PB Units’ is set to ‘Eng’. Range is de-
fined as ‘Range High’ – ‘Range Low’ for process inputs or
the thermocouple or RTD range defined in A3 for temper-
ature inputs.
A to B The output is frozen at he current value for one minute,
and the conditions are continuously monitored during this
period. If the conditions specified above are met, then an
autotune at setpoint is initiated at ‘B’. If PV drifts outside
the condition limits at any time during this period, tuning at
SP is abandoned, and tuning resumes as a ‘tune from
above’ or ‘tune from below’, depending on the direction of
drift. Since the loop is already at setpoint, a Tune Control
setpoint is not calculated; the loop is forced to oscillate
about the Target SP.
C to G The process is forced to oscillate by switching the output
between the output limits. The oscillation period and the
peak-to-peak response are determined, and the PID terms
calculated.
G to H An extra heating stage is initiated, then all heating and
cooling are switched off at H, allowing the plant to respond
naturally. The relative cool gain (R2G) is calculated.
I Autotune is switched off and the process is allowed to con-
trol at the target setpoint using the newly calculated terms.
HA030554 Issue 16 415

AT.R2G
Some load types and process conditions can cause autotune to set an incorrect
value for R2G resulting in an instability in the system after an autotune has
completed. In such circumstances, the value of R2G should be checked, and if it is
low (approaching 0.1) a manual entry should be made as follows:
1. In the Tune menu, set the AT.R2G parameter to ‘No’.
2. In the PID menu, enter the new R2G value (calculated as described below)
3. In the Tune menu, enter a value for Low Output, calculated from: Low Output =
-High Output x R2G
4. In the Tune menu, set ‘TuneEn’ On.
R2G Calculation
1. In the Main menu, set the controller to Manual mode
2. Turn heating on (limited by the value of ‘Output High’ in the Output menu -
"Output menu items" on page 148) and measure the heating rate (‘H’ °C/minute).
3. Allow the process to heat to, say, 10% above the setpoint value then turn the
heating off and allow the temperature to settle.
4. Turn cooling power on (limited by the value of ‘Output Low’ in the Output menu)
and measure the cooling rate (‘C’ °C/minute) whilst allowing the temperature to
fall below the setpoint value.
5. Calculate the value of R2G from the equation R2G = (H/C) x (Output Low/output
High)
Example:
For a measured heating rate (H) of 10°C per min and a measured cooling rate (C) of
25° per minute and with, Output High = 80% and Output Low = 40%, then R2G =
(10/25) x (40/80) = 0.4 x 0.5 = 0.2.
ΔCTemp
---------------------- = CoolingRate
Output Hi ΔCtime
Heating on
ΔHTemp
Temperature
SP
ΔHTime ΔCTemp Cooling on
Output Lo
ΔCTime
ΔHTemp
----------------------- = HeatingRate
ΔHtime PV
Time
Figure 208 R2G calculation

Note: This is not a very accurate method as it does not take natural cooling into
account. Its main advantage is that it is simple to achieve.
416 HA030554 Issue 16

Failure Modes
The conditions for performing an autotune are monitored by the Tune menu ("Tune
menu parameters" on page 145) parameter ‘State’. If autotune is not successful error
conditions are read by this parameter as follows:
Timeout Set if any one stage is not completed within an hour. Pos-
sible causes are the loop being open circuit, or not re-
sponding to the controller demands. Some heavily lagged
systems may produce a timeout if the cooling rate is very
slow.
TI Limit This is set if Autotune calculates a value for the integral
term which is greater than the maximum allowable (99999
seconds). This indicates that the loop is not responding or
that the tune is taking too long.
R2G Limit Error occurs if the calculate value of R2G is outside the
range 0.1 to 10.0. R2G limit can occur if the gain difference
between heating and cooling is too large, or if the controller
is configured for heat/cool, but the heating and/or cooling
device is turned off or not working correctly.
Relative Cool Gain in Well Lagged Processes

In the majority of processes Relative Cool Gain R2G is calculated by the autotune
algorithm as described in the previous sections.
There are occasions, however, where an alternative algorithm may be preferred.

These are processes which are heavily lagged, where the heat loss to ambient is
very small so that natural cooling is extremely slow, and certain high order plants,
those that need derivative, Td. This algorithm is known as R2GPD and has been
added to controllers from firmware version V4.10.
The type of algorithm is selected using the parameter 'Tune R2G' found in the
Auto-Tune list, "Tune menu parameters" on page 145. The choices are:-
Standard This is the default as described in example 2 in "Autotune"
on page 411. and is suitable for use on most processes.
The benefit of this algorithm is that it is relatively quick.
However, in the type of process described in the previous
paragraph, it can produce values which are not ideal.
These values are generally identified by R2G equal to or
very close to 0.1.
R2GPD If the process is known to be heavily lagged or produces
values such as those above then R2GPD should be select-
ed. This algorithm extends the autotune period by putting
the controller into proportional plus derivative mode (PD)
and uses the output power demand value during this peri-
od to determine the Relative Cool Gain.
Off The automatic calculation of Relative Cool Gain can be
turned off and the value entered manually as described in
"Relative cool gain (R2G)" on page 404.
HA030554 Issue 16 417

Example 4: When Tune R2G = R2GPD, Autotune from below

setpoint
Figure 209 Autotune from below setpoint

Periods A-F are largely unchanged from the 'Standard' algorithm, Example 2 in
"Autotune" on page 411 with the following exception:
- Changing the Target Setpoint during period A-B will not change the tuning setpoint.
Period F-H is replaced as follows:

F to G Heat is applied for a period (F-G) of half the first heat cycle
(D-E) to compensate for the last cool cycle.
G to H This is a period in which the controller is put into PD con-
trol.
The values of proportional term and derivative time for this
period of PD control are determined by the algorithm.
H OPss is the output demand value at the end of this period
and is used in the determination of R2G.
418 HA030554 Issue 16

Manual tuning
If, for any reason, automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results the controller can be
tuned manually. There are a number of standard methods for manual tuning, the
Zeigler-Nichols method being described here:
1. Adjust the setpoint to its normal running conditions (assumed to be above the PV
so that ‘heat only’ is applied.
2. Set the integral and derivative times (Ti and Td) to ‘Off’
3. Set High and Low cutback (CBH and CBL) to ‘Auto’.
4. If the PV is stable (not necessarily at the setpoint), reduce the proportional band
(PB) such that the PV just starts to oscillate, leaving time between adjustments to
allow the loop to stabilise. Make a note of the PB at this point (PB'), and also note
the oscillation period (‘T’).
If the PV is already oscillating measure the oscillation period (‘T’) and then
gradually increase PB to the point at which oscillation just ceases. Make a note of
the PB (PB') at this point.
5. If the controller is fitted with a cooling channel, enable this now.
6. Observe the oscillation waveform and adjust ‘R2G’ until a symmetrical wave form
is observed (Figure "Manual tuning" on page 419).
7. Set PB, Ti and Td according to the table shown in Figure 210.
Control type PB Ti Td
Proportional only 2 × PB' Off Off
P+I 2.2 × PB' 0.8 × T Off
P+I+D 1.7 × PB' 0.5 × T 0.12 × T
Figure 210 Calculate parameter values
Setpoint
R2G correct
Temperature
R2G too large
R2G too small
Time
Figure 211 Relative Cool Gain
HA030554 Issue 16 419

Cutback Values
The PID terms calculated from the table shown in Figure 210, should be entered
before the cutback values are set.
The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. If
unacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up, or for large
step changes in PV, then the cutback parameters should be set manually, as follows:
1. Initially set the cutback values to one proportional bandwidth converted into
display units. This can be calculated by taking the value in percent that has been
installed into the parameter ‘PB’ and entering it into the following formula:
PB/100 ´ Span of controller = Cutback High and Cutback Low
For example, if PB = 10% and the span of the controller is 0 to 1200°C, then
Cutback High = Cutback Low = 10/100 ´ 1200 = 120
2. If overshoot is observed following the correct settings of the PID terms increase
the value of ‘CBL’ by the value of the overshoot in display units. If undershoot is
observed increase the value of the parameter ‘CBH’ by the value of the
undershoot in display units.
Display units
PV approaching SP
Initial overshoot from above:
adjust CBH
Setpoint
PV approaching SP
from below: Initial undershoot
adjust CBL
Time
Figure 212 Manual Cutback setting
420 HA030554 Issue 16

Setpoint
The controller setpoint is the Working Setpoint which can be derived from:
1. SP1 or SP2, both of which are manually set by the user and can be switched into
use by an external signal or via the user interface.
2. From an external (remote) analogue source
3. The output of a programmer function block.
Setpoint function block

As well as providing a setpoint, the function block also provides:
1. The ability to limit the rate of change of the setpoint before it is applied to the
control algorithm.
2. Upper and lower limits. These are defined as setpoint limits, ‘SP High Limit’ and
‘SP Low Limit’, for the local setpoints and instrument range high and low for other
setpoint sources.
Note: All setpoints are limited by ‘Range High’ and ‘Range Low’ so that if ‘SP High
Limit’, for example, is set higher than ‘Range High’, then ‘SP High Limit’ is ignored
and the setpoint is limited at the ‘Range High’ value.
User configurable methods for tracking are available, such that the transfers between
setpoints and between operating modes do not cause ‘bumps’ in the setpoint.
Figure 213 shows the function block schematic.
PSP High Limit

Programmer SP Prog
PSP Low Limit

Local
SP High Limit
SP2
SP Low Limit SP2 Enable
Enable Rem SP
SP High Limit SP1 Enable Local
Range max
SP1
Target SP
SP Low Limit
Remote Range min
Trim High Local SP + Remote

trim
Trim Low Remote type
Remote SP Remote only
Local Trim
Remote
+ local trim
Range max
Target SP
Ramp Working SP
Other inputs: Range min
PV
Ramp rate
Servo Ramp Status
Sp changed
Figure 213 Setpoint Function block
HA030554 Issue 16 421

Setpoint Limits
The setpoint generator provides limits for each of the setpoint sources as well as an
overall set of limits for the loop. These are summarised in Figure 214.
MaxDisp
+Span
Range
High
SP SP Trim
High Limit High
Target Working LoopAlm

Remote SP1 SP2 setpoints SP Trim
SP SP
SP
Low Limit SP Trim
Low
Range
Low
-Span
MinDisp
Figure 214 Setpoint Limits

‘Range High’ and ‘Range Low’ provide the range information for the control loop.
They are used in control calculations to generate proportional bands. Span = Range
High – Range Low.
Setpoint Rate Limit

This symmetrical rate limiter allows the rate of change of setpoint to be controlled,
preventing step changes in the setpoint. The limit is applied to the working setpoint
which includes setpoint trim.
Rate limiting is enabled using the ‘Rate’ parameter. If this is set to ‘0’ then any
change made to the setpoint will be effective immediately. If it is set to any other
value, then a change in the setpoint will be have rate limiting applied at the value set,
in units per minute. Rate limit applies to SP1, SP2 and Remote SP.
When rate limit is active ‘Rate Done’ displays ‘No’. When the setpoint has been
reached the value changes to ‘Yes’.
When ‘Rate’ is set to a value (other than ‘Off’) an additional parameter ‘SP Rate
Disable’ is displayed which allows the setpoint rate limit to be turned off and on
without the need to adjust the ‘Rate’ parameter between Off and a working value.
If the PV is in sensor break, the rate limit is suspended and the working setpoint
takes the value of 0. On sensor break being released the working setpoint goes from
0 to the selected setpoint value at the rate limit.
422 HA030554 Issue 16

Setpoint Tracking
The setpoint used by the controller may be derived from a number of sources. For
example:-
1. Local setpoints SP1 and SP2. These may be selected through the front panel
using the parameter ‘SP Select’, through digital communications or by
configuring a digital input which selects either SP1 or SP2. This might be used,
for example, to switch between normal running conditions and standby
conditions. If Rate Limit is switched off the new setpoint value is adopted
immediately when the switch is changed.
2. A programmer generating a setpoint which varies over time. When the

programmer is running, the ‘Track SP’ and ‘Track PV’ parameters update
continuously so that the programmer can perform its own servo. This is
sometimes referred to as ‘Program Tracking’.
3. From a Remote analogue source. The source could be an external analogue

input into an analogue input module wired to the ‘Alt SP’ parameter or a User
Value wired to the ‘Alt SP’ parameter. The remote setpoint is used when the
parameter ‘Alt SP Enable’ is set to ‘Yes’.
Setpoint tracking (sometimes referred to as Remote Tracking) ensures that the Local
setpoint adopts the Remote setpoint value when switching from Local to Remote to
maintain bumpless transfer from Remote to Local. Bumpless transfer does not take
place when changing from Local to Remote.
Note: If Rate Limit is applied, the setpoint will change at the set rate, when changing
from Local to Remote.
Manual Tracking
When the controller is operating in manual mode the currently selected SP (SP1 or
SP2) tracks the PV. When the controller resumes automatic control there will be no
step change in the resolved SP. Manual tracking does not apply to the remote
setpoint or programmer setpoint.
Output
Introduction
The output function block selects the correct output sources to be used, determines
whether to heat or cool and then applies limits. Power feed forward and non-linear
cooling are also applied.
It is this block that manages the output in exception conditions such as start up and
sensor break.
The outputs, ‘Ch1 Output’ and ‘Ch2 Output’, are normally wired to a digital I/O where
they are converted into analogue or time proportioned signals for electrical heating,
cooling or valve movement.
HA030554 Issue 16 423

Output Limits
Figure 215 shows where output limits are applied.
PID Menu
Including Gain
Scheduling
output limits
Output High
+100
Output Low
-100 Diag Menu
Output High 2
+100
Sched Out High
Diagnostics
Sched Out Low
Output Menu Menu
Output Low 2
-100 Writeable not wireable Read only
Output High 3 Writeable not Output High

+100 wireable
Working Out Low Working
Min Working Out High output
Output Low 3
-100 Output Low
Tune Menu OPL limiting to +ve

Output Menu
Rem.Output High Output
High
Rem. Output Low Output

Low
Writeable and wirable
Figure 215 Output Limits

Notes:
1. Individual output limits may be set in the PID list for each set of PID parameters
when gain scheduling is in use.
2. Limits may also be applied from an external source. These are ‘Rem.Output
High’ and ‘Rem. Output Low’ found in the Output menu. These parameters are
wireable; for example they may be wired to an analogue input module so that a
limit may applied through some external strategy. If these parameters are not
wired +100% limit is applied every time the instrument is powered up.
3. The tightest limits (between Remote and PID) are connected to the output where
an overall limit is applied using parameters ‘Output High’ and ‘Output Low’.
4. ‘Working Out High’ and ‘Working Out low’ found in the Diagnostics list are read
only parameters showing the overall working output limits.
5. The tune limits are a separate part of the algorithm and are applied to the output
during the tuning process. The overall limits ‘Output Hi’ and ‘Output Lo’ always
have priority.
424 HA030554 Issue 16

Output Rate Limit

The output rate limiter is a rate-of-change limiter, set in (%/sec) which prevents step
changes in output power being demanded. Rate limiting is performed by determining
the direction in which the output is changing, and then incrementing or decrementing
the Working Output (Main menu - "Main menu parameters" on page 143) until it
equals the required output (Target OP).
The amount to increment or decrement is calculated using the sampling rate of the
algorithm (125ms) and the selected rate limit. If the change in output is less than the
rate limit increment the change takes effect immediately.
The rate limit direction and increment is calculated on every execution of the rate
limit. Therefore, if the rate limit is changed during execution, the new rate of change
takes immediate effect. If the output is changed whilst rate limiting is taking place, the
new value takes immediate effect on the direction of the rate limit and in determining
whether the rate limit has completed.
The rate limiter is self-correcting such that if the increment is small it is accumulated
until it takes effect.
The output rate limit is active when the loop is in both auto and manual modes, and
during autotune.
Sensor Break Mode

If a Sensor break is detected by the measurement system the loop reacts in one of
two ways, according to the configuration of ‘Sbrk Mode’ (‘Safe’ or ‘Hold’). On exit
from sensor break the transfer is bumpless – the power output starts controlling again
from the current operating setpoint and moves, under PID closed-loop control, from
its pre-set value to the control value.
Safe
If set to ‘Safe’, the output adopts a pre-set level (Sbrk OP). If rate limit is not
configured, the output steps to the Sbrk OP value, otherwise it ramps to this value at
the rate limit.
Hold
If set to ‘Hold’ the output remains at its current value. If Output Rate Limit (Rate) has
been configured a small step may be seen as the working output will limit to the value
existing two iterations ago.
Forced Output
This feature enables the user to specify what the output of the loop should do when
moving from automatic control to manual control. The default is that the output power
is maintained but it is then adjustable by the user.
If Manual Mode is set to ‘Step’, the user can set a manual output power value and on
transition to manual the output will be forced to that value.
If Manual Mode is set to ‘Track’ the output steps to the forced manual output and then
subsequent edits to the output power are tracked back into the manual output value.
If Manual Mode is set to ‘Last Man. Out’ then when moving from automatic to manual
mode, the output adopts the last manual output value.
HA030554 Issue 16 425

Power Feed Forward

Power feed forward is used when driving an electrical heating element. It monitors
the line voltage and compensates for fluctuations before they affect the process
temperature. The use of this will give better steady state performance when the line
voltage is not stable.
It is mainly used for digital type outputs which drive contactors or solid state relays.
Because it only has value in this type of application it can be switched off using the
parameter ‘Pff En’. It should also be disabled for any non-electric heating process. It
is not necessary when Eurotherm analogue thyristor control is used since
compensation for power changes is included in the thyristor driver.
Consider a process running at 25% power, with zero error and then the line voltage
falls by 20%. The heater power would drop by 36% because of the square law
dependence of power on voltage. A drop in temperature would result. After a time,
the thermocouple and controller would sense this fall and increase the ON-TIME of
the contactor just enough to bring the temperature back to set point. Meanwhile the
process would be running a bit cooler than optimum which may cause some
imperfection in the product.
With power feed forward enabled the line voltage is monitored continuously and
ON-TIME increased or decreased to compensate immediately. In this way the
process need never suffer a temperature disturbance caused by a line voltage
change.
‘Power Feed forward’ should not be confused with ‘Feed forward’ which is described
in "Feed forward" on page 427.
Cool Type
Cooling methods vary from application to application. For example, an extruder barrel
may be cooled by forced air (from a fan), or by circulating water or oil around a jacket.
The cooling effect will be different depending on the method. ‘Cool Type’ (appears
only if the ‘setup’ parameter ‘Ch2 Control’ is set to ‘PID’) is used to accommodate
different types of cooling methods as follows:
Linear
The cooling algorithm may be set to linear where the controller output changes
linearly with the PID demand signal.
Oil Cooling
‘Cool Type’ = ‘Oil’. As oil is, to all intents and purposes, non-evaporative, oil cooling is
pulsed in a linear manner.
Water Cooling
If the area being cooled is running well above 100°C, then the first few pulses of
water flash into steam giving greatly increased cooling due to the latent heat of
evaporation. When the area cools, less (or even no) evaporation takes place and the
cooling is less effective.
Setting ‘Cool Type’ to ‘Water’ delivers much shortened pulses of water for the first
few percent of the cooling range, when the water is likely to be flashing into steam.
This compensates for the transition out of the initial strong evaporative cooling.
426 HA030554 Issue 16

Fan Cooling
‘Cool Type = ‘Fan’. Fan cooling is much gentler than water cooling and not so
immediate or decisive (because of the long heat transfer path through the process
mechanics). With fan cooling, a cool gain setting of ‘3’ upwards is typical. Delivery of
pulses to the blower is non linear, this non-linearity being caused by a combination of
forced air movement and fan efficiency as a function of air velocity (e. g. the
efficiency of a fan when producing a low speed (laminar) air flow is different from its
efficiency when producing a high-speed, turbulent flow.
Feed forward
Feed forward is a method of adding an extra scalable component to the PID output,
before any limiting. It can be used, for example, in the implementation of cascade
loops and constant head control or it can be used to pre-load the control signal with a
value close to that which is required to achieve the setpoint, thus improving system
response. Feed forward (FF) is applied such that the PID output is limited by trim
limits and acts as a trim on a FF value. The FF value is derived either from the PV or
setpoint by scaling the PV or SP by the ‘FF Gain’ and ‘FF Offset’. Alternatively, a
remote value may be used for the FF value, but this is not subject to any scaling. The
resultant FF value is added to the limited PID OP and becomes the PID output as far
as the output algorithm is concerned. The feedback value then generated must then
have the FF contribution removed before being used again by the PID algorithm. The
diagram below shows how feed forward is implemented.
FF Gain FF Offset
SP
Gain
PV
FF Type Remote FF Type
TrimHi Feedback
SP
FF Trim Lim Output Output
PID algorithm
PV
TrimLo
Figure 216 Implementation of Feed forward
HA030554 Issue 16 427

Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband
Control Action
For temperature control ‘Control Act’ should be set to ‘Rev’. For a PID controller this
means that the heater power decreases as the PV increases. For an on/off controller,
output 1 (usually heat) will be on (100%) when PV is below the setpoint and output 2
(usually cool) will be on when PV is above the setpoint.
Hysteresis
Hysteresis applies to on/off control only and is set in the units of the PV. In heating
applications the output will turn off when the PV is at setpoint. It will turn on again
when the PV falls below SP by the hysteresis value. This shown in Figure 217 and
Figure 218 for a heat and cool controller.
Hysteresis is intended to prevent the output from repeated switching on and off
‘chattering’ at the control setpoint. If the hysteresis is set to 0 then even the smallest
change in the PV when at setpoint will cause the output to switch. Hysteresis should
be set to a value which provides an acceptable life for the output contacts, but which
does not cause unacceptable oscillations in the PV.
If this performance is unacceptable, it is recommended that PID control be used

instead.
Deadband
Deadband ‘Ch2 Deadband’ can operate on both on/off control or PID control where it
has the effect of extending the period when no heating or cooling is applied. In PID
control the effect is modified by both the integral and derivative terms. Deadband
might be used in PID control, for example, where actuators take time to complete
their cycle thus ensuring that heating and cooling are not being applied at the same
time. Deadband is likely to be used, therefore, in on/off control only. Figure 218 adds
a deadband of 20 to the first example in Figure 217.
HYST.C
SP Heating and cooling type

both ‘On/Off’.
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300°C
Control action = Rev
Heating hysteresis = 8 °C
OP1 HEATING HEATING
Cooling hysteresis = 10°C
OP2 COOLING
Heating off at Cooling Cooling Heating Heating off

SP (300°C) on at off at SP on at at SP
SP+ HYST.C (300°C) SP- HYST.H (300°C)
(310°C) (292°C)
Figure 217 Deadband OFF
428 HA030554 Issue 16

HYST.C
D.BAND
SP
Heating and cooling type
both ‘On/Off’.
HYST.H
Setpoint = 300°C
Control action = Rev
Heating hysteresis = 8 °C
OP1 HEATING HEATING
Cooling hysteresis = 10°C
OP2 COOLING
Power deadband
Heating off at Cooling Heating off

SP (300°C) on at Cooling Heating at SP
SP+ HYST.C off at on at (300°C)
(310°C) D.BAND SP- HYST.H
(305°C) (292°C)
Figure 218 Deadband ON set at 50% of Cooling.
Valve nudge
For systems configured as Unbounded Valve Positioning (VPU) - set up in Loop
Setup configuration (Ch1(2) control - "Setup menu parameters" on page 144), it is
possible to move the valve in small increments towards the open position (Nudge
Raise - "Output menu items" on page 148) or towards the closed position (Nudge
Lower - "Output menu items" on page 148). The trigger for such nudging can be a
digital input (e.g. contact closure) ‘wired’ to the nudge raise or lower parameter, the
up or down arrow keys or a command received over the serial link.
The nudge command causes the valve drive output to drive the valve for either the
minimum on time, or for as long as the command is ‘true’, whichever is the longer
(note 2). The default minimum on time is 125ms, but this can be edited in the
configuration for the relevant output relay ("Implicit inputs/outputs" on page 191).
Default min on Default min

time on times Min on time Min on time Min on time
125ms (User value) (User value) (User value)
Valve drive
Nudge Raise (Lower)

command
Demand < de- Demand > default Demand < user Demand > user-entered minimum-on
fault minimum minimum on time entered minimum on time. Motor runs until current mini-
on time time. Motor runs for mum-on time elapses.
minimum on time.
Figure 219 Valve nudge examples

Notes:
1. If Ch1 is set to VPU, Nudge operates the channel 1 valve, no matter what Ch2 is
set to. If Ch1 is not set to VPU, and Ch2 is set to VPU then the nudge operates
on channel 2 valve.
HA030554 Issue 16 429

2. The minimum on time is continuously re-triggered. This means that if a minimum

on time of (say) 10 seconds has been configured, then the valve may continue to
move for up to 10 seconds after the command has been removed. That is, it
continues until the current minimum on time period has expired.
Time Proportioning
PID controllers sometimes use Time Proportioning to control the average power to
the load. This is done by repeatedly switching the output on for a period (Ton) and
then off for a period (Toff). The total period (Ton + Toff) is called the ‘cycle time’. During
each cycle, the average power delivered to the load is:
PAvg = PHeater x Duty cycle,
where ‘PHeater‘ is the actual transferred heater (or cooler) power and Duty cycle =
Ton/(Ton + Toff), normally represented as a percentage value.
The PID controller calculates the Duty Cycle (the PID output control signal from 0 to
100%) and provides a Minimum on time between 100ms to 150 seconds.
Figure B2.6.11 shows how Ton, Toff and cycle time vary with demand percentage.
Millieconds
Ton + Toff = Cycle time
Ton
Toff
Output demand (%)
Figure 220 Time proportioning curves (Minimum on time = 625ms)

Note: For this instrument, only ‘Min on time’ is configurable
Diagnostics
See "Loop diagnostics" on page 150 for definitions of these parameters.
430 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Appendix C: Reference
Appendix C: Reference
Battery
This instrument is fitted with a battery which has a minimum life of 1 year unpowered
and when stored in an ambient temperature of around 25°C. The battery life may be
reduced if it is consistently operated in an elevated ambient temperature
environment. The battery is designed to retain configuration and other settings in the
event of a failure of the instrument power supply.
The battery is not user serviceable and any instrument displaying the symptoms of a
battery fail should be returned to your supplier for battery replacement at the earliest
opportunity.
NOTICE
LOSS OF DATA
With the instrument working normally, a clone file* should be made and stored, to
save the instruments configuration.
A clone file* is made and stored in a known safe location so that the settings can be
uploaded to a spare instrument or restored to the instrument following replacement of
the battery. (Alternatively maintain a record of the instrument configuration and other
important settings).
* A clone file is made using iTools, a proprietary package which may be downloaded
from: www.eurotherm.com.
Setting Up An FTP Server Using Filezilla
Downloading
‘FileZilla’ is a free download from the internet (search for ‘FileZilla server download’).
1. Download the latest version, following

the instructions on the screen.
2. Answer ‘No’ to the question ‘Do you

want to view only the webpage content
that was delivered securely’.
3. If necessary enable file download.
4. In the ‘Do you want to run or save this file’ Security Warning window, click on
‘Run’.
5. In the ‘The Publisher could not be verified..., Security Warning window, click on
‘Run’.
HA030554 Issue 16 431

Appendix C: Reference nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
6. Agree or cancel the License agreement. If ‘Agree’, choose ‘Standard’ as the type
of install.
7. Choose the destination for the file.
432 HA030554 Issue 16

8. Select startup settings.
9. Click on Close when Installation is complete.
10. Click ‘OK’ in the ‘Connect to Server’ window.
Server Setup
1. Create a new folder (directory) called, for
this example, ‘Archive’ in a suitable
location such as the C drive, or the
desktop.
2. In the Filezilla server window, click on ‘File’

and select ‘Connect to Server’.
The ‘Logged on’ message appears.
HA030554 Issue 16 433

3. In the Edit menu, select ‘Users’ and in the ‘General’ page, click on ‘Add’ and
enter a name for the user, then click ‘OK’. For this example, ‘GeneralUser’ has
been used, but it may be more advantageous to use ‘Anonymous’ because this is
the default name in the recorder/controller. Click on ‘OK’.
4. In the Edit menu, select ‘Users’ and in the ‘Shared Folders’ page, click on ‘Add’.
A browse window opens allowing the user to select the new folder (‘Archive’)
created in step 1, above.
When OK has been clicked to confirm the selection, the new folder appears in
the centre window (with an ‘h’ next to it to indicate that this is the home folder for
this ftp user setup.
5. Click on the relevant folder to enable the tick boxes. Click on all the ‘File’ and
‘Directory’ enable tick boxes, then click OK.
434 HA030554 Issue 16

PC Setup
1. Operate the ‘Start’ button, and select ‘Control Panel’ from
the window that appears. Double click on ‘Windows
Firewall’.
2. Click on the ‘Exceptions’ tab in the window

that appears, and check that both
‘FTPControl’ and ‘FTPData’ are enabled
(ticked). If not, the user’s IT department
should be contacted for advice.
3. Click on ‘Add Program...’ and browse to the

Filezilla destination defined in step 7 of the
download section ("Downloading" on
page 431). Select ‘FileZilla server.exe’ and
click on ‘Open’.
‘FileZilla server.exe’ appears in the Exceptions

list.
4. Click on ‘OK’.
HA030554 Issue 16 435

Recorder/Controller Setup
In Network Archiving ("Archiving" on page 111):
1. Enter the IP address of the pc in which the FTP server has been enabled in the
‘Primary Server’ field.
2. Enter the Primary User name, as entered in step three of the Server setup
procedure ("Server Setup" on page 433) above (GeneralUser in this example).
3. Enter the IP address of another suitable pc which has been configured as an ftp
server in the ‘Sec. Server’ field, and enter the relevant ‘Sec. User’ name.
4. Configure the other unattended archive parameters as required ("Archiving" on

page 111).
Note: For the example above, ‘Password’ was not enabled in the User Accounts
setup page ("Server Setup" on page 433), so for this example any Primary (Sec.)
password entry is ignored. If a password had been entered in the User Accounts
setup, then the Primary (Sec.) Password field would have to contain this password.
Archive Activity
Once a demand or unattended archive is initiated, the FileZilla Server page shows
the activity status as the archive progresses. Figure 221 shows a typical page. The
top of the page shows the transaction details between the server and any clients to
which it is connected. The bottom portion shows details of the files currently being
transferred. These files are archived to the ‘Archive’ folder.
Figure 221 FileZilla Server archive activity page
436 HA030554 Issue 16

Function Block Details
Eight Input OR Block

An eight input logical OR block whose output is high (1, On) if any one or more inputs
is high (1, On). If more than eight inputs are required, a second block is automatically
introduced, as shown in Figure 223. 1a. The blocks in the figure are given the names
‘A’ and ‘B’, where ‘A’ and ‘B’ can be any of the 12 available instances.
Figure 222 Eight input OR block

OR blocks are used automatically by the ‘user wiring’ when more than one source is
wired to the same destination parameter. For example, it may be required that Relay
(Digital I/O 2A2B) is to operate if channel 1 alarm 1 and/or channel 2 alarm 1
channels goes active. In such a case, the ‘Active’ parameter for the two channel
alarms would be wired to the same relay’s ‘PV’ parameter.
OR blocks are invisible to the user interface, but the iTools graphical wiring page for
this configuration (Figure 223.1b), shows that an OR block has been introduced to
OR the two alarm outputs together.
Figure 223 iTools representation of OR block usage
TCP Port Numbers

The following TCP ports are made use of by the instrument.
Port Usage
20 File Transfer protocol (FTP) data
21 FTP control
502 Modbus TCP communications
HA030554 Issue 16 437

Isolation Diagram
Single (50V ac)
Ethernet
comms
Double (300V ac)
Relays /
DC output
Double (300V ac)
Micro-
processor and PV1*
system circuits
SN1 Double (300V ac)
Double (300V ac) PV2*

Supply voltage
100 to 240V ac Rectifica-
tion Double (300V ac)
or Power
24V ac or dc Supply
Circuits PV3*
Double (300V ac)
PV4*
USB Comms
Safety Earth
(Protective
conductor
terminal)
PSU Logic/
Digital I/O
Figure 224 Isolation diagram

Note: Each ‘PV’ is double isolated (300VRMS) from all other ‘PV’s.
438 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Appendix D: Web Server
Appendix D: Web Server

The Web Browser has been added from firmware release V5.00.
Browsers
The following browsers are supported in the above firmware release:
• Google Chrome V22.0 or greater
• Google Mobile Chrome (Android Mobile technology running ‘Ice cream sandwich’
or greater
• Internet Explorer V9.0 or greater
• Mobile Safari (Apple Mobile technology running IOS 5.0 or greater)
All files are uploaded from the nanodac device to the browser, where all JS and
JQuery files are executed locally.
Browsers should be configured to allow cookies, and support for file caching should
also be enabled.
If cookies are not enabled this will have the following detrimental effects:
• Any web page configuration changes ‘saved’ by the user in the client browser will
not be retained when navigating between web pages
• For the most efficient browsing make sure that caching is enabled in the browser
being used.
• Web server supports standard ASCII character set. Any non displayable
characters will, therefore, be replaced by an asterisk ‘*’.
Connecting to the Internet

Open the desired web browser.
Enter the Ethernet address or other configured name of the instrument.
Note: The webserver requires up to 15 seconds before it becomes fully operational

after it has been enabled.
Denied Page
This page will be displayed when there are no more available connections to the
server. It does not use the same CSS theme as all other pages, so that this page
does not rely on any other files being transferred up to the client browser, since to do
this would require access to the server, which has just been denied.
HA030554 Issue 16 439

Appendix D: Web Server nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Error Message
An error message can be displayed at any time if the following three conditions
occur:
• A page fails to connect to the server. A retry will usually be sufficient to correct
this condition.
• The server is in configuration mode. To correct this put the instrument into run
mode.
• A page stops trying to connect. A refresh is usually sufficient to correct this

condition.
Home Page
The Home Page is the first page the user is directed to on completion of a successful
log in.
If Security has been set to Yes in the instrument (page 193) it will be necessary to
enter a User name and a Password.
The defaults are:
Username: admin
Password: None (password not required unless security has been set, see above)
These may be customised by the user up to 50 alpha/numeric characters.
440 HA030554 Issue 16

About Page
This page contains the following target information:
• Instrument descriptor
• MAC address
• Application software version
• Bootrom software version
• Legal disclaimer
Contact Page
This page contains links to the following Eurotherm sites:
• Accredited Service
• Customer First & Technical Support
• Installation & Commissioning
• Repair & Support Services
Note: Links are only active if the browser has Internet access.
HA030554 Issue 16 441

Bar Graph Page

The channels that have been configured to be trended on the nanodac instrument will
automatically be displayed on this page. The current configuration data for those
channels will be used to render the values on the graph.
The graph will always use the largest scale high and the lowest scale low of all the
channels being rendered.
Click on a channel on the graph to display the current channel status. To remove this,
click out of the graph again. The channel status will either be 'Ok' or 'Error' for all
other error conditions.
All channels will be represented in their configured RGB colours. Colour matching will
very much depend on the display the browser is running on.
Options
The Options button allows the user some control
over how the Bar Graph page is displayed.
All data is stored as cookies.

Graph Type Gradient (as shown in
the above display)
Flat
3D
Legend Show or Hide the Channel numbering legend in the top
right hand corner
Background Type Transparent or White
Gridlines Show or Hide
Decimal Places 0 to 4
Value Alignment Horizontal or Vertical
Plot Point All (shows all available channels)
Channel 1 only
Channel 2 only
Channel 3 only
Channel 4 only
442 HA030554 Issue 16

Line Graph Page

The channels that have been configured to be trended on the nanodac will
This graph is currently fixed at 100 samples. The first time that this page is opened it
may take a little more time as the page will need to interrogate the web server for
UHH history and render 100 samples of backfill.
As each new sample arrives the oldest historical sample is removed.
Options
over how Line Graph page is displayed.

Plot Thickness Narrow, Normal, Wide.
Legend Show, Hide.
Background Type Transparent, White.
Gridlines Show, Hide.
Sample Period 1 second - 1 hour.
Plot Point All, (shows all available channels)
Channel 1 only
Channel 2 only
Channel 3 only
Channel 4 only
HA030554 Issue 16 443

Numeric Page
This page displays the process value and channel descriptor.
The process value (PV) will not be displayed if the channel is not in a good status.
Instead the text for the channel status is displayed as one of the following
OFF Channel is turned off

>RANGE Over range
<RANGE Under range
HW_ERROR Hardware error
RANGING Automatic range configuration (may appear briefly)
OVERFLOW Value out of limits e.g. a maths channel may have returned
a bad value
ERROR Error, e.g. a maths channel divided by zero
NO_DATA No data, e.g. nothing has been written to a Modbus input
channel.
Options
The Options button allows the user some
control over how Numerics page is displayed.

Channel Font Size Small, Normal,
Large
PV Font Size Small, Normal, Large
444 HA030554 Issue 16

Alarm Summary Page

This page indicates if any process alarms are currently active
Status:
Red = Unacknowledged alarm.
Green = Acknowledged alarm.
Message Summary Page

This page provides the last 30 messages in chronological order
This page does not auto-refresh.
To refresh this page press or go to another page and re-open the Message
Summary page.
HA030554 Issue 16 445

Promote Page
This page will show up to the 10 data items that have been configured by the user in
the Promote page in the instrument display - see "Promote list" on page 77.
Historical Line Page

The channels that have been configured to be trended in the nanodac instrument will
This graph is currently fixed at 100 samples, and the first time this page is accessed
it may take a short time to load as the page will need to interrogate the web server for
UHH history and render 100 samples of backfill.
Use the ‘Previous Data’ button to navigate back in time for up to a maximum of five
time periods of history. If there is an end to the history event or a configuration
change event, then the request to navigate back may result in only part of the trend
being populated up to that event time.
Use the ‘Next Data’ button to navigate back to the point in time when the web page
was entered.
446 HA030554 Issue 16

Options
over how the Historical Line page is displayed.

Plot Thickness Narrow, Normal, Wide.
Legend Show, Hide.
Background Type Transparent, White.
Gridlines Show, Hide.
Sample Period 1 second - 1 hour.
Plot Point All (shows all available channels)
Channel 1 only
Channel 2 only
Channel 3 only
Channel 4 only
Status Icons
The Status icons are shown in the lower left of those pages that
are automatically updated (i.e. not the Message Summary page).
They indicate the following:
Security Enabled or Disabled in the nanodac instrument.
Recording Status
Green shows recording enabled e.g. when the instrument
is not in configuration mode.
Red shows recording disabled e.g. when the instrument is
in configuration mode.
Any Channel Alarm Status. This flashes when any alarm is
present, whether acknowledged or not.
Any new messages. Go to the Message Summary page to
view any new messages. This icon is then removed from
the other pages.
Any system alarm
Note: The update rate for the status icons is inherited from the current page.
HA030554 Issue 16 447

DHCP Support
DHCP is managed in the web server in as much as the web server will not be allowed
to come online until the nanodac has received a valid IP address. The server will
continually monitor the IP address and, if at any point an invalid address is found, the
server will shut down and re-start.
Network Protocols
The web server is in no way mutually exclusive with all other network protocols on the
nanodac, however, to achieve the best results from the web server it is
recommended that no other communication protocols are active at the same time.
Languages
The web server will only support English for all static text. Any channel descriptors or
units that have been configured at the target in another language will be displayed in
that language on all web pages where they are visible.
448 HA030554 Issue 16

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller Appendix E: LabVIEW Driver
Appendix E: LabVIEW Driver

The purpose of this section is to describe how to download, install and configure
examples of LabVIEW driver for nanodac instruments.
The driver is designed to integrate with LabVIEW, a graphical programming

Environment developed by National Instruments. Labview allows users to create
applications by wiring VI's from pre-existing libraries. VI stands for Virtual Instrument
which are similar to function blocks found in Invensys Eurotherm products such as
iTools or Lintools.
The user can also create their own Virtual Instruments (VIs), save them and reuse
them on future projects.
For more information on LabVIEW go to http://www.ni.com/labview/whatis/.
Four working examples are available as free downloads by going to

http://www.eurotherm.com/labview/. They are intended to show users how to use the
nanodac driver to build applications.
Each example is a collection of VIs that perform specific tasks and use Ethernet TCP
for communications.
It is not intended to describe how to configure a LabVIEW application as it is

assumed that the reader is generally familiar with this process.
To find the examples select the Help menu and 'Find Examples' to open the 'Example
Finder' page. In the search field, enter any of the following keywords nanodac,
InvensysEurotherm, Eurotherm, Steriliser, Environmental, Chambers, Controller,
Instrument or Driver and the corresponding examples will appear in the search
results. Just select and double-click to open an example.
HA030554 Issue 16 449

Appendix E: LabVIEW Driver nanodac™ Recorder / Controller
Application Example 1 - Heat/Cool Control

The "HeatCoolControl.vi" is an application example for Environmental chambers. The
user can change the target setpoint, monitor temperature and instrument alarms.
Figure 225 Heat/Cool Control Opening View
From the opening view, Figure 225;
press Run
Enter the IP address of the nanodac instrument.
Enter the Modbus address of the nanodac instrument. This depends on the setting of
the Unit ident enable in the instrument;
If this is ‘Strict’ enter 255.
If this is ‘Instrument’ enter the Modbus address as set in the instrument from 1 to 99.
If this is ‘Loose’ then the ModbusTCP Unit Identity field does not have to match the
instrument address. The instrument will respond to ANY value in the Unit Identity
field.
Press ‘Accept’.
450 HA030554 Issue 16

Figure 226 Enter Instrument Address

Note: Further information is available from the Help menu.
It is then necessary to select the firmware version which is supported for the
instrument in use. Certain functions will not be available if the firmware version of the
instrument is not in this list.
Press ‘Current Folder’.
If a password has been entered in the instrument it will be necessary to enter this.
Figure 227 Data Files Folder
HA030554 Issue 16 451

The application view then becomes live:
Figure 228 Heat Cool Live Application
The following parameters may be monitored/adjusted:
Target setpoint
• Select Auto/Manual and adjust the output power manually if in Manual.
• Monitor the current Process Variable, Active Output demand, Working Setpoint
and Error.
• Monitor alarms. The alarm beacon turns red when an alarm occurs.
• Acknowledge alarms. Pressing the Acknowledge button acknowledges the

selected alarm in the nanodac instrument. If the alarm is still active the alarm
beacon remains red. If the alarm is no longer active the beacon reverts to its dark
colour.
452 HA030554 Issue 16

Application Example 2 - Program Load by Program Number

The "Program_LoadControl.vi" is an Application example which allows the user to
load a program stored in the instrument using numbers, and to Run/Hold or Reset a
preloaded Program.
This feature has been added in the nanodac instrument from firmware versions 5.00
and above.
To open and load this file, repeat the steps listed in Example 1.
Figure 229 Program Load by Program Number (showing Context Help)
• Select the Program Number. If the number entered is not available in the
instrument it will not be recognised and an error message shown in the Program
Load Status box
• Run/Hold/Reset the program
• Monitor the running program
HA030554 Issue 16 453

Application Example 3 - Steriliser

The "Steriliser_Monitor.vi" is a Steriliser Application example allowing the user to
control and monitor Sterilisation process parameters.
To open and load this file, repeat the steps listed in Example 1.
Figure 230 Steriliser Application (showing Context Help)

• Start - Stop Predefined Cycles or Cycles using a target time
• Monitor the running steriliser cycle
• Monitor up to four input conditions. Any input can be selected by pressing the
‘Monitor Input’ button otherwise they are greyed out. Steriliser process limits are
displayed for each input.
Application Example 4 - Configurable Steriliser

This application is the same as Example 3 but some configuration is allowable by the
user such as input types and ranges.
454 HA030554 Issue 16

Full driver capabilities list

As a general summary, with the nanodac Ethernet Labview Driver the user can:
• Configure SensorBreakType and Fault Response
• Configure Instrument Alarm Types
• Configure Alarm Parameters e.g. (Threshold, Hysteresis, Latching Mode,

Blocking)
• Configure Channel Filter Time
• Configure Humidity parameters
• Configure Cool Type
• Configure FeedForward Parameters
• Configure Control Action
• Configure Control Loop Type
• Configure ServoToPV and Tracking
• Configure Range Low and High Limits
• Change Instrument Modes e.g. Operator, Configuration, Auto, Manual
• Configure Setpoints (Setpoint1, Setpoint2, Remote Setpoint, Target Setpoint)
• Configure Dead Band
• Configure hysteresis
• Configure Safe Output, Manual Output and ManStartUp
• Configure Control Output Limits.
• Configure Valve Operation
• Configure Proportional Band Integral Time and Derivate Time
• Configure Cutback Low and High Limits
• Configure Setpoint Low and High Limits
• Configure Setpoint Ramp Rate Value
• Configure Tuning parameters
• Configure PID Loop Break Time
• Configure Virtual Channel Timer Parameters
• Configure Virtual Channel Totaliser Parameters
• Configure Virtual Channel Counter Parameters
• Configure Steriliser parameters
• Read Working Setpoint and Working Output
• Read Alarm Output status
• Read Manual Output Value
• Read Process Variable and Measured Values
• Read Timer Status
• Read PID parameters
• Enable/Disable the Alternative Setpoint
HA030554 Issue 16 455

• Start an Autotune
• Global Acknowledge Alarms
• Set Active Setpoint (Setpoint1, Setpoint2)
• Set Controller Mode (Auto, Manual, OFF)
• Start Program (Reset, Run, Hold)
• Read Steriliser Parameters
• Read Program parameters
456 HA030554 Issue 16

Scan for local contacts
Eurotherm Ltd
Faraday Close
Durrington
Worthing
West Sussex
BN13 3PL
Phone: +44 (0) 1903 268500

https:\\www.eurotherm.com
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information
given in this publication.
© 2021 Eurotherm Limited. All rights reserved.
HA030554 CN39264

HA030554 Nanodac Recorder - Controller User Guide (HA030554 Issue 16)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HA030554 Nanodac Recorder - Controller User Guide (HA030554 Issue 16)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HA030554 Nanodac Recorder - Controller User Guide (HA030554 Issue 16)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

nanodac™ Recorder / Controller

Sensor Break Detection ....................................................................... 32

Digital inputs ............................................................................................ 194

Read/Write Access to Internal Modbus Registers.......................................... 346

Thermocouple data ............................................................................ 394

Valve nudge ....................................................................................... 429

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential

Note: Electrical equipment must be installed, operated, serviced and maintained

Safety and EMC

Reasonable use and responsibility

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Use in other applications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this

No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out

D Risk of electric shock.

O Take precautions against static.

* Complies with the 40 year Environment Friendly Usage Period.

Californian law requires the following notice:

For more information go to: http://www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

USB Device Precautions

Secure Network Topologies and Good Practices

Principle of Secure by Default

HMI Access Level / Comms Config Mode

Logged Out Access Level

Operator Access Level

• Operator (these permissions can be individually configured)

• Supervisor (inherits as a set)

• Engineer (inherits as a set)

• 24 Operator Users + 0 Supervisory Users + 1 Engineer User, or

• 23 Operator Users + 1 Supervisory User + 1 Engineer User, or

• 10 Operator Users + 10 Supervisory Users + 5 Engineer Users, or

• 13 Operator Users + 9 Supervisory Users + 3 Engineer Users, etc.

Configurable parameters per user

Batch Control Yes = Control batches via batch control page

Supervisor Access Level

Engineer Access Level

• Password entry is locked after a configurable number of invalid attempts (if

Ethernet security features

Ethernet rate protection

Broadcast Storm protection

Configuration backup and recovery

Supported Protocols and Threat Mitigations

1. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.

2. Firewall to block TCP port 21.

3. It is recommended that user’s should change their passwords regularly, this

Threat mitigation as for FTP Client.

1. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.

2. Use a firewall to block ICMP / ping.

1. Use fixed IP address allocation.

2. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.

1. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.

2. Firewall to block UDP port 123.

1. Physically protect access to subnet (or serial cabling) in use.

HTTP (Web Server)

1. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.

2. Firewall to block TCP port 80.

1. Physically protect access to subnet(s) in use.

2. Firewall to block TCP port 50010.

1. Physically protect access to subnet in use.